Home

E2 User Manual.book

1. greater T D m Pp QIN ull N IEEE een ae ey ur STUB IS SPLICED TO BOTH a I ENDS OF THE ECHELON Si l TRUNK CABLE al ul Tl CASE I l ECHELON CABLE TRUNK er N N NS STUB IS CABLE TYPE LEVEL IV 22AWG 2 PAIR Md CONNECTAIRW221P 2002 eee ee ECHELON CABLE TRUNK Green S DISCHARGE AIR TEMP PRODUCT PROBE Orange E DEFROST STAT OR DEFROST SENSOR 3 110 VAC 10 VA 220 VAC 50VA P N 640 0039 YELLOW P N 640 0042 YELLOW RED CLASS 2 POWER CLASS 2 POWER GRN BLK YELLOW RED 7 8 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 E2 8 Input and Output Setup 8 1 The 164AI 810 and MultiFlex Inputs 8 1 1 Connecting Sensors to Input Boards There are five network boards that may accept inputs on the I O Network the MultiFlex 16AI ARTC and the 810 Combination Input Output Board Wiring an input to these boards requires three steps 1 Connect the sensor s signal wires to the two ter minals of an input point 2 Set the input type dip switch that corresponds to the point being connected 3 If necessary connect the power lead of the sensor to one of the 5V or 12V power terminals 8 1 1 1 Wiring MultiFlex Boards An input point connector on a MultiFlex 16AI and 16Ale board consists of two terminals as shown in Figure 8 1 O
2. 3 ae 4 RS485 I O NET DAISY CHAIN CONFIGURATION SET TERMINATING JUMPERS JP2 JP3 JP4 JP2 JP3 JP4 l Z 2 4 4535 TE 9600 baud HAH Lt H A TERMINATION NO TERMINATION TEAM VreRM i ae ee eer Jumpers in the Jumpers in the 19200 baud UH d LL LI UP position DOWN position A 5 Stepper Mid harness J Use the cable harnesses with molex connector en that are supplied with the valves N For retrofits or stepper valve harnesses without a mating molex Mert saei connector use the SmartESR adapter harness wire color ECT Flow cable P N 335 3275 Crimp type orientation Molex connectors on ESR 12 or gt waterproof splices should be used to SmartESR board 1 8 ESR 20 Valve make the connections Javed For Sporlan valves match BLUE RED VALVE2 VALVE3 VALVE4 VALVES VALVEG VALVE7 VALVES all wire colors except the blue wire Instead connect WHITE BLACK the blue wire to the Sporlan green wire 6 Lc dd WIRING FOR 640 0080 80VA E 24VAC Center Tapped Transformer AC 2avac Center Tapped Cc X L25 Liz GND I gt E a E Three conductor non shielded cables are the recommended wire y for connecting between the center tapped transformer i and SmartESR boards Earth ground the G GND center tapped 240 208 terminal of each board 120 Power Wiring Types 14 AWG Belden 9495 PRIMARY SIDE SECONDARY SIDE 18AWG_ Belden 9493 5 12 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 026
3. 1 l 1 I SAI P 16Al I I 1 l 9 8RO B 8RO e eN 4AO 4AO i e Lr E 2 Wi E Fs 168A0 168 1 f a 5 Ty 8DO ic gt 8DO i Me RTU SET 2o RTUs LEGEND E RS485 I O Network HMM Echelon Network MULTIFLEX PAKs Figure 1 3 E2 RX BX Network 1 4 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 1 5 view Documentation Over The E2 RX and BX controllers are among the most versatile and customizable control system products avail able on the market Because of the enhanced capabilities of the E2s programming installation and operation of E2 and its accompanying peripherals are supported by several different CPC publications All of the publications listed below can be ordered by contacting CPC E2 RX Refrigeration Controller E2 BX HVAC Controller and E2 CX Convenience Store Con troller Installation and Operation Manual 026 1610 The manual you are currently reading The Installation and Operation Manual covers hardware installation network setup and important operator functions such as viewing status screens or logs and performing manual defrosts The Quick Start section Chapter 8 is designed to guide you quickly through setup of the most simple and vital refrigeration control applications such as suction groups and condensers More detailed information is included in the online help Router and Repeater Installation Guide P N 02
4. 10 1 SUCTION GROUPS 5 tret rernm e ree ye LEA ARES LOST AT ARGO AUCTION mm 10 1 2 Overview of PID Control Strategy cesccescsssssseseceseesecneceseesecescessseacessecaecnaecsecnecseseeeseeseceascaecnascnesaseaesneeenees 10 1 3 Variable Speed Compress OTS sisirin astonis oei eripi ooet aK a oE eei SE EE O EE OTAS IOTA Floating Setpoint COntTOL i vt id ii 10 1 5 Ha rdw re Overview isi eee ere ceteri ies R egeo ede vena nen doeet kane Lene epe ladesadenbadectideetedeot ed 10 2 CONDENSER CONTROL asec dere eei tiet rdiet e intei epe e tei eee aer irren 10 2 1 Air Cooled Condensers ies iet caneasedcesnleasdsescevesigdsde cdancesei vanaasacestasilasavaceabevaateveenead 10 21 T Ait Cooled Str te y e eR REESE ERICH EIER XR AS DX HR A eae ERES 10 2 1 2 Temperature Differential Strategy 10 2 2 Evaporative Colidensers i eadeni eee eie iter er tee ee eere Re tert dent trie 10 2 3 Ean Control ec tt a 10 2 4 Condenser Split Mode ti e e e e roe ee Ri i ed rere ap eden 10 23 Fast RecOVeEy AA e A ERR E ERE ER REY UO De e be E E us 10 2 6 Hardw re OVERVIEW a i i o rr Fe ERA dd 10 3 STANDARD CIRCUS J0 3 1 Refrigeration Control itp EU RR REDE a a n PH V PE PRU RON LR Re Ree hepar iuret 10 3 1 1 SAR 10 3 1 2 Temperature Conto irre temet iia E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual Table of Contents ix 10 39 13 Lime Up Controls 25 5 rente ER ett E ideo 10 5 10 3 2 Defros
5. 19200 baud L L1 LM WIRE to same color WIRE 0V to 0V WIRE to same color JU1 JU2 JU3 BUE Terminated JU1 JU2 JU3 O O O 181 Not Terminated DOWN DAISY T TERMINATING JUMPERS N CONFIGURATION Term UP DOWN N Term DOWN UP 5 120 208 240 VAC WIRING FOR 640 0056 56VA Transformer and 640 0080 80VA Transformer 24VAC Center Tapped Transformer Three conductor non shield are the recommended wire for connecting between the center tapped transformer and l O boards 240 208 120 PRIMARY SIDE Power Wiring Types 14 AWG Belden 9495 18 AWG Belden 9493 led cables 7 E AC1 oim ov N E lt SECONDARY SIDE Board Installation The I O Network and Hardware Setup 5 9 2 8IO INSTALLATION GUIDE 1 Connect 810 to the RS485 I O Network POWER AC1 OV AC2 Ni E 810 EL oy Y Ee BOARD m N 2 The output section of this board must be
6. CPC E INS INPUT OR OUTPUT BOARD 26513041 Figure 5 1 I O Network Configurations 5 5 Network ID Numbers Board Numbers Each device on an RS 485 segment has either a net work dip switch or rotary dials that must be used to assign the board a unique network ID number 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 E2 The network ID number makes a board unique from other boards on the network of the same type This allows E2 to find it and communicate with it easily Boards of the same type should be numbered in sequence starting with one and continuing with two three and so forth For example if a segment contains four 16AI boards and five 8RO boards you should num ber the 16AIs one two three and four and the 8ROs one two three four and five The same should be done with multiple 4AO and 8DO boards and IRLDS leak detection units For all boards except 8IO and 8DO boards the net work dip switch labeled S1 or S3 for the 16AI board is used to set the unique board number of the unit and the baud rate The 8IO and 8DO uses rotary dials to set the board number of the unit Numbering the MultiFlex Combination I O Boards When it comes to network numbering the MultiFlex Combination Input Output boards 88 88AO 168 168A0 and 168DO are special cases They are actually a combination of three types of CPC boards the inputs are configured like a 16AT the relay outputs are configu
7. 3 5 9 1 Location The Dewpoint Probe P N 203 1902 should be located 4 to 6 feet from the floor with the probe pointing up It is recommended that the Dewpoint Probe be mounted in an area where it will be exposed only to minimal amounts of dust 3 5 9 2 Mount the probe using the standard switch cover sup plied with the unit as shown in Figure 3 30 Mounting 26509008 Figure 3 30 Dewpoint Probe Mounting 3 5 10 Light Level Sensor 3 5 10 1 Location The Light Level Sensor P N 206 0002 should be located facing away from direct sunlight preferably facing north in the Northern Hemisphere or south in the Southern Hemisphere 3 5 10 2 Mounting The light level sensor is not supplied with mounting hardware The sensor should be mounted horizontally through the knockout of a standard weather resistant junc tion box Figure 3 31 shows a typical mounting configu ration Mounting 3 11 26509014 Figure 3 31 Light Level Sensor Typical Mounting 3 5 11 Liquid Level Sensors CPC s probe type liquid level sensor P N 207 1000 is usually installed by the refrigeration and equipment manu facturer If a replacement sensor must be installed in the field refer to the instructions supplied with the device or consult the equipment manufacturer 3 5 12 Refrigerant Leak Detectors CPC supplies the Infrared Leak Detector System as a stand alone unit that monitors refrigeration leaks in up to sixteen zones Co
8. 2 Capabilities CX CX CX 100 300 400 Air Handlers AHU Analog Sen sor Control Demand Control Digital Sen sor Control Holiday Schedule Lighting Control Power Moni toring Pulse Accu mulator Standard Cir cuits Time Sched 16 32 ules Table 1 3 CX 100 CX 300 and CX 400 Comparison 1 4 Networking Overview 1 4 1 E2 V O Network Most of the general purpose input and output commu nications devices required by the E2 to control refrigera tion systems are connected to the E2 via the I O Network The I O Network is a simple RS 485 three wire connec 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 2 tion that allows data interchange between input boards which read sensor values and digital closures output boards which carry out commands from E2 s control applications and the E2 itself The I O Network is the same thing as the COM A and COM D Networks found on CPC s previous generation of controllers REFLECS This allows current owners of CPC s Refrigeration Monitor and Control RMC or Refrigeration Monitor and Case Control RMCC control lers to easily retrofit with an E2 RX without need for re wiring CC 100 CASE CONTROLLERS RT 100 ROOFTOP CONTROLLERS RS485 I O NETWORK 26513123 Figure 1 1 E2 RX 1 0 Network Diagram Figure 1 1 shows the peripherals that make up the I O Network e 16AI RS 485 based input communication device sends values from up to sixteen
9. ee 08 26 05 RX 466 Unit 3 16 28 62 ALARM Use Ctrl X to Select CX Tabs SETUP C1 General co H i C3 Modem C4 TCP IP er e Peer Netwrk C9 Web Server CO System General Setup GENERAL SERU General Site Name Site Phone 06172005 Refresh Rate gt 8 00 30 RS 232 Baud 1 0 Net Baud 9600 baud Alarm Annunc No RX Home Screen Default ScreenBlankTime 18 Write DFHC Init No F1 PREU TAB F2 NEXT TAB F3 EDIT F4 LOOK UP FS CANCEL Figure 9 18 RS 232 Baud Rate Setup 9 11 2 NO Network Baud Rate The I O Network baud rate is the rate at which the E2 will communicate with input and output boards on the RS 485 I O Network and is located directly below the RS 232 Baud rate field You may select either 9600 baud 19 2 Kbaud or Port Disabled in this field The appropriate baud rate is 9600 baud 88 26 85 RX 466 Unit 3 Use Ctrl X to Select CX Tabs SETUP C1 General i C3 Modem C4 TCP IP C8 Peer Netwrk C9 Web Server General Setup GENERAL SERU 10 33 44 ALARM General Site Name Site Phone Refresh Rate 6 66 36 RS 232 Baud 115 2 Kbaud 1 0 Net Baud Alarm Annunc No RX Home Screen Default ScreenBlankTime 18 Write DFMC Init No 061729005 F1 PREU TAB F2 NEXT TAB F3 EDIT F4 LOOK UP F5 CANCEL Figure 9 19 1 0 Network Baud Rate Setup 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 2 9 12 Set Up User Access Access the User Access Setup screen from the Syst
10. Lighting Control Module 7 Multi Logic TESTER Schedif Out 7 E Control Method Select bu A Use Alt Contro Comb Type Alt Comb Light Schedule Use Alt Sched Comb Bees A Min O Off with Delay win Out N m J Min On Off On Off Delay Proof Figure 10 12 Lighting Schedule Module Cell Diagram 10 9 3 Control Method Select Control Select determines whether the Multi Logic Combiner is used or the Light Level Interface and Sched ule Interface are used for Lighting Control When Use Alt Control is set to Yes the Light Level Interface and Sched ule Interface combination strategies are disabled and are not visible When Use Alt Control is set to No the Multi Logic Combiner matrix is disabled and not visible 10 9 4 Standard Control Standard control comprises Light Level Interface and Schedule Interface strategies 10 9 4 1 The Light Level Interface Cell LLEV INTERFACE The Light Level Interface cell of the Lighting Schedule application translates the value of the light level sensor into an ON or OFF command by comparing the analog light level to a set of Cut In Cut Out setpoints From an OFF state when the light level falls below the Cut In setpoint the result of the light level comparison will be an ON state When the light level rises above the cut out setpo
11. Drop Leg Temperature Below Minimum Drop Leg Setpoint If the Drop Leg temperature drops below the mini mum drop leg temperature setpoint Drop Leg Min a decrease will be called for until Drop Leg Temp rises above Drop Leg Min This protects against the possibility of the Drop Leg Temp falling too low as a result of low plenum temperature Plenum Temperature Not Available If plenum temperature is not available due to probe or communication failure control will be based on the Drop Leg Min and Max setpoints 10 18 4 Configuration TD Control allows the user to operate a condenser at its designed temperature differential and saves energy by maintaining optimal condenser TD with the least amount of fans on as possible Standard discharge pressure control may attempt to operate the condenser below its designed TD and turn on more fans than necessary Set the number of condenser fans to be controlled in the Num Cond Fans field under Setup 4 is the default value 10 18 5 Setpoints TD setpoints are configured to allow control of the condenser at its designed TD during swings in ambient temperature For the Drop Leg Minimum setpoint if the drop leg temperature falls below this setpoint condenser fans will be cycled OFF regardless of the value of the TD setpoint For the Drop Leg Maximum setpoint it is the maxi mum allowable value of the drop leg temperature If the drop leg temperature rises above this setpoint the con
12. Sensor Control input 300 KW above the setpoint Mode 3 begins by deter mining how many levels it will need to shed to bring the KW input down to the setpoint First since Demand Control assumes it will only save 75 of an application s KW rating by shedding it the application determines that it must shed 400 KW worth of levels to achieve the setpoint Second Demand Control looks at all the applications in the next few priority levels assume for purposes of this example that all First and Rotational Shed levels are already shed and there are six defined Last Shed levels The applications in the remaining levels are as follows Last Shed 1 Total 80 KW Last Shed 2 Total 90 KW Last Shed 3 Total 75 KW Last Shed 4 Total 80 KW Last Shed 5 Total 95 KW Last Shed 6 Total 75 KW Mode 3 will immediately shed stages 1 2 3 4 and 5 for a total of 420KW If 75 of this total is actually saved by this action the total KW reduction will be 315 KW which will bring the input 15KW below the setpoint After Mode 3 makes its emergency adjustment Demand Control will recalculate If the KW input is still above the setpoint and the integral error is still near zero it will make another Mode 3 adjustment If the KW is below the setpoint but not below the setpoint minus the user defined hysteresis value it will go back to operating in Mode 1 shedding levels sequentially If the KW is below the setpoint minus the hysteresis value and th
13. 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 EINSTEIN E2 RX Refrigeration Controller E2 BX HVAC Controller and E2 CX Convenience Store Controller Installation and Operation Manual EMERSON Climate Technologies L 0 2 LLL N ELL COMPUTER PROCESS CONTROLS Computer Process Controls Inc 1640 Airport Road Suite 104 Kennesaw GA 31044 Phone 770 425 2724 Fax 770 425 9319 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED The information contained in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate However Computer Process Controls Inc assumes no responsibility for any inaccuracies that may be contained herein In no event will Computer Process Controls Inc be liable for any direct indirect special incidental or consequential damages resulting from any defect or omission in this manual even if advised of the possibility of such damages In the interest of continued product development Com puter Process Controls Inc reserves the right to make improvements to this manual and the products described herein at any time without notice or obligation Computer Process Controls Inc products may be covered by one or more of the fol lowing Computer Process Controls U S patents 6360553 6449968 6378315 6502409 6779918 and Computer Process Controls Australian patent No 775 199 No vember 4 2004 FCC COMPLIANCE NOTICE This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the fol lowing two conditions 1 this devi
14. 1 Pair 1000 Feet 3 Refer to the Emerson Emerson Flow Controls 2 JPI Valve 4 Flow Controls Valve ESR12 or ESR20 d Pin 1 Field Wiring Guide ESR8 BOARD NOTE Na or Sporlan TERM and SEI valves a m rm use GREEN wire JUMPERS E 2 l t where BLUE wire NOTE Leave jumper hanging on a ine dion m 3 one pin when unterminating an i 2 TERMINATION ESR8 so the jumper will be E r available for future use For an errem iudei rd NOTERMINATION alternative termination method 14AWG wire no longer than 200 ft refer to section 7 4 1 of this manual 4 110 VAC 75VA 220 VAC 75VA P N 640 0050 P N 640 0045 YELLOW YELLOW 24 VAC 24 VAC CLASS 2 POWER CLASS 2 POWER GND GND 24 VAC 24 VAC YELLOW YELLOW 5 Select board in Controller Network Config screen Press SET ADDRESS Function Key Select the Service Pin option Enter a wait time hrs mins secs Press Enter Chae SERVICE Open Echelon Device Connectivity Echelon Network and Hardware Setup 7 7 2 TD3 T AEEA HDN GUIDE 1 Connect the two BLUE flying leads on the TD3 harness to the Echelon network 2 Wire the GREEN WHITE and ORANGE leads on the TD3 harness to the discharge air probe the product temperature probe and the defrost termination sensor respectively 3 Connect the two RED leads and the GREEN BLACK ground lead to a Class 2 24VAC transformer rated at 4VA or
15. Application Was Created 99 A user has created a new application in this E2 Application Was Deleted 99 A user has deleted an existing application in this E2 ARTC MultiFlex RTU Override 20 An override switch on an ARTC MultiFlex RTU has Switch Stuck been ON for a prolonged period of time suggesting a possible switch failure ARTC MultiFlex RTU Reset From 50 An ARTC MultiFlex RTU lost power and reset when Attempt To Write Past Mem EOB 50 The E2 attempted to write data to memory but the E was full Average Log Stuck No Memory 15 The Average Log cannot be written because there 1s not enough memory Bad Modem 20 The modem on this E2 is not functioning properly Battery backed memory lost 30 Battery backed memory loss not due to cleanout VERRE NI Battery runtime has exceeded 80 of the battery life time Binding Input To Output Failed 20 A valid connection could not be made between an input and an output BIOS BIOS Ext Update Failed 20 JAn update to the E2 s BIOS has failed BIOS BIOS Extension Updated 50 The E2 s BIOS was successfully updated Can t Set Hardware Clock 20 The E2 1s unable to change the time on its hardware clock Case Temp Hi Limit Exceeded User A single temperature sensor in a Standard Circuit or Case Control Circuit is recording a temperature higher than its defined case temperature high set point Case Temp Low Limit Exceeded User A single temperature sensor in a Standard Circuit or Case Control
16. Down Arrow def Up Arrow aux Program Button mute Remote Program LED 26513050 Compressor LED Fan LED Defrost LED Alarm Auxilary Digital Displa Figure 2 17 EC 2 The EC 2 is an advanced refrigerated case controller that doubles as a temperature and case status indicator During refrigeration and defrost the EC 2 controls most typical case functions including fans defrost and a pulse valve on the liquid side of the evaporator to regulate super heat The EC 2 29x version controls the refrigeration sole noid valve to allow the passage of refrigerant to the TX V valve The EC 2 39x version controls a pulse valve on the liquid side of the evaporator to regulate Superheat control The EC 2 relies on a parent E2 to handle logging alarm control defrost scheduling and other case control functions The EC 2 is designed to be mounted on the front of a refrigerated case The LED display shows the current case temperature with one tenths of a degree s accuracy The display can also show alarm codes to immediately notify 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 2 floor managers of alarms and notices Other lights on the display show the ON OFF status of refrigeration defrost and fans The EC 2 can be easily programmed using either the four front panel buttons or an optional infrared remote control For security the buttons can be disabled to pre vent tampering msn NOTE There are several variati
17. Table A 1 Case Type Default Settings A 2 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 ee Appendix B Pressure Voltage and Tempera ture Resistance Charts for Eclipse Trans ducers amp CPC Temp Sensors Eclipse Transducers Voltage Pressure PSI VDC fo st oo 88 0 90 Table B 1 Temp Sensor Temperature Resistance Chart 100 Ib 200 Ib 500 Ib xducer xducer xducer Table B 2 Eclipse Voltage to Pressure Chart Appendix B Pressure Voltage and Temperature Resistance Charts for Eclipse Transducers amp CPC Temp Sensors B I eO Appendix C Alarm Advisory Messages The table below is a list of all alarm messages that may appear in E2 s Alarm Advisory Log Each alarm message is listed by its Alarm Name which is the text recorded in the Alarm Advisory Log when the error occurs and the Default Priority which is the default priority value for the alarm A Default Priority of User indicates the alarm type s priority is programmed by the user during application setup Priority Of Events Exceeded Limit User A digital value has transitioned ON more times than ES defined Number of Events setpoint 50 60 Hz Line Clock Is Bad 20 E2 1s not successfully synchronizing its clock with p UR the 50 60 Hz pulse of its incoming power A FreezeStat Input Is Too Low User A temperature sensor on an HVAC cooling stage 1s lower than the programmed freezestat setpoint indi cating possible coil freeze Ac
18. ee 11 5 Customizing the Home Screen The Home screen can be customized to show different information depending on the user s needs If you wish to change the Home screen from the default screen follow the steps below There are eight different screen options available with the Device Summary screen as the default choice essc NOTE Toggle Full Options must be on in or 4 der to customize the Home screen FULL will appear at the top right of your screen when Full Options are enabled To toggle quickly to Full Alt Options press the a key and Wl together 1 Press the CP button to open the Main Menu screen 8 2 Press for the System Configuration screen i 3 Press WEB for the System Information screen 4 Press for General Controller Info and scroll down to RX Home Screen or BX Home Screen depending on which controller you are using 5 Press ZI LOOK UP to open the Option List Selection menu Choose the desired Home screen from the list Log off to save changes 11 6 Manual Defrost and Clean Mode A circuit can be placed in manual defrost from the RX Home screen or a Circuit Status screen If a refrigeration circuit needs to be placed in manual defrost follow these steps 1 Press CIRCUITS to go to the Circuits Status screen or place the cursor on the desired Enter circuit from the Home screen and press to open the Actions Menu Select Manual Defrost Enter 2 Once inside a Circuits Status s
19. 2 3 6 TD3 Temperature Display The TD3 is a digital display unit designed to show both case temperature and product temperature for a refriger ated store case or walk in freezer The TD3 mounts on the front of a case and connects to up to three input devices a case temperature sensor a product temperature probe and either a defrost termination probe or thermostat The real time input values of these probes can be viewed on the TD3 s digital display by pressing the function button on the front panel to cycle through the temperatures The TD3 is connected to a central E2 RX controller via the Echelon Network Input values are sent to the E2 from the TD3 for use in case circuit control A diagram of the TD3 layout is shown in Figure 2 20 LEGEND Numerical Display Status LED Function Button Commissioning Button Figure 2 20 TD3 Temperature Display Layout 2 12 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 2 3 Mounting This section gives mounting instructions and dimen sions for all controllers and peripherals in the E2 system 3 1 Mounting the E2 The E2 s box body style is designed to be mounted against or inside a wall or panel If mounted against a sur face the controller will be 3 75 off the mounting surface If mounted inside a surface the door and front section of the back panel will rest 2 0 off the mounting surface See Figure 3 1 and Figure 3 2 3 1 1 Standard M
20. 6 gt Occup SETPT FLOAT SP In Float PID CONTROL Setpoint Controll a Input PID Out Av _ AV Analog Value Figure 10 17 Loop Sequence Control Application Diagram 10 12 2 Loop Sequence Control Cell Descriptions 10 12 2 1 The Select Cell The Select cell s function is to provide the control set point to the PID Control cell and to switch between occu pied and unoccupied setpoints based on the current state of occupancy To determine whether to use the occupied setpoint or the unoccupied setpoint the Select cell reads a digital input If this input is ON OCC the occupied setpoint is used If this input is OFF UNO the unoccupied setpoint is used If the occupancy input is NONE the Select cell will assume this application will not use occupancy based set points and will use the occupied setpoint only no switch ing Note the Select cell does not have any on board sched ule function to determine for itself whether the building is occupied or unoccupied It relies solely on the digital state of the Occupancy input If you wish to follow a schedule for occupancy this input must be tied to the output of a Time Schedule application 10 34 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual SEQUENCER Digital Stage 1 8 Output Stage 1 6 Input Stage 2 p Vm Stage 3 Stage 4 Stage 5 Stage 6 Stage 7 m m Stage 8 d Digi
21. ISD Oil Pressure Lockout If we have been in Low Oil warning for 2 minutes we will lock out the compressor ISD Welded Contactor If there 1s voltage on the 3 phase sense inputs 0 5 sec onds after the compressor is called to be off this advisory is generated ISD Compressor Module Failure 20 A hardware failure has occurred in the ISD module IRLDS Self Test Failure IRLDS Temperature Data Error IRLDS Unknown Error IRLDS Voltage Data Error ISD Missing Phase Lockout ISD Missing Phase Trip C 8 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 Priority ISD Discharge Pressure Lockout The discharge pressure has gone above the high dis charge cut out and this condition is set to only gener ate a lock out A lock out has occurred on the compressor because the discharge temperature sensor has gone above its alarm set point If the supply voltage to the ISD falls below 170V this advisory is generated The motor winding temperature sensor has gone above their preset value on compressors equipped with them Low oil pressure is sensed on starting the compres sor The internal line breaks have opened on compressors equipped with them The discharge pressure has gone above the high dis charge cut out and this condition is set to only gener ate a trip A trip has occurred on the compressor because the discharge temperature sensor has gone above its alarm setpoint The suction pressure has fallen b
22. If the ESRS is supplied without an enclosure it is supplied with 0 500 long metal stand off dowels which are pressed into the mounting holes in the board See Figure 3 14 ESR8 BOARD WEIGHT 0 50 LB 26501102 Figure 3 14 Mounting Dimensions for the ESR8 3 3 4 SmartESR The SmartESR is supplied with a snap track If the ESRS is supplied without an enclosure it is supplied with 0 500 long metal stand off dowels that are pressed into the mounting holes in the board Modem Communication Expansion Card Mounting New Processor Board E 10 00 4 75 C TYP2PL SmartESR BOARD WEIGHT 9 4 OZ 26501055 Figure 3 15 Mounting Dimensions for the SmartESR 3 3 5 TD3 The TD3 temperature display is almost always mounted by the OEM as part of the construction of the refrigerated cases As such field installations of TD3s are rare TD3s are typically flush mounted on the front of a refrigerated case in such a way as to be fully visible from the sales floor A hole one inch in diameter must be drilled into the case to allow the TD3 s wiring harness to extend into the case and connect to the network the power source and the case mounted probes Figure 3 16 shows the mounting dimensions of the TD3 FUNCTION BUTTON BUTTON ECHELON ADDRESS STICKER ___ RUBBER SLEEVE ON BOTTOM 780 MOUNTING HOLES gt COMMISSIONING Figure 3 16 TD3 Mounting Di
23. If the water flow is greater than the set point the flow alarm output will be set to ON and a Leak alarm will be generated If a Leak alarm occurs the cycle will terminate While a Leak alarm is active no normal cycles will run and the system status will be set to Leak Detected A Leak alarm must be cleared by the user or the alarm will return to normal after passing a leak test run by a manual cycle If an enabled zone is overridden to ON dur ing a leak test it will cause the test to fail resulting in a false alarm 10 20 6 2 Obstructed Zone Test When a zone becomes active during a cycle a timer is reset After time has elapsed equal to the flow alarm delay the water flow input will be compared to the Min Flow alarm setpoint If the water flow is less than the setpoint the flow alarm setpoint output will be set to ON an Obstructed alarm generated and the zone will be removed from the current cycle 10 20 7 Service Modes The Service Check cycle allows a service technician to visually look for malfunctioning valves and leaks by cycling each zone ON one at a time starting with the first zone The active zone uses the Service On Time parame ter and remains ON for the programmable time period entered for Service On Time While in the Service Check cycle any active irrigation cycles will be terminated The Service Check cycle will continue looping until stopped by the user or the program mable value in the Suspnd Failsafe f
24. LIGHTS HOT LIGHTS OUT NC or NO HOT LINE NEUTRAL OUTPUT CABLE EARTH GROUND 26513067 Figure 8 15 Case Controller and Defrost Power Module Wiring Schematic 8 3 3 Valve Cable The six pin connector on the right hand side of the CC 100 is where the liquid stepper or suction stepper must be connected The CC 100 uses this connection to control the stepper motors and change the position of the valve aperture All valve cable harnesses have a six pin male connec tor that plugs into the CC 100 s VALVE port Plug this connector in so that the tab on the top of the connector is facing up For instructions on connecting the valve cable to the pulse or stepper valve refer to the instructions below for Input and Output Setup 8 15 2 the appropriate cable type P N 335 3263 Pulse Valve Figure 8 16 shows the connections for pulse valve 1 and pulse valve 2 The pulse valve 2 leads BLACK GREEN may be clipped if a second evaporator is not present on the case CASE CONTROLLER 1 BLACK RED 2 BLACK RED 415156 112 3 PINOUT FOR CC 100 VALVE RECEPTACLE BLACK GREEN O BLACK GREEN 26513115 Figure 8 16 Wiring the 335 3263 Valve Cable P N 335 3261 Sporlan SEI and Emerson Flow Controls ESR Stepper Valve The 335 3261 valve cable is equipped with a four pin male connector that plugs into a four pin female connector on the valve Plug the valve cab
25. MULTIFLEX 16 MULTIFLEX INPUT ADAPTER P N 335 2301 INPUT SOCKET WIRING FOR 640 0056 56VA Transformer 120 208240 VAG and 640 0080 80VA Transformer 24VAC Center Tapped Transformer L28 Lie a Three conductor non shielded cabl z are the recommended wire for connecting between the a center tapped transformer and I O boards Y Power Wiring Types B E S Earth ground the gt c 14 AWG Belden 9495 OV center tapped 240 208 18 AWG Belden 9493 Y Y Y terminal of each board 24V CT 24V 120 PRIMARY SIDE SECONDARY SIDE AC1 24VAC Center Tapped AC2 OV 5 6 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 ee MULTIFLEX COMBINATION I O BOARD INSTALLATION GUIDE 1 Connect board to the RS485 1 0 Network 2 Set the network address on the first five rockers of dip switch S3 for the 16AI and S4 for the 8RO sections of the MultiFlex 3 Set the network address on rockers 6 8 on S4 for the 4A0 or 8DO sections of the MultiFlex if JADE 88A0 and 168A0 have a 4A0 section The 168DO has an 8DO section 4 Set the network baud rate using rockers 6 and 7 of dip switch S3 For 9600 baud set 6 UP and 7 DOWN For 19200 baud set 6 DOWN and 7 UP 5 Set RS485 termination jumpers OUT term if at either end of a daisy chain Otherwise set jumpers IN no term 6 I
26. NOTE When mounting outdoors point the 4 transmitter down so that water does not col lect in the sensor cavity The outdoor RH sensor P N 203 5760 The outdoor RH sensor P N 203 5760 should be mounted in a sheltered area preferably on the north side of a building under an eave This prevents sun heated air from rising up the side of the building and affecting the relative humidity at the sensor Mount the outdoor RH sensor P N 203 5760 using the two screw holes shown in Figure 3 27 3 10 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 ER MOUNTING j BRACKETS Figure 3 28 Outdoor RH Sensor Exploded View 3 5 8 3 Duct mounted Insertion RH Probe CPC specs a duct mounted relative humidity RH sen sor P N 203 5771 with a 0 5VDC output for use in building control and anti sweat control applications using CPC input boards 1 Cuta small circular hole in the duct large enough for the sensor tube to fit through 2 Bolt the sensor enclosure against the outside of the duct wall so that the sensor element fits through the hole and into the duct The enclosure may be mounted horizontally as shown in Fig ure 3 29 or vertically The screws should be tight enough for the foam gasket around the bottom of the sensor to form an airtight seal between the hole in the duct wall and the outside air Figure 3 29 Duct mounted RH Sensor Exploded View 3 5 9 Dewpoint Probe Sensors and Transducers
27. bered terminal Connect BLACK ground wire to odd numbered terminal Connect the bare SHIELD wire to odd numbered terminal TRANSDUCER ODD TERM SHIELD BARE WIRE TO ODD st TERMINAL 203 5750 Relative Humid ity Sensor Table 8 1 Sensor Wiring The 164AI 810 and MultiFlex Inputs Wire the P sensor terminal to 12VDC sup ply on board Wire the GND sensor terminal to odd numbered ter minal Wire the OUT sensor terminal to even numbered ter SHIELD inal CONNECTED minal TO GND Jumper sensor terminal N to sensor terminal GND TO ODD TERMINAL CONNECT SHIELD JUMPER POWER pro s12v00 v TO EVEN TERMINAL Input and Output Setup 8 3 Input Type Dip Switch 203 5751 Wall mounted Use Belden 8771 shielded three conductor cable or equivalent relative Connect the RED BLACK and WHITE wires to the screw terminals the sensor s con h idi RH nector as shown in Figure 2 Clip the SHIELD wire umidity Connect the SHIELD and BLACK wires to the OV terminal of the input board Connect Sensor the WHITE wire to the SIG terminal of the input board Connect the RED wire to the 12V power terminal on the input board Locate the input dip switch for the sensor point and set to the OFF position LEFT for MultiFlex DOWN for 16AT Refer to the input board s user manual for locations of the input dip switches
28. denser fans are cycled ON regardless of the value of the TD The Drop Leg Offset setpoint is an adjustment entered if needed after measuring liquid subcooling dur ing operation of an individual condensing unit 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 ee The TD setpoint is the optimal difference between the refrigerant drop leg temperature and the ambient plenum temperature When the TD i e drop leg temp drop leg offset plenum temp begins to climb above this setpoint fans will be cycled ON to bring down the drop leg temper ature thus lowering the TD measurement The TD deadband setpoint is a range of values around the TD Setpoint within which the value of the TD calcula tion is acceptable When the TD rises above the setpoint plus 1 2 the deadband value fans will begin cycling ON When the TD falls below the setpoint minus 1 2 the dead band value fans will cycle OFF For the Condenser Fan On Delay setpoint fans are cycled ON when the TD is above the setpoint at the rate set for Condenser Fan On Delay For example if this field is set to 30 seconds each fan is staged ON in 30 second intervals until all fans are ON or until the TD falls back below the setpoint For the Condenser Fan Off Delay setpoint fans are cycled OFF when the TD is below the setpoint at the rate set for Condenser Fan Off Delay In other words if this field is set to 30 seconds each fan is staged OFF in 30 sec ond intervals until all fans are OFF or
29. rack controller that controls compressors and condenser fans The PAK can control up to 8 compressor groups containing up to 16 compressors The compressor control strategy is Fixed Steps with setpoint deadband using ON and OFF delays Up to 20 Fixed Steps can be configured The PAK can control up to 4 condenser fan groups containing up to 8 total condenser fans The PAK con denser control strategy is sequential TD control with set point deadband using ON and OFF delays The PAK has a compressor condenser interlock fea ture that will override TD control and force the condenser fans to stage off using the TD control OFF delay when all compressors are off This feature can be disabled with an Enable Disable setpoint or when the discharge pressure is above a configurable setpoint The MultiFlex PAK boards consist of two circuit boards a bottom layer with 16 combination digital analog inputs and a plug in top layer which contains a combina tion of 8 relay outputs and 4 digital DC voltage outputs The analog outputs on the Multiflex PAK drive solid state relays to control the fan stages The relays control the compressor groups The communication interface is RS 485 I O using the Standard Extended Address Form for CPC Distributed Controllers Currently the PAK is designed to interface with the CPC Einstein controller 10 9 Lighting Schedules This document explains the function of E2 s Lighting Schedule application It includes
30. read only Board Type shows which kind of output board the point is on The Board Type field will read either 8RO 8DO or 4AO for I O Network 16AI boards E16AI and SROE for Echelon Network 16Ale boards The last character of the Board Type field also shows what type of input the point is defined as If a point has already been defined as an analog or digital input this field will signify its input type with an A for analog or D for digital 2 Brd read only The point s board number appears under the Brd field 3 Pt read only The point number of each point appears in its record in the Pt field 4 Type read only The Type field shows the output s data type Possible Types are A Analog D Digital O One Shot or P Pulse If the point has not been identified a will appear at the end of the field instead 5 Application Select which application you wish to set up inputs to Pressing LOOK UP when on a defined point will open the Application Selection menu a list of application types currently existing in the box CANCEL will cancel this menu 6 Association If a point has already been defined and is currently being used by an application the name of the input to which the point is connected will be displayed in the Asso ciation field Association is the application s user defined property that is associated with the point Multiple applications 8 12 E2 RX BX CX I am
31. rise above the setpoint The output percentage is gradually brought up from 50 until when the input is at or above the throttling range Proportional Mode will bring the out put to 100 Output at Setpoint for Condenser HVAC PID Control For Condenser and HVAC PID Control the Output at Setpoint defaults to 0 This places the 0 end of the Throttling Range at the setpoint value and it generally means Proportional Mode will strive to pull the input back down below the setpoint and attain a 0 output percent age As the input climbs from the setpoint to the top of the Throttling Range Proportional Mode likewise increases the output percentage to 100 THROTTLING RANGE OUTPUT AT SETPOINT shown here as 0 100 CONTROL INPUT 26512028 Figure D 5 End Setpoint PID Control Output Setpoint 0 The differences between the two PIDs can be seen by observing the throttling ranges For non Condenser Con trol applications PID reacts to error that exists on either side of the setpoint If the input goes lower than the set Other PID Features point the output percentage is dropped from 50 it is assumed this will result in the input rising back to the set point Likewise when the input is higher than the set point the output percentage is raised For Condenser Control PID no reaction is made to an input that is lower than the setpoint since the output percentage is already 0 Changing the Outp
32. two rows of function keys The first row EH EN is comprised of screen specific function keys and the sec ond row has designated icon keys The five icon keys are Figure 2 2 E2 CPU RX 100 Version Shown Help D Alarms O Home i Menu D and The E2 CPU or main processor board Figure 2 2 Back gt contains the CPU Ethernet port and memory used for log 2 1 4 LEDs ging The 3 6V battery for the E2 is located on this board and protects log and alarm data during power loss The main processor board connects to the PIB via a ribbon cable The RX and CX 100 versions support mono chrome display only For optimum viewing backlight and contrast adjusts are available for customizing the mono chrome display depending on the user s needs PIB LEDs Status O 2 1 2 E2 Processor Interface Green 14 ON Power is being applied to the PIB Board PIB se Yellow RX1 ON Communication is being re ceived on RS 485 Port 1A The PIB main processor board and keyboard located behind the main board LEDs can be used to determine the status of normal operating parameters for the unit Yellow RX2 ON Communication is being re ceived on RS 485 Port 1B Red TX ON Communication is being sent on RS 485 Port 1A and 1B Table 2 2 PIB LED s Status Figure 2 3 E2 PIB The E2 Processor Interface Board PIB interfaces the power and most all communications with the main proces sor board and contains all field wiring
33. used to guess pre start durations for Heat Cools operating in cooling mode Coast K factor a measurement of the change in temperature when no heating or cooling is active This is used to determine pre stop durations for both heating and cooling Heat Cools 10 16 4 Setpoint Reset If desired Heat Cools may be configured with a Set point Reset that varies the value of the heating and or cooling setpoints based on an analog value from a reset sensor This is most often used to vary the value of a heat ing or cooling setpoint based on the outside air tempera ture To set up a setpoint reset for heating or cooling the user must specify the minimum and maximum range of reset sensor values and the maximum range of setpoint adjustment As the value of the reset sensor varies within the mini mum and maximum range an equivalent portion of the maximum setpoint adjustment will be added or subtracted from the heating or cooling setpoint When the reset sen sor value is directly in between the minimum and maxi mum range values nothing will be added or subtracted from the setpoint Between the halfway point and the min imum value part of the setpoint adjustment will be sub tracted from the setpoint Between the halfway point and the maximum value part of the setpoint adjustment will be added to the setpoint An example of this is shown in Fig ure 10 21 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 2 RESET SET SENSOR POINT RANGE CHAN
34. 062 BLACK EEN Oe 8 E BLUE STEPPER 3 HET Zu GREEN STEPPER 4 11213 a o WHITE PINOUT FOR CC 100 in 2 o 12V DC VALVE RECEPTACLE A b BROWN GROUND NETWORK NETWORK To other CC 100s 7 6 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 E2 1 Connect the ESR8 to the Echelon Network II A A Lo 2 Set the termination jumper on the ESR8 For daisy chain M configurations the device will need to be terminated 5 only if at either end of a daisy chain e W 3 Wire each Emerson Flow Controls ESR12 or ESR20 valve to one of the four pin connectors on the ESR8 Refer to the Emerson Flow Controls Valve Field Wiring Guide Use Belden 9418 18AWG or equivalent 4 Connect the ESR8 to a Class 2 75 VA 24VAC transformer 5 Use the Service Button to commission the ESR8 Refer to ez section 8 14 4 in this manual for more information on E Na commissioning a device Note that dip switches S2 amp S3 are not 4 implemented has other Einsteins E2s or Echelon devices Siu if P A g To other Echelon a IUe d nw devices ma LEO EEE LEO EIIJELI E ESR8 e ESR8 e BOARTE BOARD ECHELON CABLE TYPE Level IV 22 AWG Shielded Max Daisy Chain Length Feet 4592 Meters 1400 P N 135 2300 Non Plenum 1 Pair 1000 Feet P N 135 2301 Plenum
35. 1 etc Decision 2 is made either by setting a fail safe jumper for old style 8ROs or by wiring the load to either the N O or N C terminals on the Form C contact all other output boards Table 8 3 shows how the fail safe switch jumpers and or Form C contacts should be configured based on how you want the output to perform during both normal operation and during network power loss Controller Command vs Contact State Set Jumper or Se E Wire Form Switch C Ie Contacts To N CLOSED FF OPEN IN CLOSED FF OPEN IN OPEN DOWN N O FF CLOSED ore aos Table 8 3 Output Board Fail Safe and Switch Settings 8 2 3 Switch The fail safe dip switch determines the sate of the relay when communication is lost between the board and E2 Setting the Fail Safe Dip 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 2 The fail safe dip switches are labeled S2 on the 8RO and switch S3 on the SIO Each of the eight rockers on the fail safe dip switch corresponds to an output on the board Set the rocker UP to close the relay and turn the output ON during network failure Set the switch DOWN to open the relay and turn the output OFF during network failure 8 2 4 Wiring Outputs to Points Old 8ROs The old design of 8RO P N 810 3002 used points with two terminals on them To connect output devices to these points wire the point terminals in series with the load so that the path is closed when the 8RO relay is CLOSED and open whe
36. 10 5 4 2 Two Speed Fans v RS T LT 10 5 4 3 Variable Speed Faris 2 2 eene dee em AA 10 16 10 5 5 Economizer Control en ee ete e eC tee ee Eee Pee Eee Ee eer i EPI aeree SERE 10 16 10 5 5 1 Economization Enable aan 10 16 10 5 5 2 Economization Lockout Features esiones entente a aea a i ense 10 17 10 5 6 Digital Economizer Control essi te eoe ette er ee rir Pa teet te Reb err mede bin 10 17 10 5 7 Analog Economizer Control isis ninio ee e e iip br a ee t De tee Peer een 10 17 10 5 8 Dehumidification Control ca ond endet ri te e EE er Hp 10 17 10 5 9 Curtadilment iai te Re NERA as 10 17 10 5 10 Optimum Start Stop OSS eset tie e ne tp ee RR e SE Prope inani 10 18 TOSTE AHU Zone Controls RT RR Ca rhet d nece ida dei 10 18 10 5 12 Hardware Overview e rre eret ove Gath ada er ERE D HER OR ON 10 19 x Table of Contents 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 J06 2ZONE CONTROL E eles wbeetuvelvedsesute ete a ness 10 20 LOOT EOD EE 10 20 10 6 2 How Zones Work ise ee e Nae AIA Si case ni ele e ARH le UR A eee 10 20 10 6 3 Applications That May Be Connected To Zones eese enne eere nennen 10 20 10 6 3 1 MultiFlex RTU Brat joa eel ee ca as tee 10 20 10 6 32 MultiFlex ROB Board ini A A de 10 20 10 6 3 3 AUS A et ee it uS 10 21 10 6 4 Temperature COntrol D rr a i te ee a e deb e HO E Pere rris 10 21 10 60 35 Lone Temperatur i eve RR RR ete a Nen ee e Rh ed e A rents 10 21 10 6 6 Economizer Co
37. 11 1 OSS See AHUSs optimum start stop Outputs digital selecting units 8 73 Outside Temperature Sensor See Sensors out side temperature Overrides initiating 71 9 P PAK 2 7 10 24 Part Numbers and Model Descriptions 2 Passwords setting 9 13 Peer Communications 6 closed network layout 6 2 ethernet IP configurations 6 ethernet network layouts 6 2 hardware specifications 6 open network layout 6 2 6 3 software specifications 6 2 troubleshooting 6 4 Peripherals Manual part number for manual 4 PIB 2 2 PID Control D Plus Board 5 2 PMAC II defined 2 9 features 2 9 Pointers input and output 5 Points See Inputs or Outputs Power VO Boards 5 5 Power Modules wiring 8 5 wiring schematic 8 15 Power Monitoring 10 37 daily logs 70 37 hourly logs 70 37 logging 10 37 monthly logs 10 38 shed mode 0 37 Pressure Transducers 3 7 Pulse Accumulation 70 43 accumulator reset types 10 44 configuration 10 43 high trip 70 44 logging 10 44 outputs 10 43 7 Pulse Modulating Anti Sweat Controller See PMAC II Pulsed Defrost See Defrost pulsed R RCB 2 6 10 20 Recovery Mode for Case Controllers 10 10 Refrigeration Controller Repeaters part number for manual 4 two channel mounting 3 6 Reset Button 9 7 Resetting 11 13 Resetting the E2 Controller 9 7 Retrofit Mounting 3 2 Returned To Normal Alarms 11 11 Reverse Cycle Hot Gas See Defrost reverse cy cle hot gas Rotary Dials I O Board
38. 2 2 Board Calculations With X as the number of plus boards and Y as the num ber of non plus boards use the following equation to ensure that the number of devices on your network has not exceeded the maximum load limitation of the network For example if the total number of devices is less than 256 the maximum load limitation has not been exceeded X Y 8 256 5 3 Wiring Types CPC specs Belden 8761 shielded twisted pair cables for use as I O Network wiring or Belden 82761 and Belden 88761 for plenum installations Board Designation If the recommended cable is not available in your area 5 2 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 2 be sure the wiring meets or exceeds the following specs Shielded Conductor Type Twisted Pair Gauge 18 24AWG Capacitance between 31 pF ft or less signal wires Capacitance between 59 pF ft or less signal and shield Maximum Length 4000 ft 18 to 22 AWG 2500 ft 24 AWG Nominal Impedance 1209 509 Table 5 2 RS 485 I O Network Wiring Specifications 5 4 The I O Network Structure Daisy Chains The RS 485 Input Output I O Network connects all input and output communication boards together in a sin gle open communications loop This loop or daisy chain connects the E2 to multiple input and output com munication boards and terminates at the last input or out put board on the network A diagram of this network arrangement is shown in Figure 5 1
39. 203 5750 The wiring harness P N 335 3252 designed specifically for the input must be used Wiring for this device is shown in Figure 8 14 Hand Held Terminal Jack The Hand Held Terminal jack on the left side of the CC 100 is where a CPC Hand Held Terminal HHT may be connected The HHT may be used to program setpoints and change settings in a CC 100 In addition you may use an HHT to send a case into defrost or terminate an exist ing defrost force a case into wash mode and bypass or CC 100 Case Controllers override numerous case functions The Hand Held Terminal jack also doubles as a service pin used when commissioning a CC 100 Plugging the Hand Held Terminal into a CC 100 sends the special Ech elon ID number to the E2 8 3 2 Power Module Wiring CC 100s are powered by 24VAC Class 2 power which is supplied by a CPC power module The case power module should be connected to either a 120 VAC or 240 VAC single phase power source which ever is necessary for the model ordered Complete wiring of the case controller power module including lights fans defrost and anti sweat heaters is diagrammed in Figure 8 15 Follow all local NEC and UL wiring practices Power is supplied to the CC 100 via the output cable harness DEFROST HOT DEFROST HOT DEFROST HOT DEFROST OUT DEFROST OUT DEFROST OUT ANTI SWEAT HOT ANTI SWEAT OUT FANS HOT FANS OUT NC or NO
40. 26 65 RX 480 Unit 3 16 46 33 Use Ctrl X to Select CX Tabs SETUP FULL ALARM C1 General C2 Setpoints c3 CS Outputs C6 Comp Setup C7 Comp Outs C8 Suction Groups SUCTION GRP01 Setpoints SUCT PRES SETPT Suct Pres DBand Extrn Pres Shft Comp On Delay Comp Off Delay Unldr On Delay Unldr Off Delay Min ON Time Min OFF Time TR Pressure Fi PREU TAB NEXT TAB F3 EDIT F4 STATUS FS CANCEL Figure 9 47 Setpoints Box 9 18 2 3 Navigating the Setup Screen Fi PREV TAS F2 NEXT TAB F3 EDIT Far STATUS FS CANCEL FUNCTION KEYS Figure 9 48 Typical Setup Screen RX version shown The Setup utility is the interface used to change set Set Up Applications tings and setpoints and define inputs and outputs in the E2 Figure 9 11 and Figure 9 48 show a typical Setup screen and its primary elements Index Tabs The ten boxes at the top of the screen labeled C1 through C0 are known as the index tabs These tabs pro vide a short index of the screens that are used to set up the current application The numbers C1 through C represent the screen numbers C1 being screen 1 C2 being screen 2 and so on Each of the Setup screens that you may access will have a name beside its number But as in Figure 9 11 and Figure 9 48 for example you will notice some tabs have names while others are blank As you move through these screens within the Setup Editor the highlight will move to differ
41. 3 4 2 3 Repeater The four channel repeater P N 832 4830 serves the same basic function as the two channel repeater boosting signal strength However the four channel repeater is also useful as a means of connecting the E2 to its associated devices using more than one daisy chain Mounting the Four Channel With a four channel repeater mounted in the E2 you can run as many as three daisy chain segments out into the field each of which can be as long as the prescribed Eche lon maximum wire length The fourth channel of the repeater can be used to connect other E2s in a separate daisy chain eliminating the need to run cable from the field back to the next E2 The standoffs and mounting holes are located above the PIB in the back of the enclosure box Use the mounting screws and standoffs to secure the four channel repeater in place and connect the repeater to the PIB with the two pin power connector located next to the battery Sensors and Transducers REPEATER MOUNTS 4 Standoffs E2 ENCLOSURE Figure 3 20 E2 Repeater Mounting 3 5 Sensors and Trans ducers 3 5 1 CPC transducers convert pressure readings to propor tional electrical signals between 0 5 and 4 5 volts The transducer is designed with a 1 8 inch male FPT fitting for connection to a standard access fitting If the fitting is con figured with a Schrader valve this fitting will have to be removed and replaced with a 1 8 inch female fitting Each
42. ALARM 1 Current 266 Total Acknowledged Unacknowledged DATE TIME STATE PROPERTY or Board Point MESSAGE 11 16 WE 11 16 FAIL 11 18 FAIL 11 16 FAIL 11 18 FAIL 11 18 FAIL 11 18 FAIL 11 18 FAIL 11 18 FAIL 11 16 FAIL 11 16 FAIL 11 16 FAIL 11 16 FAIL 11 89 NOTCE THIS 63 1 NetSetup fipplication confi 18 33 N FL A1 03 01 A1 03 01 01 Failed Sensor or 10 31 N FL THIS 63 1 SUCTION GRP01 SUCTION PRES Failed Sensor 18 31 N FL A1 03 01 A1 03 01 01 Failed Sensor 10 29 N FL THIS 63 1 SUCTION GRP01 SUCTION PRES Failed Sensor 66 Systen SU absent fro X366 System Device absent fro 07 X300 System Device absent fro 66 System Device absent fro 66 System Device absent fro 66 System Device absent fro 66 System Device absent fro X366 System Device absent fro X366 System Device absent fro 66 System Device absent fro 66 System Device absent fro X366 System Device absent fro X366 System Device absent fro F1 ALARM ACK ALARM RST F3 ALARM CLR F4 EXPD INFO Figure 11 20 Alarm Advisory Log The Advisory Log is divided into five categories Date Time State Property or Board Point Message 11 10 3 Date and Time The Date and Time columns simply display the date and time when the alarm or notice was generated and logged into the controller 11 10 4 State The State column describes the alarm type the current alarm state and whether or not the alarm has been acknowledged There are three
43. Control application you may easily define the fan output by tying it to CND 2 FAN 3 This keeps you from having to keep track of which contacts are tied to which point numbers You are required to enter a point name in the Point Name field The default name is BOARD NAME SUBNET NUMBER BOARD NUM BER POINT NUMBER V Board Point The Board Point Number will auto 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 2 matically be defined if you are configuring the point from the Output Status screen Select Eng Units The Select Eng Units field is where you may select how the ON and OFF states of this point are displayed and represented in the E2 s setup fields and status screens By default digital outputs have ON OFF engineering units meaning when the output is ON or OFF the input will be rep resented as ON or OFF in the system software Engineering units are only a visual representation of the state of the output point energized or de ener gized Therefore it is not necessary to define engi neering units for digital inputs However selecting units that are appropriate to the output s function such as BYP or NO_BYP for inputs that initiate bypasses will make the output s state easier to read and understand To choose an engineering unit press LOOK UP to select Default Value The value that the relay output should go to if the output is not associated to an application The default value of the D
44. DC DC Figure 8 3 Input Board Power Sources Input boards may supply 12VDC or 5VDC To connect to one of the DC power sources simply connect the sen sor s power wire to one of the terminals The maximum current that may be drawn from the 12VDC terminal is 100 milliamps The maximum cur rent that can be drawn from all three 5VDC terminals COMBINED is 50 milliamps NOTE For 24VAC sensors a separate trans 4 former must be used unless specified other wise in Table 8 1 on page 8 3 Specific wiring instructions for each type of sensor are given in Table 8 1 on page 8 3 8 2 E2 RX BX CX ISO Manual 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 P N various various Temp Sensors and Probes Digital Sensors Klixons Sail Switches etc Input Type Dip Switch 2 Connect one lead to the odd numbered terminal and the other lead to the even num bered terminal polarity insensitive Connect one lead to the odd numbered terminal and the other lead to the even numbered terminal polarity insensitive ODD EVEN TERMINAL TERMINAL ODD EVEN TERMINAL TERMINAL 800 2100 800 2200 800 2500 Pressure Trans ducers CPC 100 200 500 Ib ratings 0 5 4 5VDC output SVDC input voltage Connect RED power wire to 5 VDC sup RED TO 5VDC WHITE TO ply on input board gt EVEN TERM gt BLACK TO Connect WHITE sig nal wire to even num
45. Defrost is similar to the Temperature Termina tion strategy outlined in Section 10 3 2 3 except a defrost cycle always continues for the full programmed duration When the termination temperature rises above the set point defrost does not end Instead the defrost heat is turned OFF until the case temperature falls below the set point at which time the output will come back ON to con tinue heating Figure 10 4 illustrates what happens in a pulsed defrost cycle In this example the case reaches its termina tion temperature approximately 2 3 of the way into its defrost cycle Defrost continues but defrost heat is turned OFF until the temperature falls below the setpoint at which point the heat is turned back ON Defrost heat will continue to be pulsed in this manner until the defrost time has passed The defrost cycle will then begin the Run Off period and then restart refrigera tion 10 3 2 4 Emergency Defrost When necessary a user can initiate an emergency defrost cycle in a circuit Emergency defrost cycles are similar to normal defrost cycles except an emergency defrost cycle will ignore all calls for termination and 10 6 E2 RX BX CX 150 Manual 2 remain in defrost for the entire programmed defrost time For cases using a pulsed defrost strategy this means the defrost heat will not be pulsed during emergency defrost Any Pump Down delays that might be programmed for the circuit are also ignored in other
46. E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual E2 trolled by PID control Valve filtering is active in this CC 100 with the filter period set to six seconds and the filter percentage set to 75 During one sample taken during a period interval the CC 100 calls for a valve position of 50 One period six seconds later the CC 100 asks for a 58 valve opening The total difference between the current sample and the previous sample is 8 58 50 To determine the actual amount the valve will change the CC 100 multi plies the filter percentage 75 with the total amount of valve position change 8 As a final result the new PID output value for the CC 100 will be 56 Note that filtering only slows down the reaction of the PID loop When the control input is stabilized the PID loop will eventually achieve the output percentage it is calling for To demonstrate this suppose in the example above the CC 100 continues to call for a 58 output during the period immediately after the 6 adjustment Since the total difference between the asked for percentage and the current actual percentage is 2 58 56 valve filtering will make the new adjustment for that period 1 5 75 of 2 As a result the new valve output would be 57 5 Future filter periods will bring the actual output even closer to the asked for output Application PID filtering is used for systems that appear to be over reacting to changes in the control input If filtering is
47. Echelon based input communication device sends values from up to sixteen analog or digital sensors to the E2 e 8ROe Echelon based relay output board acti vates and deactivates up to eight devices CC 100 Case control board controls all lights fans defrost and refrigeration for a single case The Introduction 1 3 2 CC 100 controls pulse or stepper valves to provide precise evaporator control resulting in better tem perature maintenance and energy efficiency ESRS Evaporator stepper regulator the analog outputs on this board allow the E2 to control circuit temperature in up to eight circuits using suction side mounted electronic evaporator pressure regula tors EEPRs TD3 Temperature display has three inputs that monitor case temperature product temperature and defrost status 1 4 3 Interconnection With Other E2s In large installations where more than one refrigeration system is present or where E2s are controlling both refrig eration and building HVAC systems in the same site the E2s share information with each other across the Echelon Network Figure 1 3 shows an example of a possible E2 control system along with the necessary peripheral control and communication devices This diagram shows an E2 RX and its related components connected to an E2 BX and its related components E2 RX E2 BX REFRIGERATION BUILDING
48. Gateway 18 18 64 1 CPCE2Ff6000365 7 255 255 248 0 Host Name Domain Name MAC Address 66 GA F6 66 63 65 Rem Client Port 1625 Monitoring Port 3661 F1 PREU TAB F2 NEXT TAB F3 EDIT Fh STATUS FS CANCEL Figure 9 17 TCP IP Addressing The TCP IP screen is where you enter the information necessary to allow Ethernet connection to this controller If this site uses Ethernet box to box you will need to enter a TCP IP address and a group name to allow all E2s on site to communicate as a group See Section 6 E2 Ether net Peer Communications for more information From the Main Menu e H y e O O 1 Pr SS S stem C nfigurati n H m 2 Press Remote Co munications 3 Press TCP IP Setup to advance to the TCP IP Setup screen E2 units may be configured to communicate across an Ethernet computer network using TCP IP protocol To enable Ethernet communication you will need to enter IP address information for the E2 in the Serial IP screen IP Address The IP Address field sets the network address for this E2 Other network devices such as PCs running UltraSite will communicate with this E2 by sending information to this specified address Contact your network administrator to determine what IP address to enter The IP Address always consists of four numbers from zero to 255 each of which is separated by a period Enter the address in this format Subnet Mask Contact your network administrator to get th
49. HVAC units until the indoor relative humidity falls below the setpoint minus the dehumidifica tion hysteresis value An example of this is shown in Fig ure 10 9 gt DEHUM SET POINT P DEHUM OFF l DEHUM HYSTERESIS 26512040 Figure 10 9 Dehumidification Setpoint Control The need for dehumidification may also be determined by a digital humidistat In this case dehumidification is 10 22 E2 RX BX CX I50 Manual E2 active only when the humidistat input is ON 10 6 10 The Zone Humidity Input Note that unlike Zone Temperature which has 16 inputs that combine into a single value Zone humidity is designed to be provided by a single input However there may be some instances where one or more relative humid ity sensors exist within a Zone such as an installation where each MultiFlex RTU has its own humidity sensor for use in Stand Alone mode If you have multiple humidity sensors in a Zone and you wish to combine these humidity sensor values to calculate Zone Humidity use an Analog Combiner application to make the combination and tie the Zone application s Zone Humidity input to the output of the combiner Refer to Section 10 17 Analog and Digital Combiners for Analog Combiner application programming instructions 10 6 11 The Effect of Enabling Dehumidification When a Zone application determines that dehumidifi cation is needed it sends an ON signal to all its associated controllers signaling the
50. If floating setpoint control is not desired this cell can be effectively disabled by setting the value of the Float Output Range to 0 10 12 2 3 The PID Control Cell The PID Control cell uses a PID algorithm to compare the control input value with the control setpoint value The result of this comparison is a percentage from 0 100 The PID Control cell repeats this sequence ever few sec onds and the result is a PID percentage that adjusts over time to provide the optimum amount of output to achieve the setpoint The 0 100 output from the PID Control cell is passed along to the Filter cell Bypassing PID For users who simply wish to convert an analog output to a pulse width modulation or sequenced staged output a Loop Sequence Control application can be programmed to bypass PID Control altogether If this option is selected the Loop Sequence Control application completely ignores the Select Setpoint Float and PID Control cells and passes on the value of the control input directly to the Filter cell Note that when bypassing PID the control input must be an analog percentage from another E2 application or a 0 10VDC analog signal from an input point 10 12 2 4 The Filter Cell The Filter cell s primary function is to slow the rate of change of the PID cell s output The filter reads the differ ence between the current output value and the value x sec onds ago where x a user specified period of time The differenc
51. Internal Repeater eese eee non non nc one entren entente nennen neon nc nennen en 4 4 4 4 BATTERY TESTING AND REPLACEMENT c cccssssecsssscecsssececsscecessesecescecessssesesaesesenaescssecsesaeecseaeeecessecsesssecesaesesnseeeees 4 4 44 1 Low Battery Notification cet NO 4 4 4 4 2 The Battery Enable Witch diia 4 5 BATA BA do Und ee Mes 4 5 4424 Battery Replacement vice ae NET OR da ba ie ds 4 5 5 THE VO NETWORK AND HARDWARE SETUP 4 eese eese eee ee eee seen ettet ense ena setae setae eese sense sense ees easet ease 5 1 5 1 BOARD NAMES AND TERMINOLOGY sees eene eene entere thee n neri en tense sete sen tess ere nnne eren rsen rns e tree serrer nennen nene 5 1 5 2 MUETIBLEX PBUSCE BOARD A colt ice eg ea eee eas MI B bn ies 5 2 3 2 Board D signation iei eie iaa USER eR ERES 5 2 5 2 2 Bo rd Galculationss i n nentes entente eddie t eit ariete teet 5 2 NI WIRING EYPES tete tin matte nitent imet eia ta dn 5 2 5 4 THE I O NETWORK STRUCTURE DAISY CHAINS ccccccessscessseeceescesssseecsesececscecessececsaaececeaeecesaeeesesaesesesseeesaeeeneaaees 5 2 5 5 NETWORK ID NUMBERS BOARD NUMBERS sssssssseessssecessececeecececsececesaececeacecesaecesesaeeeseseeseeseeesesaeeceeseeesneeeseeaes 5 2 5 6 SETTING THE BAUD RATES sic 3 i0iact st isiiiel sees is 5 3 5 7 SETTING THE TERMINATING RESISTANCE JUMPERS ccssscccsssseecsesceeeseecsesececscecessececesaececeseecesaeeeseaaesesesses
52. Key El Pressing the key from the Home screen or any application status screen will pop up the Actions Menu If EN key moves the an option is highlighted when 1s pressed that high lighted option is selected Pressing on an applica tion summary screen will bring you to the status screen of that application Keypad PREV TAB Moves backward one screen NEXT TAB Moves forward one screen EDIT Opens the Edit Menu box STATUS OVER Opens the Detailed RIDE or LOOK UP Status screen Opens the Override Update screen or Look Up Tables Opens the Setup screens or Cancels an operation SETUP or CANCEL Table 11 5 Function Keys for Setup Screens Navigation RX Function BX Function AHU WIN sUCTIONGROUP AHU CONDENSERS ZONES STANDARD and CASE LIGHTING CIRCUITS SENSOR CONTROL SENSORS POWER MONITORING SETUP CANCEL SETUP CAN CEL Table 11 6 Function Keys for Status Screens The Help key opens the Help menu The Alarms key opens the Alarms Advi sory Log The Home key opens the Home screen The Menu key opens the Main Menu The Back key moves you back to the previous screen Table 11 7 Icon Function Keys The Help E key opens a pop up window con taining either information about the screen or menu you are currently on or information about the input output or setpoint you have highlighted with the cursor if available After the Help key has been pr
53. Lag arrangement take turns act ing as the Lead loop The user designates the maximum amount of time a Heat Cool will act as a Lead loop after this duration the current Lead loop will switch places with its Lag loop Lead Lag arrangements only work when both Heat Cools are in Occupied mode Dehumidification control uses the AHU s existing cool stages and a separate dehumidification device such as a desiccant wheel if available to remove moisture from the air The dehumidification setpoint is placed at the 0 end of the dehumidification PID throttling range In other words the dehumidification output will start at 076 when the humidity is equal to the setpoint and increase to 10096 when the humidity is equal to or above the setpoint plus the throttling range The dehumidification output percentage is used much like a heating or cooling output percentage is used in Tem perature Control The percentage represents the percent age of total dehumidification capacity available to the AHU including cool stages and other dehumidification devices 10 17 Analog and Digital Combiners Instead of using a single output source as an applica tion input you may use a combination of up to sixteen input sources To use multiple inputs a Multiple Input cell must be used A Multiple Input cell is a simple application that reads data values from its inputs combines them using a user defined combination strategy and sends the combined v
54. MULTIFLEX INPUT BOARD BOTTOM LEFT CORNER SHOW WALL MOUNT RH SENSOR BACK PLATE FRONT VIEW SHIELD e 210 2002 Wall mounted For wiring the sensor to a CPC input board use Belden 8761 shielded two conductor dewpoint mE cable or equivalent Connect the BLACK and WHITE wires to the screw terminals on the sensor s connector as shown in Figure 3 connect BLACK to Signal Ground and WHITE to 0 5V Output Clip the SHIELD wire Connect the SHIELD and BLACK wires to the OV terminal of the input board Connect the WHITE wire to the SIG terminal of the input board Connect 24VAC a separate 120VAC 24VAC transformer must be used P N 640 0039 to the power terminal on the dewpoint sensor back plate using the BLACK and WHITE wires This 24VAC transformer must only be used to power this dewpoint sensor Do not use this transformer to power additional devices Locate the input dip switch for the sensor point and set to the OFF position LEFT for MultiFlex DOWN for 16AT Refer to the input board s user manual for locations of the input dip switches SS Se WALL MOUNT DEWPOINT SENSOR BACK PLATE FRONT VIEW MULTIFLEX INPUT BOARD BOTTOM LEFT CORNER SHOW Separate Transformer PIN 640 0039 Eee Signal Ground 206 0002 Light Level Wire GREEN ground wire to odd numbered
55. Mem Out OF Stack Bounds 50 An intemal error has occured inthe EZ Device Absent From Network The current E2 could not find the al E2 VO board or Echelon controller A user tried to change the update rate of a CC 100 RT 100 or similar Echelon device but the change was not accepted Try the update rate change again If this alarm persists call CPC service Dial To Day Time Site 1 Failed 20 E2 tried to dial out to the site listed as Day Time Site IO o rare Dial To Day Time Site 2 Failed 20 E2 tried to dial out to the site listed as Day Time Site SE missam o o S C 4 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 Alarm Name Default Definition Dial To Day Time Site 3 Failed 20 E2 tried to dial out to the site listed as Day Time Site o ems o o o m EU Dial To Night Site 1 Failed 20 E2 tried to dial out to the site listed as Night Site 1 D o Er O Dial To Night Site 2 Failed 20 E2 tried to dial out to the site listed as Night Site 2 nds cta o S Dial To Night Site 3 Failed 20 E2 tried to dial out to the site listed as Night Site 3 nds nta 0 0 time Did Not Exit Defrost User A CC 100 or CS 100 that entered defrost did not ter O rinsecrentdtostatis programmed time Did Not Exit Wait User A CC 100 or CS 100 terminated defrost and entered the WAIT state but did not exit the WAIT state when refrigeration re started Did Not Exit Wash User JA CC 100 or CS 100 did not exit Clean Mode Did Not Respond To command pec CC 10
56. Network Num Ctrl Type CC166 Liquid C S166 Ckt Suction CC166 Suction ESR8 Line Up DataLink TD3 Case Display Ctrl Type Echelon 16RI Echelon 8R0 EC2 29x Control EC2 39x Control FS NEXT Figure 9 2 Network Setup Screen RX version shown After logging in for the first time the Network Setup screen will ask you to specify how many of each type of device will be connected to the E2 you are currently pro gramming Options will vary depending on the type of controller used Unit Number Echelon Subnet Each E2 on the Echelon Network must have a different unit number This can be any number from 1 to 255 but each E2 s number must be unique No two E2s on the network may have the same unit number Enter this number in the Unit Number field It is rec ommended you number the first E2 1 and number the other E2s on the network sequentially 2 3 4 etc Unit Name Type a name for the E2 in the Unit Name field Boards on the I O Network 16Al Boards Enter the number of 16AIs or Multi Flex I O boards on this E2 s I O Network If you have any special MultiFlex or Gateway boards that emulate 16AI also include their total number of boards in this field 8RO Boards Enter the number of 8ROs and Multi Flex 168AOs 168s 88AOs relay output boards on this E2 s I O Network 8DO Boards Enter the number of 8DO digital out put boards on this E2 s I O Network 4AO Boards Enter the number of 4AOs MultiFlex 168A
57. PAK are used to detect a Rack Pack failure produced by some device out of the PAK s control A valid link could not be made between an E2 appli cation and an input assigned to it 30 Failed Attempt To Bind Input 50 Failed Sensor Or Bad Wiring 20 20 20 30 E2 is unable to get a valid sensor value due to a possi ble hardware problem Failed To Create logging E2 1s unable to create logs for the input or output shown Failed to Obtain DHCP Lease Failed to obtain a DHCP lease from the DHCP Server when a lease is requested This happens at system startup if a DHCP lease is requested or if the user switches to using DHCP Failed to Renew DHCP Lease DHCP Lease failed to renew altogether DHCP Leases are renewed at an interval of half the time of the requested lease If the lease is for 5 days then a renewal will happen at 2 5 days If this fails it will retry at the of the lease time If both attempts fail the alarm is generated Fax Init String Is Not Valid The fax initialization string for the E2 s modem 1s Pee LN incorrect and may need editing Features denied during restore License manager has denied permission to access a feature during a restore Either the license for that feature is invalid or it does not exist or the number of licenses for that feature is less than the number needed for the configuration Further information may be found in the service log Features denied during startup License manager denied
58. Proportional Mode if left to operate all by itself is only capable of stopping the error from changing When the error is not changing neither is the P portion of the output This means the system may reach stability at any value regardless of whether it is above or below the set point see Figure D 2 Proportional Mode alone has no mechanism that can bring the error to zero after stability has occurred The T Mode is necessary in order to move the input in the direction of the setpoint 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 ee TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE EEN pa Y M E 30 X A ae ae P MODE ONLY Figure D 2 Comparison of P Mode vs P I Mode Saturation Once the input value has wandered outside Propor tional Mode s throttling range the output percentage will be at 0 if below the Throttling Range or at 100 if above the Throttling Range At this point PID is consid ered to be in saturation meaning it is operating at full or zero capacity and is not able to react any further to changes that occur beyond the throttling range Proportional Mode cannot distinguish between a satu rated and an unsaturated system it simply makes propor tional adjustments to the output percentage Therefore once an input value in a saturated system changes direc tion Proportional Mode reacts to correct the movement regardless of how much error exists As the temperature changes direction and again
59. S1 S2 EC HEN BOARD STATUS LEDs 15 PAK ANALOG Code A Code B General OUTPUTS 1 4 Status DC POWER OUTPUTS Ml NETWORK STATUS LEDs 3 at 5VDC at 12VDC Table 2 9 MultiFlex PAK Hardware Overview 2 7 2 2 2 4 The 8RO and 8ROSMT Relay Boards The 8RO P N amp 10 3005 board is a general purpose Cc 1 O nergy board used to connect an E2 to any of eight standard con trol relay outputs but is now obsolete and has been replaced by the SROSMT P N 810 3006 board To function the 8RO board must be connected through either the Echelon Network or the RS 485 I O Network to the E2 When properly installed the 8RO receives an elec p i BOE no LEGEND trical impulse from the E2 which either opens or closes AC Power Connection Address amp Baud Rate Dip Switc o thi VO Network Connection Fail Safe Dip Switch any of eight contact relays Output definitions within the Rx and Tx LEDS ea E2 allow the user to configure the 8RO board to interact Termination Resistance Jumpers 9 Relay Fuses 8 places B E Hand Held Terminal Port LED Relay Indicators 8 places with any refrigeration system or environmental control component Figure 2 11 8ROSMT Relay Output Board y Uulp The 8RO board is the direct link between the E2 and component operation Information gathered by the con troller from the input boards is checked against current stored setpoints If differences in the re
60. Section 9 16 2 for information on how an Alarm Annunicator works Quick Start 9 23 Set Up Alarming 9 17 Set Up Global Data RX 466 Unit 3 16 07 29 SETUP FULL ALARM C1 General C4 Setpoints C7 Notices SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Input Definitions Output Definitions System Information VALUE ALG STATUS Remote Communications Alarm Setup Logging Setup Network Setup A Global Data Licensing Figure 9 43 System Configuration Menu In a network with multiple E2s it is often the case that certain sensors or transducer values will need to be used by all E2s A good example of this is outside air tempera ture There is no real need for every E2 to have its own outside air temperature sensor and therefore it would be beneficial if a single sensor could be used by all E2s on the network 08 26 05 RX 466 Unit 3 16 31 45 Use Ctrl X to Select CX Tabs SETUP ALAR M1 C3 Summer Wtr C4 Outputs CS Holidays Global Data GLOBAL DATA OAT Mode OUTDOOR TEMP Out RH Mode OUTDOOR HUMID Indoor RH Mode User Light Level Mod Local Only LIGHT LEVEL IN E Spare Anlg Mode User Spare Anlg EU DF Sparefnlg2 Mode User Sparefnlg2 EU DF Sparefnlg3 Mode User SpareAnlg3 EU DF SpareAnlg4 Mode User SpareAnlg4 EU DF Sparefnlg5 Mode User E DF pareAnlg5 EU Hilocal Only Local Only F1 PREU TAB F2 NEXT TAB F3 EDIT F4 LOOK UP FS CANCEL Figure 9 44 Global Data Setup Scre
61. System General Site Name Site Phone Refresh Rate RS 232 Baud 1 0 Net Baud 9600 baud Alarm Annunc RX Home Screen Default ScreenBlankTime 16 Write DFMC Init Value 06172005 6 66 36 115 2 Kbaud No Fi PREU TAB F2 NEXT TAB F3 EDIT F4 STATUS F5 CANCEL Figure 9 39 Alarm Annunciator 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 EZ 9 16 3 Alarm Dial Out RX 466 Unit 3 CONTROLLER SETUP 14 08 01 ALARM Name Model THIS 03 1 52003 A1 03 01 16A1 RO 63 61 8RO THIS 01 1 CX366 C ALARM SETUP MabDial out Setup Alarm Filtering Setup Controller Alarm 1 0 Status Figure 9 40 Alarm Setup Menu One of the E2 s most important alarm reporting fea tures is its ability to dial out to remote sites whenever a serious alarm condition occurs Each E2 is capable of dial ing out to up to three sites The E2 may dial out to a com puter a fax machine a digital pager or a printer To set up from the Main Menu Dial out devices are set up in the Dial out Setup screen To reach this screen 1 Press WA System Configuration 2 Press Alarm Setup 3 Press Dial out Setup RX 466 Unit 3 16 44 52 ALARM C4 Status CS Day Status Remote Dialout Setup REMOTE DIAL report to All sites Filtered Sites only Night starts at 6 68 Night stops at 6 66 NightNumsOnSat No NightNumsOnSun No Printer Baud Use Default F1 PREU TAB F2 NEXT TAB F3 EDIT F4 LOOK UP FS CA
62. Table 8 1 on transducer page 8 3 Case Circuit Temperature see Table 8 1 on Temperature page 8 3 Oil Reset Digital see Table 8 1 on Switches page 8 3 Table 10 1 Suction Group Inputs Wire Output Output Device Board EP Switch to Set Failsafe Dip ee Compressor N C up If you want a compressor to be OFF during network power loss use N O failsafes instead Unloader 10 2 Condenser Control An E2 RX is capable of controlling air cooled or evap orative condensers The E2 RX 300 may control a single condenser while the RX 400 may control up to two con densers 10 2 1 An air cooled condenser consists of one or more fans that blow air across a manifold of tubing to cool heated refrigerant and condense it into a liquid The E2 controls condensers by activating or deactivating fans in order to maintain discharge pressure or temperature at or below a chosen setpoint Air Cooled Condensers A Condenser Control application may use either of two strategies to operate air cooled condensers an air cooled strategy or a temperature differential T D strategy 10 2 1 1 The air cooled strategy uses a simple PID control loop that compares a single Control In input to a PID setpoint The resulting percentage is used to activate the condenser Air Cooled Strategy 10 2 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual N O down These fail safe settings are specifically for unloaders EM Line Sole EM C N C up Keeps solen
63. Table A 1 Case Type Default Settings The number of defrosts per day and the defrost time length from the Elec column under Defrost types For example if you select 14 RIFF reach in frozen food the E2 sets the circuit s setpoint at 10 the number of defrosts at 1 and the defrost time at 60 minutes The other columns in this table such as the High and Low Alarm Dly columns and the Hot Gas Rev Air and Timed columns are suggested values that are not automat ically entered into the Circuit application Appendix A Case Type Defaults A 1 Defrost Type Low Elec Type Description Alarm Delay DEF Timed S2 BART Bakery retarder 35 o 40 oro 2M6 25 2 45 2160 SS RTDR Bakery retarder 35 o 4 oro 2M6 24s 2M5 2 6 Si MTPK Meat packaging room 45 60 407 0L00 2M6 245 2 45 290 SS MTCU Meat cutingroom as o 4 oroo 2M6 245 245 290 S6 MTPR Meat prep room of 40 oro 2 16 2 45 as 2790 S7 MTWR Meat wrapping room a 607 40 01 00 2 16 3 45 245 2 90 S8 FAPR Fish prep room 45 607 40 01 00 on 2 45 2745 o So SBCL Subeooler ss os n 3245 2 60 215 60 PRPR Produce prep room 55 6 45 oroo 2M6 245 2 45 290 6I SDFM Single deck freezer meat 10 0 20 oroo 28 240 ms Us GSMDFM Muli deck freezer mear 10 o 20 oro 218 2 40 2 60 2 45
64. The point logs stored 1n memory were not restored O o per he treset orupgmde oo 1 50 A Suction Group s internal list of possible compres sor combinations became temporarily invalid requir ing a rebuild Product Temp Hi Limit Exceeded User A product temperature probe in a standard or case controlled circuit has measured a product tempera ture above the low limit setpoint Product Temp Lo Limit Exceeded User A product temperature probe in a standard or case I font circuit has measured a product tempera ture below the low limit setpoint Program ID mismatch 20 Open Echelon controller Program ID does not match A opamp Proof Fail User A proof checking device 1s registering a failure in one P fine Applies comol devies Proof Failure Occurred User A proof checking device 1s registering a failure in one O Apple comma devees o Proof Reset Stage In retry 50 Due to a FAIL signal from a proof checking device dez tempting tore ero aloe Rack Failure Occurred User A Suction Group application 1s registering a total rack failure REFR Phase Loss User A phase loss device connected to Global Data has O ed to sun down al eget systems REFR Shutdown User A Global Data application s REFR Shutdown input has turned ON to shut down all suction groups con densers and circuits Relativ Adv No Active Setpt An application that is supposed to be generating an alarm for a specified input has no active setpoint to use for alarming This usually occu
65. WIRE OV to OV WIRE to same color NETWORK 4 T DAISY CHAIN CONFIGURATION SET TERMINATING JUMPERS JU1 JU2 JU3 JU1 JU2 JU3 I f f O O O UP 1 i 1 DOWN Oj O O dem N Term Terminated Not Terminated UP DOWN DOWN UP A IC WIRING FOR 640 0056 56VA Transformer gt 120 208 240 VAG and 640 0080 80VA Transformer 24VAC Center Tapped Transformer AC 24vAC Center Tapped L28 Liz OV il Three conductor non shielded cables 77 Z are the recommended wire for connecting between the center tapped transformer and I O boards Power Wiring Types 14 AWG Belden 9495 18 AWG Belden 9493 Y Earth ground the y OV center tapped li i 240 208 oz terminal of each board 120 PRIMARY SIDE SECONDARY SIDE Board Installation The I O Network and Hardware Setup 5 11 2 SmartESR INSTALLATION GUIDE POWER 485 ov VO NET 485 v gg VALVE1 VALVE2 VALVE3 VALVE4 VALVES VALVE6 VALVE7 VALVES HM uu 1 Connect the SmartESR to the I O Network 2 Set the network address on the first five rockers of the dip switch labele
66. Zone applications AHUs are usually large enough to be zones in and of themselves However if desired you may associate an AHU Con trol application with a Zone application The AHU will then use the Zone s Temperature Control setpoints occu pancy state summer winter state and economization and dehumidification enable signals More information on 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 2 Zone control is available in Section 10 6 Zone Control 10 5 12 Hardware Overview To set up an AHU for control by an E2 numerous tem perature and humidity sensors for several different appli cations must be connected to the I O Network as well as fan and cool proof checking devices economization checking devices curtailment devices and all of the heat ing cooling and dehumidification outputs Listed below are wiring instructions for some of the inputs and outputs that are part of a typical AHU setup Space Temperature Temperature See Table 8 1 on page 8 3 Space Humidity Humidity See Table 8 1 on page 8 3 Supply Air Temp Temperature See Table 8 1 on page 8 3 Return Air Temp Temperature See Table 8 1 on page 8 3 Outdoor Air Temp Temperature Set up as Out door Air Provider in Global Data see Section 9 17 Table 10 9 Suction Group Inputs Outdoor Air Humid Humidity Set up as Out door Humidity Provider in Glo bal Data see Section 9 17 Curtailment Device Digital Set up as Curtail ment in Global Da
67. above the Cut Out setpoint at which time the output turns OFF See Figure 10 16 for an illustration 10 11 4 Digital Sensor Control The Digital Sensor Control module performs two basic functions LOGICAL COMBINATION Up to four inputs may be combined using standard logical combina tion methods such as AND OR XOR etc The result is the command output value which can be used to operate a relay BYPASS The command output may be configured to be bypassed to a fixed value by a switch or but ton press 10 11 5 Logical Combination A Digital Sensor Control module has four inputs num bered 1 through 4 The logical combination of the Digital Sensor Control modules follows one of the following strat egies FIRST The first of the four digital inputs received will be used as the logical input value This combi nation first looks at input 1 If the value of this input is undefined it looks for other valid inputs starting with 2 and descending in numerical order to 4 SELECT The sensor module reads an analog 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 2 input which provides a numerical value from 1 to 4 This number determines AND The logical input value will be ON only when all sensor control inputs are ON If one or more of them are OFF then the logical input value will also be OFF OR The logical input value will be ON if one or more sensor control inputs are ON If all of them are OFF the logical inpu
68. an overview of how the application works and instructions on how to program it 10 9 1 Overview The Lighting Schedule application provides an inter face for Cut In Cut Out control based on light level simple time scheduling with or without use of external Time Schedule applications proofing minimum on off times and Solar control Generally the Lighting Schedule application is designed to follow a digital command from a time sched ule to determine when the lights should be ON or OFF At the same time Lighting Schedule looks at the value of a light level sensor compares it to a set of Cut In Cut Out setpoints and overrides the schedule as the real time light ing conditions warrant As a result the light level sensor and schedule both work to provide adequate light when 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 E2 needed AND saving energy by keeping lights OFF when they are not necessary 10 9 2 Functions of the Lighting Schedule Application Figure 10 12 shows a flowchart diagram of the Light ing Schedule application and the eight cells that work together to control the lights A description of each cell and the functions they perform are given below Combiner Offset Control RiselSe otset Light Level LLEV a LLev Interface M uev Logi Logic In Logic In Sched In LLEV Occup Use Alt LLEV Comb 2 Use Alt Y invert Output
69. case can be cleaned or serviced www NOTE If the case circuit has been placed in 4 Clean Mode it must be taken out of Clean Mode Follow the procedures up to the Option List menu and choose End Manual Mode End Manual Mode Selecting this command will end any defrost cycle or the Clean Mode initiated manually If the defrost time needed is shorter than what the nor mal programmed defrost time allows or if in Clean Mode follow the procedures to the Option List menu and select End Manual Mode 11 7 Overrides If a compressor stage or a fan on the condenser needs to be bypassed follow these instructions 1 From the default Home screen arrow to either the COMPRESSOR STGS or FAN STAGES sections and highlight the stage or fan to be bypassed Press Enter to access the override option from the menu RX 480 Unit 3 10 59 46 RX DEU SUMMARY FULL ALARM SUCTION GRPO1 39 1 fiecuits State Temp ECTRL CKT81 Off NONE ECTRL CKT82 NONE NONE Fr NONE r NONE Override Update r NONE r NONE Property THIS 63 1 SUCTION GRP81 COHP1 Y NONE r NONE ICE ol r NONE ri A E um r NONE Override Time 6 66 66 NONE E NONE Override Value NOTACT NONE Sensor Ctrl Valu ANALOG SENS61 NONE Controlled By Discharge Status Fan s On ANALOG SENS82 NONE DIGITAL SENS61 NOTA F1 DIGITAL SENS82 NOTA ON Enter State Use Next Prev keys F1 SELECT y CANCEL Figure 11 16 Override Update Screen RX Ver
70. connections The PIB allows you to connect an external keyboard accessory cards and an external computer All RS 485 and Echelon Network connectors are located on the PIB 2 2 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 2 _ MODEM 14 4k or 33 6k Main Board CPU LEDs Green D1 1 blink every two seconds 1 sec General Sta ond ON 1 second OFF Main tus LED for board is operating normally E2 and Blank Solid ON E2 is booting up E2 PROCESSOR BOARD Face E2 Faster blinks per second Indi cates an error condition with the hardware or firmware Green D18 ON E2 is booting up Boot Status LED Table 2 3 Main Board CPU LED s Status Keyboard LED Green D5 1 blink every two seconds 1 sec General Sta ond ON 1 second OFF Status is tus LED normal 2 2 JO Network Boards 4 blinks per second A flash and 7 or crystal problem has been de and Peripherals tected Board should be replaced Table 2 4 Keyboard LED s Status 2 2 1 The Gateway Board Figure 2 5 Mounting the Internal Modem Board 2 1 5 PC 104 Peripherals The Internal Modem Previous Genera tion Processor Board ging the modem into the PC 104 slot Failure to do so can damage the modem and void the warranty CAUTION Power down the E2 before plug The E2 s internal modem mounts in the PC 104 slot located at the top left of the E2 main board See Figure 2 5 Disconnect po
71. contains a list of power usage sum maries for the previous 24 months A monthly log entry contains The month and year of the entry The KWh for that month The maximum average KW within any demand window for that month The highest instantaneous KW reading taken for that month and the date and time the reading was taken The total number of minutes the Power Monitoring application was in Shed Mode The Heat Degree Days for that month The Cool Degree Days for that month Definition of Heat and Cool Degree Days Heat degree days and cool degree days are standard industry measurements of the demand for heating and cooling This measurement is based on the daily average outdoor air temperature If the daily average temperature is below 65 F then the number of heat degree days for that day is equal to 65 minus the day s average temperature in degrees Fahren heit Example if the day s average temperature is 54 F the number of heat degree days for that day is 65 54 9 heat degree days If the daily average temperature is above 65 F then the number of cool degree days for that day is equal to the day s average temperature in degrees Fahrenheit minus 65 Example if the day s average temperature is 71 F the number of cool degree days for that day is 71 65 6 cool degree days Larger degree day numbers indicate a larger demand 10 38 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual ER for heating or cooling Degree day totals may
72. control boards that communicate using the Echelon Net work the 16Ale analog input board the 8ROe relay out put board the CC 100 CS 100 series of case control and case circuit control boards and the ESR8 board Wire Restrictions 7 6 1 Powering Echelon Devices with the same 56VA and 80VA transformers used to power the I O Network Echelon devices require Class 2 power to operate which is not supplied by the I O board transformers CAUTION Do not power Echelon devices All Echelon devices require 24VAC Class 2 power CPC specs several sizes of transformers to accommodate the full range of CPC s Echelon compatible products Table 7 3 lists each transformer s part number and rating Xformer P N VA Rating Input Voltage 640 0039 10 VA 110 VAC 640 0041 50 VA 110 VAC 640 0042 50 VA 220 VAC 640 0050 75 VA 110 VAC 640 0045 75 VA 220 VAC Table 7 3 Class 2 Transformers for Echelon Devices To select a power transformer for one or more Echelon devices 1 Determine what the total VA is for the boards and controllers that will be powered by the transformer see Table 7 4 Example Two TD3 boards 4 VA each and one E2 40 VA board are to be powered by one transformer The total VA is 2 x AVA 1 x 40VA 48VA 2 Use a transformer that has a power rating equal to or higher than the total calculated VA see Table 7 3 Example Boards totaling 48VA can be connected to either a SOVA or 75VA transforme
73. controller Pressing Service Pin on controller Entering Neuron ID s directly Specifying a range of nodes Cancel 1 2 3 4 Press desired selection Figure 9 31 Commissioning Menu A menu will appear on the screen giving you the option of either pressing the service button entering the Neuron ID by hand or cancelling and returning to the main screen Press to select the manual entry option License Management and bring up the dialog box shown in Figure 9 32 Bus Subnet Board Setting Controller Address for CL 63 662 Subnet 3 Node 2 Specify Neuron ID Of Controller Neuron 1D MENEEEE Figure 9 32 Setting Controller Address Neuron ID Enter the device s Neuron ID as it appears on the form you created and press ES The E2 will then look for the controller with the Neuron ID you entered If it is found the E2 commissions the device and you may move on to commissioning the next device If E2 does not find it the display will read ERROR Controller with specified Neuron ID did not respond This could be caused by an improperly entered number or it could be caused by a problem with the device s network connections or power connections When all devices are commissioned keep the form with the Neuron ID stickers in an easily accessible place so that it may be referred to if necessary for board remov als replacements or troubleshooting 9 15 License Management Some applicati
74. controller is capable of using three dif ferent types of defrost Off Cycle Timed Off Cycle defrost also known as Timed defrost is simply a period of time during which refrigeration is sus pended No heat is applied to the evaporator The applica tion simply turns refrigerant flow OFF for the duration of the defrost cycle When these defrost types are used Pump Down and Run Off times are not necessary therefore they will not be part of the defrost cycle Hot Gas and Reversed Cycle Hot Gas Hot Gas and Reversed Cycle Hot Gas require the use of hot gas from the refrigeration lines During these types of defrost the application will open the valve and pump heated refrigerant through the evaporator coil Any user Case Control Circuits defined Pump Down and Run Off times will be observed as normal Electric Defrost Electric defrost uses electric heaters to defrost the evaporator coil During electric defrost the application will turn the Defrost output ON which will likewise acti vate the heaters connected to the power module s defrost relay Any user defined Pump Down and Run Off times will be observed as normal 10 4 4 3 Defrost Termination Both the start time and the end time of a defrost cycle are determined by the user The Pump Down Defrost and Run Off stages all have fixed durations and when the last stage of the cycle is complete defrost is terminated However a case controller may be programm
75. controller will enter Fail Safe Mode see Section 10 4 11 and default to a fixed 5096 output 10 4 6 Dual Temp Control A case controller can be configured to change its case temperature alarm and superheat setpoints when an exter nal digital input is switched ON or OFF Dewpoint Input Sources 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 2 The user simply connects the digital switch to an input point on the RS 485 I O Network and configures the case controller to read that input as a dual temp switch When the dual temp switch is ON the case controller overrides its normal case temperature alarm and superheat set points with a set of user specified alternate setpoints 10 4 7 Fan Control A relay on the power module activates the case fans The fans will be ON while in refrigeration mode and they may be programmed to be either ON or OFF when the temperature setpoint is satisfied and refrigerant is not flowing When in defrost mode the fans default to OFF but they may be programmed by the user to be either ON or OFF When a liquid side CC 100 is in Recovery Mode see Recovery Mode page 9 10 Fan Control may be config ured to delay the activation of fans for a user specified amount of time This delay helps keep the fans from splashing excess moisture that may still be on the coil 10 4 8 Light Control Lights are activated and deactivated by a relay on the power module The case controller itself does not have any special
76. cooler than the inside air economization is enabled Software Overview 10 21 6 Invs Out Enthalpy This strategy requires indoor and outdoor humidity sensors and also indoor and outdoor temperature sensors The enthalpy of the outdoor air is calculated and com pared to the enthalpy of the indoor air If the out door air enthalpy is less than the indoor air enthalpy economization is enabled Otherwise economization is disabled You may choose a different method for use in summer and winter months Also an alternate method may be specified that will be used as a fail safe when the primary method is not available due to sensor failure etc 10 6 8 The Effect of Enabling Economization Both MultiFlex RTU and AHU applications support the use of both two position digital and variable position analog economizers Digital economizers when enabled behave like a first stage of cool When analog economizers are enabled the MultiFlex RTU or AHU will modulate the opening percentage of the dampers based on its own mixed air temperature measurements 10 6 9 Dehumidification Control A Zone application is responsible for reading the rela tive humidity level within the Zone comparing it to a dehumidification setpoint and sending a command to dehumidify when the humidity is above the setpoint Once the Zone humidity level rises above the setpoint dehumidification will be active in all the Zone applica tion s associated
77. defined Superheat setpoint Recovery Mode Recovery Mode is a special part of Superheat Control that occurs at the beginning of every refrigeration cycle When refrigeration has been OFF and Temperature Con trol calls for refrigeration to be ON a Recovery Mode begins during which the valve is fixed to a user defined percentage usually 70 for a fixed amount of time This floods the previously empty evaporator with refrigerant and gradually establishes a differential between the coil in and coil out temperatures When the Recovery Mode ends the superheat will be relatively close to the setpoint at this 10 10 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 2 time Superheat Control will begin Recovery Mode always lasts for a specific number of seconds The CCB determines the duration based on past performance of the evaporator during previous Recovery Modes Thermostatic Expansion Valves TXVs As an alternative to regulating superheat using EEVs CC 100s also support cases that use mechanical thermo static expansion valves TXVs When TXVs are being used the CC 100 uses only Temperature Control to turn refrigeration ON and OFF Superheat Control is dis abled since it is assumed the TXV is taking care of the superheat 10 4 3 2 EEPRs Suction Stepper The CC 100H and CS 100 control case temperature from the suction side of the evaporator by using an EEPR to regulate suction pressure Suction side control differs from liquid side
78. defined zone in the list turns OFF The Number of Zones parameter with a default value of 4 specifies how many zones the application will use No two zones are ever ON at the same time each zone starts and stops independently and waits for the other to finish before another zone starts 10 20 2 1 Cycle Control Types By default Timed cycles are always used unless the user has configured a flow sensor optional If a flow sen sor is configured a control type parameter will become visible where the user can select either a Timed or Volume cycle control type During any cycle the disabled zone states and valve 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 E2 outputs will be set to OFF For midnight crossover times a cycle will be com pleted if the duration extends into the next day 10 20 2 2 Timed Instead of start and stop times entered to define the length of time a zone is on the user enters a duration of time The default parameter called On Time with a default value of 2 hours entered in HHH MM format is used when a certain length of time is desired for watering Irrigation begins per cycle start time and lasts for all zone durations that are active for the current day For example if a time of 30 minutes 0 30 is entered that zone will stay ON for 30 minutes and then shut OFF 10 20 2 3 Volume Under volume control enabled zones will be cycled until the set volume of water for each zone has been dis pensed for the curren
79. detected Irrigation pipe leak detected Priority Lost Log Data CRC Error 30 An internal error has occurred in E2 resulting in lost log data Low Battery Voltage The backup battery that keeps the time and date resi dent on the E2 main board may need to be replaced Low Limit Alarm User An HVAC application AHU Zone RI 100 or ARTC MultiFlex RTU has a temperature below one of its heating setpoints Cow Limit Notice o Ds Low Pack Superheat ces Multiflex Pak ProAct superheat low limit exceeded imi exceeded Low Suction Limit Exceeded User VACI ONET a pressure has fallen below a Suction REM ad MIP Receive Buffer Overflow Messages from the Echelon network are coming into E2 too fast for the controller to process This might be caused by an E2 having too many applications and or logs running or there may be too many Eche lon devices on the same segment as the E2 i e more E 63 If this message persists call CPC service Modem Didn t Initialize 20 E2attempted to initialize the modem but failed Modem Init String Is Not Valid 34 The dial out initialization string for the E2 s modem is incorrect and may need editing Neuron Not Responding The chip that handles Echelon networking on the E2 is either defective or in a mode that makes it non responsive Contact CPC service for assistance No Configuration Template There is an internal error in the E2 software Notify CPC service No Description File
80. digital outputs 810 3067 MultiFlex 168DO 810 3066 MultiFlex 168 16 analog digital in puts 8 relay outputs 16 analog digital in puts 16 relay outputs 810 3073 MultiFlex 1616AO 810 3077 MultiFlex 1616DO 4 digital outputs 16 analog digital in puts 16 relay outputs 4 digital outputs Table 2 7 MultiFlex Combination Input Output Board Models 2 2 3 3 MultiFlex CUB 2 6 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 2 The MultiFlex Condensing Unit Board CUB is a smart input output board designed to control single con densing units A single condensing unit is a self contained compressor and condenser bearing unit which controls refrigeration in a single case line up or walk in cooler The MultiFlex CUB uses the same general hardware configuration as a MultiFlex 168A0 It is equipped with a processor and extra memory to allow it to control com pressors condensers refrigeration and defrost for a single condensing unit using on board I O and control algo rithms The MultiFlex CUB has its own installation and opera tion manual P N 026 1706 2 2 3 4 MultiFlex RTU BX and CX Only Similar in design to the MultiFlex combination input output boards the MultiFlex RTU board is designed spe cifically for operating package rooftop HVAC units as part of an E2 BX or REFLECS BCU building control system The MultiFlex RTU is designed to be a replacement for the previous generation ARTC and is 100 compatible
81. display for error code information and call CPC service An internal error has occurred in the IRLDS Check the IRLDS display for error code information and call CPC service An internal error has occurred in the IRLDS Check the IRLDS display for error code information and call CPC service An internal error has occurred in the IRLDS Check the IRLDS display for error code information and call CPC service An internal error has occurred in the IRLDS Check the IRLDS display for error code information and call CPC service An internal error has occurred in the IRLDS Check the IRLDS display for error code information and call CPC service IRLDS Line Filter Flow Fault A zone on an IRLDS unit has a dirty filter or a crimped tube IRLDS Data Error IRLDS Detector Data Error IRLDS Drift Fault IRLDS General Fault IRLDS Pressure Data Error An internal error has occurred in the IRLDS Check the IRLDS display for error code information and call CPC service An internal error has occurred 1n the IRLDS Check the IRLDS display for error code information and call CPC service The IRLDS has experienced an error not recognized by the E2 An internal error has occurred in the IRLDS Check the IRLDS display for error code information and call CPC service After 10 consecutive missing phase trips the com If any of the 3 phases of power is missing after the compressor is called to be on this advisory is gener ated
82. eee verre p i en ree epis 4 1 41 1 Enclosure E 4 1 42 Maim Processor Board ss aere tee iio 4 I 4 1 3 Main Processor Board Previous Version eese eese eite eee n nnne n ner en nns r innen enn nest nn erint 4 2 AVA Power Interface Bord obest ette idee e dea t em e esty pet Rees 4 2 4 2 POWERING IHE E2 uo ue lia ee A 4 2 ADA R 5 465 POYIS os ope te e e e ERE petri e ede t Ie e ER Med 4 2 T2 2 RS 485 Jumpers ii esee be e e e dee e diee aie ee t ne Pee e tette 4 2 4 2 3 Echelon Network Connect s epe de eap yu tenet Sed decd ipse ee fete eeoa bega 4 2 42 4 Echelon Jumpers te RR Ed STER e RO PG ORI EFE Ee Tute ua EE e Ye SEEDS Yen Vis caes 4 2 vi Table of Contents 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 4 39 ADD ON E2 PERIPHERAL Se iii 4 2 4 3 1 Plug In Echelon Card P N 537 4860 with mounting screw P N 101 4201 cesser 4 3 4 3 2 Modem Communication Expansion Card New Processor Board eese nennen 4 3 4 3 3 Plug In Modem Card P N 537 4870 with mounting screws P N 101 4038 and standoffs P N 107 9440 Previous Generation Processor Board eene 4 4 4 3 4 Plug In Digital I O Network Card P N 537 4860 csset ener rennen nennen 4 4 23 4 O O A E UU HERE PTT IN ONO 4 4 4 5 5 RS 485 Port Card P N 537 4890 esiosan eene entere nne rennen EEE RE E rennen inneren e aE 4 4 ABI JEBEDS zii re aa 4 4 4 3 6 Plug In Four Channel
83. eese eene eterne 10 25 10 9 3 Control Method Select it ee ta eet eret Sent etc e e ie e esce aera ie 10 25 10 9 4 Standard Control ee A 10 25 10 9 4 1 The Light Level Interface Cell LLEV INTERFACE esses nennen nne tne teen tnnnns 10 25 10 9 4 2 The Schedule Interface Cell SCHEDIE esses eee e erret 10 26 10 95 Alternate Control esnean eg ete eb Eo pier a Sa ace sah dn deb eae wees 10 26 10 9 5 1 Multi Eogi COrt bi et 3 4 iore t ERU E eR ee DAMM 10 26 10 9 5 2 Offset Solar Control eee ot here e Ee IR I eei AAA eto Ra 10 26 10 9 6 The Basic Schedule Cellini ion eiorinn oa a E S E e i Eas 10 27 10 956 1 Slave Scheduling 3 5 2 rot repete aperire tie Ee teet cla ee ieee E ORN T 10 27 10 9 7 The Min ON OFF Cell a ii 10 27 10 9 8 TheProof Cell ies ett iet eO e ER aa deg a Ra e Re dda dese eee e Ae eres 10 27 10 10 DEMAND CONTROL eh Ure PEOR ENERGIE RENE ee RE ISA 10 28 10 10 1 Introduction to Demand Limit Control eese essent nennen ettet nennen nter nen enne 10 28 10 10 2 Demand Monitoring ies dee ia EEE EOE ERES 10 28 TO IO 3 Load SHeddin Boccia andan crece to eed nei virt Pe E ER e teet salinas 10 28 10 10 3 1 Definition Seer tette teme ed ate cepe erm ete UAE 10 28 10 10 4 Shedding Levels ui eiae eee i ep o EO reete tia 10 29 T0 LOS Priority Levelsa aate ete od NRER e ER cd 10 29 10 10 6 How Demand Control Uses Load Shedding
84. equal to or above the setpoint plus the throttling range The dehumidification output percentage is used much like a heating or cooling output percentage is used in Tem perature Control The percentage represents the percent age of total dehumidification capacity available to the AHU including cool stages and other dehumidification devices 10 5 9 Curtailment Some power companies offer curtailment programs that allow participating stores to disable user defined loads during peak power times in return for discounts on utility rates If you are participating in a curtailment program the Software Overview 10 17 power company will supply you with a digital curtailment device that must be wired to an input on the RS 485 I O Network To set up curtailment in the system software you must designate which specific heating and cooling stages will be subject to curtailment When the power company sends a curtail command i e the value of the curtailment device switches to CLOSED all stages that are set up to be curtailed will be shut off and locked out Fan control is not directly affected by a call for curtail ment The AHU fan will still run at a speed based on the number of active non curtailed stages or if using modu lated outputs the curtailed modulating percentage If this causes the fan to slow down or shut off during curtailment there will be energy savings from the fans 10 5 10 Optimum Start Stop
85. following priority structure from highest to lowest e Temporary Schedule Event 1 Temporary Schedule Event 2 Temporary Schedule Event 3 Events that occur on HD1 Holiday 1 Events that occur on HD2 Holiday 2 Events that occur on HD3 Holiday 3 Events that occur on HD4 Holiday 4 8 Temporary Schedule Events of a slave schedule s master schedule if applicable Mo ON Ur fF WY 9 Standard events within the schedule itself 10 13 1 5 Ranges In addition to the 15 events within a master or slave schedule up to 12 standard ranges may be specified Ranges are sets of dates that specify which days within the year the schedule s events will be applied The E2 checks the list of ranges to see if the current date falls within any of the twelve possibilities if the date does not fall within a range none of the schedule s events will occur 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 E2 When no date ranges are specified the schedule is con sidered to be active All scheduled events will occur nor mally 10 13 2 Holiday Schedules A Holiday Schedule application s primary function is to pass along the day of the week to one or more master or slave schedules and to tell these schedules when it is a holiday HD1 HD4 A holiday schedule determines hol idays by cross referencing the current date with its user programmed list of holiday date ranges During the time periods of these date ranges the holiday schedu
86. func tional on menus and can be used to move from section to section on the Home and Status screens Page Up Page Down Keys The Page Up MN and Page Down Ui keys scroll the user through menus application summary screens and setup screens too large to fit on one screen Ctrl Page Up Ctrl Page Down Keys Page Ctrl Page Ctrl The Ctrl Page Up ea Ctrl Page Down a Dorm keys on an application setup screen take the user to the next or previous application on the same screen Numeric Keypad The numeric keypad is fully functional from both the front panel and an external keyboard Hot Keys Hot Keys are quick and easy shortcuts to frequently used functions and applications For a complete menu screen that lists all Hot Keys and how to access them Alt press the ll key and the a key together Ctrl Use the control keys Ctrl Mode and Names Pressing Bl and a INS will appear on the top right of the screen activates Insert Mode Insert Mode a between Insert and Overwrite edit modes to access Insert Mode Edit Pressing and ED will appear on the top right of the screen activates Edit Mode Edit Mode allows you to change the name of the application to something besides Ctrl the name of the application and the number Pressing N and id NAMES will appear on the top right of the screen switches from a Point number to a Point Name when setting up Board and Points in a Setup screen 11 8 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual
87. input is ON 10 9 5 Alternate Control Alternate control comprises Multi Logic Combiner and Offset Solar Control strategies 10 9 5 1 Multi Logic Combiner When the Alternate Lighting Control Use Alt Con trol parameter under the General tab in Setup of the application is set to Yes an alternate lights on off combi nation method is then used to turn lights ON and OFF The user is then presented with a logical matrix where they can select which inputs will turn lights ON and OFF This matrix is located under the Alt Control tab in Setup of the application The Number of Inputs parameter Num Inputs located under General tab in Setup of the application specifies the number of input sources made available in the matrix Up to four input sources may be used Sched ule Solar Light Level and Logic TIP Activating the Use Alt Control parameter is the only way to use the Solar Calculation Control method for Lighting Control 10 9 5 2 Offset Solar Control 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 ee The Offset Solar Control cell of the Lighting Schedule application uses the Sunrise Offset and Sunset Offset parameters to determine how many minutes before or after sunrise the sun is considered to be risen or how many minutes before or after sunset the sun is considered to be set The resulting offset for sunrise and sunset is used by Lighting Control in its logical equations for the Solar state A positive value is entered if adding t
88. is to be maintained TD strategy uses drop leg temperature for the refriger ant temperature and plenum temperature for the ambient temperature The formula for determining the TD control value is TD dropleg temp dropleg offset plenum temp DropLeg Offset is a user configured parameter to allow fine tun ing of the drop leg temperature measurement In TD condenser control operation when the TD rises above TD setpoint TD deadband 2 an increase in fan capacity is called for Similarly when the TD drops below TD setpoint TD deadband 2 a decrease in fan capac ity is called for TD can control up to four condenser fans 10 18 3 TD Control Fail Safes TD Control operates as long as plenum and drop leg temperature inputs are available and the drop leg tempera ture remains within a minimum maximum range config ured by the user Otherwise TD control uses various fail safe modes to control the condenser fans 10 42 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 2 In the event drop leg temperature is not available due to probe failure all fans will be staged on Drop Leg Temperature Above Maximum Drop Leg Setpoint If the Drop Leg temperature Drop Leg Temp rises above the maximum drop leg temperature setpoint Drop Leg Max an increase will be called for until Drop Leg Temp drops below Drop Leg Max This protects against the possibility of the Drop Leg Temp rising too high as a result of high plenum temperature
89. may be placed elsewhere see Appendix D PID Control D 1 Throttling Range on page D 1 THROTTLING RANGE OUTPUT AT SETPOINT i shown here as 50 CONTROL INPUT 26512028 Figure D 1 Throttling Range Example 1 Suppose a Case Control application has a throttling range of 10 degrees Also for simplicity s sake assume only the Proportional Mode is active and the pro portional constant Kp is one The system begins with a 0 output at the bottom of the Throttling Range and with an input value of 24 F Because the throttling range is 10 degrees Proportional Mode will gradually add 100 to the output percentage as the input changes to 34 over time Suppose for example the input increases by one degree every time an update occurs The following adjust ment would then likewise occur after every update P mode adj 1 0 1 degree 10 degrees 0 1 10 After 10 updates the input value would be 34 F and the output would be 100 The same would happen if it were five updates at two degrees each or one hundred updates at 0 1 degrees each In every case the tempera ture travels a total of 10 degrees and because the throt tling range is also 10 degrees the output travels from 0 to 100 proportionally Higher Throttling Range values will result in a wider 0 100 range and therefore will result in smaller reaction to changes in input values Proportional Constant Kp The Proportional Constant i
90. moves in the direction of the CHANGES DIRECTION THROTTLE RANGE REMAINS SATURATION THROTTLING RANGE FOLLOWS INPUT DURING SATURATION TIME P P MODES setpoint Proportional Mode will reduce the 100 output percentage in an attempt to stop the movement and stabi lize the temperature To put it another way when a system is saturated the input changes the placement of the Throttling Range As shown in Figure D 2 as the input rises above the Throt tling Range the top end of the Throttling Range rises with it When the input finally changes direction the Throttling Range remains at its new position The T Mode covers for Proportional Mode s inability to account for saturation When the input value is outside the throttling range I Mode will continue to adjust the output percentage to bring the input value towards the set point AS INPUT IN SATURATED SYSTEM CHANGES DIRECTION THROTTLE RANGE REMAINS SATURATION Y I CORRECTS ERROR AND BRINGS c IHROTTLING RANGE BACK TO NORMAL 1 1 1 1 Lz THROTTLING RANGE 0 FOLLOWS INPUT DURING SATURATION P MODE ONLY Figure D 3 Saturation in P vs P I Modes The I Mode Calculation To determine the T Mode adjustment for each update the following calculation occurs I mode adjustment K current error K in this equation is called the integral constant It is simply a multip
91. necessary for the E2 to identify and establish communications with all devices on the net work To start commissioning open the Controller Setup screen 1 Press GBP to open the Main Menu amp 2 Press System Configuration amp 3 Press Network Setup 4 Press Controller Setup RX 466 Unit 3 13 42 CONTROLLER SETUP FULL fRLARRH Node Name Model Bus Subnet Boardt THIS 63 1B eT ts ETH 3 1 AI 63 61 16AI 1 0 RO 63 61 8RO 1 0 Neuron ID THIS 61 1 CX366 C Store ETH 1 1 F2 DELETE RCRD F3 NET STATUS JFh SET ADDRESS F5 CANCEL Figure 9 26 Controller Setup Screen Set Up Echelon Network essi NOTE A device may only be commissioned if it is properly connected on the network and powered up How Commissioning Works Each device that is capable of communicating on a Echelon Network has a unique 12 digit Neuron ID code number that is hard coded in a chip on the board In order for the E2 to begin communications with a unit controller or another E2 it must know the device s ID number When a device is commissioned its 12 digit code is either entered by hand into the E2 via the front panel key board or sent across the network to the E2 using the device s service button Once the E2 knows the device s 12 digit ID it establishes communication and gives the device its user defined subnet and node address From that point on the E2 uses only the subnet and node address to commun
92. on page 1 the Throttling Range is the range of input values across which Proportional Mode will gradu ally move the output percentage from 0 to 100 excluding effects by the Integral and Derivative Modes The Output at Setpoint value basically tells the RMCC where to place the Throttling Range in relation to the set point this is explained in further detail below Output at Setpoint for Non Condenser HVAC PID For all non condenser and non HVAC PID control the Output at Setpoint is fixed at 50 except for Analog Out put Modules which may be programmed with any value from 0 100 As mentioned before this means that PID control will constantly strive to achieve a stable system where the input is equal to the setpoint and the output is 50 The throttling range in a PID Control application with a 50 Output at Setpoint is placed in such a way as to put the setpoint right in the middle of the throttling range as shown in Figure D 3 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 2 THROTTLING RANGE OUTPUT AT SETPOINT i shown here as 50 0 100 CONTROL INPUT 26512028 Figure D 4 Centered Setpoint PID Control Output Setpoint 50 Therefore as the input value gradually drops below the setpoint the Proportional Mode of PID will gradually bring the output percentage down When the input drops below the low end of the throttling range the output will be zero The opposite happens with the input value begins to
93. or overrides are active Each status screen is specially designed to provide a concise at a glance view of how one or more systems are functioning TIP To view the Suction Group Status screen in the RX controller start from the Home screen Press the function key SUC TION GRP If more than one Suction Group has been set up the Suction Group Summary screen opens Choose which application you wish to view with the cursor and press The current status runtime and HP rating for each compressor are displayed in this screen To view other application types use the function keys WB WES and see Table 9 2 to see the condenser circuits and sensor control status screens Quick Start 9 5 E A RU EE and Lighting Circuits Case Circuits EZE SensorContro Sensors Sensors and Power Monitor ing Table 9 2 Status Screen Function Keys Status screen functions are explained in more detail in Section 11 ae a Guide to Using the E2 of the man ual For now press ml to access another important screen the Actions menu 9 7 3 The Actions Menu RX 466 Unit 3 RX DEU SUMMARY Refr Refr CTI herr 2 Refr SU EDO Refr Override Refr Expanded Information Refr Refr Refr Refr Refr Detailed Status CONDENSERO1 NONE 200 0 Sensor Ctrl Value ANALOG SENS61 NONE ANALOG SENS82 NONE DIGITAL SENS81 NOTAC F1 DIGITAL SENS82 NOTAC ON Controlled By Discharge Status Fan s On
94. order Mode 3 Integral Error Approaching Zero If the integral error is getting too close to zero this sig nifies the demand window may soon be above the power company s demand setpoint When this occurs Demand Control switches to Mode 3 Mode 3 simply calculates the amount of KW differ ence between the current KW input and the setpoint and sheds enough levels to meet or exceed the KW shedding requirement Demand Control does this by reading the KW levels of all applications which have been defined by the user when the applications were set up in all the prior ity levels that have not yet been shed It then sheds as many levels as necessary to bring the KW input value down thus saving the demand window from exceeding the setpoint Note that though each application has a user defined Application KW parameter that represents how much total power the application uses the actual amount of KW used by the application may be significantly lower especially if itis OFF when Demand Control sheds it Demand Con trol compensates for this fact by assuming shedding an application will only lower the KW input value by 7596 of the application s designated KW value For example if a priority level contains a single AHU with a user assigned KW value of 250 Demand Control will only expect to save 75 of this value 187 5 KW by shedding it Example of a Mode 3 operation A Demand Control application reads an integral error near zero and a KW
95. out puts on the MultiFlex 168DO ARTC 32 Rooftop HVAC con MultiFlex RTU and RTU troller board ARTC discontinued CUB 32 Single condensing MultiFlex CUB II II unit controller one compressor and up to 4 condenser fans Table 5 1 Board Types and Boards Included in Each Type The I O Network and Hardware Setup 5 1 5 2 Board The MultiFlex plus board contains a replacement RS 485 transceiver chip that presents less of a load on the net work than a non plus board This increases the maximum number of devices that can be placed on the network but not the number of board types an Einstein controller can communicate with MultiFlex Plus The MultiFlex plus board now accounts for only 1 8 the load of a non plus board with 32 total devices on the network one Einstein controller 31 boards This new conversion allows for the placement of 256 devices on the network one Einstein controller 255 boards The num ber of boards an Einstein controller can support is increased from 31 up to 255 using MultiFlex plus boards only In other words the number of I O net devices are no longer restricted by the I O net 31 node limitation eramus NOTE The MultiFlex plus board replaces the gt 4 old style MultiFlex boards and is currently being shipped 3 2 1 Plus boards are always identified with a plus sign that appears on the plastic insulating cover on the top of the board after the board name 5
96. possible alarm states ALARM A high priority warning usually signify ing a condition that requires attention NOTICE A low priority message usually signify ing a condition or a system change that requires no attention or may require attention in the future FAIL A failure is a special message that signifies a failure in an E2 system an application or in an input or output device controlled by an application such as a sensor or fan 11 10 4 1 Returned To Normal and Forced To Normal Alarms Operator s Guide to Using the E2 11 11 For as long as the condition that caused the alarm mes sage exists the State field will show either ALARM NOTICE or FAIL as appropriate to the alarm type How ever if the condition that caused the alarm notice or fail ure is corrected the message shown in the State field will change to signify the correction There are two ways an alarm notice or failure condi tion may be corrected e Return To Normal Return To Normal means the condition that generated the alarm notice or failure has returned to normal on its own or the E2 has automatically corrected the condition If an alarm returns to normal a N will appear in front of the alarm state in the State field e Reset Forced To Normal Reset To Normal means the E2 has been forced by a user to consider the condition normalized for purposes of alarm control A Reset To Normal occurs when an
97. refrigeration will restart 10 4 10 Walk In Freezer Control The CC 100P case controller is used to control walk in boxes since it is the only model capable of controlling two valves Walk in boxes are controlled the same way as for other cases The primary difference between walk in boxes and other cases is the use of the door switch When the CC 100P s door switch input is turned ON refrigeration is suspended all pulse valves go to 0 the fans turn OFF and the lights turn ON The walk in box remains in this state until the door switch turns OFF again Alarm times can be assigned to the door switch input so that an alarm can be generated when the door is left open for too long Also when temperature alarm setpoints are configured for the case the CC 100P will begin refrigeration if a tem perature alarm trips with the door open 10 4 11 Fail Safe Mode When major system malfunctions occur the case con troller enters a Fail Safe Mode The Fail Safe Mode is designed to keep the case functioning as normally as pos sible under system conditions that would otherwise make case control impossible A case controller will enter Fail Safe Mode whenever one of three conditions occur 1 The superheat and or temperature control set point s are corrupted i e outside of its pro grammed minimum maximum range 2 The software is corrupted 3 An unrecoverable sensor failure has occurred see Operation with Failed Sensor
98. state and economization status are displayed in the Zone Status screen Lighting Status Screen Press MEN Lighting status information can be found on this screen Check light level bypass and other modes from here Sensors Status Screen Press MXN Select an analog or digital sensor and press ES Information such as control value and com mand values will be displayed The analog sensor will have Cut In Cut Out temperature values Other Status Screens Other status screens in the E2 controller may be accessed by selecting M3 H Configured Applications from the Main Menu This menu gives you access to Summary and Status screens such as Anti Sweat Power Monitoring Time Schedules Holidays and many more To gain access to any of the given applications select the corresponding Enter number and press 11 10 Alarms This section describes how to view and use the Alarm Advisory Log 11 10 1 Accessing the Alarm Advi sory Log The Alarm Advisory Log can be accessed by pressing the alarm icon key LY on the controller 11 10 2 Viewing the Controller Advi sory Log The current number of advisory log entries the log that is highlighted is displayed at the top right of the Advisory Log Screen The total number of alarms and or notices in the Advisory Log is displayed below the current Alarms field To move between Advisory Log entries press the up or down arrow key RX 466 Unit 3 ADUISORY LOG 11 26 65
99. temperature setpoint This feature ensures that the air coming from outside is not too cold 10 5 6 Digital Economizer Control Control of digital or two position economizers is rela tively simple When conditions are favorable for econo mization the dampers will be opened when cooling is needed If not favorable the dampers will be closed 10 5 7 Analog Economizer Control For variable position dampers economization is gen erally used by the AHU just as a cool stage would be in Temperature Control If cooling is needed and conditions are favorable for economization the dampers will open and economization will begin If more cooling is needed the cooling stages would then cycle on as normal The position of the analog economizer damper is important only for the purposes of keeping the mixed air temperature a combination of the outdoor air coming through the dampers and the return air temperature near the user specified setpoint The damper is controlled using PID control 10 5 8 Dehumidification Control Dehumidification control uses the AHU s existing cool stages and a separate dehumidification device such as a desiccant wheel if available to remove moisture from the air The dehumidification setpoint is placed at the 0 end of the dehumidification PID throttling range In other words the dehumidification output will start at 076 when the humidity is equal to the setpoint and increase to 10096 when the humidity is
100. terminal Wire YELLOW and RED signal wires to even num bered terminal Wire the POWER wire to a 12VDC source on input board v v Ss TO ODD TO EVEN TO 12VDC TERMINAL TERMINAL ON BOARD Table 8 1 Sensor Wiring 8 4 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 207 0100 Analog Liquid Level Input Type Dip Switch Connect RED power wire to 12VDC source on input board Connect BLACK ground wire to odd numbered ter minal Connect GREEN signal wire to even numbered terminal gt TO 12V ON BOARD TERMINAL TERMINAL 207 1000 Refrigerant Level Trans ducer Hansen Probe Wire BLACK ground wire from GND sensor terminal to odd numbered board ter minal y Wire GREEN signal TO ODD wire from SIGNAL TERMINAL sensor terminal to even numbered board terminal Wire RED power wire from POWER sen sor terminal to 12VDC terminal on board BLACK GND GREEN SIGNAL TO EVEN TERMINAL lt TO 12VDC ON BOARD 203 1902 Dewpoint Probe Table 8 1 Sensor Wiring The 16AI 810 and MultiFlex Inputs Connect the WHITE and GREEN wires to ACI and AC2 power terminals Connect BLACK ground wire to odd numbered board termi nal Connect RED signal wire to even numbered board terminal To AC1 on Input Bd V To AC2 Y on Input Bd VV Toodd Toeven terminal termi
101. the Setup for this particular application C3 is not an accessi ble screen There are several reasons why a tab may be inaccessi ble i e without a name next to the number The tab and the corresponding screen is unused and reserved for later revisions The screen may only be accessed when running in Full Options mode see Section 11 2 Logging On and Access Levels The screen may require one or more fields to be set to certain values before the screen may be accessed For example a screen containing nothing but com pressor proof input definitions might be hidden if there is a field on another screen that tells the sys tem there are no proof checking devices on the group s compressors To access this screen you would have to set this field to YES The screen you are currently in is always highlighted in the screen s index tab For example because Screen 1 is displayed tab C1 is highlighted As you move to other screens within Setup the high light will move to different tabs to indicate which screen will be displayed 11 6 E2 RX BX CX 150 Manual ee Header Icons CX 366 Unit 1 Device Summary 11 15 16 RLRRH 68 61 65 Press Log In Out to Log On Figure 11 12 Header Icons At the very top of every screen in the E2 there are icons that indicate various stages of activity number of users logged into the controller battery alerts connectivity status and more ICI Batter
102. the baud rate at which the Gateway communicates with the site controller on the RS 485 Network These switches must be set to the same baud rate setting as the E2 or REFLECS usually 9600 baud Dip switch 8 controls the baud rate at which the Gate way communicates with the other devices on the Receiver Bus Network This baud rate may only be set to either 9600 baud switch DOWN or 19200 baud switch UP All Gateways and receivers on the Receiver Bus Network must have the same baud rate dip switch setting It is rec ommended you use 9600 baud as the Receiver Bus Net work baud rate Baud Rate for the 81O 8DO and ARTC There are three I O devices that do not have baud rates determined by dip switches They are as follows 1 The 8IO this board automatically detects the baud rate being used by the I O devices on the network and adjusts to match their baud rate 2 The 8DO this board automatically detects the baud rate being used by the I O devices on the network and adjusts to match their baud rate 3 The ARTC this board is fixed at 9600 baud Baud Rate for MultiFlex Boards On all MultiFlex boards switches 6 and 7 on S3 are used to set the baud rate To communicate at 9600 baud set switch 6 to the UP position and 7 to DOWN For 19200 baud set switch 6 to the DOWN position and 7 to UP Baud Rate for the SmartESR Set the baud rate on the SmartESR board by setting switches 6 and 7 on the network address termi
103. the sensor installed For example 5V 200PST is a 5 volt powered 200PSI pressure transducer and Temperature is the standard CPC temperature sensor NOTE The previous Eclipse and Standard sensors are now SV and 12V respectively 2 From the Main Menu select System Configuration 7 and Input Definitions 1 3 Highlight the desired input and press SETUP to check Sensor Type No Heat or Air Will Come On Incorrect board and points assignment Make sure that your board and points are assigned to the correct compressors and heat stages Check the Heat and Cool OAT lockout temps From the Home screen press AHU SETUP Move cursor to C5 HT CL Setup to check the Lockout temperatures Dehumidification Problems Number of stages are not set up or set up incorrectly From the Home screen press AHU SETUP Move cursor to C9 Dehum to check Dehum Stages Dehumidifier source not set up From the same screen verify what the sensor source is Temperature setting for DEHUM OCC or DEHUM UOC is set too high From the same screen check the minimum temperature setting Appendix E Troubleshooting E 7 SYMPTOM POSSIBLE PROBLEM SOLUTION Lighting Control Problems Lights will not come on Make sure you have a Time Schedule set up A Time Sched ule is not Lighting Control You can use the same Time Schedule for several Lighting Controls Set up the T
104. to achieve the case setpoint CS 100 This controller uses suction side evapora tor suction regulators ESRs to control suction pressure for an entire circuit Unlike the CC 100 which controls only one case the CS 100 controls all cases on an entire circuit EC 2s The EC 2 is a liquid side pulse valve case controller that doubles as a case temperature and information display Unlike the CC 100 it is designed to be mounted on the front of the case and has a push button front panel interface for program ming and viewing status The EC 2 29x version controls the refrigeration solenoid valve to allow the passage of refrigerant to the TXV valve whereas the 39x version controls a pulse valve on the liquid side of the evaporator to regulate super heat escenas NOTE There are several variations of the 4 EC 2 Contact CPC at 1 800 829 2724 for more information 10 4 2 1 Valve Control The CC 100 is capable of supporting two types of valves pulse and stepper The CC 100 uses PID control to vary the aperture rates of both valves between 0 and 100 as required by their temperature control algorithms see Section 10 4 3 below Pulse Valves A pulse valve is a device capable of being in only two Case Control Circuits states fully open or fully closed To achieve the necessary percentage of refrigerant flow CC 100s repeatedly pulse these valves open for a percentage of an interval called the valve period whic
105. to be used at all it is recommended to use caution since even a small amount of filtering may cause the PID loop to become underreactive 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 2 Appendix E Troubleshooting The chart below describes symptoms and solutions if troubleshooting the system or equipment is needed For further information contact CPC Service at 1 800 829 2724 SYMPTOM POSSIBLE PROBLEM SOLUTION I O Network Problems I O board not getting power Check I O board power is the green STATUS light on If not check power wiring connections and use a multimeter to verify the board is getting 24VAC Reset power to board I O board not communicating or won t come online Check I O network connections 1 Check wire polarity positive to positive negative to negative 2 Check for broken or loose wires Dip switches are set incorrectly Check I O board network dip switches Verify network ID number is not a duplicate and that baud rate switches are set to 9600 If switches are wrong make changes and then reset the controller Refer to Section 5 5 Network ID Numbers Board Numbers Terminating resistance jumpers are set incorrectly Check for proper setting of ter minating resistance jumpers Network segment should be ter minated on the two endpoints of the daisy chain and unterminated everywhere else Refer to Sec tion 5 7 Setting the Terminating Resistance Jumpers
106. to certain values before the screen may be accessed For example a screen containing nothing but com pressor proof input definitions might be hidden if there is a field on another screen that tells the sys tem there are no proof checking devices on the group s compressors To access this screen you would have to set this field to YES The screen you are currently in is always highlighted in the screen s index tab For example in Figure 9 11 and Figure 9 48 because Screen 1 is displayed tab C1 is highlighted The Help Line The line near the bottom of the screen above the func tion key menu is the help line The help line this time pro vides a short description of the selected field along with important information such as minimum and maximum value ranges and setup instructions The Function Keys For Setup The five boxes at the very bottom of the screen show the function of keys through MEN Most of these keys retain the same function no matter which field screen or application is selected in a Setup screen Table 9 8 shows what each key is used for PREV TAB Moves backward one screen NEXT TAB Moves forward one screen EDIT Opens the Edit Menu box STATUS OVER Opens the Detailed RIDE or LOOKUP Status screen Opens the Override Update screen or Look Up Tables CANCEL Cancels the operation Table 9 8 Function Keys for Setup Screens 9 28 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 2 After all of the func
107. user ordered override of a setpoint input or output Config This includes all actions that change an application setting This includes configuring inputs and outputs Alarm Ack This includes acknowledging one or more alarms in the Alarm Log Refer to Section 11 10 8 1 Acknowledging for the definition of acknowledging alarms For each row and column of the Level Required For table enter the desired minimum priority level that will be required for users to perform actions on each type of appli cation E2 will check this table when a user attempts an 9 14 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual action to verify the user has the appropriate access level to make the change If the user s access level is equal to or above the priority setting in the table access will be allowed If not access will be denied 9 12 2 Creating a New User Account After entering the User Access Setup screen by press ing ES Passwords User Access from the System Infor mation menu 1 Move the cursor so that it is somewhere in the Users box at the bottom of the screen 2 Press ADD USER to put a blank record at the bottom of the list 3 Type in the user name Username and then move to the next field Password by pressing the right arrow button 4 Type in a password for the next user then press the right arrow button to advance to the next field 5 The Auto Logout feature determines the maxi mum time user may be inactive before b
108. will be necessary are When the configuration for the inputs needs to be changed i e when the case has a sensor or switch configuration that cannot be satisfied by the default configuration When a valve other than an Emerson Flow Con trols ESR 12 ESR 20 or ESV is being used Each case controller is programmed by default to operate Emerson Flow Controls brand valves If the valve type is different the valve control parameters must be changed in the case controller software When the PID settings that determine the valve aperture or closure require alteration When necessary the case controller can be altered in either of two ways You can change settings in a case con troller application in E2 via the front screen Or you can use a Hand Held Terminal to log in to the CC 100 or CS 100 directly and make temporary changes that will not be saved 10 4 14 Associating CC 100 CS 100s with Case Circuit Control Applications Before you can program a Case Control Circuit with the necessary parameters you must associate the appropri ate CC 100s CS 100s and EC 2s with the Case Control 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 2 Circuit application you will be programming To access the CC CS 100 Case Control Association Screen 1 Press UM for the Main Menu 2 Press WA for System Configuration 3 Press W for the Network Setup menu 4 Press for Case Control Associations The Case Control Association screen shou
109. with all legacy E2 BX and BCU systems The MultiFlex RTU board has 16 analog inputs 8 relay outputs and 4 analog outputs Most of these I O points are reserved for sensors and input devices required to read environmental data such as space and supply air temperature and control all output devices that control the environment such as heat cool stages and dampers The RTU relay outputs are rated for line voltage 240VAC The RTU board controls the rooftop unit directly with its built in heating cooling and humidity control algo rithms It may operate in stand alone mode or it may interface with an E2 BX or BCU to control the store envi ronment in zones and pass along logging and alarm infor mation The MultiFlex RTU has its own installation and opera tion manual P N 026 1705 2 2 3 5 MultiFlex Rooftop Control Board RCB BX and CX Only The MultiFlex Rooftop Control Board RCB P N 810 3062 is a rooftop HVAC control board for use either as a stand alone controller or in zone control applications using a CPC E2 BX building control system The Multi Flex RCB is capable of controlling heat and cool stages fans humidification and dehumidification devices econo mizers using on board I O and control algorithms as well as monitor and interact with other building control systems and peripherals such as smoke alarms and CO2 sensors The RCB is an improved version of the MultiFlex RTU The RCB has sixteen fully configur
110. words defrost heat is activated immediately when the command is given Emergency defrosts are initiated by the user from the Standard Circuit Bypass screen see Section 11 4 Naviga tion 10 3 3 Clean and Door Switches 10 3 3 1 A Standard Circuit application may be configured to entirely shut down a case circuit so that it may be cleaned or serviced A case circuit enters clean mode when it receives a signal from an input called the clean switch Clean Switches Clean switches may be set up as either Switched or Timed If a clean switch is configured as switched the circuit enters clean mode when the switch is turned ON and it remains in clean mode until the switch is turned OFF If a clean switch is configured as timed the circuit enters clean mode when the switch is turned ON and it remains in clean mode for a fixed user defined amount of time During clean mode the Fan Defrost and Refrigera tion Solenoid outputs are all turned OFF and the liquid line solenoid is CLOSED If desired a notice may be sent to the E2 s Alarm Log so that the E2 can keep track of clean modes and times 10 3 3 2 Door Switches Walk In Box freezers are often equipped with door switches that disable the evaporators when the door is open The E2 is capable of reading a digital door switch input and controlling the freezer appropriately When a door switch opens the E2 will shut off the refrigeration solenoid a
111. 0 or CS 100 did not respond to an E2 com mand Did Not Terminate Detrost Defrost in a standard circuit lasted for its entire pro grammed time duration and did not terminate Usu ally this means the termination sensor did not record a temperature higher than its setpoint but it could also mean sensor failure has occurred Did Not Wash User A case circuit that was ordered to go into cleaning ode di nor suerestuly emer Clean Mode o Differential Limit Exceeded User The difference between the supply air temperature and the return air temperature in an HVAC applica tion was less than the programmed heating or cooling differential setpoint This might indicate a problem with cooling or heating Dirty Filter Detected 30 A filter checking device connected to an ARTC MultiFlex RTU is detecting a dirty filter Discharge Trip User A high discharge pressure detected by a Suction Group application has caused an emergency shut down of the compressor rack Duplicate Controller Names 20 Two controllers on the network have the same names One of them will need to be renamed to prevent com munications problems Events Per Hour Exceeded Limit User A digital value has transitioned ON more times in the uu hour than its defined Events Per Hour setpoint Appendix C Alarm Advisory Messages C 5 Priority External Fault An external fault input defined in a Multiflex PAK controller has indicated a failure External fault inputs in the
112. 00 LB 12VDC 200 PSI transducer 86K Temp Copeland s integral dis 1 6VDC output Discontin charge temperature sensor d aie Table 8 2 Sensor Input Types Table 8 2 Sensor Input Types Select Eng Units The engineering units of the 8 8 E2 RX BX CX ISO Manual 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 2 sensor value are entered in the Select Eng Units points point names engineering units and other impor field This value is set automatically to an appropri tant parameters ate default unit whenever the Sensor Type is changed To select a different engineering unit press or Maj to scroll through the options or select the unit from the LOOK UP Units Per Pulse The Units Per Pulse field appears only when Pulse Accum is entered in the Sensor Type field The E2 is capable of generating an analog KW value by counting the number of pulses from the pulse accumulation outputs of a KW transducer Each pulse from the transducer signifies that a fixed num ber of KW has been used The number of KWs per pulse varies depending upon the type of transducer being used Consult the trans ducer s documentation for the exact number of KWs per pulse and enter it in this field Default on Open The value placed here will deter mine the value the unit reports if there is an open condition detected in the sensor input connection An open condition could be the result of a broken wire to the sensor or a sensor failure
113. 11 which may be mounted as shown in Figure 3 22 fasteners are not provided Mounting 26509018 Figure 3 22 Outside Temperature Sensor with Cover and Clamp 3 8 E2 RX BX CX ISO Manual E2 3 5 4 Insertion Temperature Probe 3 5 4 1 The 12 inch insertion temperature probe may be used to monitor temperature in either the supply or return air ducts of the AHU or RTU 3 5 4 2 The insertion probe may be mounted in any orientation within the duct as long as the probe is in the air flow of the duct The probe housing should be secured using self tap ping screws A 0 250 diameter hole is required for the probe Figure 3 23 shows the installation of the insertion probe self tapping screws are not provided Location Mounting 26509012 Figure 3 23 12 Inch Insertion Probe Mounting 3 5 5 Supply and Return Air Sen sors In addition to the 12 inch insertion temperature probe CPC uses the same temperature sensor used for outside and inside temperature to monitor supply and return air temperature When used in this application the sensors are supplied without enclosure covers The sensors should be mounted directly in the air stream of the supply or return air duct The sensors are not supplied with any mounting hardware for this application 3 5 6 Refrigeration System Tem perature Probes and Sensors 3 5 6 1 CPC supplies several temperature monitoring devices including bull
114. 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 2 6 E2 Ethernet Peer Communications Communication between E2 controller version 2 10 or greater may now be implemented through an Ethernet net work using TCP IP protocol To utilize peer connections over Ethernet the following tasks must be performed Upgrade the E2 controller firmware to version 2 10 or greater nstall an industry standard Ethernet switch es or hub s in an area or areas nearby the E2 controllers nstall Ethernet straight through cabling at the site from each E2 to the switch or hub Installation of RJ 45 connectors may be necessary to achieve this goal The recommended cabling is CAT 5 6 1 Ethernet IP Configu rations If using an open network configuration see Section 6 4 2 Open Network Layout contact your IT Network Administrator for all IP configuration information IP Address Subnet Mask Primary and Default Gateway set tings 6 2 tions Hardware Specifica Standard industry accepted practices for wiring of Ethernet networks are expected E2 controllers use a star topology identical to PC deployment This includes a unique point to point run from a switch or hub to the controller This is done with Category5 or better cable Maximum distance for a run of 10BaseT is 328 feet 100 meters 11 5 dB loss max The maximum number of controllers allowed on an IP subnet is 20 All E2 controllers that must com municate with each other must be on the s
115. 26 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 location 3 11 mounting 3 11 wiring to input board 8 4 liquid level mounting 3 12 liquid level probe wiring to input board 8 5 offsets 8 9 outside temperature 3 8 location 3 8 mounting 3 8 power connections on input boards for 8 2 pressure transducers Eclipse wiring to input board 8 3 Eclipse voltage to pressure chart B mounting 3 7 refrigeration probes and sensors 3 8 location 3 8 mounting 3 9 relative humidity wall mounted 6 4 wiring to input board 8 3 sail switches wiring to input board 8 3 supply and return air mounting 3 8 temperature temp to resistance chart B wiring to input board 8 3 Wiring To 16AI 8IO Input Points 8 7 Separate Setpoints 10 46 configuration 70 47 cool cut in cut out setpoints 10 46 dehumidification 10 46 heat cut in cut out setpoints 10 46 two speed fan control 10 46 Service Button 9 17 CC 100 9 18 Setpoints separate 10 46 Setpoints entering 9 26 Setting Number of Applications 9 3 Setting the Time and Date 9 9 Setup Screen 1 1 5 Setup Screen Configuration 9 26 Setup Screens 9 7 Single Enclosure Mounting For I O Boards 3 3 SmartESR Board 2 4 Snap track Installation For I O Boards 3 4 Software Applications 0 Software Licensing 5 9 19 Software Overview Demand Control Demand Monitoring 10 28 Specify Number of Boards 9 15 Split Mode 0 3 Standard Circuits defrost 0 5 electric defrost 0 5 hot gas 10 5 reversed cycle hot gas 70 5 states 10 5 termina
116. 3 on page 2 3 for more information on main board CPU status LEDs M Blank face mounting dimensions are identical to the stan SINGLE ENCLOSURE dard and recessed mount boxes See Figure 3 3 and Fig REAR OF ENCLOSURE ure 3 4 WEIGHT 12 LB 1 00 TYP 4 PL 3 2 Mounting I O Boards 0025 TYP 2 PL The 16AI 8RO 8DO 4A0 810 and MultiFlex boards are usually installed by the refrigeration or building 26501099 equipment manufacturer Therefore the installer need only make the necessary connections between the E2 and the cases condenser boards and or HVAC units In some instances an installer may be required to mount an I O board There are no restrictions on the loca tion of these boards however for ease of network config 0025 uration it is recommended that the boards be located TYP 2 PL adjacent to the E2 I O boards may be mounted without an 0 50 TYP 2 PL enclosure but they should be mounted in a location that is not easily accessible to avoid tampering or damage 3 2 1 Single Double Enclosures DOUBLE ENCLOSURE REAR OF ENCLOSURE WEIGHT 15 LB The Single enclosure and Double enclosure are sup plied with four mounting holes in the rear panel of the enclosure The mounting holes can be accessed without removing any of the boards inside the enclosure Figure 3 7 shows the dimensions and weight for the Single enclo sure Figure 3 8 shows mounting dimensions for the Dou ble enclosure When mounting boa
117. 6 1605 If you have a large site with 64 or more devices on the Echelon Network you might require the use of a router or repeater to properly set up your Echelon Network The Router and Repeater Installation Guide will help you determine when a router or repeater should be used how and where to set it up and how to configure the E2 s on the net work to interact with the router or repeater Peripherals Manual P N 026 1701 The Periph erals Manual gives important installation informa tion about sensors transducers thermostats and other essential items that are a part of every CPC control network The Peripherals Manual is not nec essary for field installation instructions these are given in the User s Guide however it may bea useful reference for contractors and OEMs who require more information about a specific periph eral SmartESR Installation and Operation Manual P N 026 1720 From general information to details on mounting wiring and heat dissipation the SmartESR manual provides the information you need to install and operate the SmartESR board in addition to valuable information on software setup and valve control MultiFlex I O Board Installation and Operation 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 2 Manual P N 026 1704 Installation and opera tion manual for the MultFlex 16 and all versions of the MultiFlex combination input output board excluding unit controllers such as the CUB and RTU Multi
118. 69 65 69 69 65 196 196 196 196 196 196 196 196 196 196 196 196 Ymore F1 BEGINNING F3 GRAPH F4 UPDT DATA F5 EXPD INFO Figure 11 26 Sample Log View The Log view shows logged data in a tabular format arranged by the date time of sample 1 ES a value from any screen and press to open the Actions Menu 2 Select Log and the Log screen opens Several function keys may be used to navigate the Log view and provide additional information BEGINNING Move the cursor to the top of the table the most recently recorded sample END Move the cursor to the bottom of the table the oldest sample GRAPH Displays logged data in a graph format see Sample Graph View Figure 11 27 UPDT DATA Pressing this key updates the Log View by adding all newly recorded samples to the top of the table EXPD INFO Pressing this key will display the board point address or the controller applica tion property address for the point that is being logged Page Page Up Scrolls up one page Page Page Down Scrolls down one page Operator s Guide to Using the E2 11 15 11 11 3 The Graph View 6 66 69 69 65 Figure 11 27 Sample Graph View The Graph view shows logged data in a graphical for mat with sample times as the X horizontal coordinate and sample values as the Y vertical coordinate To access a graph view 1 Highlight a value from any screen and press
119. 8VA Use a transformer that has a power rating higher than the total calculated VA see Table 5 3 Example For boards totalling 48VA a 56VA trans former is sufficient since 56VA is greater than 48VA I O Board Transformers should be located within 10 feet of the board it is powering preferably within the board enclosure 5 8 1 Wiring Types For powering I O boards use only the listed wire types from Table 5 5 Three conductor non shielded cables are the recommended wire for connecting between the center tapped transformer and the I O boards The third conduc tor should be connected to earth ground If boards use a center tapped transformer also connect the center tap to Board Installation e the earth grounded third conductor Power Wiring Types 14 AWG Belden 9495 18 AWG Belden 9493 Table 5 5 Power Wiring Types The wire length from the transformer and the number of boards connected to the same wire determines the type wire gauge used In most cases the distance between the I O boards and the transformer that supplies power to them is not enough to be concerned with But it is very impor tant not exceed this maximum wire length or the boards will malfunction Use these formulas to determine if the wire gauge you are using fits within specification 14 AWG Feet 1920 VA 18 AWG Feet 739 VA VA is the total VA rating of the I O boards For example if you had an 80 VA load 14 AWG 24 ft 18
120. A f 1 Press al to clear the selected advisory 2 Press B to clear all advisories 3 Press to cancel the operation Expanded Advi sory Information E Advisory 1 of 200 l y Parent Controller THIS 03 1 Property or Board Pt 80 83 82 X388 System Advisory Message FAIL Device absent from network Acknowledge Status UNK Report Priority 26 Date 69 69 65 Time 11 16 Press the ENTER key to close this dialog Figure 11 22 Expanded Info Screen To view expanded information on a log entry highlight the desired log and press EXPD INFO A screen will come up telling the user what advisory is being viewed out of a total number of advisories Property or Board Point This message shows the location where the advisory was generated This will be a board and point address or an application input or output in Controller Applica tion Property format Advisory Message The advisory message is displayed below the Property or Board Point The Advisory Message describes the advi sory log entry what went wrong in the system Acknowledge Status Acknowledge Status describes the state of the advi sory If an advisory has been acknowledged or reset the user name or the person who acknowledged or reset the alarm will appear below the acknowledge status The date and time when the advisory was acknowledged or reset will also be displayed below the user s name If the advisory has not been acknowledged or reset this f
121. AWG 9 ft rounded down Figure 5 3 Power Wire Lengths Sensors requiring 24VAC can be powered from the same transformer powering the input board as long as the resulting total load of both the input board s and the sen sor s connected to the transformer does not exceed the transformer s VA rating Consult Section 5 8 Powering the I O Boards and Section 7 6 1 Powering Echelon Devices for more information 5 9 Board Installation The following pages give step by step graphical instructions on all steps necessary to install each I O Net work device so that it is powered up and able to communi cate with E2 If these devices have not yet been mounted refer to Section 3 2 Mounting I O Boards for mounting instructions for these devices The I O Network and Hardware Setup 5 5 2 MULTIFLEX 16 INSTALLATION GUIDE PEE MULTIFLEX 16 BOARD POWER AC2 OV AC1 13N S8y AD 98p K S o O vs 9900000 Ov SIG INPUT 2 d eososso OvSIG 0vSIG 0vSIG INPUT 3 INPUT 4_INPUT5 Ov SIG INPUT 7 INPUT 8 1 Connect board to the RS485 I O Network 2 Set the network address on the first five rockers of dip switch S3 Valid address range 1 16 3 Set the network baud rate using rockers 6 and 7 of dip switch S3 4 Set RS485 termination jumpers OUT term if at either end of a daisy chain Otherwise set jumpers IN no term 5 If replacing an old 810 or 16Al u
122. An output pointer can be connected to multiple input pointers e A single input pointer cannot be connected to mul tiple output pointers Pointers can be set up for all applications To set up pointers from a Setup screen 1 Press SETUP from the desired applica tion s Status screen If starting from the Home screen move the cursor to the desired applica tion s value and press to open the Actions Menu Choose Setup This will take you to the Setup screen 2 Once inside the application s Setup screen use the and keys to highlight the Inputs and Outputs index tabs Press EDIT to open the Edit menu 4 Choose Alternate I O Formats to open the for mat menu 5 Choose one of the pointer formats If you are in the Inputs setup and have selected Con troller Application Property as the pointer format the Viewing Logs and Graphs third column the Output field is the output that you are pointing connecting the input to If you are in the Out puts setup and have selected Controller Application Property as the pointer format the third column the Input field is the input that you are pointing connecting the output to 11 11 2 Log View RX 466 Unit 3 LOG SCREEN 15 42 25 ALARM Point Log Time 89 09 05 69 69 65 196 69 69 65 196 69 69 65 196 69 69 65 196 69 69 65 196 69 69 65 196 69 69 65 69 69 65 69 69 65 69 69 65 69 69 65 69 69 65 69 69 65 69 69 65 69 69 65 69 69 65 69
123. At 4 E 2 At 2 Kg derivative gain E current error E_ error from the previous update At the amount of time elapsed since the previous exe cution E_5 error from the update before the previous update At o the amount of time elapsed between 2 executions ago and the previous execution The factors E_ At_ and E_ gt At_ are the rates of change of the error in units per minute The rate of change for the previous error E_ weighs twice as much in the Derivative Mode calculation as the 2 d previous error E 2 since E is closer to the current rate of change than E 5 The derivative gain Ky is a multiplier that changes the total size of the Derivative Mode adjustment If Derivative Mode is causing PID control to react too quickly or too slowly the derivative gain may be adjusted to correct the problem Higher values of Kg result in quicker reactions lower values result in slower reactions How Condenser Control and HVAC PID Differs From The Others The RMCC approaches condenser control and HVAC control from a different angle than other PID controlled systems such as Pressure Control and Case Control PID control for Pressure Control and Case Control seeks to maintain a constant equality between the input and the set point Specifically in Pressure Control the RMCC tries to keep the suction pressure or temperature equal to the suc tion setpoint and in Case Control the RMCC tries to keep D 4 E2 RX BX CX I am
124. Boards are not powered Check Network Power voltages Refer to Section 5 8 Powering the I O Boards Appendix E Troubleshooting E I SYMPTOM POSSIBLE PROBLEM SOLUTION Echelon Network Problems Faulty wiring Check connections Are wires broken or loose Check network polarity positive to positive negative to negative Check for wire damage Termination jumpers are set Check for proper setting of ter incorrectly minating resistance jumpers Network segment should be ter minated on the two endpoints of the daisy chain and unterminated everywhere else Refer to Sec tion 7 4 Device Termination Subnet unit is set incorrectly Each controller must have its own subnet address Refer to Section 7 3 Echelon Network Structuring Daisy Chains E 2 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 SYMPTOM POSSIBLE PROBLEM SOLUTION Compressor will not Operate Compressor is not programmed properly Verify that E2 was programmed for correct number of compres sor stages Highlight the General tab C1 in the Suction Group Setup screen Is the correct num ber of stages in the Number of Stages field Compressor types are set up incorrectly Make sure that compressor stages were properly set up as VS variable speed C com pressor or U unloader Compressor programmed with incorrect rating Verify that compressors were assigned the p
125. Circuit is recording a temperature lower than its defined case temperature low setpoint Cell Config Not Restored 15 E2 s attempt to restore configuration data to its appli cations has failed 0 Cell Create Failed For Restore 2 E2 attempted to create new applications as part of the configuration restoration process and failed to do so successfully Checkit Sensor Has Failed User A Checkit sensor 1s returning an invalid temperature value indicating a sensor failure Checkit Sensor Is Alarming User A Checkit sensor on a Suction Group application 1s recording a high temperature Checkit Sensor Is In Notice User A Checkit sensor s temperature 1s above its pro grammed notice setpoint C 2 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 2 Priority Comb Temp Hi Limit Exceeded User The combined temperature of an entire Standard Cir cuit or Case Control Circuit has risen above its pro grammed high temperature setpoint Comb Temp Low Limit Exceeded NS combined temperature of an entire Standard Cir cuit or Case Control Circuit has fallen below its pro Commission failed chk network grammed low temperature setpoint 50 Commission of Echelon controller failed binding of NV was not sucess Check the Echelon or Communication Port 1 Is Down 20 E2 cannot communicate with the RS 232 port on the E2 main board The E2 main board likely needs repair or replacement Communication Port 2 Is Down 20 E2 cannot communi
126. D CKT18 Refrigeration NONE OFF STANDARD CKT11 Refrigeration NONE OFF CASECTRL CKT81 OFF 28 8 OFF CASECTRL CKT82 OFF 28 8 DFF CASECTRL CKT83 OFF 26 6 OFF Actions Menu Detailed Status Manual Defrost Application Logs Graphs SUCTION GRPO1 Actions Menu F1 SUCTION F2 CONDENSER F4 SENSORS Log Override Expanded Information Figure 11 9 Summary Screen RX 400 Version Shown Detailed Status Status Screens Figure 11 8 Example Actions Menu for Suction Group Value Status screens are real time views of application func tions They show the current status of all outputs the cur rent values of all inputs and other important data such as 11 4 2 Screen Types control setpoints run times and whether or not bypasses or overrides are active Summary Screens Summary screens let you view status information for multiple applications of the same type For example Fig ure 11 9 is the Circuits Summary screen in the E2 RX controller This screen shows the name state temperature setpoint alarm refrigeration and defrost information for Each status screen is specially designed to provide a concise at a glance view of how one or more systems are functioning all defined standard and case control circuits displayed To SES JEEN see a more detailed status when on an application sum z SUCTION GROUP NAME Suct 22 0 mary screen highlight the desired application from the list SUCTION GRPO1 3 ae Ds
127. Default on Short The numeric entry in this param eter is the default value the analog input would report if a short is detected on the sensor input connec tion A short could be the result of a damaged wire or a sensor failure Default Other The value placed in Default Other is the value reported if the input is not updated after a certain amount of time If there is a failure that will not allow the input board to report the value of the sensor the value placed in this parameter will be reported Sensor Offset If a sensor needs a numeric value added or subtracted to the calculated value enter the number here The value can be positive or negative Sensors sometimes have to have offsets The offset that you enter in this field is in the units you selected in the Eng Units field NOT in millivolts Output This field displays the link between the input and the application s they feed into You do not need to enter anything in this field You will be able to link applications to this point during the application setup process 8 1 3 4 Setting Up Digital Inputs Open the Digital Input screen by selecting a Digital D input from the Input Status screen Figure 8 4 and pressing SETUP Set up digital inputs in order to assign digital input The 164AI 810 and MultiFlex Inputs 01 01 02 RX 300 Unit 1 V VE 18 15 19 DIGITAL INPUT Point Mame Board Point H 4 Select Eng Units ON OFF Default Value Push Button M
128. Definition 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 E2 Load shedding is the process of curbing the amount of kilowatt usage within one or more target applications Most applications that drive mechanical or electronic devices such as lights heaters air conditioners compres sors etc are configured with special inputs that when active shed the application Physically when a device is shed its control set points are altered by a specified amount in a direction that will save energy For instance an HVAC unit with heating and cooling stages that is commanded to shed will have its heating setpoints lowered and its cooling setpoints raised This will cause the HVAC unit to operate at a lower capac ity thus saving energy Table 10 12 lists a number of E2 RX 300 and BX 300 applications and how load shedding affects them Application Shedding Effect All HVAC applica Raises cooling setpoints lowers tions RT 100s Multi heating setpoints Flex RTUs AHUs Heat Cools Raises or lowers Cut In Cut Out setpoints whichever direction saves energy Sensor Control and Analog Input I O Modules Refrigeration Circuits Raises case temperature setpoints Suction Groups Raises suction setpoint Raises discharge setpoint Analog Output I O Raises or lowers PID setpoint Modules whichever will save energy Digital Output I O Control output is locked OFF Modules Table 10 12 Shedding Effect on Applications 10 10 4 She
129. Dewpoint and Light Level Sensors These sensors are to be wired with shielded 4 conduc tor at least 22 GA wire Belden 8729 or equivalent 8 1 1 3 Input Type Dip Switches An input type dip switch must be set for each input point Input type dip switches are located in the switch banks labeled S1 and S2 on the MultiFlex 16AI and switch bank S4 on the 8IO The input type dip switch tells the input board whether or not the sensor connected to the point requires a DC sup ply voltage in order to operate If the sensor requires DC voltage the dip switch should be set to the DOWN posi tion If the sensor does not require power or if it uses AC power the dip switch should be set to the UP position Dip switches for unused points should be set to the UP posi tion The dip switch positions for each specific sensor type is shown in Figure 8 2 Input and Output Setup 8 1 2 8 1 2 Power Connection If power is needed to operate the sensor several termi a A S 6 8 nals exist on the 16AI Multiflex boards 8IO that may be a I I I i used to supply DC power see Figure 8 3 for 16AI and ie i Set DOWN for MultiFlex power connections sensors requiring eee b voltage INPUTS 1 8 4 Set UP for AA sensors not requiring miii INPUTS 9 16 2 26501070 Figure 8 2 Input Type Dip Switches for MultiFlex 16 and 16AI Boards MultiFlex REA 12V 5V
130. Disk activity or saving to disk Caps lock is ON Table 9 1 Header Icons and Descriptions 9 6 2 The Function Keys F1 SUCTION F2 CONDENSER F3 CIRCUITS F4 SENSORS F5 SETUP Figure 9 7 Home Screen Function Keys RX version shown At the very bottom of every screen in the E2 there are five boxes labeled through MEN These boxes are the function key descriptions The function key descrip tions show what each of the five function keys do when pressed Options will vary depending on the type of con troller being used Function key usage often varies depending on which screen or field E2 is currently in 9 6 3 The Help Line The line directly above the function button menu is called the help line The help line displays information about the currently selected field such as general descrip tions possible ranges and other information to help a user maneuver around and or configure the field 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 2 TIP To see different messages the help line generates start from the RX Home screen Press CIRCUITS Highlight a circuit Enter and press ES Use the arrow buttons to move around the screen and notice how the help line changes as the cursor moves from the setpoint to status sections When finished press the GD key to return to the Home screen 9 7 9 7 1 Screen Types The Main Menu RX 400 Unit 3 RX DEU SUMMARY SUCTION GRPO1 NONE 18 56 28 ALARM Circuits MAIN ME
131. E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 2 Master schedule events always occur at specific times of the day In other words when you program an event pair in a master schedule you must specify two specific times of the day the events will occur These types of events are called absolute events However when programming event times in slave schedules you may choose to enter event times that are relative to its master schedule s ON and OFF times These types of events are called relative events They are pro grammed not as absolute times but as amounts of time before or after its master schedule s events For example suppose a master schedule is set up to be ON at 8 a m and OFF at 9 p m every day of the week and you wish to set up a slave schedule so that its output comes ON 15 minutes before the master comes ON and OFF 15 minutes after the master goes OFF To do this you would set up the slave schedule to come ON at 00 15 and OFF at 00 15 every day of the week The slave schedule will automatically determine the correct ON and OFF times 10 13 1 3 Temporary Schedule Events Each schedule may also be given up to three pairs of temporary schedule events These events start and end at specific days and times and do not continue past those dates in other words temporary events cannot be made to occur weekly or annually 10 13 1 4 Overlapping Events may and often do overlap within a schedule When events overlap the E2 uses the
132. ER COOL UOC SUMMER HEAT UOC WINTER COOL OCC WINTER HEAT OCC WINTER COOL UOC WINTER HEAT UOC Table 10 8 Possible Heating Cooling Setpoints Software Overview 10 15 AHU Control looks at the E2 s Global Data parameters to determine whether it should run in summer or winter mode Refer to Section 9 17 Set Up Global Data for information on how to set up summer winter control parameters The AHU chooses occupied or unoccupied mode by reading an occupied state input which is most commonly tied to the output of a Time Schedule application 10 5 4 Fan Control The E2 BX can control three different types of AHU fans However only one fan can be controlled per AHU The fan types include single speed two speed and vari able speed Controls for all fans are similar in that they operate in either of three modes Continuous The fan is always on even when the AHU is not in heating cooling or dehumidification mode Auto The fan is only on when the AHU is in heating cooling or dehumidification mode Summer ON Winter Auto This mode allows the AHU fan to operate in Continuous mode during the summer months and in Auto mode during the winter months The operation of the fans during Continuous and Auto modes is largely dependent on the fan type 10 5 4 1 Single speed fans require no advanced control parame ters Whether in Continuous or Auto mode the fan will be ON when Fan Control calls for it to be O
133. EREMEUSER DEFINED DLT Dates Month of Change Week of Change Day of Change Time DLT Start APR First Week of Month SUN 2 68 DLT End oct Last Week of Month SUN 2 00 Daylight Savings uses GMT No Unit Location From US Zip Code US Zip Code 30144 Twilight Type Standard SUNDOWN Sunrise Time 7 05 Active Latitude 35 033840 Sunset Time 20 16 Active Longitude 84 597435 F4 LOOK UP F5 CANCEL Figure 9 15 Time Date Setup Screen User Defined Shown 9 8 1 Setting the Time and Date Time Date Setup The Time Format field affects how times are displayed and entered throughout the controller When 24 Hour For mat is selected in this field the hours are displayed and entered as a number from 0 to 23 When 12 Hour Format is selected the hours are displayed and entered as a num ber from 1 to 12 an A or a P at the end of the time signi fies whether the time is A M or P M Table 9 6 shows some times as how they would appear in both formats 12 Hour Format 24 Hour Format 7 15 00A 7 15 00 12 00 noon 12 00 00P 12 00 00 11 59 p m 11 59 00P 23 59 00 12 00 12 00 00A midnight Table 9 6 Time Formats 12 and 24 hour To select a time format select either 12 or 24 hour using the LOOK UP tab Active Date The Active Date shows the current Julian date in the format that was chosen in the Date Format field For secu rity reasons the Active Date cannot be set to a date earlier in time than the
134. Enter uml to open the Actions Menu 2 Select Graph and a graphed view of the selected value opens Upon first entering the Graph view for a logged value all available samples are displayed The X axis sample time ranges from the time and date of the earliest avail able sample relative to the time and date of the latest sam ple The Y axis sample value ranges from the minimum sensor reading to the maximum sensor reading In the case of an input point log e g suction pres sure assume the Log Group setup specifies Samples as 1000 and Log Interval as 0 03 00 Also assume that the system has been running continuously with no interrup tions for one week The X axis would span a time interval starting approximately six days and six hours ago all the way up to the present If suction pressure ranged from 18 psi to 25 psi during the time period of the log the Y axis of the graph would be just large enough to show all samples in the log 11 11 4 Zooming In and Out For a more detailed view of a graph zoom in by press ing MEN This results in half of the samples of the current view being redrawn to fill the entire view Using the above example the graph would now shows three days and three hours of samples from the middle of the original graph 11 16 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 2 Pressing again zooms in even farther Pressing zooms out resulting in a graph whose time scale spans twice that of the previous vie
135. Ere EE e NA NEE S EEr rek 11 2 11 3 TOGGLING FULLCOPTION S eoe ii it 11 3 TAN GAN e D Rin leo ee E ee ee 11 3 IB NE T E ie 11 3 LAD Screen Types in iei aa oa UR et E e t d eee 11 5 LIAS The E2 Keypad tt et ote E teen erede ee te et eet ede p 11 6 11 5 CUSTOMIZING THE HOME SCREEN cccccconcconcnoncnnnnnncononnnonncon conan te etre en teeth eneee tentent tee nn Ren rennen eren nen recono treten trennen 11 8 11 6 MANUAL DEFROST AND CLEAN MODE eret etes ee RE EAE ene ERU PUES ded feces C UH teu 11 8 11 7 OVERRIDES ae heii ee Be te Boe One iidhete RU DOR aim er P En 11 9 11 8 CHECKING BOARDS ONDINE scott etu iet id ede P avons eie e E td ete tope 11 10 11 9 CHECKING STATUS SCREENS eee eet eerte e EI Ie erede eee eerte ce eee diaria 11 10 TITO VU iS 11 11 11 10 1 Accessing the Alarm Advisory Log eese esee eee eene cone anna nana rancia nen eene ene 11 11 11 10 2 Viewing the Controller Advisory Log eese eerte ene en entree nennen tentent nennen 11 11 I1 10 3 Date and Time ses isa O 11 11 EE ANNA E TA NON 11 11 11 10 4 1 Returned To Normal and Forced To Normal Alarms esee eee nhe etnntnnnne 11 11 LEJOS Ack Reset State i s sse e eoe er a E eke sec dee rele o Ere lot 11 12 11 10 6 Property or Board Point eee eee esee esee nennen eene on enne Dn nene ene en nente enn earn non teens ene 11 12 LL AOS Advisory Message no ttd ia dm eed detenti etes 11 12 11 10 8 Acknowledging
136. Figure 9 10 The Actions Menu The Actions Menu is available from any status screen by pressing Enter E and may be used to do just about any task in the E2 system software This screen lists a number of options that can be used to affect a selected field an entire application or the E2 in general 9 6 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual E2 Graph Opens graph view for the selected value Log Opens the Log screen of the selected value Override Opens the Override Update win dow where the selected input or output can be overridden to a user defined value or state Expanded Informa Displays detailed information tion about the selected value Setup Opens the setup screen for the selected value Detailed Status Special status screen that shows detailed setpoints and input out put information with complete summary of inputs outputs Manual Defrost For circuits only Opens the Cir uit Bypass screen to force a man ual or emergency defrost or wash mode Allows Service Start End for Irri gation and Pulse Accumulation applications Application Com mands Applications Logs Graphs e Opens various log and graph screens for Anti sweat and Pulse Accumu lation applications e Opens the Circuit Report screen for standard circuits only Table 9 3 Actions Menu Options and Descriptions One of the more important features of the Actions Menu is the Setup screen H Setup The actual setup screen will
137. Flex CUB CUB II Condensing Unit Board Installation and Operation Manual P N 026 1705 Installation and operation manual for the MultiFlex CUB old style and the MultiFlex CUB II family which includes the CUB II and CUB TD MultiFlex RTU Rooftop Controller Installation and Operation Manual P N 026 1706 Installa tion and operation guide for the MultiFlex RTU replacement for ARTC P N MultiFlex Description Product 810 3080 CUBII Smart board that con trols single condens ing units CUB TD Smart board that con trols single condens ing units includes temperature differen tial CHB Controls a breaker panel with up to 42 Cutler Hammer pulse breakers PAK Distributed pack rack controller that controls compressor and condenser fans B T 810 3081 810 3068 810 3082 810 3065 RC HVAC rooftop con troller RTU HVAC rooftop unit controller MultiFlex 88AO 8 analog digital in puts 8 relay outputs 4 analog outputs MultiFlex 88 8 analog digital in puts 8 relay outputs Table 1 4 MultiFlex Products and Descriptions 810 3062 810 3063 810 3064 On Line Help System Overview 16 analog digital in puts 8 relay outputs 4 analog outputs 810 3065 MultiFlex 168AO 810 3067 MultiFlex 168DO 16 analog digital in puts 8 relay outputs 4 digital outputs 810 3066 MultiFlex 168 16 analog digital in puts 8 relay outputs 810 3073 MultiFlex 1616AO 16 analog digital in put
138. GE MAX MAX RANGE CHANGE MIDPOINT SUBTRACT MAX CHANGE Figure 10 21 Setpoint Reset Diagram 10 16 5 Lead Lag A Heat Cool application may be linked with another Heat Cool application in what is called a Lead Lag arrangement In this arrangement one Heat Cool is desig nated as the Lead loop and used as the primary space tem perature control device The other Heat Cool the Lag loop becomes active only to support the Lead loop when it is unable to keep the space temperature within a certain proximity of the setpoint called the setpoint delta Figure 10 22 shows how a pair of Heat Cool applica tions using a Lead Lag arrangement would operate in Cooling mode When the temperature is in between the setpoint and the setpoint delta the Lead loop alone will control cooling However when the temperature is above the setpoint delta the Lag loop will come on line and both Lead and Lag loops will work to bring the tempera ture down The Lead Lag arrangement works similarly in Heating mode except that the setpoint delta is below the Heating setpoint and Lead and Lag are both on when the tempera Analog and Digital Combiners ture is below the setpoint delta w a E E t E y B SETPT ne ue DELTA SETPOINT m EI c mm LEAD AND LAG ON LEAD AND LEAD ON ONLY LAG ON LEAD ON ONLY TIME 26512037 Figure 10 22 Lead Lag Arrangement Heat Cools in a Lead
139. ID per centage The Override cell when activated by a user initi ated manual override will block the PID percentage from being sent to the outputs replacing it with a fixed value specified by the user The value from the Override cells is then sent to the Loop Sequence Control s PID output and also to the two output cells for conversion to stages and PWM 10 12 1 2 Output Cells The two output cells make no alteration of the PID per centage determined by the control cells but re interpret them in a way that can be used for systems with multiple stages and or with pulse width modulation Sequencer The Sequencer cell will use the percent age to activate an equivalent percentage of its defined stage outputs The Sequencer supports up to eight cells and also provides for minimum on off times and first on last off sequencing PWM The PWM cell drives a digital output whose ON time per pulse width modulation period is equal to the PID percentage In other words if the PWM cell is set with a pulse width of 10 seconds a PID percentage of 60 turns the output ON for 6 seconds OFF for 4 seconds ON for 6 seconds etc 10 12 1 3 Diagram An abstract diagram of the control and output cells is shown in Figure 10 17 Software Overview 10 33 2 SELECT CELL Occ SP FILTER OVERRIDE A In 1 Unoc SP gt In 2 Analog PID PWM Loop Output 4 In Out Occupied
140. LT DATES when this option is chosen the user can specify start and end times for daylight savings including month week and day settings EUROPEAN UNION DLT DATES the Euro pean Union Daylight rules are the same as the Stan dard US DLT Dates with the exception that one hour must be added to the time at 1 00AM GMT during the last Sunday in March DLT Not Used the E2 does not make any adjust ments to Active Time for Daylight Savings Time Daylight Savings Time uses GMT This setting is only visible when Daylight Savings Dates is set to User Defined DLT Dates If set to Yes Daylight Savings Time uses GMT calculates the time to change from GMT and the current time zone setting For example if the start time is at 1 00 AM and the time zone is 200 GMT the time change will occur at 3 00 AM local time Defaults to No Unit Location From Sunrise and sunset times are calculated based on either zip code or latitude longitude If US Zip Code is chosen in the Unit Location From field enter the zip code in which the controller is located If outside the United States choose Lat Long and enter the latitude and longitude val ues in which the controller is located Once a value has been chosen the controller is able to calculate the sunrise and sunset times The Sunset output will turn ON at sun set and OFF at sunrise and can be connected to a lighting circuit Sundown Sundown is an output that calculates when the sun sets
141. M os CONDENSERO1 DISCH TRIP IN cal wiring is complete you will need to tell E2 the types of CONDENSEROI FAST REC IN 2 5 1641 1 4 D OIL FLT PLUGED OCCUPANCY OFF sensors or devices that are connected to each I O point OIL FLT PLUGED LOGIC DM em 16AI 1 5 D COMP OIL FAIL LOGIC IH1 OFF This is achieved in the Input and Output Definitions sony SA Sie RL T OEA TATA AREER PHASER Do OE 16AI a 8 D SUCTION GRPO2 VS ALARM INPUT OPEN screens 16AI 1 9 A OUTDOOR TEMP INPUT NONE REF LEVEL INPUT2 8 1 3 1 Configuring a Point from the iar 1 10 RO Tek pura NOE io e SUBCOOL INPUT2 Input Definitions Status Screen Jc eum 16AI 1 12 A EX FAN 2 INPUT1 NONE To configure a point go to the Input Definitions Status DAMPER 2 PUFA DAMPER 1 INPUT1 screen F1 SETUP F2 DEL MOD F3 OFFSET F4 LOOK UP F5 CANCEL l Press BP to open the Main Menu 2 Press WA System Configuration Figure 8 4 Input Status Screen 8 Press Input Definitions Use the up and down arrow keys to move the cursor to the point you wish to set up and press SETUP A pop up menu such as the one shown in Figure 8 5 will prompt you to specify the point as analog or digital The Input Status screen opens Press W if the input is analog press WM if the input is dig 8 6 E2 RX BX CX ISO Manual 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 2 ital or press to cancel setup L 8 D 1 9 A SUCTION GRPO2 OUTDOOR TEMP VS ALARM INPUT INPUT1 Please select the data type fo
142. N and OFF when it calls for it to be OFF 10 5 4 2 Two Speed Fans Two speed fans have a LOW and a HIGH speed set ting You must specify the number of the stage that when activated will switch the fan from LOW to HIGH For example if there are four cooling stages and you wish to have the fan switch from LOW to HIGH when stage 3 becomes active enter a 3 as the switch over set point This will cause the fan to switch to HIGH speed when stage 3 is activated Likewise when stage 3 is deac tivated the fan speed will switch from HIGH to LOW You may choose a different switch over setpoint for occupied heating occupied cooling unoccupied heating and unoccupied cooling modes When the AHU is in dehumidification mode the AHU Control application will ignore the fan speed settings of the active stages and switch to a user specified dehumidi fication speed usually LOW Continuous Two Speed Fan Operation When All Single Speed Fans 10 16 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 2 Stages Are OFF When the fan is operating in Continuous mode and all heating and cooling stages are OFF the fan speed will default to a user specified speed You may choose a differ ent default speed for both occupied and unoccupied opera tion 10 5 4 3 Variable Speed Fans Variable speed fans may operate at any percentage of its maximum speed The method AHU Control uses to determine the speed percentage is dependent on whether the heat and co
143. NCEL Figure 9 41 Remote Dialout Setup Screen This screen and the other screens that follow it are used to set up dial out sites for both daytime and nighttime operation including specifying phone numbers and IP addresses Use the and keys to cycle through the Setup screens 9 16 4 Introduction Alarm Report ing In general a controller reports alarms to any or all of four different sources 1 The E2 Display Header Alarms that occur within a E2 may be reported to the header display at the top of the screen When an alarm is reported to the display the word ALARM flashes underneath the time at the top of the screen as shown in the example below 68 61 65 CX 366 Unit 1 Device Summary 11 15 16 ALARN Press Log In Out to Log On Figure 9 42 E2 RX Display Header 2 The Advisory Output Each E2 has a single digital output that reacts to alarm reports When an alarm is reported to this output the out put turns ON and remains on until the alarm condition has returned to normal 3 Dial Out Alarms may be sent to remote alarm receivers via the modem defined for the controller Possible dial out devices include a PC running UltraSite a printer a fax machine and a digital pager 4 The LonWorks Network The Alarm Annunciator If multiple E2s exist on a network you may choose to send alarms across the LonWorks Network so that they may be picked up by the Alarm Annunciator Refer to
144. NTROL ccsscssssssssssessssssssesseseseesersesessesesseseseeseseesessesessessssesssseseseesessesessessssessesersesersesev ess APPENDIX E TROUBLESHOOTIING cssscssssssssscssescssesessvscsssscssescssescsesscseeseseescseessseesesessesessesessesesssseseesersesens E 1 INDEX M 1 1 xiv Table of Contents 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 2 1 Introduction The E2 controller is a microprocessor based control system designed to provide complete control of compres sor groups condensers refrigerated cases and other com ponents related to refrigeration and building control The E2 is the controlling component of a two network configu ration both RS 485 I O and Echelon Lonworks Net works that includes input and output communication boards remote communication software and a variety of sensors probes and transducers The E2 efficiently operates all systems that support refrigeration including compressor racks and condensers and other components not directly related to refrigeration control such as satellite HVAC systems anti sweat heat ers and sensor control modules 1 1 The E2 Refrigeration Controller The E2 RX is available in two models the RX 300 and RX 400 The E2 RX 300 is capable of controlling a single refrigeration system including one condenser and up to four suction groups The E2 RX 400 is capable of con trolling two separate refrigerati
145. NU MEaSuction Groups Condensers Circuits Sensor Controls Configured Applications Add Delete Application System Configuration Value NONE Controlled By Dis NONE DIGITAL SENS61 NOTAC F1 DIGITAL SENS82 NOTAC ON Status Figure 9 8 The Main Menu RX version shown The Main Menu is accessed by pressing the c key This menu gives you direct access to applications such as Suction Groups Condensers Circuits Air Han dling Units Zones Light Schedules and Sensor Controls applications depending on which controller type you are using as well as all configured applications in the control ler The Main Menu also allows you to add and delete applications gives system configuration abilities and shows status information for inputs and outputs network graphs and logs Screen Types 9 7 2 Status Screens RX 400 Unit 3 SUCT GROUP STAT 13 59 56 ALARN SUCTION GROUP NAME Suct SUCTION GRPO1 Dsch HP STATUS RUNTIME CONDENSER 15 6 62 CONDENSER 61 15 wa 6 14 15 ON 6 15 ON 6 15 22 0 GENERAL INFORMATION Sat Suc Temp 3 2 Rack Fail Current HP Capacity PID F1 SUCTION F4 SENSORS FS SETUP Figure 9 9 Status Screen RX version shown Status screens are real time views of application func tions They show the current status of all outputs the cur rent values of all inputs and other important data such as control setpoints run times and whether or not bypasses
146. Network and Hardware Setup 7 Overview 7 2 Wiring Type Echelon is an optional two conductor network that CPC specifies one type of cable for Echelon Network interconnects E2s and other associated devices such as wiring This cable type s properties are listed in Table 7 1 CC 100 case controllers TD3 temperature displays and ESRS evaporator stepper regulator boards All Echelon devices are wired together using the daisy chain method of network structuring If an Echelon network enabled E2 is required it must be specifically ordered from CPC as an Echelon enabled E2 Cable Type Level 4 twisted pair stranded shielded Wire Diam AWG 0 65mm 22AWG Loop Resistance 106 ohms km Capacitance 49 nF km Table 7 1 Echelon Network Cable Specifications Cable Type CPC Part Number 1 pair non plenum 135 2300 1 pair plenum 135 2301 Table 7 2 Recommended Wiring 7 3 Echelon Network Structuring Daisy Chains RECOMMENDED Echelon devices are networked together into configu F i N rations called segments A segment is a group of up to 64 Echelon devices that are connected together on an unbro ken series of wires The recommended way of constructing an Echelon lt CABLE CABLE 5 Network is called daisy chaining In the daisy chain net work configuration devices are arranged by subnets LONWORKS which consist of one E2 and all Echelon devices associ DEVICES ated with the E2 First all devic
147. OCCUPIED both of which is supplied by the Zone SUMMER COOL OCC SUMMER HEAT OCC SUMMER COOL UOC SUMMER HEAT UOC WINTER COOL OCC WINTER HEAT OCC WINTER COOL UOC WINTER HEAT UOC Table 10 11 Possible Heating Cooling Setpoints 10 6 5 Zone Temperature Each MultiFlex RTU and AHU application has a space temperature output that is equal to the unit s current Con trol Temperature When associated with a Zone applica tion this space temperature output is connected to one of sixteen Zone Temperature inputs in the Zone application These sixteen inputs are then combined using a user defined combination method to yield the Zone Tempera ture Zone Control Zone Temperature provides an at a glance view of how well the units within the Zone are doing in heating and cooling If desired Zone Temperature may also be used as a temperature control input by one or all of the Zone s HVAC applications 10 6 6 Economizer Control A Zone application is responsible for analyzing the outside air conditions and determining if the conditions are favorable for bringing in outside air If the air condition is favorable the Zone sends a signal to its associated HVAC units telling them economization is OK If not it sends a signal to disable economization It is up to the associated HVAC unit to process the economization information and open the dampers 10 6 7 Economization Enable There are five possible ways a Zone application may deter
148. OL APPLICATION WINDOWS VIRTUAL DEMAND WINDOWS Power consumption KW time minutes 26512041 Figure 10 13 Example of Rolling Demand Window In short the primary goal of a Demand Control appli cation is to make sure that every possible interval of time that might be used by the power company as a demand window will be under the set demand limit This ensures the demand setpoint will never be exceeded 10 10 2 Demand Monitoring The E2 either monitors power using an analog KW transducer which sends the current KW usage via analog signal or monitors energy consumption using a digital watt hour transducer which pulses to signify a fixed amount of watt hours have been used As mentioned in Section 10 10 1 Introduction to Demand Limit Control all KW input values are gathered together and averaged together in a demand window The demand setpoint is then subtracted from this average The result of this calculation is called the integral error or integral of the demand window The integral error repre sents how far below or above the setpoint the input has been for the entire demand window Under non demand conditions the integral error will be below zero since the average KW or watt hour value will be below the setpoint The current value of the integral error and the current value of the KW input are what determine when the Demand Control application will begin load shedding 10 10 3 Load Shedding 10 10 3 1
149. OSS escri NOTE OSS applies only to AHU Control ap plications that use a time schedule to change occupancy states Overrides initiated by the digital BYPASS TO OCC or BYPASS TO UN OCC inputs will not initiate pre starts or pre stops Optimum Start Stop OSS is a feature that works alongside the AHU Control application s occupied and unoccupied temperature control modes OSS takes control of heating and cooling several minutes before the building is scheduled to change occupancy states and prepares the building for the upcoming change in setpoints As a result when the occupancy state changes the temperature will be comfortably within the range of the new setpoint Figure 10 8 shows an example of how pre starts and pre stops work in a heating application From unoccupied mode the pre start period ramps the temperature up slowly so that when the scheduled change from unoccu pied to occupied mode occurs the temperature will already be at or near the occupied heating setpoint During the pre stop which occurs before AHU Control goes from occupied to unoccupied mode heating is suspended and the temperature is allowed to coast down to the unoccu 10 18 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 2 pied setpoint OCCUPIED SET POINT UNOCCUPIED a SET POINT 26512036 Figure 10 8 Diagram of Pre Start and Pre Stop Operation Intelligent Pre Starts and Pre Stops OSS is designed to handle pre starts
150. Os and MultiFlex 88AO analog output boards 9 2 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual E2 on this E2 s I O Network IRLDS Controllers Enter the number of IRLDS not IRLDS Hs leak detection units on this E2 s I O Network Unit Controllers Echelon Liquid Ctrls CC100P CC100LS Enter the com bined number of pulse valve case controllers CC100Ps and liquid side stepper valve case con trollers CC100LSs in this field Suction Controllers CC100H Enter the num ber of suction stepper case controllers CC100Hs in this field Circuit Suction CS100 Enter the number of suc tion lineup circuit controllers CS100s in this field ESR8 Line Up Boards Enter the number of ESR suction lineup circuit boards SR100s in this field TD3 Temperature Displays Enter the number of TD3 temperature display units in this field EC 2 Case Controllers Enter the number of EC 2 refrigerated case controllers in this field Echelon 16Al Enter the number of 16Ale analog input boards in this field Echelon 8RO Enter the number of 8ROe analog input boards in this field casara NOTE At any time you can access this screen to add or remove boards on this E2 by pressing 8 a aH When finished press NEXT to move to the next screen 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 2 9 4 Setting Number of Applications T xx APPLICATION SETUP Figure 9 3 Application Setup RX version shown The Application Setup screen is whe
151. P F5 CANCEL Figure 10 11 Zone Association Screen BX 400 Unit Shown The Zone Association screen lists all RTUs ARTCs and AHUs that are set up on the current E2 To make an association move the cursor to the Zone field of the RTU ARTC or AHU you wish to associate and press LOOK UP to open the Application Selection menu and use the arrow keys to scroll to find the desired Zone name When this menu is open use and to move quickly to the beginning or end of the list respectively From this screen you may also choose to jump to the Setup screen to configure an individual RTU ARTC AHU or Zone application by using the SETUP AHU key or the SETUP ZONE key 10 7 MultiFlex CUB Board The MultiFlex Condensing Unit Board CUB is a smart input output board designed to control single con densing units A single condensing unit is a self contained compressor and condenser bearing unit which controls refrigeration in a single case line up or walk in cooler The MultiFlex CUB uses the same general hardware configuration as a MultiFlex 168A0 It is equipped with a processor and extra memory to allow it to control com pressors condensers refrigeration and defrost for a single condensing unit using on board I O and control algo rithms The MultiFlex CUB has its own installation and opera tion manual P N 026 1706 10 24 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 2 10 8 MultiFlex PAK Board The PAK is a distributed pack
152. Resetting and Clearing Log Entries eese 11 12 11 10 8 1 Acknowledging 11 12 11 10 8 2 Resetting 0 see See 11 13 11 10 8 3 Cleaner en erbe Dd ee dieci tie e oretenus 11 13 III VIEWING LOGS AND GRAPHS a tete tte eet et donas n sou EE e ses core Ir tht eR PUTES ebrio eos 11 14 11 11 1 Locating Logged Inputs Outputs iet irte tette itti eee repe Deo ignei eei peras 11 14 11 1 11 Home Stat s Screeris eet ere RUE IRR e ee e EE 11 14 TIIN 2 Setup Sereen i a NN 11 14 11 11 1 3 Setting Up Input and Output Pointers eese eerte enne reete tetne trennen nennen enin 11 15 TILA 2 Log View eate tue E RN EUER Ue 11 15 LLALS The Graph View aste ira ni adea a tra oe ir or d iter b e Eee eie Ghee a 11 16 LITA Looming I and Out iia dr atte o ri eee er o anre SEEE erasi Ei 11 16 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual Table of Contents xiii 11 12 LOW BATTERY NOTIFICATION cc0sccccsccocccecocecovscessseccscensneconecesceeseecesscesovevvvascdsananaceccsesesecescvoceesvevevevvevsensneas 11 16 APPENDIX A CASE TYPE DEFAULTS cccsssssssssessssessssessssessssessesesessessesessessesesssesessessesessssesessesessessesessssevess A 1 APPENDIX B PRESSURE VOLTAGE AND TEMPERATURE RESISTANCE CHARTS FOR ECLIPSE TRANSDUCERS amp CPC TEMP SENSOR cssssssssssssssessssessssessssessssessssessesessesessssessesessesesessesessesessessasessesesessesers B 1 APPENDIX C ALARM ADVISORY MESSAGES APPENDIX D PID CO
153. SED WIRE to same color Lit fit zit xl 5 DAISY CHAIN CONFIGURATION SET TERMINATING JUMPERS JU1 JU2 JU3 JU1 JU2 JU3 f oO o O UP 1 i T DOWN O UP DOWN DOWN UP Acceptable CPC Transformers O P P N 640 0041 120VAC Primary l AC1 120 208 240 VAC YELLOW AC2 OV YELLOW AC1 24 VAC 5 10 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 2 16Al INSTALLATION GUIDE 1 Connect 16A1 to the RS485 I O Network 2 Set the network address on the first five agi ov AC Bl D a rockers of dip switch S3 SSS QONO NODDY GOGGGGGGG 3 Set the network baud rate using rockers 6 and 7 of dip switch S3 4 Set RS485 termination jumpers UP term if at either end of a daisy chain Otherwise set jumpers DOWN not term bh 5 Connect board to the 24VAC center tapped secondary of the power transformer SGOSGGSGGG SOON Note If you change any dip switch settings 26 2728 29 30 31 32 while the board is powered disconnect the power and re power the board to reset PARR 4l SHIELDED TWISTED PAIR 3 BAUD RATE BELDEN 8761 FOR PLENUM js h USE BELDEN 82761 OR 88761 OR EQUIV m 9600 baud BER i ov gt OUUU d Ong E 485 mnnmn5i DEUS 485 19200 baud OUUU VICES I f WIRE to same color WV
154. SHIELDED TWISTED PAIR BELDEN 8641 y x0 4 oR EQUIV THER OS pece m ov gt WIRE to WIRE OV to OV WIRE to 2 RS 485 I O Net O de NOT TERMINATED TERMINATED DAISY CHAIN CONFIGURATION SET TERMINATING JUMPERS Echelon CABLE TYPE Level IV 22 AWG Shielded Max Daisy Chain Length Feet 4592 Meters 1400 P N 135 2300 Non Plenum 1 Pair 1000 Feet P N 135 2301 Plenum E EI 1 Pair 1000 Feet g Echelon 5 TERM Earth JP7 Y Ground Connector TERMINATED 12 or 14 AWG JP7 Y NOT TERMINATED DAISY CHAIN CONFIGURATION 6 110 VAC 50VA 220 VAC 50VA P N 640 0041 P N 640 0042 AC1 AC1 o e CLASS 2 POWER 24 VAC gt 24VAC CLASS 2 POWER 24 VAC S 24VAC AC2 AC2 4 6 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 ee 5 The I O Network and Hardware Setup Each E2 controller may connect with up to 127 devices via the RS 485 Network This network is used by the E2 to read data from the input boards and to send commands to the analog and digital output boards Case controllers and rooftop controllers are not part of the RS 485 Network 5 Board Names and Terminology There are many input relay output analog output and combination I O boards available from CPC for use with the E2 However E2 only recognizes four different types of boards 16AI 8RO 4AO and 8DO All E2 compatibl
155. Settings 5 2 Settings For 8IO 5 5 Routers part number for manual 4 RS 232 Baud Rate 9 2 RS 485 Network See I O Network RTU 2 6 10 20 RX Capabilities RX Home Screen 71 1 S Screen Elements 9 4 function keys 9 4 header 9 4 Help line 9 4 Screen Types 9 5 11 5 actions menu 9 6 RX and BX Main Menus 9 5 setup screens 9 7 status screens 9 5 system configuration menu 9 7 system information menu 9 8 Screens Main Status 9 3 Status 9 5 Sensor Control analog and Forced To Normal I 8 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 2 alarm control 0 32 combiner function 0 32 cut in cut out control 0 32 analog sensor control modules 0 32 digital logical combination methods 0 32 digital sensor control modules 70 32 Sensors analog E2 setup 8 7 analog liquid level indicator wiring to input board 8 5 bullet and pipe mount mounting 3 9 coil in temperature location 3 8 mounting 3 9 coil out temperature location 3 8 mounting 3 9 dewpoint wall mounted 8 4 dewpoint probe 3 11 location 3 11 mounting 3 11 wiring to input board 8 5 digital selecting units 8 9 wiring to input board 8 3 Hansen probe See Sensors liquid level probe humidity connecting to a case controller 8 15 installation 3 9 indoor RH sensors 3 9 outdoor RH sensor 3 10 insertion probe 3 8 location 3 8 mounting 3 8 inside temperature 3 7 location 3 7 mounting 3 7 Klixons wiring to input board 8 3 KW Transducer wiring to input board 8 6 light level 0
156. Temperature Differential Strategy 70 2 Control Keys 71 8 Convenience Store Controller 2 CPU 2 2 Creating 9 14 CS 100 70 9 CS 100 See Case Controllers CS 100 CUB 2 6 10 24 Customer Service 800 Number 2 7 CX Home Screen 71 2 D Daisy Chains diagram of 5 2 Date and Time 71 11 Date Setup 9 9 Daylight Savings Dates 9 9 Defrost defrost cycle 10 5 10 11 demand 70 11 fail safe time 70 12 drip time See Defrost run off time electric 10 11 emergency 10 12 initiating 71 8 hot gas 10 11 in case controlled circuits 70 70 inhibiting using demand sensors 70 11 manual defrost ending a cycle 71 9 initiating 11 8 off cycle 10 11 pulsed 70 11 pump down delay 0 11 reverse cycle hot gas 10 11 run off time 0 11 standard circuits 10 5 defrost states 10 5 defrost type 10 5 electric defrost 70 5 1 3 emergency defrost 10 6 pulsed defrost 10 6 termination 0 5 timed and reverse air 0 5 termination 70 11 pulsed defrost 0 11 temperature 70 11 timed off cycle 10 11 Demand explanation of 10 37 Demand Control 0 28 Demand Defrost See Defrost demand Dewpoint Probe 3 11 location 3 11 mounting 3 11 Dewpoint Probe See Sensors dewpoint probe DHCP Enabled 9 11 Dip Switches baud rate 5 3 input type 8 network settings 5 2 Discontinued boards 16Ale 2 10 8ROe 2 10 ESR8 2 11 Door Switches 10 6 E E2 1 1 blank face 3 3 capabilities connection to other 1 4 documentation 4 Echelon connectors 4 2 Echelon
157. The Description File has failed to load onto the E2 when the Echelon device was commissioned No description file exists for the Open Echelon controller being commissioned No Refrigerant flowing 1 Low or no refrigerant flowing No update has been received 1 No update has been received from the output point connected to Normal Hi Limit Exceeded User n analog value has risen above its programmed Hi Normal Low Limit Exceeded User An analog value has fallen below its programmed Lo C 10 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 Priority Not Enough Backed Memory 10 The E2 tried to save data to the battery backed mem ory but the memory was full Not Enough Flash Memory 20 The E2 tried to save data to the flash memory but the memory was full Not Enough Memory 10 The E2 tried to save data to unbacked memory but the memory was full Not Enough Scatch Pad Memory 50 The E2 tried to save data to the scratch pad memory but the memory was full Notice Limit Exceeded User An analog sensor s programmed notice limit has been exceeded Num Of Events Exceeded Limit User A digital value has transitioned ON more times than its defined Number of Events setpoint Occupied Hi Limit Exceeded User An analog value has risen above its defined high limit setpoint during OCCUPIED mode Occupied Low Limit Exceeded User An analog value has fallen below its defined low po limit setpoint during the OCCUPIED mode Off Time Exc
158. The defrost cycle will then begin the Run Off period 10 4 4 4 Demand Defrost If a case is configured with a demand defrost sensor a case controller may use their inputs as a means of keeping scheduled defrost cycles from occurring when frost levels Software Overview 10 11 are not high enough to require a defrost The optical demand defrost sensor may be either an analog or digital type sensor When this sensor detects no major build up of frost the Case Circuit application ignores all scheduled calls for defrost and continues in refrigeration mode When the sensor detects frost the defrost inhibit is cancelled and the case circuit will enter defrost at the next scheduled time A demand defrost inhibit only keeps scheduled defrosts from occurring Any manual calls for a defrost cycle will occur as normal Demand Fail Safe Time To protect against demand defrost sensors that may not be working properly a demand fail safe time may be set up Demand fail safe times limit the amount of time a defrost inhibit may last If a demand defrost sensor does not detect frost for an amount of time equal to the Demand Fail Safe Time the defrost inhibit is lifted and the circuit will enter defrost at the next scheduled time 10 4 4 5 Emergency Defrost When necessary a user can initiate an emergency defrost cycle from a circuit Emergency defrost cycles are similar to normal defrost cycles except an emergency defrost cycle will igno
159. WIRE to same color WIRE OV to 0V WIRE to same color 9600 BAUD 19200 BAUD IN OUT 6 1 Jp2 E Jp2 e PLUG INPUT 49 CONNECTOR CONNECTOR Jes e E JP3 e FROM 16A Tyco INTO THIS ism pr THIS INPUT SOCKET NO TERMINATION TERMINATION 4 MULTIFLEX INPUT ADAPTER P N 335 2301 D Acceptable CPC Transformers Pa P N 640 0041 120VAC Primary ACI 50VA YELLOW AC2 P N 640 0050 120VAC Primary 75VA P N 640 0042 220VAC Primary 120 208 240 VAC 50VA P N 640 0080 Multi tap 120 208 240VAC Primary 80VA P N 640 0056 Multi tap 120 208 240VAC Primary 56VA YELLOW AC1 24 VAC Note Please refer to transformer SECONDARY SIDE for primary side wiring Board Installation The I O Network and Hardware Setup 5 7 2 Y POWER AC2 0V_AC1 JON 485 a gt ikk 8RO 8ROSMT 0 BOARD Bits Nifi 6 8RO 8ROSMT INSTALLATION GUIDE 1 Connect 8RO 8ROSMT to the RS485 I O Network Wire color polarity must be observed 2 Set the network address on the first five rockers of dip switch S1 Valid address range 1 31 3 Set the network baud rate using rockers 6 and 7 of dip switch S1 4 Set RS485 termination jumpers UP term if at either end of a dais
160. able analog and 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 2 digital input points whereas the RTU has only eight inputs two of which are configurable The RCB has four analog outputs for use in controlling variable speed fans economizers or modulating heating and or cooling valves whereas the RTU has only two analog outputs for use only with VS fans and economizers The RCB also features a more sophisticated HHT interface and updated algorithms for controlling heating cooling dehumidification and air quality The MultiFlex RCB has its own installation and opera tion manual P N 026 1707 26501126 LEGEND 1 INPUT POWER RS 485 TERMINATION 24VAC JUMPERS 2 RS 485 O NETWORK HAND HELD TERMI NAL JACK 3 RCB INPUTS 1 8 11 RELAY OUTPUT CON NECTORS 4 RCB INPUTS 9 16 12 RELAY OUTPUT FUSES QA rated 250V slow blow 5 NETWORK ID DIP 13 RELAY STATUS LEDs SWITCHES S3 S4 INPUT TYPE DIP 14 OUTPUT FAIL SAFE SWITCHES S1 S2 SWITCHES 7 BOARD STATUS LEDs 15 ANALOG OUTPUTS Code A Code B General Status DC POWER OUTPUTS 3 at 5VDC l at 12VDC NETWORK STATUS LEDs 2 2 3 6 MultiFlex PAK Board The PAK is a distributed pack rack controller that controls compressors and condenser fans The PAK can control up to 8 compressor groups containing up to 16 compressors The compressor control strategy is Fixed Steps with setpoint deadband using ON and OFF delays Up to 20 Fixed Steps can be configured Table 2 8 MultiFl
161. ach Zones Section Directly below the AHU section is the Zones section which shows the number of zones temperature whether or not the application is in occupied mode CSP and HSP Sensor Control Section Sensor Control is at the bottom right hand corner of the BX Home screen and contains analog and digital sen sors value command and status information 11 1 3 CX Home Screen 09 13 05 WUAC CONTROL INSIDE RH NONE STATE TEMP SPACE MONEHO CASEC OFF HONE 6 ff HOHE fS FAM OFF Ci HOME STATE UNOCC CASECTAL CKTOA OFF MOME DENUN IMACTU STANDARD CKTOT Refr HONE STANDARD CKTOZ Refr HONE anua SPACE MON HO STANDARD ckTO3 Refr HOME NAH STANDARD CKTOA Refr MONE FAM OFF STANDARD CKTO5S Refr MONE STATE UNOCG DEHUN IMACTU AICHTINE LICHT LEVEL NONE BYPASS OUTPUT TIME SCHEDLEGI NOTACT orf ort n TIME SCHLDLEU2 NOTACT I OFF OFF NOTACT OFF LIGHTSOn OFF OFF DIGITAL SENSO NOTACT OFF DIGITAL SENSO3 NOTACT OFF ICHTIMG F3 CIRCUITS LEGEND Anti Sweat F SENSORS FS SETUP 1 Lighting 5 2 HVAC Control 6 Sensor Control 7 3 Refrigeration Time Schedules 4 Demand Control Figure 11 3 CX Home Screen Lighting Control Section The lower left hand corner of the screen shows name and bypass output for the lighting circuits HVAC Control Section The top left hand corner of the screen shows whether the fans are ON or OFF state and dehumidification status of the first two
162. ach device s name subnet 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 ee and node address controller type and corresponding Neu ron ID number Once this list is complete each device may be commissioned one at a time from the E2 front panel To make a list of network devices follow the steps below 1 For each record set up in the Controller Network Configuration Status Screen write down the con tents of each device s Controller Name Model Subnet and Node fields on a sheet of paper If desired you may also include the model or serial numbers of the units that will be controlled as well as a physical location 2 Whenstep 1 is complete go to where each device on the list is installed and locate each device s Neuron ID sticker Every Echelon compatible device available from CPC has a sticker on its enclosure that shows the unit s Neuron ID num ber Each sticker also has a perforated tag at the bottom that may be removed and affixed to your form Tear this tag off and stick it in the Neuron ID blank on the sheet of paper If the perforated tag has already been removed write the ID num ber in the blank When all Neuron ID numbers have been collected return to the E2 and enter the Neuron ID numbers for each device To commission a device move the cursor to the device to be commissioned and press Set Address Model Bus Subnet Board Neuron ID Set controller address for CL 63 662 Subnet 3 Node 2 Select method for identifying
163. air handlers in the sequence Refriseration Control Section The top center of the screen shows the name state and 11 2 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual ee current temperature of standard circuits Demand Control Section The top right hand corner of the screen shows the sta tus of the Demand Control application Anti Sweat Control Section The middle right hand section of the screen shows name and percent ON information for each anti sweat application Sensor Control Section The bottom center section of the screen shows both analog and digital sensor control name and command output Time Schedules Section The lower right hand section of the screen shows the name and current status of time schedules 11 2 Logging On and Access Levels An E2 may be programmed with up to 25 different users A user basically consists of a username a password and an access level Whenever a username and password are entered during login the E2 searches the user records for the username and password If found the E2 will log the user in at the access level configured for the user in the user records The access level determines how many of the E2 s fea tures the user may use The E2 uses four access levels one being the lowest and four being the highest Table 11 1 gives a description of each level and the capabilities they have access to Level 1 Read only access Users may generally only view status screens setpoints and
164. alarm is reset using the Alarm Reset button ALARM RST If an alarm is forced to normal an R will appear in front of the alarm state in the State field Table 11 8 lists the nine possible state messages as they appear in the State field Advisory Type Condition Condition Condition Still Exists Returned Reset to To Normal Normal Table 11 8 Alarm States 11 10 5 Ack Reset State The State field also shows whether or not an advisory record has been acknowledged or reset by a user If an alarm has been acknowledged or reset a dash will appear at the end of the State field If an alarm has not been acknowledged or reset an asterisk will appear at the end of the State field 11 10 6 Property or Board Point This column describes where the alarm notice or fail ure was generated from Alarms and notices can either be generated within the E2 system or from an input value that 1s higher or lower than an alarm or notice setpoint defined during the system configuration process 11 10 7 Advisory Message The Advisory Message columnis a brief description of 11 12 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 2 the alarm notice or failure Because of screen size con straints it is often the case that the full advisory message will not be displayed in the Message field To view the full advisory message as well as the alarm priority and other important alarm information press EXPD INFO for Expanded Inf
165. all of its own applications that use the Global Data input Only one input of each type may be designated as a primary on the E2 Network In other words if one E2 is acting as the primary provider of the global Out door Air Temp no other E2 on the network may have a global Outdoor Air Temp sensor with a primary priority If using this priority setting you must enter board and point settings Secondary Sensors that are set up with secondary priorities are backup sensors that will be used by all Global Data applications if the primary sensor fails If a global input is set up on an E2 with a secondary priority the E2 will not send its value to the other Global Data applications as long as it is receiving a primary value of that type from another E2 on the network If a secondary provider does not receive a primary value update at least once every five min utes the secondary provider will assume the primary sensor has failed and it will send the secondary value to all other Global Data applications on the net work These applications will then use the secondary value in place of the failed primary value Secondary providers will continue to send the input 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 ee value until the primary provider again sends a valid update to the other Global Data applications The secondary provider would then stop sending the sec ondary value and all Global Data applications would use the primary value I
166. alls below the entered setpoint for Freeze Lockout 10 20 4 5 Alarm If the zone is inhibited for more than the number of days specified in the Inhibit Alarm setpoint an Inhibit alarm will be generated for the zone This alarm will return to normal when the zone is no longer inhibited 10 20 5 Zone Bypass Inputs Each zone has a digital bypass input called Zone Bypass Inputs A zone can be bypassed to ON at any time while the application is enabled A zone cannot be bypassed to OFF When a zone is bypassed to ON the main water valve will be turned ON immediately 10 20 5 1 Bypass Failsafe While each zone is bypassed to ON a timer is checked If time has elapsed equal to or greater than the zone s cycle duration parameter the bypass input will be ignored and the zone will return to normal operation For a zone in Bypass Failsafe its bypass input must be set to OFF or NONE to reset the Bypass Failsafe and to Software Overview 10 45 use the bypass input again 10 20 6 Flow Sensor Related Tests 10 20 6 1 Leak Test For both Timed and Volume control types if a flow sensor is configured water flow will be checked via a leak test that is performed at the beginning of the cycle During the leak test the main water valve will be turned ON and all zone valves will be set to OFF After an amount of time has elapsed equal to the Flow Alarm Delay the Water Flow input will be compared to the Minimum Flow for Alarm setpoint
167. alog output may be either of two types Linear and VSComp Linear means that the output is a standard 0 10VDC linear output VSComp means that the output is a percentage 0 100 that is driving an inverter that controls a vari able speed device such as a compressor or fan Tf the output will be driving a variable speed device Input and Output Setup 8 13 choose VSComp in this field otherwise select Lin ear Use LOOK UP to select Select Eng Units The engineering units of the output value are entered in the Select Eng Units field This value is defaulted to percent PCT Use LOOK UP to select Default Value The value that the relay output should go to if the output is not associated to an application The default value of the Default Value field is OFF Modify Output Equation Enables the value to be translated into an output Low End Point The output voltage when the INPUT is at the value specified in the Low Eng Units field High End Point The output voltage when the INPUT is at the value specified in the High Eng Units field Low Eng Units The value of the input in Engi neering Units that will produce the output voltage specified in the Low End Point field High Eng Units The value of the input in Engi neering Units that will produce the output voltage specified in the High End Point field PRIORITY OVR When an input is overridden to an output cell If this input is not set to NONE it
168. also features a more sophisticated HHT interface and updated algorithms for controlling heating cooling dehumidification and air quality 10 6 3 3 AHUs An AHU controls all aspects of an air handling unit including up to eight stages of auxiliary or reclaim heat six cooling stages dehumidification analog or digital economization and support for single two or variable speed fans Normally since AHUS are designed to cover a wide area of space AHU Control applications operate on their own and are not associated with Zone applications they are large enough to be zones within themselves How ever if desired an AHU may be associated with a Zone application which will allow the AHU to use the Zone s setpoints occupancy state summer winter state and dehu midification and economization enabling 10 6 4 Temperature Control As mentioned Zone applications do not control tem perature themselves Zone applications simply pass along the setpoints an HVAC unit will use and the individual unit is responsible for controlling to the setpoint using its own temperature input The Zone application passes along eight different set points which are shown in Table 10 11 Of these set points the application receiving the setpoints will only use one cooling and one heating setpoint The pair the applica tion will use is determined by whether the current season is SUMMER or WINTER and whether the building is OCCUPIED or UN
169. alue to the desired application input A common application for this is in HVAC control where a single heating control value might come from an average of a number of temperature sensors throughout the Software Overview 10 41 building Two different types of Multiple Input cells may be used depending upon whether the inputs to be combined are analog or digital sources 10 18 TD Control 10 18 1 Overview The TD Control application controls fans sequentially based on the temperature differential TD of the con denser When an increase is called for the next fan will turn on when the time since the last fan state change is greater than the Fan On Delay Time setpoint or will turn on immediately if the last change was more than the Fan On Delay Additional fans will be staged on at Fan On Delay intervals while an increase in capacity is called for When a decrease is called for the next fan will stage off when the time since the last fan state change is greater than the Fan Off Delay Time setpoint or will turn off immediately if the last change was more than Fan Off Delay Additional fans will be staged off at Fan Off Delay intervals while a decrease in capacity is called for 10 18 2 Temperature Differential TD Strategy TD strategy attempts to maintain a constant difference i e TD setpoint between the temperature of the refriger ant and the ambient temperature The TD setpoint allows you to set the constant that
170. ame area as the site controller near the controller s 16AI 8RO and other RS 485 Network peripherals The Gateway is designed to fit into a standard 3 snap track supplied with the board or may be mounted in a panel or on stand offs Follow the dimensions in Figure 3 12 for panel mounting 5 00 0 16 TYP 4 PL GATEWAY BOARD 26501125 Figure 3 12 Gateway Board Mounting Dimensions The Gateway should be mounted in an environment with ambient temperature between 40 F and 150 F with a non condensing relative humidity between 5 and 95 3 3 Echelon Devices 3 3 1 16Ale and 8ROe The 16Ale and 8ROe boards have the same mounting dimensions as their I O counterparts the 16AI and SRO boards For mounting dimensions and instructions see Section 3 2 2 Boards Without Enclosures Snap Track and refer to Figure 3 9 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 2 3 3 2 CC 100 Case Controller and CS 100 Case Circuit Controller Generally the case controller will be mounted within the raceway or on top of the case If a controller must be replaced or installed in the field it should be located based on the specific design of the case 0 18 TYP 2 PLACES CONTROLLER 202 TOP VIEW M CONTROLLER SIDE VIEW Figure 3 13 CCB Mounting Dimensions 3 3 3 ESR8 Discontinued The ESRS board is slightly larger than the 16AI and 8RO boards and is not supplied with a snap track
171. ame sub net Recommended Ethernet cabling is CAT 5 straight through cable 328 feet 100 meters is the maximum distance allowed between devices before a switch or hub must be added Ethernet IP Configurations 6 2 1 Equipment Specifications Type Industrial grade Operating storage temp range 40 F to 185 F Vibration IEC68 2 6 RH 5 to 95 UL 508A CE approved Supports 10Base T crossover cable Supports all IEEE 802 3 protocol Components Ethernet Five or Nine port Switch may require an additional power supply Supports Auto Crossover MDI MDI X Screw terminal power connec tors Industrial grade Surge capacity 1 kA line Operating temp range 40 F to 185 F Max frequency 155 MHz Clamp and rated 10V and 5V Ethernet Surge and Lightning Protector recom mended Table 6 1 Equipment for E2 Ethernet Peer Communications secre NOTE An external power supply may be needed E2 Ethernet Peer Communications 6 1 EZ 6 3 Software Specifica tions cnn NOTE The gateway E2 is the E2 controller at a remote site to which UltraSite directly con TCP IP nects It is through this E2 that UltraSite com E2 controller versions 2 10 and later communicate municates with the other controllers defined as the between controllers using the TCP IP protocol TCP Port non gateway E2s and external entities such as Ultr 7238 is the default for connections established between the aSit
172. an application has forced a reset of this E2 VS Alarm 20 Multiflex PAK variable speed device alarm Appendix C Alarm Advisory Messages C 13 Priority VS Inverter Fail User A variable speed inverter driving a variable speed fan or compressor has failed WCC Controller Alarm 20 Woodley case controller alarm WPK Controller Alarm NECS Pack Amps Fail alarm Watchdog Countdown Hit Zero E2 locked up while trying to perform a task If this alarm occurs often there may be a problem with your system Contact CPC service Watchdog Reset Timer Failed E2 tried to reset itself to clear a hung task but the watchdog feature on the E2 was disabled Check the jumper J19 labeled Watch Dog on the E2 main board This jumper should be either be set to ENABLE or it should not be present at all X300 X300 Links Lost CRC Err 20 An internal error has caused a loss of communication between E2s C 14 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 E2 Appendix D PID Control Introduction to PID Control PID Control is a specialized method of closed loop control that strives to maintain equality between an input value and a user defined setpoint by operating a device or a number of devices at somewhere between 0 and 100 of full capacity PID Control works by making adjustments to the out put at a constant rate called the update rate usually 2 6 seconds For every update that occurs PID Control takes a
173. an running at 51 maximum speed VS SS combined fan setup is for the combination of a variable speed fan with single speed fans First under PID control the variable speed VS fan turns on Then as the PID percentage rises above VS fan s maximum speed the E2 switches on additional single speed fan stages 10 2 4 Condenser Split Mode The E2 is capable of operating condensers in a special mode that reduces its cooling effectiveness This special mode is called split mode Split mode is most often used in cold climates during periods of low outside air temperature Split mode is also sometimes used when heated refrigerant from the refriger ation system is being used as reclaim heat by an HVAC unit The most common way E2 achieves split mode in an air cooled condenser with single speed fans is to lock OFF Condenser Control 50 of the total number of fans You may choose to lock OFF all odd numbered fans even numbered fans the first half of all fans or the last half of all fans Split mode can also be achieved by activating a valve that bypasses a portion of the tubing in the condenser man ifold The resulting decrease in surface area results in reduced cooling 10 2 5 Fast Recovery Under certain conditions the system pressure may increase too quickly above the condenser setpoint to be reduced effectively by normal condenser control The E2 provides a user definable fast recovery rate setpoint at which all the cond
174. analog or digital sensors to the E2 SRO Relay output board activates and deacti vates up to eight devices 4A0 Analog output board contains four 0 10VDC analog outputs Used for controlling vari able speed devices and other peripherals requiring analog values DO Digital output board contains eight outputs that pulse 12VDC Ideal for use as anti sweat heater controllers Networking Overview 1 4 2 The E2 Echelon Lonworks Network The E2 is also compatible with a network platform called Lonworks This is most commonly referred to as the Echelon Network after the company who invented the platform the Echelon Corporation In general peripherals with control functions such as case controllers rooftop HVAC controllers and other E2 RX and BX units are interconnected on the Echelon Network These controllers do most of their own computa tion and system control but they communicate with other E2s to provide logging alarm control and other functions In addition to these CPC also offers Echelon compatible input and output boards similar to those available for the RS 485 Network E2 RX REFRIGERATION CC 100 CASE CONTROLLERS E2 RX ECHELON NETWORK MULTIFLEX PAKs E226513124new Figure 1 2 E2 RX Echelon Network Diagram Figure 1 2 shows the E2 RX peripherals that commu nicate across the Echelon Network e 16Ale
175. and pre stops in the most energy efficient manner possible Every time a pre start or pre stop occurs OSS measures the amount of time it takes to bring the temperature from the previous setpoint to within the comfort zone of the new setpoint a user defined range of values above and below the set point within which the temperature is considered accept able This duration is used to determine the average rate of temperature change called the K factor The K factor is stored in the memory along with the average value of the outdoor air temperature during the pre start or pre stop Over time collected K factor data will be sorted and combined into a table As a result by constantly observing and recording the results of previous pre starts and pre stops OSS will be able to intelligently guess how much time a pre start or pre stop mode should last based on the outside temperature AHU Control keeps track of three different kinds of K factors Heat K factor used to guess pre start dura tions for AHUs operating in heating mode Cool K factor used to guess pre start dura tions for AHUs operating in cooling mode Coast K factor a measurement of the change in temperature when no heating or cooling is active This is used to determine pre stop durations for both heating and cool ing AHUs 10 5 11 AHU Zone Control Unlike MultiFlex RTU rooftop controller applications AHU applications are not required to be grouped into
176. and times for watering are set by the user with a maximum of two Irrigation applications allowed in the CX controller The master water valve is turned ON and OFF as water is needed for a zone When disabled no application con trol of any outputs will be possible and the System Status output will indicate Disabled Under normal control only one zone will be active at a time 10 20 2 Zones and Cycles A zone is defined as a single line of irrigation fed from a main water supply valve i e a group of sprinklers that are attached to the same line of irrigation Up to 16 zones of irrigation per application are supported with six start times for watering The user will be able to configure each zone to function on different days of the week or odd or even days of the month Zones are turned ON one at a time starting from the first enabled zone The zone that is ON is considered to be the active zone Its state is set to ON and its valve output is also set to ON When the active zone completes its time duration its state will be set to Done and its valve output set to OFF For enabled zones that are not active or complete the states will be set to Pending and the valve output set to OFF A cycle is the sequence of all defined zones irrigating one at a time A cycle is considered complete when the last defined zone finishes irrigating and shuts OFF Each zone turns ON one at a time starting with the first defined zone until the last
177. anual Table of Contents v 3 2 2 Boards Without Enclosures Snap Track eese esee eene eese ennt nen tenen netten ennt n rennen en nets 3 4 3 3 ECHELON DEVICES itt ee Rer RE ORT EE rere ETE OR 3 4 3 3 1 JOAIe and SRO o NER GN OI seine A A a 3 4 3 3 2 CC 100 Case Controller and CS 100 Case Circuit Controller esse eee 3 5 3 3 3 ESRG Discontinued asus us e p n RH RI eat 3 5 SO UE Smart SR ud actes ate en oR 3 5 3 39 29 ID haie d tiet ta deed aetate de ag hte APE a A tud tees 3 5 3 4 MODEM COMMUNICATION EXPANSION CARD MOUNTING NEW PROCESSOR BOARD seen 3 5 3 4 1 Mounting PC 104 Cards in E2 Previous Generation Processor Board eene 3 6 3 4 1 1 The Internal Modem cinco tenere n on rey eee eoe xa n ka eee Y geo keen ege enean eee vx YN xu ERE 3 4 2 Two Channel and Four Channel Repeaters 3 4 2 1 Mounting Repeaters Overview 3 4 2 2 Mounting the Two Channel Repeater esses enne non nono aran nena netten tenente nn eterne 3 4 2 3 Mounting the Four Channel Repeater eese nennen E E teet ener nennen entente nennen 3 5 SENSORS AND TRANSDUCERS 3 24 Pressure NA AA A desine ie tee eee hoe Made dia Fame eee Ene ele cota tvlinatdeeotdiuaddecevioustslaebideeties 3 5 15 1 Mo ntifig ar ie ele NAS ate eee ettet tene E 3 5 2 Inside Temperature Sensor esee tei dessa ne e C ie err ire Har eee DR a ree e de
178. ard or by connecting a 102 ohm terminator block at the end of the network seg ment see Section 7 4 1 Using a Termination Block P N 535 2715 to Terminate a Daisy Chain Refer to the installation guide references at the end of this section for specific device termination instructions All other E2s and Echelon devices that aren t at the end of a daisy chained network segment must be untermi nated Device Termination 7 2 E2 RX BX CX 150 Manual 2 If a router or repeater is being used in a network termi nation becomes more complicated because routers and repeaters join multiple daisy chain segments together Refer to the Router and Repeater Installation Guide P N 026 1605 for specific termination instructions JP7 TERMINATION e ERI m 5 Y E2 _ Termination NO TERMINATION EN Terminate Here EN Terminate Hora 26513153 Figure 7 3 E2 Termination Daisy Chain 7 4 Using a Termination Block P N 535 2715 to Terminate a Daisy Chain Some Echelon Network devices notably TD3s have no on board means of terminating For some other devices it is inconvenient to use the jumpers supplied for termination the CC 100 CS 100 case controllers for example require the enclosure to be removed to set the jumper To remedy these problems CPC supplies termination blocks that can be wired to the end of an Echelon ca
179. are used only by the Lighting Sched ule application If more than one Lighting Control applica tion will be using the same schedule it is recommended you configure an external Time Schedule application so you won t have to re enter event and date information for each lighting application 10 9 6 1 Slave Scheduling If you have an external Time Schedule application pro viding occupied unoccupied times but you want to alter this schedule slightly for the Lighting Schedule applica tion you can designate the Basic Schedule cell s schedule as a Slave schedule Lighting Schedules A slave schedule differs from a master schedule in that its events are relative to the events of a master schedule A master schedule s events are absolute times like 08 00 ON 23 00 OFF A slave schedule contains a set of times that are added to or subtracted from its master schedule s events like 00 30 ON 01 00 OFF As a result the behavior of the output of the slave schedule is altered slightly from that of the master schedule Slave scheduling is most often used in cases where the master schedule represents the occupied unoccupied times of a building and slave schedules are used to control loads that need activation or deactivation earlier or later than the occupied unoccupied times 10 9 7 The Min ON OFF Cell The Minimum ON OFF cell has three important func tions It receives the light state requested by the Schedule Interface cel
180. aud Rate Dip Switch Analog Outputs 4 places Divider Circuits 4 places 26501007 Figure 2 12 440 Analog Output Board 2 2 06 8DO Digital Output Board and PMAC II Anti Sweat Controller For control of anti sweat heaters CPC supplies the 8DO Digital Output board P N 810 3050 The 8DO has eight outputs which may pulse up to 150mA at 12VDC Since the 8DO is primarily designed to control anti sweat heaters the 8DO is the heart of CPC s Pulse Modu lated Anti Sweat Control PMAC II panel The PMAC II P N 851 1000 provides 16 channels of anti sweat control circuitry The PMAC II panel combines the 8DO with high capacity relays in a single enclosure providing 256 total amps of anti sweat heater operation The 8DO is shown in Figure 2 13 The PMAC II is shown in Figure 2 14 I O Network Boards and Peripherals Digital Output Connections 26501042 Figure 2 14 PMAC II Anti Sweat Control Panel Hardware Overview 2 9 2 3 Echelon Network Boards and Peripherals The 16Ale Discontinued 2 3 1 Echelon In Inputs 1 8 Echelon Out Status LED Power Network LED Node ID 10 Service Button Inputs 9 16 11 Service LED Voltage Outputs 26501112 Figure 2 15 16Ale The 16Ale P N 810 4000 is an Echelon based input board similar in function to its I O Network counterpart the MultiFlex 16 see Section 2 2 3 The 16Ale receives input signals through any of 16 two wire conne
181. available in two models the BX 300 and BX 400 The only significant difference between the E2 BX 300 and the E2 BX 400 is the total number of building control devices that may be operated by a single controller Table 1 2 shows the differences between capabilities for The E2 Building Con Introduction 1 1 the BX 300 and BX 400 Capabilities BX 300 BX 400 Air Handlers AHU Control Digital Sensor Con 64 12 trol Table 1 2 BX 300 vs BX 400 Comparison 1 3 The E2 Convenience Store Controller The CX controls HVAC lighting and refrigeration systems for convenience store and small box retail facili ties The CX s primary function is to provide energy effi cient control of rooftop units as well as refrigeration and defrost control of display cases and walk in boxes In addition the CX provides extensive sensor control log ging and graphing features that allow the user to view accurate real time information about system conditions The CX is equipped with many power monitoring and demand control features that give you the information you need to keep your site s energy consumption low The E2 CX is available in two models the CX 300 and CX 400 The only significant difference between the E2 CX 300 and the E2 CX 400 is the amount of C Store equipment that may be operated by a single controller Table 1 3 shows the differences between capabilities for the CX 300 and CX 400 1 2 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual
182. based on latitude and longitude and is ON when the sun sets The user will select the Board Controller Point Application and Input values from the LOOK UP menu for each field When a Lighting Schedule is config ured to use Sundown information the Lighting Schedule application automatically connects to the Sundown out put 9 10 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 2 9 9 Set Up Modem 16 08 57 ALARN C3 Modem ___ H CH Jez C8 Peer Netwrk C9 Web Server CG System General Setup GENERAL SERU alue Internal Modem 188 Pause Duration 2 F5 CANCEL F1 PREU TAB F2 NEXT TAB F3 EDIT F4 LOOK UP Figure 9 16 Modem Select Screen From the Main Menu 1 Press WWA System Configuration ica 2 Press WM Remote Communications 3 Press Modem Setup to advance to the Modem Setup screen You can choose between an internal modem one that is mounted directly on to the E2 circuit board via the PC 104 slot in previous generation E2 circuit boards or an external modem If you have a modem navigate to the Modem Port field and select Internal Modem Press LOOK UP for the Option List Selection Screen 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 E2 9 10 Set Up TCP IP RX 466 Unit 3 16 14 27 CX Tabs SETUP ALARM C2 Eng Units C3 Modem C8 Peer Netwrk C9 Web Server C8 System General Setup GENERAL SERU C1 General DHCP Enabled IP Address Subnet Mask DNS Server 1 DNS Server 2 DNS Server 3 Default
183. be added together to indicate heating and cooling demand for weeks months or years E2 does this to keep monthly logs of heat and cool degree days 10 14 2 1 Power Monitoring Input The Input Type Selection parameter defines the way the Power Monitoring input INPUT under the Inputs tab in application Setup will be used The parameter can be set to KW Analog Pulse KWH Current Amps or Current 3 phase Settings When KW Analog is selected verify the input is con nected to a board and point that is set up with Engineering Units of KW When Pulse KWH has been selected verify the input is connected to a board and point that is set up with Engineering Units of KW When Current Amps has been selected verify the input is connected to a board and point that is set up with Engineering Units of Amps When Current 3 phase has been selected verify the input is connected to a board and point that is set up with Engineering Units of Amps Note that for 3 phase three power monitoring inputs will appear under the Inputs tab of the application All inputs must be connected to board and points set up with Engineering Units of Amps 10 15 Anti Sweat Setup An anti sweat application controls one anti sweat zone An anti sweat zone is defined as one or more anti sweat heaters that use the same dewpoint or RH and tem perature sensors and the same control setpoints If all the outputs on a 20 channel PMAC panel are going to use the same se
184. be set up on different E2s than primaries this way if a single controller fails or loses communication with the other E25 there will still be a usable input source for the other E2s User This setting means the E2 s global data will read or be a User of all values coming from the network This setting is for E2s that are not con nected to the sensor itself but read the data that comes from it If the application in this E2 will be using primary or secondary inputs from other E2s then set the priority to USER Local Only This setting specifies that the input to the global data is read and sent only to within the E2 you are programming Also this means that this E2 will not read any Primary or Secondary providers from the network If using this priority setting you must enter board and point settings Example Setting Up an Outdoor Temperature Sen sor EJ Press Global Data and the Status screen opens 2 Move the cursor to the Outdoor Air Temperature OAT Mode and then choose the priority by scrolling with the mm keys 3 Press the down arrow button once to the Board and Point section and enter the board and point locations for the sensor 4 Press lt gt BACK to return to the Main Status Home screen The Outdoor Air Temperature sensor is now set up as a global device in the E2 Other global inputs can be set up using the same method as above E2 is now ready to be programmed with application
185. ble segment This termination block uses the same three pin connector as all other Echelon devices Wire the two sig nal wires to the outside terminals and connect the shield to the middle terminal see Figure 7 4 coset NOTE The recommended termination proce 4 dure for all Echelon devices is the termination block 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 2 AT END OF DAISY CHAIN 26501113 Figure 7 4 Placement and Wiring of the Termination Block 7 5 Wire Restrictions Maximum Total Segment Length The total amount of wire used to connect all E2s and associated controllers in a single segment not including devices on the other side of routers cannot be longer than 4592 feet 1400 meters If the total length of cable used is longer than 4592 feet a repeater or router will be required Routers act as communication gateways that reduce the amount of network traffic They are used when net works exceed their 63 node limit Adding a router allows you to add another daisy chain segment of 4592 feet with a maximum of 63 more nodes Repeaters boost signal strength and are only used in instances where a segment of 63 nodes or less uses more than 4592 feet of Echelon cable Refer to the Router and Repeater Installation Guide P N 026 1605 for information about router and repeater placement 7 6 Installing Echelon Devices The E2 control system has several types of peripheral
186. ble 10 5 Suction Group Inputs Wire Output Output Device Board contacts to N C up Wire fans to remain ON during comm loss Refrigeration Sole N C up Wire solenoid to remain energized OPEN during comm loss noid Set Fail safe Dip Switch to Defrost N O N O down Defrost heaters electric and hot gas will remain de energized CLOSED during comm loss Liquid Line Sole N O N O down The liquid line solenoid will remain de energized CLOSED noid Hot Gas during comm loss defrosts only EEPR ESR8 con None ESR8 point None ESR8 point The evaporator stepper regulator valve should be plugged in to a trolled circuits point on the ESR8 board only Table 10 6 Suction Group Outputs 10 4 Case Control Circuits separate Case Control Circuit application is cre ated with its own set of control parameters 10 4 1 Overview 2 Each CC 100 CS 100 or EC 2 is associated with a Case Control Circuit application in the E2 Association creates a network link between the case controller and the application which supplies the information necessary to control temperature defrost lights fans and anti sweat heaters Case circuits that use CC 100s CS 100s or EC 2s for case control rely on Case Circuit Control applications in the E2 to provide them the necessary setpoints defrost scheduling and other control parameters Unlike Standard Circuit applications Case Control Circuits do not directly cont
187. bles the user to View site specific information such site name site phone local date and time View the current version of the E2 This includes the type of unit e g RX 400 and the version of 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 2 the firmware View global data values such as outside air temper ature and humidity RX 480 Unit 3 14 08 01 CONTROLLER SETUP FULL ALARM View a list of other networked area controllers at the site including version and controller type infor Name Model mation RX400 R i E A1 03 91 16AI Connect to the selected E2 for remote configuration RO 63 01 BRO ALARM SETUP changes dia C7 Alarm Filtering Setup Access Terminal Mode Controller Alarm 1 0 Status View Alarms To access Web Services Open a browser window and enter the IP Address of your E2 controller Figure 9 37 Alarm Setup Menu CPC E2 WebServer At site THIS 01 1 Controllers at this Site ea Summary for Controller THIS 01 1 Serves IP 10 90 64 29 00 General Status Activities Figure 9 36 E2 Web Services Page 9 16 Set Up Alarming To set up alarms open the Alarm Setup menu 1 Press CD to open the Main Menu amp 2 Press System Configuration 3 Press Alarm Setup Set Up Alarming Quick Start 9 21 9 16 1 Types Apart from storing alarms it generates in its own Alarm Advisory Log E2 can also report alarms it gener ates or receives in order to notify p
188. cal combinations listed below LLEV Logic Only The Schedule Interface cell uses the input from the Light Level Interface cell as its output ignoring the value passed to it from the Basic Schedule cell Sched Only The Schedule Interface cell uses the input from the Basic Schedule cell as its output ignoring the value passed to it from the Light Level Interface cell 10 26 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual ee Both ON Both OFF From an output OFF state when both the Light Level Interface input and the Basic Schedule input are ON the resulting output command will be ON The output command will remain ON until both the Light Level and Basic Schedule inputs turn OFF Both ON Sched OFF Like the Both ON Both OFF strategy except when the Sched ule Interface output is ON it will turn off only when the Basic Schedule input turns OFF Sch ON Both OFF Like the Both ON Both OFF strategy except when the Schedule Interface output is OFF it will turn ON only when the Basic Schedule input turns ON Both ON Any OFF Like the Both ON Both OFF strategy except when the Schedule Interface output is ON it will turn OFF if any input turns OFF If desired the final result of any of the above combina tions can be inverted by setting a parameter Alternate Schedule Interface Combinations If desired you can specify an alternate means of com bining the Schedule Interface cell inputs that is used only when the Use Alt Sched Comb
189. cate with the RS 485 network port on the E2 main board The E2 main board likely needs repair or replacement Communication Port 3 Is Down 20 E2 cannot communicate with the PC 104 modem slot on the E2 main board The E2 main board likely needs repair or replacement 20 COMA is used by service personnel to attach hard ware used in test or debug functions This alarm indi cates the port that allows E2 to communicate with these devices is faulty The E2 board likely needs repair or replacement un Communication Port 4 Is Down Communication Port 6 is down 20 Completed Firmware Update The E2 s firmware was successfully updated 15 Due to a difference between configuration templates in a previous E2 version and templates in the current version configuration data could not be restored Config Loss CRC Error UE to an internal error E2 has lost configuration Config Loss File CRC Error EXE to an internal error E2 has lost configuration 0 1 Config Not Saved To Flash 2 E2 could not save configuration data to flash mem ory Controller or Device Absent From 20 The current E2 could not find the specified E2 I O Network board or Echelon controller Controller Reset 50 An ARTC MultiFlex RTU has gone through a reset Controller Shutdown 50 The E2 has gone through a shutdown LUDEDIIOIUDILI UL MEME Controller Startup 50 TheE2 has re started after a shutdown Appendix C Alarm Advisory Messages C 3 a A device
190. cates alarm LIGHTS CASE TEMP TO OTHER CASES IN CIRCUIT E PROBE TERMTEMP _ PROBE EVAPORATOR This case display can be configured to show either the discharge air temperature default the product probe tem perature or the defrost termination temperature The TD3 communicates with the E2 controller via the Echelon Network and in turn the E2 adjusts the circuit s temperature or defrost status 10 3 6 Wiring Wiring a case circuit so that it may be controlled by a Standard Circuit application primarily involves wiring all temperature sensors to 16AI Analog Input Boards and wir ing the valves and other devices on the case to a relay out put board such as an 8RO Relay Output Board Figure 10 5 shows a typical case in a circuit and the devices that must be wired for each Follow the guidelines below to wire the circuit to the E2 I O Network PRODUCT PROBE REFRIGERATION SOLENOID TYPICAL CASE IN A STANDARD CIRCUIT Figure 10 5 Typical Case in a Standard Circuit Standard Circuits 26513118 Software Overview 10 7 2 Case Temp Probe up Temperature see Table 8 1 on to 6 page 8 3 Defrost Termination May be digital see Table 8 1 on Probes up to 6 Klixon or Tem page 8 3 perature Product Probe up to Temperature see Table 8 1 on 6 page 8 3 Clean Switch not pic Digital see Table 8 1 on tured page 8 3 Door Switch not pic Digital see Table 8 1 on tured page 8 3 Ta
191. ce may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation CE COMPLIANCE NOTICE Class A Product Information for Einstein E2 Controllers The CPC Einstein and E2 controllers are Class A products In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures This covers e All Einstein family product types RX Refrigeration Controller 830 xxxx BX Building HVAC Controller 831 xxxx and all ver sion models 300 400 500 e All E2 family product types RX Refrigeration Controller 834 xxxx BX Building HVAC Controller 835 xxxx CX Convenience Store Controller 836 xxxx and all version models 300 400 500 Table of Contents AI AAA 1 1 1 1 THE E2 REFRIGERATION CONTROLLER acid 1 1 1 2 THE EX BUILDING CONTROLLER ui is 1 1 1 3 THE E2 CONVENIENCE STORE CONTROLLER cccsccecsssecessececessecesecesessecessseccsseceesseeceesececssseceseeecessecenesseeensesesnas 1 2 1 4 NETWORKING OV RV a add E EE ee des S EEO OES EESE EEES 1 2 LAL SED ALO NR e Ecc 1 2 1 4 2 The E2 Echelon Lonworks Network eese eene een en sehen ete te nee e nnns ne e esse ense se eite eret e nnns nnne 1 3 1 4 3 Interconnection With Other E2s enrii aar n E a A e nnns nne ese eese e e treten enn aS 1 4 1 5 DOCUMENTATION OVERVIEW e tir ette ee aeree eee
192. ce to be added to a network without having to manually assign it a unique IP address DHCP supports a mix of static and dynamic IP addresses Quick Start 9 11 9 11 Rates Set Up Network Baud eves NOTE If a baud rate is changed in this screen y the controller must be rebooted turned OFF then ON again to make the baud rate change occur 9 11 1 RS 232 Baud Rate To access RS 232 and I O Network baud rates 1 Press BP to open the Main Menu 2 Press WA System Configuration 3 Press WEB System Information 4 Press General Controller Info and use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the baud fields The RS 232 Baud rate field determines the speed of communications between the E2 and an RS 232 device such as a satellite link or PC The baud rate selected in this field should correspond with the baud rate for the RS 232 device For example if connecting a PC to this port the PC s COM port should be set up to communicate at the same rate as what is set in this field There are four options to choose from Select one of the options below using LOOK UP depending on the type of connection Port Disabled When this option is selected the RS 232 port will be disabled 9600 Baud recommended for satellite 19 2 Kbaud recommended for modem 38 4 Kbaud recommended for modem 57 6 Kbaud recommended for modem 115 2 Kbaud recommended for direct connect 9 12 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual
193. ceived input data and the setpoint information are detected a signal is either sent to the proper 8RO relay or an existing signal is dis continued Through the use of this relay signal control functions that can be properly maintained by a simple con tact closure sequence are effectively operated by the E2 The 8RO board is easily installed and operated within the CPC Network environment because of its straightfor ward design Several of these features are shown in Figure 2 10 LEGEND AC Power Connection Fail Safe Dip Switch 1 0 Network Connection Output Connection 8 places Power Receive LED Relay Fuses 8 places Termination Resistance Jumpers LED Relay Indicators 8 places Address and Baud Rate Dip Switch 26501106 Figure 2 10 8RO Relay Output Board 2 8 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 ER 2 2 5 4A0 Analog Output Boards The 4AO Analog Output Board P N 810 3030 Fig ure 2 12 is configured with four analog output connec tions that provide a variable voltage signal to any of four analog devices that may be controlled by a single E2 AC Input Power Connection Network Address Rotary Dials LED Power Indicator Fail Safe Dip Switch 1 0 Network Connection LED Output Indicators Terminating Resistance Jumpers AC Power Input Connection VO Network Connection LED Power Indicator Terminating Resistance Jumpers Address and B
194. cess Log Lost CRC Error 20 An internal error has caused the loss of E2 s user Advisory Log Lost CRC Error 20 An internal error has caused the loss of E2 s alarm Alarm Limit Exceeded User An Analog Sensor or a Suction Group has an input ER A value greater than one of its high limit setpoints Alarm s Were Cleared A user has erased one or more alarms from the alarm VENENUM OMM Alarm s Were Reset A user has reset one or more alarms from the alarm O UMEN All Config Logs Were Cleared 30 A user has performed a clean out on this E2 remov ETT al programming ana sired dat O All Lights On User A Global Data applications All Lights On input has ee AA turned ON to switch on all the lights NVs Alternate Hi Limit Exceeded An analog value in an application using alternate setpoints has risen above its programmed Hi Limit setpoint Alternate Low Limit Exceeded An analog value in an application using alternate setpoints has risen above its programmed Lo Limit setpoint Appl Not Keeping Setpoint An Air Handling Unit or Heat Cool Heat Cool appli cation has not achieved setpoint for a prolonged period of time Application Cell Is Lost 15 An internal error has caused the loss of an entire O e Application Config Has Changed A user has changed the configuration of one of E2 Betis ee Appendix C Alarm Advisory Messages C 1 Priority Application Setpoint Has Changed Ea user has changed a setpoint in one of E2 s applica tions
195. cess level Whenever a username and password are entered during login the E2 searches the user records for the username and password If found the E2 will log the user in at the access level chosen for the user in the user records The access level determines how many of the E2 s fea tures the user may use The E2 uses four access levels one being the lowest and four being the highest Table 9 7 gives a description of each level and the capabilities they have access to Read only access Users may generally only view status screens setpoints and some system settings Level 2 Setpoint and bypass access Users may perform all the tasks a level 1 user may plus they may change control setpoints and bypass some devices Level 3 Configuration and override access Users may perform all the tasks a level 2 user may plus they may override system set tings create new cells and program new applications Level 4 System Administrator access All E2 func tions are accessible by a level 4 user Table 9 7 User Access Levels 9 12 1 Changing Required User Access Levels Quick Start 9 13 2 The Level Required For table in this screen is used to customize what access level is required to perform certain actions within the E2 unit There are four rows in this table each of which corresponds to a different type of E2 function or application Refrigeration Control This category includes changes or actions inv
196. ch with the arrow keys and press This will take you to STAGES HP STATUS RUNTIME CONDENSER the Status screen cm W 8 82 CONDENSER81 CR M C 3 C Hh GENERAL INFORMATION Sat Suc Temp 3 2 Rack Fail Current HP Capacity F2 CONDENSER F3 CIRCUITS y F5 SETUP Figure 11 10 Status Screen RX 400 Version Shown Setup Screens The Setup utility is the interface used to change set Navigation Operator s Guide to Using the E2 11 5 tings and setpoints and define inputs and outputs in the E2 Figure 9 11 shows a typical Setup screen and its pri mary elements Index Tabs RX 466 Unit 3 SETUP 69 69 65 Use Ctrl X to Select Ci General 10 07 33 ALARM CS Defr Times CO MORE CX Tabs C4 Defrost C6 Inputs C7 Outputs C8 Alarms C9 Notices Figure 11 11 Index Tabs RX 400 Version Shown The 10 boxes at the top of the screen labeled C1 through CO are known as the index tabs These tabs pro vide you with a short index of the screens that are used to set up an application C1 through C0 represent the screen numbers C1 being screen 1 C2 being screen 2 and so Ctrl on Press the il key and the number of the index tab next to the C and the cursor highlights that index tab Each of the Setup screens that you may access will have a name beside its number In Figure 9 11 for exam ple you will notice some tabs have names while others are blank This is because there are only four screens in
197. ch cools the refrigerant as water is evaporated Control of the evaporative condenser is simi lar in ways to the air cooled strategy in that the Condenser Control application uses PID control to activate or deacti vate fans thus increasing or decreasing the amount of evaporative cooling Like air cooled condensers evaporative condensers may be controlled by discharge pressure or temperature They may also be controlled by water sump temperature In addition each evaporative condenser may have up to 16 override sensors either temperature or pressure that allow the condenser to be overridden to fast recovery mode See Section 10 2 5 Fast Recovery 10 2 3 Fan Control Condenser Control applications can control three dif ferent kinds of fans single speed fans up to 12 stages two speed fans and variable speed fans All fan types are controlled by PID control in other words the Condenser Control application generates a percentage from 0 to 100 that corresponds to the amount of total fan power that should be active Single speed fans translate the PID percentage into a percentage of total fan capacity For example if the PID percentage is 75 then 75 of all condenser fan stages will be ON Two speed fans use Cut In Cut Out setpoints to trans late the percentage into an OFF LO or HI fan state Variable speed fans simply use the percentage to determine the fan speed Thus a 51 PID percentage will result in the f
198. chieve stability at any value between 29 and 31 without the I Mode trying to bring the error to zero Application The practical use of Minimum Accumulated Error is to set up a close enough zone around your PID setpoint When the control input is within the zone PID will not worry about making any T adjustments to attempt to equalize the input and the setpoint Proportional Mode will handle any minor input changes that occur within this zone Filtering Filtering is a feature commonly used by CC 100s in valve control and it thus sometimes called valve filter ing The primary purpose of filtering is to dampen the rate of change of the PID percentage in an effort to make the PID control loop less reactive The filtering feature takes samples of the PID output percentage at regular intervals which are determined by a parameter called the filter period Every time a new filter period interval occurs the PID percentage sampled during the last period interval is subtracted from the current PID percentage from the current period interval The result of this subtraction is multiplied by a param eter called the filter percentage 0 10046 to yield the actual amount the PID percentage will change Over time the application of the filter percentage to the change in PID position will result in a PID control loop with a smaller amount of reaction to changes in the input Example A stepper EEV valve on a CC 100 is con D 6
199. concconconncononnnonnnonononnonncnnc ennen eret en treten teet nan retenti ene 9 QUICK START E oon stS 9 1 9 LOGGING ON cette ita DP DPI of ete A ess 9 1 9 2 CLEANING OUT THE CONTROLLER i ineteetsteete tese ite oe deter ert E ebbe Prae E rte iei noster tee decet to eei ueteri 9 1 9 3 SETTING NUMBER OF NETWORK DEVICES ococccnonccononnnononnnonnconnonnconncnnonnecnnennnonn none er Ee nn non eran conan encon non neon ron treten nennen 9 2 9 4 SETTING NUMBER OF APPLICATIONS csccesseesseceesecseescecscesaecseceacssecsseesecseeseseaeeseeeaeesaecaecaaecaecsassaecaeessesesenseseenes 9 3 9 5 TARMAN STATUS HOME SCREEN iesus eerte tt tegi eee p Ec DO ER A E E ee A a E Eai 9 3 9 5 1 Customizing the Home Screen s eie i me i ere i e a ee i DE EEA acicate 9 3 9 6 COMMON SCREEN ELEMENTS err erre rate eis i eee ep Eee EE Re rb pet EEEE o ea Brio serbe esee prep e E pipi 9 4 DOL The Header e e AS hee met Ace ate bee AS 9 4 90 1 1 Header Icons voii dels ERRE S E ERE E a atacada ind cove 9 4 9 6 2 TNE FUNCION KEYS te e ERR dece e E a e eite ex eR rete tU sue retis 9 4 96 3 The Help Eine ue eee ree e eie tg ei iie estin imber tren 9 4 9 7 SCREEN TYPES m 9 5 9 73 The Mam Md e sd 9 5 9 752 Status SChEONS A ii 9 5 III ENE A CONS Men seeded uua uS 9 6 IRA The Setup SCreehsic iie tedio ie NR vit ea eee ebbe rie rere deeds 9 7 9 7 5 System Configuration Menu iecit te tar ei ERO eie P pete te Har R p eige
200. cone et rentrer nenne enint entente 7 2 TA DEVICE TERMINACION eS a Gs SPR sh SA RA Sh ie eie RR 7 2 7 4 1 Using a Termination Block P N 535 2715 to Terminate a Daisy Chain esee 7 2 TD WIRE RESTRICTIONS is 7 3 7 6 INSTALLING ECHELON DEVICES nit mr end rte in ttr tei e pU ee reris 7 3 76 1 Powering Echelon Devices seco sie pedi aka bete be iii 7 3 LEDS mimo Cae a A sare i c Msn t rmi ts E Ere 7 4 7 8 OPEN ECHELON DEVICE CONNECTIVITY eese esee nenen nens en nens n entes enne sr RR tese ern rn sent serrer sintesi teen inneren 7 4 7 8 1 Configuring Echelon Devices aetas e De eet te a iere reet pet me Eri rers 7 4 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual Table of Contents vii SL TrOUDIESHOOtN Gs 2 tl tle te o RO i ie saat e E E e t NR 7 5 8 INPUT AND OUTPUT SETUP e eeeeeeeeeeeeee eese tns en sens ttn tasa sn sn se tates ooroo esos tasa sse tn eto ss sn senses S EISS s iS 8 1 8 1 THE 16AI 8IO AND MULTIFLEX INPUTS 0 ccccccsssccccecssssceccecessececeeceessnececesensaecececeseaasececesesacaeccecessaaeceecsenaaeceeeeeeas 8 1 1 Connecting Sensors to Input Boards iuis td dete Pei dete Pese ven Lue ne e Do re bi beds 81 1 T Wiring ete tee aee e ERE ERE E bte are Ee e a eee ED es 81 12 Sensor Wirn Types e cone tre eon RR VOR due aono ER 8 1 13 Input Type Dip Switches iicet tee eee He ed e e e He HERE A le e 8 12 Power Conhection oae ed eie eee HERE TE ERR dee te IMMER eR Shed Inp
201. control algorithm for the case lights other than to leave the lights ON during normal operation There are only two cases where the lights are not always ON 1 An override from an E2 takes over control of the case lights This override may take the form of a manual switch or a schedule output 2 Ifthe CC 100 is set up to use Walk In Box Con trol the case lights default to OFF and only come ON when the door switch is tripped See Section 10 4 10 Walk In Freezer Control 10 4 9 Clean Wash Mode Clean Mode is a special kind of case deactivation designed specifically for washing or performing mainte nance on the case Clean Mode is initiated by activation of a cleaning switch input or by a command sent from a hand held ter minal or an E2 During Clean Mode refrigerant flow is turned OFF all fans and anti sweat heaters are deacti vated and the lights are turned either ON or OFF as pro grammed by the user Clean Modes may be either fixed or timed Fixed Clean Modes begin when the clean switch is turned ON and end when the clean switch is turned OFF Timed Clean Modes begin when the clean switch is turned ON and ends a specific time afterwards The user specifies how long the Case Control Circuits wash mode will last End of Mode Warning To warn service personnel that wash mode is about to end the case controller will blink the case lights for five seconds After five seconds of blinking the case fan will activate and
202. control in that Superheat Control is not used In liquid side control the valve aperture is controlled in order to achieve a super heat setpoint In suction side control the CC 100 changes the valve aperture to achieve the case temperature set point Case temperature may be supplied by a supply air sen sor return air sensor or a mixture of the two values Temperature Control uses PID control to operate the valve and keep the case temperature input value equal to the case temperature setpoint Recovery Mode Recovery Mode for suction side CC 100s is slightly different than Recovery Mode for liquid side controllers Suction side CC 100s enter Recovery Mode only after a defrost or cleaning cycle and it does so in order to bring the case temperature down to a level that is controllable by Temperature Control During Recovery Mode the valve is opened to a fixed percentage until the case temperature falls below the case setpoint When this occurs the CC 100 exits Recovery Mode and begins normal Temperature Con trol 10 4 4 Defrost Control The physical aspects of defrost control such as shut ting off valves and turning on defrost heat sources is han dled by the CC 100 When operating on its own a CC 100 initiates defrost cycles at programmed time intervals When connected to a Case Circuit application the CC 100s defrost times are coordinated and scheduled by the E2 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 2 10 4 4 1 Defros
203. creen press ES to open the Actions menu 3 Select Manual Defrost from the list and the Cir 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 E2 cuit Bypass screen opens RX 466 Unit 3 10 36 27 STANDARD CKT BYP FULL RLARRH Circuit Name STANDARD CKT61 CIRCUIT STATE Refrigeration BYPASS STATE NORMAL Bypass Command Scroll using Next Prev keys F4 LOOK UP F5 CANCEL Figure 11 14 Circuit Bypass Screen RX 400 Version Shown 4 The Circuit Bypass screen see Figure 11 14 will display the circuit name its current state and the bypass state The Bypass Command field will be highlighted RX 466 Unit 3 16 46 28 OPTION LOOKUP FULL ALARM Option List Selection Select Description Select Mo Action CI Defrost Emergency Defrost Clean End Manual Mode Use Up Down Arrow keys or function keys to select ent F1 SELECT 1 F3 BEGINNING Figure 11 15 Option List Selection Screen 5 Press MZM LOOK UP The Option List Selection screen see Figure 11 15 will give you five choices of defrost modes No Action Normal no manual defrost state Defrost This is the normal defrost mode The defrost ends according to the terminating device sensor or fail safe time whichever occurs first Emergency Defrost The defrost time goes the full duration of programmed defrost time and ignores any defrost termination sensors Overrides e Clean This mode disables all refrigeration and defrost so that the
204. ctions The board receives either digital or analog data from sensors wired to any of the 16 input connections located on the board This board has been discontinued and is no longer available for sale 2 3 2 The 8ROe Discontinued LEGEND Echelon In Echelon Out Power Network LED Network Failsafe Service Button Form C Outputs 8 10 Service LED Output LEDs 8 Status LED Figure 2 16 SROe The 8ROe P N 810 4010 is an Echelon based input 2 10 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual E2 board similar in function to its I O Network counterpart the 8RO The 8ROe board is the direct link between the E2 and component operation Information gathered by the controller from the input boards is checked against current stored setpoints If differences in the received input data and the setpoint information are detected a signal is either sent to the proper 8ROe relay or an existing signal is dis continued Through the use of this relay signal control functions that can be properly maintained by a simple con tact closure sequence are effectively operated by the E2 The 8ROe features Form C contacts for wiring outputs as either normally open or normally closed Fail safe dip switches on the SROe allow the installation technician to specify the desired state of each relay in case of communi cations loss This board has been discontinued and is no longer available for sale 2 3 3 EC 2s Select Button
205. current date without assistance from CPC Technical Service 1 800 829 2724 Active Time The Active Time is the current time in the controller s internal clock This time may be changed by entering the new time in the Active Time field When a new time is entered in the Active Time field it is sent across the network and changed on all device clocks so that all devices can remain synchronized Time Zone Time zone is where the time zone of the E2 is entered Each time zone is represented by a time zone offset that corresponds to the amount each time zone must add or subtract from Greenwich Mean Time GMT to get the correct local time Choose the time zone by using the LOOK UP tab Date Format Dates may be presented and entered in either of two ways month day year format and day month year for mat Choose the most appropriate date format by using the LOOK UP tab Daylight Savings Dates The Daylight Savings Dates type determines how the E2 will make date adjustments for daylight savings time Quick Start 9 9 Use the LOOK UP tab to cycle through the options in each of the fields There are four options STANDARD US DLT DATES the E2 will use the standard United States s method of determining Daylight savings time dates The Daylight savings time adjustment will occur automatically on Sun day of the first week of April and end on the Sun day of the fifth week of October of every year USER DEFINED D
206. d RECUERDE EE ee RE RR DER SED DERE coved anteaters 10 42 10 18 4 Configuration o eie e o te RR E TE OR UE REPRE RE DO PERDER ER Pte EIE 10 42 J0 18 5 Setpoints eoe i er eA ien dy e ert ste d t o deo eng 10 42 UBI WEITERE 10 43 UE WAP Unum ea ed eS 10 43 10 19 PULSE ACCUMULATION 1 REPE Rede i Re ERE PO IO RO ier EROR P erts 10 43 LOLOL COVE WA RR n e RARI INSERERE ER m ee a 10 43 10 19 2 Configuration nue eO dere i e OR a E UR PEE E eb 10 43 LOGS Outputs c iiia eo OE re OR dar UR ap REI ER REN EUR 10 43 10 19 4 Accumulator Reset Types uisi rm anales PETERE 10 44 J0 19 5 Logging arrere deis d eic eame edere e e bd t n d e t d dvo eis 10 44 10 19 6 Migh Triple eiue pte narret ei RD eem eres 10 44 10 20 IRRIGATION CONTROL sii reset ttr ee ene e e I et ree e PI Eee beoe esent erat e aee ee Ree 10 44 10 20 1 OVeEVIEW a i cia o c e e RR E ERR ERR Re capt cscs RP ERR HR B RC RE M Caere 10 44 10 20 2 Zones and Cycles iie mex tu ae e INVE NX Ne neges ier REPRE ERU IE 10 44 10 20 2 1 Cycle Control Types 5 ee bete Rete eee edant ei eee 10 44 10 20 2 2 A tiles tebe oath utate tenenda v dii 10 45 10 20 23 VOIUTIIG Seniesa re Here eere bee e ED ee e eb e nete Or llantas 10 45 10 20 3 Cycle Schedule s nui i ettet M RS Ie eed 10 45 10 20 4 Zone Inhibit iios dete A t e A EP ei eagle 10 45 xii Table of Contents 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 10 20 41 Eumned A A RPP ES ires esee A 10 204 2 Vol ine A lali 10 20 4 3 Ra
207. d S1 on the SmartESR board 3 Set the network baud rate using rockers 6 and 7 4 Set the termination jumpers UP terminated if at either end of a daisy chain Otherwise set jumpers DOWN no termination 5 Wire each stepper valve by connecting the stepper valve molex connector to one of the eight molex connectors along the top of the board 6 Connect the SmartESR to a Class 2 80VA 24VAC center tapped power transformer One SmartESR board SHIELDED TWISTED PAIR BELDEN 8761 FOR PLENUM amp USE BELDEN 82761 88761 OR EQUIV VO NET WIRE to same color WIRE SHIELD TO CENTER PIN per transformer For more information on transformer wiring refer to the SmartESR manual P N 026 1720 Set the network address ADDRESS using the first 5 rockers TT T7 of dip switch S1 ii BOARD 5 Valid address range 1 31 madii S1 BOARD 1 BOARD 2 BOARD 3 BOARD 6 aM BOARD 7 i BOARD 8 z BOARD 9 BOARD 10 BOARD 11 BOARD 13 BOARD 15 BOARD 16 80 a Go T0811 aaa aL BOARD 17 BOARD 18 BOARD 18 BOARD 22 BOARD 23 BOARD 24 ONU BOARD 7 e 7 BOARD 30 TIME BOARD 29 an BOARD 26 WIRE to same color
208. d during power failure A fail safe dip switch is used to determine connection status during net work failure 8 2 1 Figure 8 8 shows how to wire the three terminal Form C contact Wiring Form C Contacts One wire of the two wire connection should always be connected to the middle terminal The second wire must be connected to the N C terminal if you want the relay to be closed ON during power failure or the N O terminal if you want the relay to be OFF during power failure RELAY IS OPEN ON POWER FAILURE RELAY IS CLOSED ON POWER FAILURE Figure 8 8 Form C Contact Wiring 8 2 2 MultiFlex Relay Outputs 8 10 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual ee The MultiFlex boards that have relay outputs all mod els except the MultiFlex 16 each have eight relays that energize and de energize to control output loads When setting up an output on one of these relays you must make two important decisions 1 Do you want an ON command from your control ler to mean energize the relay or de energize the relay and 2 When the relay is de energized as is the case when the 8RO or 8IO goes off line or loses power do you want the contacts to be OPEN or CLOSED Decision 1 is made by setting the fail safe switch This is a bank of eight switches labeled S2 on the 8RO and 8RO FC S3 on the 810 and S1 on the MultiFlex plug in output board Each switch corresponds to an out put on the board switch 1 output
209. d is not adequately lowering Mode 1 KW Input Is Greater Than Setpoint Mode 1 is usually the first stage of demand shedding used by Demand Control It begins when the KW input rises above the setpoint When this occurs Demand Control begins by shedding 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 ee one level at a time starting with First Shed 1 and con tinuing sequentially through all First Rotational and Last levels as shown in Figure 10 14 The Demand Control application will continue to shed levels in this sequence until the KW goes below the set point minus a user defined hysteresis value and the inte gral error is less than zero When both these conditions are met the shed levels will be restored in last shed first restore order Mode 2 KW Input Has Been Greater Than Setpoint for 1 4 Demand Window And Is Still Going Up Mode 2 begins when the KW input has been above the setpoint for an amount of time equal to 1 4 the demand window duration and the KW input has not begun to come down In short if Mode 1 is not working to lower demand Mode 2 will take over When Mode 2 begins Demand Control sheds two lev els at a time using the same sequence of priorities as Mode 1 Demand Control continues to shed in this manner until the KW goes below the setpoint minus a user defined hysteresis value and the integral error is less than zero When both these conditions are met the shed levels will be restored in last shed first restore
210. d screwdriver into the two 8 89 cm slots on either side of the top of the sensor case and twist to separate the back plate from the case 3 Remove the knock outs from the back plate before mounting so wires may be threaded 4 1 2 11 43 cm through 4 Mount the back plate to the wall using the two open mounting holes on the top and bot tom of the plate 5 Replace the cover on top of the back plate by lining up the tabs and snap the lid back into place Screw Opening 26509028 Figure 3 27 Outdoor RH Sensor Mounting Dimensions m The outdoor RH sensor P N 203 5761 Bark Panel gt en The outdoor RH sensor P N 203 5761 should always be mounted on the north side of the building if in the Northern Hemisphere or on the south side if in the South ern Hemisphere The sensor should be mounted under an Koa mu overhang or otherwise out of direct sunlight if possible j SSS Y Mount the RH sensor P N 203 5761 as follows num end 1 Secure the rear side of the enclosure to the out side wall using the two mounting brackets as shown in Figure 3 28 The tube holding the sen sor element should point straight down 3 50 89 mm Figure 3 26 Indoor RH Mounting Dimensions 3 5 8 2 Outdoor RH Sensors 2 If you will be running the sensor cable through the wall behind the sensor cut or drill a hole in the wall through the hole in the enclosure essai
211. d time of peak value are stored in this log The Daily log will contain data for the last 48 days Date total accumulation for that day maximum average for that day maximum peak value time of peak value and minutes tripped are stored in this log The Monthly log will contain data for the last 24 months The log will be updated on a user specified day of the month Date total accumulation for that month maxi mum average for that month maximum peak value time of peak value and date of peak value are stored in this log Application graphing generates hourly daily and monthly graphs from the application log data All graphs show the total and max average On the main Status screen consumption for the current hour day and month are displayed 10 19 6 High Trip A high trip output can be triggered if the Accumula tor s total quantity exceeds a user defined setpoint The trip point output can be controlled by any of three input sources The output will be turned ON when the input source is equal to or greater than a user specified value The total amount of time the application has been in a high trip condition is shown in the Time In Trip Today output 10 44 E2 RX BX CX ISO Manual 2 10 20 Irrigation Control 10 20 1 Overview Irrigation control is an application used for the control ling of sprinkler systems This application controls water ing by duration of time or water usage parameters Days of the week
212. d to unoccupied mode heating is suspended and the temperature is allowed to coast down to the unoccu pied setpoint OCCUPIED SET POINT UNOCCUPIED 5 SETPOINT 26512036 Figure 10 20 Diagram of Pre Start and Pre Stop Operation Intelligent Pre Starts and Pre Stops OSS is designed to handle pre starts and pre stops in the most energy efficient manner possible Every time a pre start or pre stop occurs OSS measures the amount of time it takes to bring the temperature from the previous setpoint to within the comfort zone of the new setpoint a user defined range of values above and below the set point within which the temperature is considered accept able This duration is used to determine the average rate of temperature change called the K factor The K factor is stored in the memory along with the average value of the outdoor air temperature during the pre start or pre stop Over time collected K factor data will be sorted and combined into a table As a result by constantly observing and recording the results of previous 10 40 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 2 pre starts and pre stops OSS will be able to intelligently guess how much time a pre start or pre stop mode should last based on the outside temperature Heat Cools keep track of three different kinds of K fac tors Heat K factor used to guess pre start durations for Heat Cools operating in heating mode Cool K factor
213. dding Levels Some applications have a single input usually called DEMAND SHED that when ON sheds the application Each application is programmed with a specific demand bump value that is added or subtracted from the control setpoints when this input comes ON Other applications notably HVAC applications have two inputs a primary and a secondary usually called PRI DEMAND SHED and SEC DEMAND SHED Each input has its own demand bump value so that when the primary is ON the primary demand bump is in effect and when the secondary is ON the secondary demand bump is in effect When both of these inputs are ON the demand bump values are added subtracted together and applied to the setpoint s As a result two levels of shedding are pos sible for a single application Example An air conditioner with a cooling setpoint of Demand Control 70 F has a primary demand bump value of 2 and a sec ondary demand bump value of 2 In a typical Demand Control application setup the PRI DEMAND SHED input would be one of the first inputs to go into shed when this occurs the bump value is added to the cooling setpoint raising it to 72 F The SEC DEMAND SHED would be set up to shed later if necessary as a second level of shedding for the air conditioner When this input is turned ON the setpoint is raised by the secondary demand bump value Since the PRI DEMAND SHED input is still ON both values are added to the setpoint ra
214. de variety of input output and smart control solutions all of which are based on a single universal hardware plat form The board design uses flash uploadable firmware and plug in expansion boards to configure the base plat form board and apply it for use as an input board relay output board analog output board or a combination I O board 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 2 2 2 3 4 MultiFlex 16 Input Board wi ioi iit i111 Address and Baud Rate Dip Switch Input Dip Switches Input Connections 16 Transducer Power Out General Status LED AC Input Power Connection Termination Resistance Jumpers three 1 0 Network Connection 1 0 Net Tx and Rx LEDS Hand Held Terminal Port Figure 2 7 MultiFlex 16 Input Board The MultiFlex 16 input board offers sixteen combina tion analog digital input points for use by CPC E2 and REFLECS control systems The MultiFlex 16 may be used in retrofits with no additional hardware or software setup or upgrades The MultiFlex 16 communicates with the site control ler via an RS 485 connection to a REFLECS COM A amp D Network or an E2 I O Network Dip switches on the board set the network ID board number and baud rate The board also provides both 5VDC and 12VDC output voltage points for use in powering transducers or other input devices that require power The MultiFlex 16 has a hand held terminal interface which may be used by technicians to view the in
215. ducers alongside food products in a refrigeration case or freezer The product probe uses a thermistor type temperature sen sor in a sealed cylindrical container approximately 16 oz A magnet is contained at the bottom the probe s enclosure to allow easy attachment to a side or bottom of a refrigeration case 3 5 8 Humidity Sensors and Humidistats 3 5 8 1 Indoor RH Sensor The indoor relative humidity sensor should be mounted in a central location within the zone to be mea sured away from doors windows vents heaters and out side walls that could affect temperature readings The sensor should be between four and six feet from the floor Note that this sensor generates a small amount of heat therefore do not mount temperature sensors directly above RH sensors Mount RH sensor P N 203 5750 as follows 1 Remove the two screws from the sides of the enclosure and remove the cover 2 Mount the sensor to the wall using the two mounting holes near the flattened corners of the mounting plate as shown in Figure 3 25 3 Replace the cover and the cover mounting screws 4 13 cm INDOOR MOUNTING DIMENSIONS 26509027 Figure 3 25 Indoor RH Mounting Dimensions Mount RH sensor P N 203 5751 as follows Mounting 3 9 2 1 With a flat head screwdriver push down the middle tab on the top of the sensor case and pop the lid off to expose the circuit board o A 3 1 2 2 Insert the flat hea
216. e A E O O btt attentis 3 5 2 2 Mounting 3 5 3 Outside Temperature Sensor esses 3 5 3 1 Location 3 5 3 2 MOU B ae RR REOR RENI e RETURN E Eo Dae 3 5 4 Insertion Temp rature Probe eed eee ge oett o FU ege idee te FER eee reete es Tue RES 3 5 4 1 Location 3 54 2 IMOUNUN A A EEE RT RP ERE NE UPPER RE ROA 3 33 Supply and Returm Air SeRSOEFS itte teet hd EE rei det ee dettes 3 5 6 Refrigeration System Temperature Probes and Sensors BAS Ook LO Cath OM OO 3 5 6 2 Mounting Bullet and Pipe Mount Sensors 3 5 7 Product Temperature Probes o itte ee a tai geste prede iter d appetere 3 5 8 Humidity Sensors and Humidistats 3 35 81 Indoor REL SENSOR rsisi netter ER He ata Dad epic ned bae etti e Oto Oe EH RR HR 39 8 2 Outdoor REL Sefsots Vent ene be ete a re peri e e Pe E PER Ego ti aeree Tenn 3 5 8 3 Duct mounted Insertion RH Probe 3 5 0 Dewpoint Probe 3 5 9 1 Location 35 02 Mo ntIng to eterno doe Ha o Ee ue anb te 35 3 10 Light Level Sensor iere De ie saoute sles resorte AU EU badge ssuapevesvesuvesteushagpasty 3 5 10 1 Location 3 9102 MOUNN 2 sz eme etm cette dde eue ete cubed eevee sl elt sod oe SOM eese e oio NE dibs a Eee 3 294 Ti Guid Bevel SCS OVS sos cu ce tuo tei t eret etd need 3 5 12 Refrigerant Leak Detectors eset ieten te theater ehe arn eie eek a IN andado cie ne Eea nb vane euer eese desee uh 4 E2 HARDWARE SETUP Lese 4 1 4 1 SSETIING UP THE EZ iih ihid iet eet see e edito ee
217. e I O boards communicate with E2 as if they are one or more of these types of boards In this manual and in the E2 interface when you encounter these board names bear in mind that they are terms that represent many types of boards Table 5 1 describes all the actual boards or board components for each E2 board type Board Names and Terminology Board Translation Boards That Type Match Board Type 16AI 16 Any I O board that 16AlI discontinued has digital and ana 810 discontinued log inputs The i inputs of a combina MultiFlex 16 tion T O board 810 or MultiFlex combo board are by them selves treated as one 16AI The inputs on all Mul tiFlex combo boards 88 88A0 168 168A0 AII versions of the Gateway board some versions behave like as multiple 16AIs Any I O board with 8RO relay outputs The SROSMT relay outputs of a combination I O board 8IO or Multi all MultiFlex combo boards 88 88AO 168 168A0 SIO discontinued Any I O board with 4AO analog outputs The SIO discontinued analog outputs of a combination I O The analog outputs on board 81IO or Multi the MultiFlex 88AO and 168AO The relay outputs on Flex combo board are by themselves treated as one 8RO Flex combo board are by themselves treated as one 8RO Any I O board with 12VDC digital pulse outputs 8DO including all versions of the PMAC and PMACII anti sweat control ler and digital
218. e InSite etc controllers All peer communications occur over this port 6 4 1 Closed Network Layout 6 4 Ethernet Network Layouts d2 4 d d Echelon daisy chain The two types of network options for E2 controllers using Ethernet communications are 1 Closed Network E2 devices are not connected A to a store s LAN The only devices on the net d A MA 3 mit N work are the E2 controllers themselves This network type is used if there is no need to inte grate the network into the company s intranet Ut E2 Unit 3 Ethernet Ethernet Ethemet SSeS ise Hub Switch Remote UltraSite a NOTE Contact your IT Network Administra A 4 tor for setup parameters for both closed and open networks 2 Open Network E2 devices are connected to the store s LAN Devices on the network include E2s and other Ethernet TCP IP devices This network type is used if the network will be con nected to the store s LAN i 3 t 8 E g 2 8 2 o a Figure 6 1 Closed Network Layout The E2 peer Ethernet network facilitates communica g R niacin tions between E2 controllers These include at least the following e Routing of messages between external entities such as UltraSite InSite and non gateway E2 controllers e Distribution of global data and other network variables such as system time controller iden tification etc e Communication between E2 co
219. e Overview 10 27 10 10 Demand Control Demand Control applications are used by E2 to keep the total power usage of the building environmental sys tem below a specific demand setpoint dictated by the power company Demand Control applications achieve this by reducing power consumption in one or more appli cations in the other E2 applications as necessary until the total KW is below the setpoint This process is called load shedding The Demand Control application is designed to calcu late power usage in much the same way power companies do which ensures that it will be able to meet the power company s demand limit accurately The Demand Control application is also designed with a large amount of flexi bility in the way load shedding is prioritized which allows users to maximize power economization with a minimal amount of interference into the normal operations of the building s HVAC systems 10 10 1 Introduction to Demand Limit Control Power companies supply power to consumers at a fixed rate per kilowatt hour until a pre defined level of energy consumption is reached This level is called the demand limit When the demand limit is exceeded the rate is greatly increased as a penalty for high power demand by the consumer Typically once the demand limit is exceeded the increased rate is charged for the remain der of the year To determine if a consumer has reached the demand limit the power company arbitrarily monito
220. e between these two values is multiplied by the filter ratio which is a percentage between 0 and 100 The result of this multiplication is the output value Note that if the filter ratio is at 100 or if the Filter cell is dis abled the input is not modified by the Filter cell 10 12 2 5 The Override Cell The Override cell s function is to provide a method of overriding the analog output going to the Sequencer and PWM cells to a user specified value instead of the value called for by the Filter cell The Override cell can override the output to any value between 0 and 100 and may be either fixed or timed A fixed override remains overrid den until the user deactivates the override while a timed override remains in effect until a user specified time has elapsed Time Scheduling and Holidays 10 12 3 Output Cell Descriptions The Loop Sequence Control application has three con trol outputs a standard 0 100 analog output a set of up to eight staged outputs and a pulse width modulation PWM output The analog control output comes directly from the Override cell However the same control output is fed into the Sequencer and PWM cells for translation into digital staged outputs and pulse width modulation 10 12 3 1 The Sequencer Cell The Sequencer cell simply activates a certain percent age of the Digital State 1 8 outputs based on the percent age of the control output For example if the control output is 50 the S
221. e correct subnet mask value and enter it in this field The default value 255 255 255 0 is the subnet mask commonly used for small networks Set Up TCP IP Primary DNS Contact your network administrator to see if a Primary DNS value is required for this E2 If so enter the Primary DNS address supplied by your administrator in this field If not leave this field set to 0 0 0 0 Secondary DNS Contact your network administra tor to see if a Secondary DNS value is required for this E2 If so enter the Secondary DNS address sup plied by your administrator in this field If not leave this field set to 0 0 0 0 Primary Gateway Contact your network adminis trator to see if a Primary Gateway value is required for this E2 If so enter the Primary Gateway address supplied by your administrator in this field If not leave this field set to 0 0 0 0 Secondary Gateway Contact your network administrator to see if a Secondary Gateway value is required for this E2 If so enter the Secondary Gate way address supplied by your administrator in this field If not leave this field set to 0 0 0 0 DHCP Enabled Dynamic Host Communication Protocol DHCP is a protocol that assigns a dynamic IP address to devices on a network With dynamic addressing a device could have a different IP address every time it connects to the network When set to Yes DHCP Enabled keeps track of IP addresses and enables a new IP devi
222. e eee EEEa er e Qe paria 9 14 2 1 The Service Button Method 9 14 2 2 The Manual ID Entry Method 9 15 LICENSE MANAGEMENT 4 3 ctes och coschve o ERREUR OUO Ree cb ew erbe EE Re RETO EA eee Eo ER Re tree et EYE unde VERE SUI ii E E E E E EEE TET OSLO SET UP ALARMING ettet TRE ON T IR NEEE EEEE EE ER EN E E E EEE E R 9 16 1 Specifying Alarm Reporting Types esses eee nennen enne nennen tentent nenne treten nenne sn nennen teens 9 T6 1 1 Th Display Dine ee tu Ee EROR TO ERI RENI EOS 9 16 1 2 The Alarm Output ety i 9 16 13 Dial OUt 2 eere Eee ERRARE ORO 9 16 1 4 The Echelon Network The Alarm Annunciator 9 16 2 Setting up an E2 to be an Alarm Annunciator eese esee eee eene nen rene en nennen treten ene 9 16 3 Alarm Dial Q t SEE 9 16 4 Introduction Alarm Reporting ee nan iea e e iep er topive 9 17 SET UP GEOBAL DATA a A ERU RI RR ER RN ARR RETE ERE VERERR N DTD Priority Settings sias A e RR 9 24 9 18 SET UP APPEIGATIONS cotes e ORO PIDE DI tenete ria E RO er Eee EB IR E eves 9 25 GIST Add Delete Gn Application dii eU RH ee et ea p E ER eue 9 25 9 18 2 Using and Configuring a Setup Screen 9 26 9 18 2 1 The Edit Menu ES 9 18 2 2 Entering Setpoints 9 18 2 3 Navigating the Setup Screen 9 18 3 Using the Help Key to get Property Help sss eene eren non een eennee trennen nenne enne tren 9 28 10 SOFTWARE OVERVIEW
223. e inhibit input is ON the zone status will be set to Inhibit and the valve output will be set to OFF Irrigation Control 10 20 4 1 Timed If the zone is inhibited for Timed control types it will be excluded from the cycle If Zone Inhibit turns ON dur ing the cycle control will transfer to the next defined zone 10 20 4 2 Volume For Volume control types the inhibited zone will be excluded from the cycle only while the inhibit input is ON If the inhibit input turns off and the cycle is still in progress the zone s state will again be set to Pending and will again be included in the cycle 10 20 4 3 Rain Delay The rain inhibit input should be connected to a rain sensor and will only function during the ON season In the event of rain a programmable rain delay of 0 7 days will prevent irrigation cycles for the user defined number of days from when the rain sensor has detected rain Active cycles will not be terminated if the input turns ON how ever Rain Inhibit will begin when the active cycle ends An entry of 0 days will disable this parameter 10 20 4 4 Freeze Lockout An irrigation cycle should be terminated if the current environmental conditions will result in freezing of dis pensed water This is to prevent the sheeting of ice on any adjacent paved surfaces or sidewalks which could create hazardous conditions for motorists and or pedestrians Zones are inhibited from watering if the outside air temperature f
224. e integral error is below zero Demand Control will begin restoring loads 10 10 6 1 Power Monitoring Input The Input Type Selection parameter defines the way the Power Monitoring input INPUT under the Inputs tab in application Setup will be used The parameter can be set to KW Analog or Pulse KWH Settings When KW Analog is selected verify the input is con nected to a board and point that is set up with Engineering Units of KW When Pulse KWH has been selected verify the input is connected to a board and point that is set up with Engineering Units of KW 10 11 Sensor Control 10 11 1 Overview The E2 is equipped with numerous generic control Software Overview 10 31 modules that may be used both for simple monitoring of an analog or digital sensor and for simple Cut In Cut Out control of a digital output These modules are called Sen sor Control modules There are two different Sensor Control Module types Analog Sensor Control modules read the values from one or more analog sensors compare them to a set of Cut In Cut Out setpoints and operate a digital output such as a relay based on the analog input in relation to the set points Digital Sensor Control modules read the values from one or more digital sensors combine them using a series of logical commands and operate a digital output such as a relay based on the result of the logical combination 10 11 2 Analog Sensor Control On a basic level an A
225. e sensor s have failed the case controller will not be able to make the required calculations and they will go into Fail Safe Mode Discharge Return Air If the sensor or combination of sensors supplying the case temperature to the case controller have failed i e the 10 14 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 2 case controller has no usable case temperature input value the case controller will keep the valve percentage at its last known good value and continue operation as nor mal For instance if the valve was at 75 when the case temp sensor s failed the valve will remain at 75 until it the failure is corrected All other case control functions will continue functioning as normal 10 4 12 Wiring Input and output wiring for a case controller is dis cussed in detail in Section 4 E2 Hardware Setup Before a Case Control Circuit application may begin functioning all case controllers must be properly connected to its case inputs and outputs and each case controller must be com missioned and properly communication on the Echelon Network see Section 4 E2 Hardware Setup for instruc tions on how to do this 10 4 13 Setting Up An Individual Case Controller Most of the data required for a case controller to begin operation are supplied to it by associating the controller with an E2 However in some cases it will be necessary to change some of the parameters in an individual case con troller Some instances where it
226. ed by a PID algorithm that steps the valve open from 0 to 100 based on how far away the circuit temperature is from the setpoint Line Up Control requires the use of an ESR8 stepper regulator output board available from CPC 10 3 2 Defrost Control Defrost cycles in a Standard Circuit application may be initiated in either of three ways by schedule at specific times of the day programmed by the user by external trigger a user initiated signal such as a switch or button or by manual command initiated on the E2 front panel by the user 10 3 2 1 Defrost States The defrost cycle for a Standard Circuit application consists of three steps 1 Pump Down Elec amp Hot Gas only The defrost cycle begins with this step immediately after the refrigeration solenoid is turned OFF During the Pump Down phase the application waits for a user specific amount of time to elapse before turning on the defrost heat This allows refriger ant in the evaporator to be evacuated before defrost heat is activated The compressor s remain ON during Pump Down 2 Defrost During the defrost phase refrigeration is disabled If using electric defrost heaters will be ON If using hot gas heated refrigerant will be pumped through the coil This phase will con tinue until the defrost is terminated see Section Standard Circuits 10 3 2 3 for information on how defrost is termi nated 3 Run Off Elec amp Hot Gas only After defro
227. ed to ter minate the Defrost stage of the defrost cycle early if the temperature inside the case rises above a fail safe tempera ture setpoint For certain defrost types defrost heat may also be pulsed in order to keep the temperature below the setpoint without terminating defrost Temperature Termination One or more temperature sensors in the case circuit may be designated as termination temperature sensors The values of these sensors are combined into a single control value and this value is compared to the setpoint If the termination control value is greater than the user defined setpoint defrost will end and the defrost cycle will begin the Run Off period if applicable Termination sensors may be either analog temperature sensors or digital closures Klixons Also Case Circuit applications may use the value of the analog case tempera ture sensors for use in temperature termination Pulsed Defrost Pulsed Defrost is only available if the circuit is using Electric or Hot Gas defrost Pulsed Defrost is similar to Temperature Termination except when the termination temperature rises above the setpoint defrost does not terminate Instead the output that applies defrost heat is turned OFF The output will remain OFF until the temperature falls below the setpoint at which time the output will come back ON The Case Circuit application will continue to pulse defrost in this manner until the defrost time has passed
228. eeded Limit User A digital value has been OFF longer than its defined On Time Exceeded Limit User A digital value has been ON longer than its defined A TAO ime on Lasepo n Open Wire 30 SmartESR controller has detected an open wire on ee ae Overcurrent 30 SmartESR controller has detected an overcurrent SS Override Log lost CRC Error An internal error in the E2 has resulted in a loss of the override log Override Lost Output Cleared i user tried to override an output on a CC 100 RT 100 or similar Echelon device but the override was not performed successfully Try the override com mand again If this alarm persists call CPC service Override State Not Restored An overridden input or output has remained in the override state longer than its programmed time Pad Memory Corrupted Reboot E problem with memory has resulted 1n a reset of the E2 Part Cnfg Loss Ptr Due to an internal error part of E2 s configuration data has been lost Point Log Cleared Stamps Ahead After a power failure or reset E2 tried to recover log data from its memory but the log data was corrupted 20 20 Override Operation Didn t Take 20 The E2 tried to carry out an override and was unsuc cessful 50 1 15 50 E2 cleared all data from its point logs and started over Appendix C Alarm Advisory Messages C 11 Point Log Stuck No Memory 15 A Point Log 1s unable to save new values because there is not enough memory Point Logs Not Restored 15
229. eee E 10 4 4 5 Emergency Defrost ies e ix 10 4 4 6 The WAIT State wis nen RP E o EE E ERE eae ee 1043 AntiSWeat Contfol ut edt S REG OE vans gnden ER HENEK ERR NIE E ERREUR DU ERE t eere 10 451 Dewpoint PUES OU 5 acu eth e e hte t a eoo er a ena 10 12 10 4 6 Dual Temp Control tto eta E RR RD ex b pei a tere 10 12 LOA Fan Controb d e E Ee mre ee etel ER e Eee s 10 13 10 4 8 Fight Control A ee de ede ete eee AE 10 13 10 4 9 Clean WashiMOode iie tee ee Debe eR ERE RE HERR eei Dicet pee eere 10 13 10 4 10 Walk in Freezer Control I eei onse eek ett eren Fee eie no A E e Yee e Unete e aede o IRES TATE ne 10 13 T0 AGCEL EdilsSafe Modes ae toa repere eg I 10 13 104 111 Recoverable Sensor Eail res rtr Here te ide e c aee e ee e ete Ea 10 14 LOAD WII 4e s aes cede ea Son eec ete E eee ette Dx dre ve seit de vr e iiem eve bee lua 10 14 10 4 13 Setting Up An Individual Case Controller eee eese entente netten eren 10 14 10 4 14 Associating CC 100 CS 100s with Case Circuit Control Applications esee 10 14 10 5 ATR HANDLING UNITS AHU J iaa REA Piedad 10 15 LOS OVerVIEW seem Re A qe cease eere de Deep Urs a uiae nete eI ch ae da aoc a Re REIR 10 15 10 5 2 Temperature Control oie e Eat a eres ee e e ne denen Aes 10 15 LOIS Alternate Setpoints s rte nU ep iere e dee 10 15 10 54 Ene saca 10 16 10 5 4 3 Single Speed Fans zi eue ei mita UO 10 16
230. efault Value field is OFF Physical On Specifies whether the physical relay output should energize or de energize its coil when the logical output is on Physical Off Specifies whether the physical relay output should energize or de energize its coil when the logical output is off Physical Null Specifies whether the physical relay output should energize or de energize its coil when there is no application associated with the output Minimum Physical On Time Specifies the mini mum time the physical output must remain on regardless of the logical output state Minimum Physical Off Time Specifies the mini mum time the physical output must remain off regardless of the logical output state PRIORITY OVR When an input is overridden to an output cell If this input is not set to NONE it will be used for the output value instead of the input value but only for the override timeout period Priority Override Timeout When an input goes on it will override to a value for the timeout period INPUT This field links the output to an application You do not need to enter anything in this field You will be able to link applications to this point during the application setup process 8 2 6 4 Setting Up Analog Outputs The 8RO 810 and MultiFlex Outputs Open the Analog Output screen by selecting an Analog A output from the Output Status screen Figure 8 9 and pressing SETUP This is where output types units and default valu
231. eing logged out Enter the amount of time for the user and press the right arrow button 6 Enter the appropriate access level for the user See Table 9 7 7 Press 4B BACK 9 12 3 Deleting a User To delete a user from the system 1 Move the cursor so that it is highlighting the record to delete in the Users box at the bottom of the screen and press DELETE USER 2 Aquestion box will appear to double check the deletion of the current record Press if you are sure about the deletion 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 2 9 13 Set Up I O Network Access level guide Level Required for Refrigeration Cont RX 466 Unit 3 USR ACCESS SETUP NETWORK SETUP 16 24 ALARM Setpoint Bypass Administrator ig Alarm Ack 3 1 Press UD to open the Main Menu amp 2 Press System Configuration 3 Press WA Network Setup 4 Press Connected I O Boards amp Controllers Building Control Advanced Control Common Control Enable Detailed Tr 3 Online Status 3 3 A Connected 1 0 Boards Controllers Controller Setup al Log On Yes Access Level USER 1 Router Setup Case Control fissociations SnartESR fissociations Figure 9 22 Network Setup Menu To start the setup on the I O Network access the Net work Setup menu l Press BP to open the Main Menu amp 2 Press System Configuration 3 Press Network Setup The Network Setup menu displays five options Online Sta
232. elow the low pres sure cut out If there 1s no 3 phase power on the 3 phase sense inputs when the compressor is called to be on The ISD will only accept run commands from the Einstein when the communications jumper is installed If this jumper is not installed an advisory will be generated The power measurement taken by a Power Monitor ing or Demand Control application is higher than the programmed demand setpoint Link To Output Bad No Output 50 A valid link could not be made between an E2 appli cation and an output assigned to it Last Off Time Expired Notice or alarm generated in digital generic alarming Last On Time Expired Notice or alarm generated in digital generic alarming NI a NI e ISD Discharge Temp Lockout ISD Supply Voltage Trip ISD Motor Temp Trip ISD Low Oil Warning ISD Internal Line Break ISD Discharge Pressure Trip ISD Discharge Temp Trip ISD Suction Pressure Trip ISD No 3 Phase On Start ISD No Command Communica tions KW Demand Limit Exceeded CNN Pg EST Log Data Loss SRAM Data Bad 50 A memory error has resulted in lost log data 50 Log Stamp Loss Flash Data Bad IE memory error has resulted in lost log time stamp data Log Stamp Loss SRAM Data Bad EE memory error has resulted in lost log time stamp data Logging Group Stuck No Memory 15 A Logging Group is unable to save logging data because there is not enough memory Appendix C Alarm Advisory Messages C 9 Leak
233. elta the change that must occur at the output before the new value is used Generic Alarm Setup enables the user to custom assign alarming parameters in the controller Logging Setup enables the user to turn logging on for a particular parameter Note that if L appears next to the parameter default logging has already been enabled for the Logging Group Cell Bypass Setup Opens screen for bypass input types which are Momentary or Level triggered and remain active for a Bypass Duration For example Time Schedules have two such inputs I O Mode toggles between displaying board names and board numbers Setup I O allows user to enter an input or output point setup screen 9 18 2 2 Entering Setpoints An application setpoint is a user defined control 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 2 parameter stored inside the controller Setpoints can be programmed from any application setup screen To enter setpoints from a Setup screen 1 Press SETUP from the desired applica tion s Status screen If starting from the Home screen move the cursor to the desired applica tion s value and press to open the Actions Menu Choose Setup This will take you to the Setup screen 2 Once inside the application s Setup screen look for the Setpoints option in the index tabs along the top of the screen 3 Use NEXT TAB to tab over and the Set points box of your application will open 68
234. em Information menu 1 Press UD to open the Main Menu amp 2 Press System Configuration 3 Press WEB System Information RX 400 Unit 3 SYSTEM INFORMATION General Controller Info Site Name Site Phone Refresh Rate RS 232 Baud 1 0 Net Baud Alarm Annunc RX Home Screen ScreenBlankTil Write DFHC In Time and Date Passuords User access Firmware Revision Service Actions Maintenance Logs Display Users Toggle Full Options Application Default Value Setup Figure 9 20 System Information Menu In the User Access Setup screen you may add user names and passwords to the controller with varying levels of security and customize user access for each security level To access this menu choose option Passwords User Access from the System Information Menu Set Up User Access RX 466 Unit 3 10 39 14 USR ACCESS SETUP FULL ALARM View 2 Config Override 4 Access level guidelines 1 Change Setpoint Bypass System Administrator Level Required for Point Bypass Override Config Alarm Ack Refrigeration Contro 2 2 E Building Control 2 2 E Advanced Control 2 3 Common Control 2 2 3 3 3 Enable Detailed Transaction Logging Yes Enable Global Log 0n Yes Users Username Password Auto Logout USER 1 USER PASS 6 38 Access Level 4 Figure 9 21 User Access Setup Screen An E2 may be programmed with up to 25 different users A user basically consists of a username a password and an ac
235. emperature control modes OSS takes control of heating and cooling several minutes before the Zone application is scheduled to change occupancy states and prepares the area for the upcoming change in setpoints As a result when the occupancy state changes the temperature will be comfortably within the range of the new setpoint Figure 10 8 shows an example of how pre starts and pre stops work in a heating application From unoccupied mode the pre start period ramps the temperature up slowly so that when the scheduled change from unoccu pied to occupied mode occurs the temperature will already be at or near the occupied heating setpoint During the pre stop which occurs before the Zone application goes from occupied to unoccupied mode heating is sus pended and the temperature is allowed to coast down to the unoccupied setpoint OCCUPIED SET POINT CCUPIED i i UNOCCUPIEDE a SET POINT 26512036 Figure 10 10 Diagram of Pre Start and Pre Stop Operation Intelligent Pre Starts and Pre Stops OSS is designed to handle pre starts and pre stops in the most energy efficient manner possible Every time a pre start or pre stop occurs OSS measures the amount of time it takes to bring the temperature from the previous setpoint to within the comfort zone of the new setpoint a user defined range of values above and below the set point within which the temperature is considered accept able This durati
236. en Navigate to the Global Data screen from the Main Menu 1 Press WA System Configuration 2 Press Global Data to open the Global Data Status screen 3 Press Setup to open the Global Data 9 24 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual E2 Setup screen The Global Data feature is an enhanced method of effectively distributing commonly used input values between multiple E2s Sensors such as outdoor tempera ture and outdoor humidity are set up on an E2 as Global Data inputs This E2 then becomes the provider of the global sensor values to all other Global Data applications on the E2 As a result a single sensor can be used by any applica tion in any E2 on the network Unless you program it otherwise the E2 always assumes you will be using Global Data in all your applica tions When you create new applications in the E2 it will always automatically connect the appropriate application inputs except for the spares to their corresponding Glo bal Data outputs 9 17 1 Priority Settings When selecting the priority for a global sensor input there are four settings to choose from Primary Primary inputs are the highest priority inputs If a sensor is set up with a primary priority it is recognized by all Global Data applications on the network as the highest priority The primary provider sends this input value to the other Global Data appli cations in the other E2s and each E2 immediately sends that value to
237. ends off and attach the terminal plugs supplied with the ESRS to the wire ends 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 2 www NOTE A valve cable harness may not be 4 longer than 150 feet Emerson WHITE 3 Flow Q EE cones ES For Sporlan valves match all wire colors except the RED blue wire Instead connect the blue wire to the Sporlan green wire TOP OF BOARD Pin 1 Figure 8 18 ESR8 Valve Wiring aww NOTE For Sporlan CDS wire the same as Emerson Flow Controls ESR but use green wire in place of blue wire SmartESR Boards For SmartESR boards the stepper valves are wired to the board by connecting the stepper valve molex connector to one of the eight molex connectors along the top of the board Figure 8 1 Use the cable and cable harnesses that are supplied with the valves Stepper valve harness with molex connector Stepper Valve Figure 8 19 ECT Flow Valve and SmartESR Board Wiring For retrofits or stepper valve harnesses without a mat ing molex connector use the SmartESR adapter cable P N 335 3275 Crimp type waterproof splices should be used to make the connections ESR8 and SmartESR Valve Output Wiring Input and Output Setup 8 17 2 9 Quick Start This section covers what to do when you are program ming a new E2 for the first time The section includes log ging on specifying information about I O boards and application types and other topics related
238. engineering units and summer winter change over specifications SYSTEM INFORMATION A General Controller Info Time and Date Passwords User Access 2 Time and Date Change the current date and time and specify date formats Firmware Revision Service Actions Maintenance Logs Display Users 3 Passwords User Access Set up usernames and pass Toggle Full Options rl Value words and define security level 4 3 NONE Controlled By Dis Application Default Value Setup NONE requirements NOTAC F1 SENSO2 NOTAC 4 Firmware Revision Read only information screen ON that contains current system ver sion information 5 Service Actions Set up system diagnostics mem Figure 9 13 System Information Menu ory and execution info and per form advanced functions system resets and firmware update The System Information Menu is another menu used to set up the E2 The options in this menu allow setting up time and date passwords toggle full options general information about the controller and system administrator functions 6 Note Pad Writable field for technician to make notes about changes made or general information T th tem Information Menu ope te aio ran 7 Display Users Enter information about Logging 1 Press UD Group applications such as the sampling frequency and total 2 Press WA System Configuration number of samples 3 Press System Information 8 Toggle Full Options When set t
239. enser fans are turned ON to reduce sys tem pressure For air cooled and temperature differential condenser strategies discharge pressure is always used as the control value that determines fast recovery You may choose to enable or disable fast recovery and also to include a delay when transitioning from one mode to the other For evaporative condensers up to 16 override tem perature sensors may be combined to yield a single over ride value that is used for fast recovery Fast Recovery is always used in an evaporative condenser 10 2 6 Hardware Overview An overview of the input and output devices that make up a typical Condenser Control application is shown by Figure 10 2 and Figure 10 3 Figure 10 2 shows the typ ical layout of an air cooled condenser Figure 10 3 shows the typical layout of an evaporative condenser AMBIENT TEMP gt CONDENSER OUTLET DISCHARGE PRESSURE OA e CONDENSER INLET AIR COOLED CONDENSER 26509037 Figure 10 2 Air Cooled Condenser Diagram Software Overview 10 3 AMBIENT TEMP DISCHARGE PRESSURE OUTLET CONE INLET WATER SUMP _ TEMPERATURE d m mA ATER PUMP 1 PUMP 2 EVAPORATIVE CONDENSER DAMPERS CST 26509038 Figure 10 3 Evaporative Condenser Diagram Wire Output Set Fail safe Dip Devi Boar n Output Device oard Contacts Switch to to N C N C up To ensu
240. ent tabs to indicate which screen is being displayed Pressing PREV TAB will back up the order of the screens Pressing P HOME at any point will take you to the Main Status Home screen TIP To see each screen in a typical setup for the E2 RX controller start from the Main Sta tus Home screen Position the cursor somewhere inside the Suc tion Groups section and press and Setup or just SETUP from the Home screen The General Setup screen will be dis played Press NEXT TAB to move the cursor to Setpoints The Setpoints Setup screen is dis played Press again and the Inputs Setup screen comes up Press a few more times to see the rest of the Setup menu screens When the CO tab MORE is highlighted there may be more Ctrl than one extra Setup screen Press ul zero to see a list of all Setup screens for that application Keep pressing while taking note of the extra screens until C1 is highlighted once more These screens C1 through C0 contain all of the set up information that is associated with the selected suction Quick Start 9 27 group Blank tabs are inaccessible There are several reasons why a tab may be inaccessible i e without a name next to the number The tab and the corresponding screen is unused and reserved for later revisions The screen may only be accessed when running in Full Options mode The screen may require one or more fields to be set
241. equencer cell will activate 50 of the total number of stages The Sequencer cell will always round DOWN that is if there are four stages in a Sequencer cell and the output is 74 the Sequencer cell will only activate two stages or 50 of the stages When the output climbs above 75 the third stage will activate If desired delays may be specified for stage activation and deactivation Also the definitions of OFF and ON may be redefined as either ON OFF or NONE 10 12 3 2 The PWM Cell The PWM cell converts the control output percentage into a periodic ON pulse A pulse in this cell is a con stant period of time that consists of one ON event and one OFF event The PWM cell takes the PID percentage and turns the output ON for an equivalent percentage of the total pulse period In other words if the PID output is 60 and the pulse period is 30 seconds every 30 seconds the PWM output will be ON for 60 of 30 seconds 18 sec onds and OFF for the remaining portion of the 30 second period Once the period has ended the PWM Cell reads the PID output again and the process is repeated 10 13 Time Scheduling and Holidays Time Schedules are used for timed activation and deactivation of loads and for providing occupied and unoccupied building times for occupancy driven systems such as Sensor Control Lighting and HVAC There are four different types of schedules used by the E2 Brief description of each of these are given be
242. er on the network set 4 Change Network Type to Ethernet ETH and DHCP Enabled to Yes and it will retrieve the informa press Enter The Group Name field is now visi tion from the server and populate those fields E2 con ble trollers must also have the same Ethernet Subnet in order to communicate box to box we NOTE If unsure of any tab settings it is rec ommended that the default settings be used 5 Once the Ethernet network type is enabled enter Software Setup E2 Ethernet Peer Communications 6 3 2 a unique site name in the Group Name field www NOTE The site name is the unique identifier A for the site that will allow the controllers within the same group to share data 05 09 05 BX 300 Unit 1 16 54 59 Use Ctrl X to Select CX Tabs SETUP en General ca Eng Units General Setup GENERAL SERV Peer Netwrk Value Network Type Ethernet ETH Enable Encrypt No AutoDscTimeout 300 Reconect Timeout 120 Group Name HAMNAME OF SITE Peer Network Tab Set Group Name All controllers that you would like to appear in this group must all have the same group name and must be using the same network type 6 6 Troubleshooting Network troubleshooting is outside the scope of this section Section 6 E2 Ethernet Peer Communications Consult your IT Network Administrator for any additional information needed 6 4 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 17 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 eO 7 Echelon
243. ersonnel E2 can report alarms in several different ways 9 16 1 1 Alarms that occur within an E2 or which are received by an Alarm Annunciator from another E2 may be reported to the header display at the top of the screen When an alarm is reported to the display the word FALARM flashes underneath the time at the top of the screen allowing site managers or supervisors to see that one or more alarms are active for the E2 Specifying Alarm Reporting The Display Line RX 466 Unit 3 10 49 23 RX DEU SUMMARY ALARM Figure 9 38 Display Line 9 16 1 2 The Alarm Output Each E2 has a single digital output that reacts to alarm reports An alarm can be reported to this output in which case the output turns ON and remains on until the alarm condition has returned to normal 9 16 1 3 Dial Out Alarms may be sent to remote alarm receivers via the modem defined for the controller Possible dial out devices include a PC running UltraSite a printer a fax machine and a digital pager Dial out sites are configured in Section 9 16 3 9 16 1 4 The Echelon Network The Alarm Annunciator If multiple E2s exist on a network you may choose to send alarms from all E2s across the Echelon Network so that they may be picked up by the Alarm Annunciator The Alarm Annunciator is the primary alarm reporting device in a multiple device E2 Network The Alarm Annunciator gathers all alarms posted by all devices on the Echelon Net
244. es are specified for analog output points In most cases only the point name will need defining in this screen unless you wish to change the 0 10V output range or configure a priority override 01 01 02 RX 300 Unit 1 EU 18 19 58 ANALOG OUTPUT Point Name EA EL Board Point Output Type Linear Select Eng Units PCT Default Value NONE Modify Output Equation Low End Point 0 v Low Eng Units 0 High End Point 10 0 High Eng Units 100 0 OVERRIDE SETUP PRIORITY OVR Priority Override Timeout H 0 30 INPUT B MED TEMP SUCTION GRPO1 VS COMP OUT F5 CANCEL Figure 8 12 Analog Output Screen Point Name The Point Name is simply a name for the output point that may be used as a reference Assigning a descriptive name to a point makes set ting up outputs for applications much easier For example if you are setting up fan 3 for Zone 1 you may choose to name it FANs amp 1 HT 3 Then when programming your Condenser Control application you may easily define the fan output by tying it to FAN 1 HT 3 This keeps you from having to keep track of which contacts are tied to which point num bers You are required to enter a point name in the Point Name field The default name is BOARD NAME SUBNET NUMBER BOARD NUM BER POINT NUMBER Board Point The Board Point Number will auto matically be defined if you are configuring the point from the Output Definitions screen Output Type The an
245. es in a subnet are connected in an unbro ken chain without branches or star configurations see Figure 7 1 Then if more than one E2 is present on site all chains are connected so that the entire network forms a large unbroken chain called a daisy chain see Figure 7 UNBROKEN PU 2 This allows for all devices in the Echelon Network to CHAIN be hard wired together for trouble free communication Figure 7 1 Echelon Wiring Subnets Overview Echelon Network and Hardware Setup 7 1 CABLE Figure 7 2 Echelon Wiring pt 2 7 3 1 Maximum Number of Eche lon Devices A daisy chained segment may contain no more than 63 total Echelon devices also called nodes If there are 64 or more Echelon devices at your site an Echelon compati ble router P N 572 4200 will be required A router placed on the Echelon Network allows you to add another 63 node daisy chain network For larger installations multiple routers can be used to extend the network indefi nitely More information about routers and how they are used in a daisy chain Echelon Network can be found in the Router and Repeater Installation Guide P N 026 1605 7 4 In a daisy chain configuration both ends of the net work segment must be terminated Terminate the E2 by setting jumper JP7 to the UP position as shown in Figure 7 3 Other devices on the Echelon Network are terminated either by jumpers on the control bo
246. esee eene eene enn eenneennee 10 30 10 10 6 1 Power Monitoring Input eese nennen ene nen rennen ennt tree tne tette nenne teene nnne teen 10 31 10 11 SENSOR CONTROL erit rer em E er ri eerte ie Re eher RR Eve ve Fe Ee 10 31 TOTII verviews s e re diee ahd Sabi etsi rte eb e E gus nba ERU RAE fede dit de abd Mb tese ree ue eben 10 31 10 11 2 Analog Sensor Control a tae Deeper d UE RE ERE er pe ra rete arte 10 32 LOLTS Cut In Cut Out Setpoint Control tte sae ear sii eed 10 32 10 11 4 Digital Sensor Control eet pee repr pe e a ite s 10 32 TOTIS Logical Combinati n c Rd ae o ER RR V CR Eve ERR de ee oe esp de das 10 32 10 12 LOOP SEQUENCE CONTROL PA E E E E ASE EE E EE E 10 33 10 12 1 Layout of the Loop Sequence Control Application eese eere enne entren enne 10 33 10 12 11 Control Cel Siac 2 en pt ee Hee t o Eee b eet od a e eerie be yt e rens 10 33 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual Table of Contents xi 10 12 12 O tput Cell ARA E hice edere CR ede en ee OA ART 10 12 1 3 DM REP e le ee n e ie Rea i a Ree 10 12 2 Loop Sequence Control Cell Descriptions 10 12 24 The Select Cell ertt eer refe ae ii oett e eene oae e a ene eR ete 10 12 2 2 The Setpoint Float Cella etr A RE 10 12 2 3 The PID Control Cell es 10 12 2 4 The Filter Cells citet A reete atem A A 10 12 2 5 The Override Cell 2 5 i A eR e IRR Se aa 10 12 3 Output Cell Descriptions a e ER oe Eat es dus 10 35 10 12 3 1 r
247. eseesnenaees 5 3 5 8 POWERING THE VO BOARDS 5 dd E is 5 4 32 04 Wiring TYPOS 0d e RO e e ER Ce PED OR ias 5 5 3 9 BOARD INSTALLATION iiie nde dette Ua aha ea Deut ES ceil 5 5 6 E2 ETHERNET PEER COMMUNICATIONS ccssssssscssscssccsssscssscsssssessscescesesssccssesssssssessssnssssesssssscssssnsscoss 6 1 6 1 ETHERNET IP CONFIGURATIONS cccssccccsssecessscesssseecesssesesseecssaeeecessecessssecesaececescecesaesesesaeeseessesenseecsesaeseeeaeeeensseesenes 6 1 6 2 HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS a e oe ih A tete ree Erbe ve mie eet xe ai eL Edere 6 1 6 2 1 Components ioo bp EU E RECS e a PAPE 6 1 6 3 SOFTWARE SPECIFICATIONS rne A A tear ONE RES 6 2 6 4 ETHERNET NETWORK LAYOUTS oot nene Deep etenim rip 6 2 6 41 Closed Network Lay0Ut i seite uet reet ET ra RE E ban owas XE EE RARE ERE ERE TNR PER VR 6 2 6 4 2 Open Network Layout ete ER p Rer t ed teer ape eerie i ien 6 3 6 5 SOFTWARE SETUP in eH ee eaa caes 6 3 6 6 TROUBLESHOOTING 24 32 aissn ene ehanetipmenmine e ED qu 6 4 7 ECHELON NETWORK AND HARDWARE SET UP e eeeeeee eee ee esten eto ee etos seno etae setae eate sen estas testen eee ta eS 7 1 Ji OVERVIEW i 6 oa A e tat dta ea ito alam tei oS ener 7 1 7 2 WARING TYPE wo iio lidiar E 7 1 7 3 ECHELON NETWORK STRUCTURING DAISY CHAINS ccsccccessececsscecesaececesaeceseecesesaeecsesaesceeecnsseeecseseseseseeensaeeecnnaees 7 1 7 3 1 Maximum Number of Echelon Devices eee eese ener one
248. ess D gt 2 Press WA System Configuration Screen Types The System Configuration menu contains eight menu items 1 Input Definitions View the status of all input boards as well as set up individ ual points on the I O boards 2 Output Definitions View the status of all output boards as well as set up individ ual points on the I O boards 3 System Information Menu that gives access to more E2 setup options and informa tion 4 Remote Communica Gives access to modem informa tions tion dial out setup and TCP IP 5 Alarm Setup Set up dial outs and alarm reporting for the current E2 6 Logging Setup Enter information about Logging Group applications such as the sampling frequency and total number of samples 7 Network Setup View and or change the configu ration of the Echelon and RS 485 I O Networks 8 Global Data Configure one or more analog or digital sensors to be used as global values by all E2s 9 Licensing Opens the Licensing Report page with a list of all licensed features on the current E2 and allows additional features after a password key has been entered by the user to be enabled Table 9 4 System Configuration Menu Options 9 7 6 Menu The System Information Quick Start 9 7 2 The System Information menu contains nine items EN jen Menu Option Description 1 General Controller Info Edit general information about the E2 such as
249. ess to cancel setup v DUUTLUN LKFUL v aran UUI D SUCTION GRPO1 COMP 2 Please select the data type for Output 5 Pi 3 One Shot Press desired selection D SER UUTPUT D 01 BAKERY CLR REFRIG SOLENOID D 02 ISLAND PROD REFRIG SOLENOID D 03 PROD DISP 1 REFRIG SOLENOID Figure 8 10 Output Data Type Pop Up Menu Depending upon what type of output you selected the Digital Output see Section 8 2 6 3 Setting Up Digital Outputs Pulse Digital Output or One Shot Digital Output screen will appear 8 2 6 2 Using the Output Definitions Status Screen The Output Definitions Status screen serves a dual purpose It is both an at a glance summary of all points on Input and Output Setup 8 11 each output board and a menu where output points may be selected and configured In order for the E2 to properly control devices that are hooked to an I O board you must first tell the E2 what type of output the devices require This is achieved by using the Output Definitions Status screen SETUP DEL MOD LOOK UP and CANCEL are the function keys along the bottom of the screen available for the Output Definitions Status screen The Output Definitions Status screen serves a dual purpose It is both an at a glance summary of all points on each output board and a menu where output points may be selected and configured Each record in this screen contains the following infor mation about a point 1 Board Type
250. essed will open the General Help menu containing Troubleshooting options Press the and gt keys together at any time to open General Help The Alarms 3 key displays the alarm advisory log that shows all the current alarms in the E2 When the Home aD key is pressed from any location the Home screen opens When the Menu P key is pressed from any location the Main Menu opens The Back lt gt key will take you to the previous screen B E Pressing from an application status screen Home screen or Input Output Status screen brings up the Operator s Guide to Using the E2 11 7 Actions Menu and gives the user access to controller func tions such as graphing logging setup and detailed status The Log In Out Key The Log In Out key brings up the current E2 User Login Screen when logging in If the Log In Out key is pressed in order to log out and there is data on the screen that has been edited and not saved a dialog box opens asking if the data should be saved If Yes is selected the data is saved the user is logged out and returned to the Home screen If No is selected the dialog box closes and the screen is refreshed as necessary Press ing the Log In Out key in order to log out when no data needs to be saved simply logs the user out and returns to the Home screen Four Directional Arrow Keys Directional arrow keys move the cursor in the direction of the arrow pressed The arrow keys are always
251. et sensors pipe mount sensors immersion probes insertion probes and sensors for high temperature applications Each of these sensors is generally installed on the system by the equipment manufacturer If a device must be added to the system refer to the information sup plied with the device and consult the refrigeration equip ment manufacturer Table 3 1 lists some typical sensor Location 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 E2 applications and the sensor or probe most suited for that purpose Table 3 1 Sensor Application and Type 3 5 6 2 Mounting Bullet and Pipe Mount Sensors Bullet or pipe mount sensors mounted on refrigerant lines should be secured with a Panduit low temperature cable tie number PLT2S M120 or equivalent For pipe mount sensors the curved surface should be placed against the pipe and the tie should be positioned in the groove on the top surface of the sensor A second tie should be used to secure the lead to the pipe for additional support Sensors located on refrigerant lines should be insulated to eliminate the influence of the surrounding air A self adhering insulation that will not absorb moisture is recom mended to prevent ice logging at the sensor location The sensor should be positioned on the side of the line as shown in Figure 3 24 26509022 Figure 3 24 Sensor Orientation 3 5 7 Product Temperature Probes The product temperature probe is designed to be used Sensors and Trans
252. etup 3 Select Controller Setup Commission the device on the Connected I O screen 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 2 BX 466 Unit 1 11 23 15 CONTROLLER SETUP ALARM Node Name Model Bus Subnet Board Neuron ID THIS 61 1 BX466 Bldg LON 62D9E32561668 A LonMark Device LON 001178381200 663 LonMark Device LON G4F 494006168 LM 61 664 LonMark Device LON 804297307101 AR 61 61 ARTC RTU 1 0 RC 61 61 RCB 1 0 F2 DELETE RCRD F3 NET STATUS F4 SET ADDRESS F5 CANCEL Figure 7 6 Controller Setup Screen BX 400 Unit Shown Highlight the LonMark device on the screen you wish to commission and follow the steps in Section 9 14 2 Commissioning a Device to commission the device 7 8 4 1 Troubleshooting After commissioning has been completed check to make sure the device has been added successfully From the Main Menu select Configured Applications to open the Configured Applications list If the device you have commissioned does not appear in this list the Description File has failed to upload correctly onto the E2 An alarm of No Description File will be generated and can be found in the Alarm Advisory Log Call CPC at 1 800 829 2724 to contact your CPC sales representative or technical assistance to obtain the Description File Open Echelon Device Connectivity Echelon Network and Hardware Setup 7 5 2 CC 100 CS 100 INSTALLATION GUIDE DETAIL A A 1 Connect CC 100 to power module using outp
253. evices All Echelon devices are wired together using the daisy chain method of network structuring For the E2 to communicate on the Echelon Network the plug in card must be connected No Echelon Network communication can occur without the card The plug in Echelon card connects to the main proces sor board on the far right side of the board just above the Power Interface Board PIB connector The connector for the plug in Echelon card is labeled Echelon Plug In so it is easy to find 4 3 2 Modem Communication Expansion Card New Processor Board The E2 s Modem Communication Expansion card mounts above the PIB in the back of the enclosure box as shown in Figure 4 5 See Table 4 1 for modem expansion card types and descriptions Add On E2 Peripherals MODEM COMMUNICATION EXPANSION CARD LAYOUT AND MOUNTING Ribbon Cabl Connector Termination Jumpers RX and TX LEDs Phone Line Connector me RS 485 Connector Modem Communication Expansion Card Mounts 4 Standoffs Figure 4 5 Modem Comm Expansion Card Layout and Mounting Modem PIN 637 4871 Modem Comm Expansion card with odem serial communication port plug ins that can be either RS 232 DTE style or RS 485 software unication port plug in that can be either RS 232 or RS 485 software able that has a male DB 9 header and DB 9 to DB 25 converter to support e standard external modem interface Table 4 1 Modem Comm Card Part Numbers and Descripti
254. ex RCB VO Network Boards and Peripherals The PAK can control up to 4 condenser fan groups containing up to 8 total condenser fans The PAK con denser control strategy is sequential TD control with set point deadband using ON and OFF delays The PAK has a compressor condenser interlock fea ture that will override TD control and force the condenser fans to stage off using the TD control OFF delay when all compressors are off This feature can be disabled with an Enable Disable setpoint or when the discharge pressure is above a configurable setpoint The MultiFlex PAK boards consist of two circuit boards a bottom layer with 16 combination digital analog inputs and a plug in top layer which contains a combina tion of 8 relay outputs and 4 digital DC voltage outputs The analog outputs on the Multiflex PAK drive solid state relays to control the fan stages The relays control the compressor groups The communication interface is RS 485 I O using the Standard Extended Address Form for CPC Distributed Controllers Currently the PAK is designed to interface with the CPC Einstein controller 26501126 LEGEND 1 INPUT POWER RS 485 TERMINATION 24VAC JUMPERS 2 RS 485 O NETWORK 10 HAND HELD TERMINAL JACK 3 PAK INPUTS 1 8 11 RELAY OUTPUT CONNECTORS 4 PAK INPUTS 9 16 12 RELAY OUTPUT FUSES 2A rated 250V slow blow 5 NETWORK ID DIP 13 RELAY STATUS LEDs SWITCH S3 RELAY FAIL ee INPUT TYPE DIP 14 SWITCHES
255. f replacing an old 810 or 16AI use MultiFlex input adapters P N 335 2301 to plug input connectors from old board into the MultiFlex input sockets One for inputs 1 4 and one for inputs 5 8 Otherwise polarity sensitive inputs will have to be rewired No adapter is needed for inputs 9 16 A io a o lt A m 7 Connect board to power transformer If a center ta resent DO NOT use the center tap Instead connect 0V erminal to a separate Earth ground OQOSGOGOGOGGGIGGSGI SS SS SSOSGGISS SS Ov SIG OvsiG OvSIG 0vSIG Ov SIG S E Ov SIG OvSIG 0vSIG OvSIG bs fo SIG INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 4 INPUT 5 INPUT 6 INPUT 7 INPUT 8 INPUT 9 INPUT 10 INPUT 11 INPUT 12 INPUT 13 INPUT 14 INPUT 15 INPUT 16 D SHIELDED TWISTED PAIR BELDEN 8761 FOR PLENUM USE BELDEN 82761 OR 88761 OR EQUIV 53 INPUT 16AI ADDRESS S4 RELAY BRO ADDRESS i BOARD 1 BOARD 2 BOARD 5 el BOARD 13 TRANS FM T TA BOARD 21 BOARD 24 BOARD 25 S4 ANALOG 4AO ADDRESS GIG GEI or BDO ADDRESS OF THE 168DO BOARD BOARD 1 toa
256. f using this priority setting you must enter board and point settings Example Out of three E2s an outside air temperature sensor on E2 A s I O Network is set up as the primary provider of the global Outside Air Temp input A sim ilar sensor is set up on E2 C with a secondary prior ity see Figure 9 45 As long as E2 A is capable of broadcasting a valid temperature value all three E2s would use E2 A s Outside Air Temperature value in their own Global Data applications However if E2 A loses contact with the sensor E2 A no longer has a valid temperature value to send to the other Global Data applications After five minutes of no updates from E2 A E2 C will consider the pri mary Outside Air Temp source to have failed and it will begin sending the value of the secondary sensor to the Global Data applications of the other two E2s All E2s would then use this secondary value as Out side Air Temperature Jona E is PRIMARY USED AS GLOBAL OUTSIDE AIR TEMP BY ALL E2s n m erent MARY S S um EH o E SECONDARY SENSOR USED AS OUTSIDE AIR TEMP WHEN PRIMARY FAILS um Y Y 26512038 Figure 9 45 Global Data Priority Example Just as there may be only one primary provider for Set Up Applications each input type there may be only one secondary for each input type It is recommended that secondaries
257. ff times will be observed as normal Electric Defrost Electric defrost uses electric heaters to defrost the evaporator coil During electric defrost the application will turn the Defrost output ON to activate the heaters con nected to the output Any user defined Pump Down and Run Off times will be observed as normal 10 3 2 3 Defrost Termination Both the start and the end times of a defrost cycle are determined by the user The Pump Down Defrost and Run Off stages all have fixed durations and when the last stage of the cycle is complete defrost is terminated However a Standard Circuit application may be pro grammed to terminate the Defrost stage of the defrost Software Overview 10 5 cycle early if the temperature inside the case rises above a fail safe temperature setpoint called the termination set point For certain defrost types defrost heat may also be pulsed in order to keep the temperature below the set point without terminating defrost Pulsed Defrost DEFROST TERMINATION PULSED STRATEGY DEFR TERM TEMP REACHED TIME HEAT WILL BE ES ENDS A W x R T w n z iu ke REFRIGERATION TIME PUMP DOWN LEGEND REFRIGERATION ON Wl DEFROST HEAT ON REF DEF BOTH OFF 26512052 Figure 10 4 Defrost Termination Pulsed Pulsed Defrost is only available if the circuit is using heated defrost such as Electric or Hot Gas defrost Pulsed
258. ge that would usually represent the range of outputs from 0 to 20 is cut off Any input value that falls within the previous 0 to 20 portion of the throttling range will cause the Proportional Mode to move the output towards 20 2 The Output at Minimum or Output at Maximum value replaces any calculated adjustment that would normally call for the output to be outside of the specified range In other words if the Out put at Minimum and Output at Maximum values Appendix D PID Control D 5 are 20 and 100 respectively the output per centage will never be below 20 even if the P I and D Mode adjustments call for the output to be below 20 The output will remain in saturation at 20 until a higher output percentage is called for In short PID works as it normally does except the out put never goes below Output at Minimum or above Output at Maximum Minimum Accumulated Error The Minimum Accumulated Error setting disables error accumulation in the T Mode when the current error is equal to or less than a certain amount For example if the PID setpoint is 30 and the Minimum Accumulated Error is 1 the T Mode will not adjust the PID output per centage as long as the input is between 29 and 31 Because T Mode does not accumulate error within the Minimum Accumulated Error range the control input is allowed to settle on a value other than the setpoint It is possible in the example given above for the system to a
259. given a separate network ID number as if it were an 8RO Set the network ID number using rotary switch S1 3 The input section of this board must be given a separate network ID number as if it were a 16Al number using rotary switch S2 Set the network ID 4 Set the jumper JU4 to enable or disable the analog outputs 5 Set RS485 termination jumpers UP if at either end of a daisy chain Otherwise set jumpers DOWN 6 Connect board to power transformer DO NOT USE THE CENTER TAP Connect 0V terminal to a separate Earth ground 50VA P N 640 0050 120VAC Primary T5VA P N 640 0042 220VAC Primary 50VA P N 640 0080 Multi tap 120 208 240VAC Primary 80VA P N 640 0056 Multi tap 120 208 240VAC Primary 56VA Note Please refer to transformer for primary side wiring SECONDARY SIDE D SHIELDED TWISTED PAIR 2 9 4 LC USE BELDEN 82761 OR 86761 OUTPUT e Aldi dx TON A OREQUIV i NETID d NETID Ed JUMPER ON ua onies BU IF ANALOG A A er commen me S FRY j MES T9 areseno USED W d a 4 e d Li JU4 or ToS JUMPER OFF REER INN pA pr ike Au IF ANALOG rc Uy X s m 3 X 8px OUTPUTS 1 P und P ARE NOT to same color NY D poA od 2 LL WIRE OV to OV e 9 d 4 EY 3 pe BEING U
260. goes below a heating setpoint or above a cooling setpoint the heating or cooling outputs climb from 0 to 100 as Heat Cool Control determined by the throttling range see Figure 10 18 Lighting Control Command Cells Input Value 1 4 DVCOMBINER SCHEDIF Ini Out gt 09c In In2 Occupied In3 REE sched In Out In4 Alt Schedule Use Alt Sch Alt Combiner Use Alt Comb Comb Type Alt Comb Invert Output MIN ON OFF ONESHOT OVERRIDE rie oun ouj In Out LIGHTS Pulse Width Timer 26512043 Figure 10 18 Example of Heat Cool PID Control By default only the proportional and integral modes of PID control are enabled for Heat Cools The user may choose to add the Derivative mode or to get rid of the Inte gral mode and use strictly Proportional control 10 16 2 Unoccupied Hysteresis When the Heat Cool receives an indication that the building is unoccupied the control mode changes from the PID method described previously and uses simple ON OFF control of the heating and cooling outputs The Heat Cool application in unoccupied mode makes use of a hysteresis value to form a range of temperature values across which the heating and or cooling will be applied As shown in Figure 10 19 when the temperature drops to the Unoccupied Heating Setpoint or rises to the Unoccupied Cooling Setpoint the heat or coo
261. h S quencer Cell teins das ett de b eb eme ede s 10 35 10 1232 The a URGE 10 35 10 13 TIME SCHEDULING AND HOLIDAYS eese nene tnt E E ASe sa tein th tesis atas tease sensa EEEE 10 35 LOTSA How Schedul s MOrKk sete hetero pe T re eate eee n tens tse pe Ier PERRA EIS 10 36 10 13 1 1 10 13 1 2 10 13 1 3 10 13 1 4 10 13 1 5 HINC IAN TIT E eves 10 37 10 14 2 1 Power Monitoring Input 2 n eene dd e eder t e 10 38 10 15 ANTES WEAT SETUP nia eR EH RE RU i Ret ret in eben ii a 10 38 LOAD 1 How Anti Sweat Worksin iea E lana E RERUM CREE e EUR 10 38 10 T6 HEAT COOL CONTROL wii 5 marre t o Un E NER OI e Ai 10 39 10 16 1 Temperature Control ieu usur eR EEG HO rere p er PH eres 10 39 10 16 2 Unoccupied Hysteresis ie e d t ERREUR DERE EE RSEN sande covevgneas ERES ERUNT 10 39 10 16 3 Optimum Start Stop OSS ette erret e ER ERES POE t ERREUR PUE RIRs 10 40 J0 16 4 Setpoint Reset i o ia ee aede te a e oie ele b ive aera PEE 10 40 10 16 5 Lead Lag euis nor Ee Pre rede perde e o e d rere 10 41 10 17 ANALOG AND DIGITAL COMBINERS eene eene enne nne nennen innen teneret eren nee trennen nen ene 10 41 10 18 TD CONTROL endete nor or e PRU EORR ORE EE RO ET atte 10 42 LOL SAD OVORVICW E 10 42 10 18 2 Temperature Differential TD Strate gy cesses eene trennen entente tenen non eene 10 42 10 18 3 TD Control Fail Safes i e e eee r
262. h defaults to six seconds For example to achieve a 20 valve output in a CC 100 with a valve period of six seconds a pulse valve would be opened for 20 of six seconds or 1 2 seconds and closed for the remaining 8046 of the valve period 4 6 seconds This same six second sequence will repeat for as long as the CC 100 calls for a 20 valve output Stepper Valves Stepper valves are devices that may opened to many different positions between fully closed 096 and fully open 100 Stepper valves usually have hundreds or thousands of steps in between fully closed and fully open To achieve the desired opening percentage the CC 100 moves the valve the required number of steps To properly control a stepper valve the CC 100 must know the operating characteristics of the valve such as its maximum steps per second change rate the total number of steps between 0 and 100 and its hysteresis rate the number of steps required for the valve to change direc tion Software Overview 10 9 10 4 3 Refrigeration Control 10 4 3 1 EEVs Liquid Pulse and Liquid Stepper In CC 100P CC 100LIS and EC2 case controllers there are two different control systems that work together to regulate refrigeration temperature control and super heat control Temperature Control Temperature Control measures the case temperature and turns refrigeration ON or OFF as required to keep the case within a certain proximity of the user spec
263. he demand limit the E2 s Power Monitoring applications determine your current KW usage in much the same way as your power company Power Monitoring uses a watt hour transducer input to determine the current KW usage Multiple KW values are averaged together into demand Power Monitoring windows much like the ones power companies use Then depending on how the application is configured the most current KW value is compared to a demand set point The current KW value in this case may be either the instantaneous value read by the power transducer or it may be the average of all KW transducer readings taken over 1 minute intervals This setpoint should be equal to or slightly lower than the demand limit set by your power company In short since E2 doesn t know when the power com pany s demand window will begin the E2 measures power as if the demand window could happen at any time This way E2 can more accurately determine when your site is approaching or exceeding the demand limit Shed Mode If the KW usage is higher than the demand setpoint Power Monitoring goes into Shed Mode During Shed Mode Power Monitoring turns on a digital output called SHED OUT This output may be connected to the demand shed inputs of one or more E2 applications which will in turn shut down or otherwise curb the power usage of the overall system The SHED OUT output remains ON until the KW usage falls below the demand setpoint In short the p
264. he suction group selected will be dis played with information such as active stages discharge temperature current setpoint associated condenser and other general information Condenser Status Screen Press MAN Information on the condenser such as con trol setpoints detailed fan status and other general infor mation will be displayed Circuit Status Screen Press MEN Select which circuit status to view with Ent s the arrow buttons and press ES Information such as current temperature current state individual case informa tion and other information are given Sensor Status Screen Press MB Select an analog or digital sensor and E press E Information such as control value and com mand values will be displayed The analog sensor will have Cut In Cut Out temperature values F2 ZONES F3 LIGHTING F4 SENSORS FS SETUP Figure 11 19 BX Function Button Menu 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 2 The E2 BX controller has four status screens that are each accessible from the Home screen by pressing the corresponding function key AHU Status Screen Press MAN The AHU information such as control temperature season mode space humidity apparent tem perature heat cool mode fan state economization status dehumidification and humidity status are all included on this screen Zones Status Screen Press HE Zone information including outdoor and zone temperature outdoor humidity season mode occu pied
265. icate with the device As mentioned above there are two ways in which a device may be commissioned No one way is better than the other in terms of effectiveness but one of the methods may be less difficult than the other depending on the type of installation 9 14 2 1 The Service Button Method To commission a device using the service button you must first set up the E2 to receive a service button signal and then press the service button on the device When the signal is received by the E2 the device will be commis sioned To set up the E2 to receive a service button signal move the cursor to the Controller Name field of the record you wish to set up and press SET ADDRESS Bus Subnet Board Neuron ID Set controller address for CL 63 662 Subnet 3 Node 2 Select method for identifying controller 1 Pressing Service Pin on controller ntering Neuron ID s directly Specifying a range of nodes 4 Cancel Press desired selection Figure 9 27 Commissioning Menu A menu will appear on the screen giving you the option of either pressing the service button entering the Neuron ID by hand or canceling and returning to the main screen Press to select the service button option Quick Start 9 17 Setting Controller Address for CL 03 002 Subnet 3 Node 2 Enter time to wait for service pin message Wait Time 6 61 66 Figure 9 28 Service Button Screen The E2 will prompt you to enter a wa
266. ide Expanded Information Detailed Status CONDENSERO1 NONE 200 0 Sensor Ctrl ANALOG SENSO1 ANALOG SENS62 DIGITAL SENS61 DIGITAL SENS62 Value NONE NONE NOTAC NOTAC Controlled By Discharge Status Fan s On F1 ON FS CANCEL Figure 11 23 Sample Actions Menu From RX Home Screen The easiest way to access a log or graph is from the Actions menu while on the Home screen or an applica tion s Status screen These screens contain a number of different input and output values from the application If a particular input or output is being logged by the E2 and has log data stored in the system you can view the log or graph by following the instructions below 1 Use the arrow keys to highlight the desired input 11 14 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual ee or output on the Home or a Status screen 2 Press to call up the Actions Menu and l select either option to view a graph or to view a log If Graph and Log options are not listed in the Actions Menu this means the property you have selected is not set up to be logged It may also be the case that there are currently no logged values to be viewed this often happens when a controller is first set up or after a log has been cleared If this is the case E2 will tell you that no logged samples exist For a complete list of items in the Actions Menu refer to Section 9 7 3 The Actions Menu 11 11 1 2 Setup Screens RX 466 Unit 3 SETUP Se
267. ield is reached 10 21 Separate Setpoints The Separate Setpoints strategy for AHU allows a Cut In Cut Out setpoint to be set up for each heat and cool stage instead of just one cool and one heat setpoint set up for each stage Normal strategy Dehumidification con trol can be performed while controlling with separate set points 10 46 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 2 10 21 1 Heat Cut In Cut Out Set points For Each Stage If the current space temperature is greater than or equal to the heat stage Cut Out setpoint or the individual cool ing stage is currently ON due to a call for cooling Cut In setpoint or dehumidification and the current space tem perature is greater than the individual COOL stage Cut In setpoint then begin turning the stage OFF by starting the heat stage Off Delay countdown timer Or if the current space temperature is less than or equal to the heat stage Cut In setpoint begin turning the stage ON by starting the heat stage On Delay countdown timer 10 21 2 Cool Cut In Cut Out Set points For Each Stage If the current space temperature is less than or equal to the cool stage Cut Out setpoint begin turning the cool stage OFF by starting the cool stage Off Delay countdown timer If the current space temperature is greater than or equal to the Cut In setpoint begin turning the cool stage ON by starting the cool stage On Delay countdown timer 10 21 3 Dehumidification Control Dehumidification cont
268. ield will display an asterisk along with the word UNK Report Priority The report priority fields describe the priority level of the advisory as well as the date and time the advisory occurred Return To Normal If the advisory has returned to a normal state either on its own or because of a user ordered alarm reset the date Operator s Guide to Using the E2 11 13 and time on which the reset occurred will be shown beside the report priority 11 11 Viewing Logs and Graphs There are two basic forms used by the E2 to display data logs and graphs A log is simply a list of sampled values for a particular input or output along with the sampling times and dates When you view logged data in this form it is usually listed with the most recent sample at the top of the list and the other samples listed below it in reverse chronological order A graph is a graphical representation of these log entries that shows how the sampled value has changed over time Graphing is a quick easy way to get an idea of how the application has been behaving Special graphing features also allow you to zoom in on specific areas of the graph 11 11 1 Locating Logged Inputs Outputs 11 11 1 1 Home Status Screens RX 466 Unit 3 RX DEU SUMMARY CKT61 CKT62 CKT83 CKT 64 11571 CKT 66 CKT87 CKT68 CKT69 CKT18 CKT11 Refr Refr Refr Refr Refr Refr Refr Refr Refr Refr Refr Actions Menu Log Overr
269. ified tem perature setpoint The user supplies Temperature Control with the set point and a deadband which is the range of case tempera tures equally above and below the setpoint within which the case temperature will be considered acceptable When the case temperature is above the setpoint plus one half the deadband refrigeration will be turned ON It will remain ON until the temperature drops to below the temperature setpoint minus one half the deadband at which point refrigerant flow will be turned OFF Case temperature may be supplied to Temperature Control by a supply air sensor a return air sensor or a mixture of both the supply and return air sensor values Temperature Control itself does not vary the opening percentage of the pulse or stepper valve it simply addresses the case s need for refrigerant flow to maintain its setpoint Once refrigeration is started control of the valve is handled by Superheat Control Superheat Control The difference between the temperature of the refriger ant going in to the evaporator inlet the coil in tempera ture and the refrigerant leaving the evaporator outlet the coil out temperature is called Superheat When refriger ant is flowing through an evaporator Superheat Control uses PID Control to keep the Superheat at a user defined Superheat setpoint Superheat Control positions the valve to increase or decrease refrigerant flow in an effort to keep the Superheat equal to a user
270. ight control 70 15 mounting dimensions 3 5 power modules wiring 8 5 wiring schematic 8 5 problems with cases E 6 recovery mode EEPRs 70 10 EEVs 10 10 sensor default locations 8 14 sensor failures 70 14 Sensors default installation locations 8 14 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 setting up individual CC 100s 10 14 specifying the number of 9 2 9 16 stand alone mode 70 13 superheat control 70 10 temperature control 10 10 temperature probes installing 5 4 valve cable 8 5 valves 10 9 EEPRs 70 10 EEVs 10 10 liquid pulse 0 10 liquid stepper 70 10 pulse 70 9 stepper 0 9 suction stepper 10 10 walk in freezer control 70 13 wash mode See Clean Mode 10 13 CC 100H See Case Controllers CC 100LS See Case Controllers CC 100P See Case Controllers Checking Boards Online 9 16 11 10 Checking Status Screens 11 10 Clean Mode 0 13 11 8 initiating 1 1 8 Clean Out 9 Clean Switches 10 6 Cold Reset performing a 9 7 Cold Reset Button 9 7 COM A amp D Network See I O Network Commissioning 9 7 Commissioning CC 100s 9 17 how commissioning works 9 17 Compressors troubleshooting E 3 Condensers air cooled 10 2 strategy 10 2 bypassing fan stages 1 9 evaporative 10 3 fail safe dip switch setup 0 4 fan control 0 3 single speed 70 3 two speed 70 3 variable speed 10 3 2 fast recovery 10 3 hardware overview 70 3 input types 10 4 output wiring 10 4 overriding compressor stages 71 9 problems with E 5 split mode 0 3
271. ime Schedule first and then assign it to a Lighting Control Set up a Time Schedule and got to Lighting Control Choose the desired application and press SETUP Move the cursor to C7 Inputs and highlight the Board field Press LOOK UP choose the input device and press E Highlight the Point field and press LOOK UP Select the type of schedule Enter and press E Make sure Lighting Control out put is assigned Lights Will Not Come On With Photocell is not recognized by Make sure the photocell is con The Photocell controller figured as an analog input Verify that the type of light sen sor is correct If using a light level sensor from another E2 controller set it up on the controller it is associated with in the Global Data section E 8 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 Index Numerics 16AI Analog Input Board input type dip switches 6 7 power connections for sensors 8 2 specifying the number of 9 2 9 15 wiring input devices to 8 16Ale Analog Input Board defined 2 0 detail 2 10 4A0 Analog Output Board defined 2 9 features 2 9 specifying the number of 9 2 9 15 8DO Digital Output Board defined 2 9 features 2 9 location 3 3 mounting without enclosure 3 4 specifying the number of 9 2 9 15 810 Combination Input Output Board input labeling 8 input type dip switches 8 numbering 5 3 power connections for sensors 8 2 8RO Relay Output Board defi
272. in Delay 10 20 4 4 Freeze Lockout 10 20 43 Alatmm c one attente rem He nine em OR as 10 20 5 Zone Bypass Inputs usas e e e ee A d e tci e Ciel 10 45 10 20 5 1 Bypass Failsafe zin sontes nee eon em RE eee See 10 45 10 20 6 Flow Sensor Related Tests eese sees eee ete nenne ennt ennt en eren rsen resin nennen reser nennen nennen eren 10 46 10 20 6 1 BeakTeSt e A A RER OR AE 10 46 10 20 6 2 Obstr cted Zotie Test 5 31e ee eerte ente tne tee tn tene reip ele edere rete 10 46 10 207 Service Modes sS tee intret eh RE RM Rd 10 46 10 21 SEPARATE SEIPOINTS ete eREpROSGpRO ii 10 46 10 21 1 Heat Cut In Cut Out Setpoints For Each Stage esses eee eerte nennen nennen trees 10 46 10 21 2 Cool Cut In Cut Out Setpoints For Each Stage esee 10 46 10 21 3 Dehumidification Controls s eR He edet e ERE ae eoe e 10 46 10 21 4 Two Speed Fan Control i id eere Pere Ie ere dure R Seeds 10 46 J0 21 5 Configurations eee een em eo tien 10 47 11 OPERATOR S GUIDE TO USING THE E2 eee eee sees eee esee eene tassa etos ta stone tete noc nooo sense tn e tasto setae eas ebe rones 11 1 TEI THEEZHOMESGREEN 5 ook esis ote en eee See das ia 11 1 TUI AX OME SCT CON TEE casens ceive ote qe peer pte diete tec e e RES 11 1 T11 2 BX Home Screen sese rN eese e A n sk Ses ea a e Eee e Doce S aekin 11 1 Mrs CX HomeScreen idad 11 2 11 2 LOGGING ON AND ACCESS LEVELS unten e E e EE EE E Sa en EEE
273. ince the controller looks at only the actual state of the point when it uses the input for control purposes 1t is not necessary to define engineering units for dig ital inputs However selecting units that are appro priate to the input s function such as BYP or Input and Output Setup 8 9 NO_BYP for inputs that initiate bypasses will make the input s state easier to read and understand To choose an engineering unit press LOOK UP to select Push Button Mode Digital inputs may be set up as push button inputs by changing this field to YES Push Button Mode is a method of interpreting a digi tal state that is used strictly for push buttons When used a button press lasting longer than one second will change the state of the input In other words if the input is OFF a button press will change it to ON and another button press will change it back to OFF etc Output This field displays the link between the input and its application s You do not need to enter any thing in this field You will be able to link applica tions to this point during the application setup process 8 2 The 8RO 810 and MultiFlex Outputs The 8RO 8IO and MultiFlex have relay outputs that close when called to be ON and open when called to be OFF When an output point is closed ON the LED directly above the output terminal glows red These boards use Form C contacts that determine if the connection will be open or close
274. inputs Connection In order to function correctly the CC 100 needs to know the function of each of the sensors plugged into inputs through 6 For example a CC 100P liquid pulse controller needs to know which of the six sensors is the coil in sensor which is the coil out sensor etc Each of the six inputs have a default input type assign ment based on the type of CC 100 either Liquid or Suc tion If the sensors in your case match the default sensor types plug each sensor into the appropriate receptacle 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 ee Input Liquid CC 100P and Suction CC 100LS CS 100 and CC 100H 1 COIL IN Blue DISCHARGE TEMP 1 Green 2 COIL OUT Red DISCHARGE TEMP 2 Green 3 DISCHARGE AIR DISCHARGE TEMP 3 Green Green 4 RETURNAIR Pur DISCHARGE TEMP 4 ple Green 5 DEFROST TERM DEFROST TERM Orange Orange 6 CLEAN SWITCH CLEAN SWITCH Table 8 4 Default Input Assignments If your case has sensors or switches that are not listed in the defaults above or if itis otherwise impossible to use all the defaults for the CC 100 the input type can be changed in the system software Refer to P N 026 1603 Programmer 5 Guide for instructions on how to do this Auxiliary Analog Input JUMPER Figure 8 14 Auxiliary Analog Input The four pin analog input is designed to be connected to a Relative Humidity Sensor P N
275. int the state will transition from ON to OFF Lighting Schedules The ON OFF state determined by the light level can be logically combined with LOGIC IN a digital input from an input point or another application in E2 The result of this comparison will be the final ON OFF light state com mand that is sent from the Light Level Interface cell to the Schedule Interface cell explained below Logical Combination Strategies There are several different strategies for combining the light level ON OFF state with the value of the LOGIC IN input Logic Only The cell will read only the LOGIC IN input and ignore the light level sensor reading LLEV Only The cell will read only the light level sensor and ignore the value of the LOGIC IN input Both ON Both OFF From an output OFF state when both the light level state and the LOGIC IN input are ON the resulting output command will be ON The output command will remain ON until both the light level state and the LOGIC IN input turn OFF Both ON LLEV OFF Like the Both ON Software Overview 10 25 Both OFF strategy except only the light level state must turn OFF in order to turn the output from ON to OFF LLEV ON Both OFF Like the Both ON Both OFF strategy except only the light level state must turn ON in order to turn the output from OFF to ON Both ON Any OFF Like the Both ON Both OFF strategy except any of the two states that turn from ON to OFF will res
276. ischarge Status Fan s On ana DIGITAL 2x DIGITAL SENSO on Fiz SUCTION F2 CONDENSER Fa CIRCUITS FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS Fa SENSORS Figure 9 5 Common Screen Elements RX version shown 9 6 1 The Header The first two lines at the top of the E2 screen are referred to as the screen header This area of the screen contains the time and date controller name subnet and node number and alarm and failure notifications In addi tion it contains highlighted indicators and icons to show when a user is operating in a particular mode such as full options edit macro record or insert mode If the E2 s Global Data feature is being used to supply outside air temperature and outside relative humidity val ues these values will also be displayed in the header 9 6 1 1 At the very top of every screen in the E2 there are icons that indicate various stages of activity number of users logged into the controller battery alerts connectivity status and more Header Icons 68 61 65 CX 366 Unit 1 11 15 16 Device Summary ALAR Me Press Log In Out to Log On Figure 9 6 Header Icons 9 4 E2 RX BX CX ISO Manual 2 icon Desorption Battery indicator Yellow less than 30 of battery life left Red less than 10 of bat tery life left or battery switch is disabled Single user is logged in Multi users are logged in 9 E2 is connected to Ethernet EX Wait or system is busy 2
277. ising the setpoint to 74 F 10 10 5 Priority Levels Each application that you wish to set up for shedding must be assigned a priority level in the Demand Control application When a Demand Control application sheds loads it does so by shedding all applications that are in the first priority level and then continuing to shed higher pri ority levels until the demand is at an acceptable level or until all levels are shed Priority levels are simply outputs that connect to the demand shedding inputs of one or more applications When a level is shed the output comes ON and all appli cations connected to the output are shed There are three types of priority levels 1 First Shed First Shed levels are the first ones to be shed when demand shedding begins The Demand Control applica tion first begins shedding by activating level 1 of the First Shed levels As needed each level thereafter is shed in succession 2 3 and so on to 20 Applications that are part of the First Shed priority lev els should be non vital applications that would have no significant effect on the system if it were to be shed for a prolonged period of time Examples motor room exhaust fans satellite HVAC units and or lights in low occupancy rooms 2 Rotational Shed The Rotational Shed levels are shed in sequence only if all defined First Shed levels have already been shed and the Demand Control application needs more shedding to lower demand Un
278. it time in the Wait Time field The Wait Time is the amount of time the E2 will try to detect a service button press before declaring the attempt unsuccessful and returning to the main screen To commission the device the Neuron ID must be sent during the Wait Time duration After you enter a wait time in hours minutes seconds Ent format and press ES the Wait Time duration begins All that is left to do is to press the service button on the device to be commissioned tion begins the E2 will accept the first Neuron ID code it receives Be sure that no other ser vice buttons on any devices on the network are being pressed during the Wait Time Since the service button on the CC 100 is its Hand Held Terminal jack be sure that no one has a Hand Held Terminal plugged into a CC 100 other than the one being commissioned CAUTION When the E2 s Wait Time dura The location of the service button and the method of pressing it depends on the device or controller being com missioned The CC 100 s Service Button Since the CC 100 is meant to remain in an enclosure the CC100 s Hand Held Terminal jack has been config ured to act as the service button Plugging a Hand Held Terminal into the jack simulates a service button press The Hand Held Terminal Jack is on the left side of the case controller next to the power cable harness connec tion To send the Neuron ID plug a Hand Held Terminal into the jack and hold it in for fi
279. itch Reset and Clean Out Buttons Plug In 3rd Party Network Card RS232 Port External Keyboard Port Termination Jumper JP7 Echelon Network Connector Plug In Digital O Card RS 485 I O Network Connectors two RS 485 Termination Jumpers JP1 6 Power Interface Port Power Switch Power On LED Earth Ground Figure 4 4 Power Interface Board The PIB interfaces the power and most all communica tions with the main board and contains all field wiring connections 4 2 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 2 4 2 Starting at the lower right side of the PIB the first plug is the 24VAC input This must terminate into the power supply transformer Powering the E2 E2 requires 24VAC Class 2 power which is supplied by a non center tapped Class 2 transformer CPC supplies two transformers that may be used to power E2s one for use with 110VAC P N 640 0041 and one for use with 220VAC P N 640 0042 Both trans formers are rated at 50VA and each will power one E2 unit 4 2 1 RS 485 Ports On the lower left side of the PIB are two RS 485 Net work connector ports This is where all I O boards except the case controllers TD3 ESR8 and Echelon I O boards are connected 4 2 2 RS 485 Jumpers There is one set of RS 485 jumpers for each RS 485 port Jumpers JP1 3 are located directly above the first connector port and jumpers JP4 6 are located directly above the second c
280. jumpers 4 2 installation instructions 4 6 mounting blank face 3 3 recessed mount 3 retrofit 3 2 standard mount 3 networking introduction to 2 Quick Start 9 7 repeater part number for manual 4 routers I 4 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 2 part number for manual 4 RS 232 Baud Rate 9 2 RS 485 port 4 2 RS 485 termination jumpers 4 2 specifications 2 2 user s guide 4 EC 2 Case Controller defined 2 0 detail 2 10 Echelon Network checking boards online 9 16 11 10 daisy chaining 7 device wiring 7 E2RX 1 3 installing Echelon devices 7 3 location of connectors on E2 4 2 maximum number of nodes 7 2 Neuron ID number manual entry of 9 18 overview 7 1 peripherals for the 3 powering Echelon devices 7 3 problems with E 2 subnets setting the number 9 2 9 16 termination block installation 7 2 unit controllers 9 2 9 16 wire length limitations 7 3 wire restrictions 7 3 wiring 7 1 wiring type 7 1 Echelon Network Setting Up 9 16 Economizers See AHUs economizers Edit Menu 9 26 EEPRs See Valves EEVs See Valves Electric Defrost See Defrost electric Emergency Defrost See Defrost emergency Enhanced Lighting combination strategies 70 25 occupied mode 10 26 ESR8 Board defined 2 11 features 2 71 installation guide 7 7 mounting 3 5 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 specifying the number of 9 2 9 17 Ethernet Box to Box 6 1 F Flexible Combiner 6 Full Options On and Off 1 3 Function Buttons BX co
281. l and applies this state to a set of minimum ON and OFF times If the requested light state turns ON the lights before the prescribed minimum ON time or turns OFF the lights before the prescribed minimum OFF time the Minimum ON OFF cell will delay the command until the mini mum ON or minimum OFF time has elapsed If ON and OFF delays are specified the cell delays ON OFF commands it receives from the Schedule Interface cell It processes commands for manual bypass ing of the light state When the Bypass input is any value other than NONE the cell ignores the light state command input all minimum ON OFF times and all ON OFF delays and bypasses the light state to the digital value of the Bypass input The digital output of this cell controls the I O board output point that activates and deactivates the lights 10 9 8 The Proof Cell The Proof cell verifies that the lights are turning ON and OFF as commanded by the Lighting Schedule applica tion The Proof cell compares the digital command sent to the I O output that controls the lights with a digital input from a proof checking device like a digital light level sen sor If the two inputs are not equal for an amount of time longer than the programmed proof delay the Proof cell turns its Proof output ON to signify a failure has occurred The Proof cell will deactivate the Proof output if the proof failure has been cleared longer than the programmed proof latch time Softwar
282. l horns or lights ONLY IF technicians have been notified of the problem and have been dis patched Technicians after fixing the problem MUST reset or clear the alarm to re enable alarming To acknowledge an alarm or notice highlight the desired log entry and press ALARM ACK A screen will come up prompting the user to either acknowl edge the selected advisory acknowledge all advisories or to cancel the operation Press to acknowledge the selected advisory Press B to acknowledge all advisories Press to cancel the operation 11 10 8 2 Resetting When a log entry is reset it is forced to a normal con dition and the log entry remains in the Controller Advisory Log An alarm notice or failure can be reset by highlight ing a log entry and pressing ALARM RST while at the Advisory Log screen A screen will come up prompt ing the user to either reset the selected advisory reset all advisories or to cancel the operation A 1 Press A to reset the selected advisory 2 Press al to reset all advisories 3 Press to cancel the operation 11 10 8 3 Clearing The option to clear logs completely removes a log entry from the Advisory Log Advisory Log entries may be cleared by highlighting the log entry and pressing ALARM CLR while viewing the Advisory Log screen A screen will come up Alarms prompting the user to either clear the selected advisory clear all advisories or to cancel the operation
283. l outputs go to 100 ON They remain in this state until the tempera ture rises above the heating setpoint plus the hysteresis or below the cooling setpoint minus the hysteresis at which time the outputs will go to 0 ON HYSTERESIS 100 OUTPUT TEMPERATURE I HEATING SET POINT COOLING SET POINT 26512035 Figure 10 19 Unoccupied Hysteresis Mode Software Overview 10 39 10 16 3 Optimum Start Stop OSS cvs NOTE OSS applies only to Heat Cools that use a time schedule to change occupancy states Overrides initiated by the digital OCC STATE input will not initiate pre starts or pre stops Optimum Start Stop OSS is a feature that works alongside the Heat Cool s occupied and unoccupied tem perature control modes OSS takes control of heating and cooling several minutes before the building is scheduled to change occupancy states and prepares the building for the upcoming change in setpoints As a result when the occu pancy state changes the temperature will be comfortably within the range of the new setpoint Figure 10 8 shows an example of how pre starts and pre stops work in a heating application From unoccupied mode the pre start period ramps the temperature up slowly so that when the scheduled change from unoccu pied to occupied mode occurs the temperature will already be at or near the occupied heating setpoint During the pre stop which occurs before the Heat Cool goes from occupie
284. la The High Alarm Low Alarm and Delay columns are the suggested high and low case temperature alarm set points and the report delay To set up these alarm setpoints and delays locate the Case Temperature control input and select the Generic Alarm Setup action from the Actions Menu Enter the High and Low setpoints in the Normal Hi and Normal Low fields respectively Enter the Delay in the Report Delay field Defrost Type The E2 assumes by default that all cases have electric defrost If this is not the case you will have to enter new values for the Number of Defrosts and the Defrost Time in the circuit The suggested defaults are listed under the Hot Gas Elec Rev Air and Timed columns The number to the left of the slash indicates the suggested number of defrost times per day and the number to the right of the slash indicates the recommended Defrost Time length Defrost Type Low Elec e Description AE EE DEF Timed fe ee fsbo singe decir as a oo ae as va 10 3 SDFJ Single deck freezer juice I8 30 oro 2M8 15 veoj 1 60 6 ICBX fice cream freezer box 20 5 30 oro 320 2 45 xeo 2160 E RIE _ Reach in freezerjuice I5 s 20 or m ms veoj 1160 S FRBX Frozen food box 220 or s sas eoj 3 60 12 MDFF__ Multi deck freezer food 10 0 20 oro 222 1s xeo x60 iS FZBK Muhideckfreezerbakery 10 20 mo 2722 m5 2 60 2 60
285. ld look like Figure 10 7 RX 466 Unit 3 16 18 59 CASE CTRL ASSOC FULL ALARM CC CS188 lt gt Circuit Association l CC CS166 Controller Bus CC CS166 Appl Circuit CL 63 662 CC LIQUID882 CS 63 663 CS SUCTIONG63 CH 63 664 CC SUCTIONG64 EC 63 665 EC2 CC885 Fi SETUP CCB F2 SETUP CKT F4 LOOK UP FS CANCEL Figure 10 7 CC CS100 Circuit Association Screen RX 400 This screen lists all of the CC 100s CS 100s and EC 2s defined in this E2 Each one is listed with its name its node number the application name of the case control ler s application and the associated circuit name To associate a case controller with its circuit move the cursor into the Circuit field of the controller you wish to associate and press the key The Application Selec tion menu will list all of the Case Control Circuit applica tions in the E2 Choose the desired circuit and press or to select Repeat this process until all case con trollers are associated with Case Control Circuit applica tions Air Handling Units AHU 10 5 Air Handling Units AHU 10 5 1 The E2 BX supports the simultaneous control of up to six air handling units AHU AHU Control applications govern all aspects of an AHU s operations including heat ing and cooling dehumidification fans and economizer control Unlike rooftop control units RTUs AHUs are con trolled directly by the E2 itself and not by a separate unit control board Ove
286. lding this button a CLEAN OUT for one second will cause the E2 14 BLUE R to reset and retain all pro grammed applications logs and other data stored in memory Clean Out Button The button labeled CLEAN OUT on the controller is used to perform a function called clean out Using this button in conjunction with the Reset But ton will cause a clean out which is a reset that erases all data from memory The E2 will re boot after a clean out with all programmed applications logs and other data erased Clean outs are also commonly called Blue R resets named for the key presses required to clean out CPC s pre vious generation of controllers REFLECS Performing a Clean Out grammed parameters from memory Do not follow these instructions unless you are abso lutely sure you wish to remove all applications and logs from memory CAUTION A clean out will erase all pro 1 Press and RELEASE the Reset Button quickly The screen will clear 2 Press and Hold the Clean Out button 3 When CLEANOUT appears in large text across the screen RELEASE the Clean Out but ton Quick Start 9 1 9 3 Setting Number of Network Devices RX 466 Unit 3 CONNECTED 1 0 E unit Number THIS 63 1 Unit Name Boards Controllers on 1 0 Network Num Ctrl Type Nu Ctrl Type Num Ctrl Type 6 16AI WCC 8 PAK 8R0 CUB 8 SmartESR Liu IRLDS 4A0 WTPK DFHC WPK AA AA Controllers on Echelon
287. le connector into the valve connector P N 335 3260 Generic Stepper and Emerson Flow Controls ESV Valve The 335 3260 valve cable has six flying leads for con nection to a stepper valve Four of these leads connect to the stepper motors while the other two serve as the power wiring 12VDC and ground The pinout for this valve cable is shown in Figure 8 17 Table 8 5 shows how to hook the flying leads to Emer son Flow Controls ESR Emerson Flow Controls ESV and Sporlan SEI amp CDS valves CASE CONTROLLER 4 5 6 1 213 PINOUT FOR CC 100 VALVE RECEPTACLE 26513116 Figure 8 17 Wiring the 335 3260 Generic Stepper Valve 8 16 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual BER on Valve BER 335 3260 Pin Color trols ESR trols ESV ume ue Due eue d Sporlan 2 pus Bue Red Green 5 Wwe e s 5m S o Table 8 5 335 3260 to Valve Connection Information 8 4 ESR8 and SmartESR Valve Output Wiring ESR8 Boards Discontinued For ESR8 boards the stepper valves are wired to the board by connecting the four conductor wire from the stepper valve to a connector plug and then plugging in to one of eight jacks along the top of the board Figure 8 18 Use the cable harnesses supplied with the valves or use Belden 9418 four conductor 18AWG wire we NOTE A wire run may not be longer than 150 5 ft using Belden 9418 If the stepper valves have block style connectors cut the
288. le tells the schedules to perform the events programmed for one of the four holiday dates HD1 HD2 HD3 or HD4 Because multiple E2s on a network would likely use the same holiday schedules for determining special occu pied and unoccupied building hours holiday scheduling is handled by Global Data This means the holiday schedule can be set up in one E2 and shared with all other E2s that use time scheduling 10 14 Power Monitoring A Power Monitoring application is used primarily for monitoring recording and to a lesser degree controlling KW usage in a building 10 14 1 Overview Explanation of Demand Power companies supply power to consumers at a fixed rate per kilowatt hour until a pre defined level of energy consumption is reached This level is called the demand limit When the demand limit is exceeded the rate is greatly increased as a penalty for high power demand by the consumer Generally once the demand limit is exceeded the increased rate is charged for the remainder of the year To determine if you have reached the demand limit the power company arbitrarily monitors a consumer s energy consumption for a fixed period of time This monitoring period is called a demand window Power companies can generally tell you how long a demand window period lasts but you ll never know when the measurement will take place How Power Monitoring Calculates Demand To help you make sure you do not use more power than t
289. lications separate from Time Scheduling See Section 10 13 2 Holiday Schedules for more information Temporary schedules are technically not schedules but temporary override functions that may be made to exist within an individual master or slave schedule Tem porary schedules are used to temporarily override the ON OFF instructions of an individual master or slave sched ule Generally temporary schedules are only used for one shot applications such as keeping the lights on an extra hour for a single night Temporary schedules override all other events within a master or slave schedule including holidays 10 13 1 How Schedules Work 10 13 1 1 Events Master schedules and slave schedules consist of up to 15 pairs of events Events are simple commands to turn the schedule output either ON or OFF at a particular time within a range of days Events are usually programmed in pairs so that during a specified range of days the schedule output can be turned ON and OFF at a particular time within the same day However events may be pro grammed singularly on OFF or one ON command per day Events may be programmed to take place on any or all days from Sunday to Saturday In addition events may take place on any or all of four holiday or special dates called HD1 HD2 HD3 and HD4 Holiday sched ules are used to tell the master or slave schedules when these special dates occur 10 13 1 2 Absolute and Relative Events 10 36
290. lier that increases or decreases the speed at which the I Mode will increase or decrease the percent age Introduction to PID Control P P MODES When changing the value of K it should be noted that small adjustments yield large results For this reason it is suggested that K should remain close to 1 0 and certainly no less than 0 5 and no greater than 2 0 Derivative Mode The Proportional and Integral Modes provide a good method of controlling a closed loop system However in special circumstances where the input value is changing rapidly there may be a lag time between when the error is noted and the length of time it takes the system to compen Appendix D PID Control D 3 sate for error To reduce this lag time Derivative Mode is used Derivative Mode constantly analyzes the rate of change of the error makes a prediction about what the future error will be and makes an adjustment to the output in an attempt to reduce the rate of change in the error In layman s terms Derivative Mode causes PID con trol to overshoot the amount of output percentage to compensate for the slow reaction times of the P and I Modes As a result Derivative Mode slows the rate error change down to a level the P and I Modes can handle The D Mode Calculation To determine the D Mode adjustment for each update PID performs the following calculation D mode adjustment Kg E 2E 4
291. like the First Shed priority levels Rotational Shed levels do not always begin shedding by activating level 1 Instead it shares the burden of being the first to activate among all the Rotational Shed levels If during one demand condition Rotational Shed level 1 is the first of all the Rotational Shed levels to activate it rotates first activation status to the next level in sequence in this case level 2 Thus the next time a demand condition occurs Software Overview 10 29 level 2 will activate first and further levels will activate in sequence until it reaches level 1 which will be the last to activate Applications that are Rotational Shed priority should be more vital to system performance than the ones config ured as First Shed priority levels In addition all applica tions assigned to Rotational Shed levels should all be of relatively equal importance since they each will spend about the same total amount of time in shed Also if you will be shedding a small amount of loads that are relatively equal in priority you may choose to define them all under Rotational Shed levels leaving the First Shed levels blank Demand Control would then skip directly to the Rotational Shed levels during load shed ding and all loads would share shed time equally 3 Last Shed The Last Shed priority levels are shed in sequence only if all First Shed and Rotational Shed levels have been shed and the Demand Control ap
292. low Master schedules are the main scheduling unit used by the E2 A master schedule consists of up to 15 sched uled ON OFF event pairs which may be programmed to occur on any individual date and time or series of dates and times Master schedules may also drive slave sched ules Software Overview 10 35 Slave schedules are similar to master schedules except their operation is driven by a master schedule Slave schedules generally are alterations of the master schedule s event times The ON OFF times in a slave schedule may take place either at specific defined times of the day or relative to the times given in the master sched ule For example a master schedule may say The build ing is occupied from 8 00 a m to 9 00 p m while one of its slave schedules says Dim the building lights 15 min utes before the store closes Slave schedules may also be mastered by other slave schedules to create a series of stacked schedules Holiday schedules are used to tell master and slave schedules that a special day or event is occurring For example master schedules and their corresponding slave schedules may be programmed with special holiday events such as Keep all lights off during Holiday x The holiday schedule s job is to inform the schedules to which it is connected Today is Holiday x Although holiday schedules are used exclusively by Time Scheduling applications they are set up as individual app
293. low the Circuits section at the bottom right of the screen is the Sensor Control section where Control Value and Command information are displayed 11 1 2 BX Home Screen OX 400 Unit 1 Ox ory SUMMARY EIE NOTA WON HOTA HOH Levet PX Denand ET DEMAND CIRLOT 0 6 DEMAND CTRLO2 8 3 LEGEND 1 Outside Humidity 7 Function Button Index 5 2 Outside Air Temperature 8 Sensor Control 3 Season 9 Zones 4 Light Level FTC 10 Air Handling Units 5 6 Demand Control 11 Light Schedules Power Monitoring Figure 11 2 BX Home Screen OAT Section The upper left hand section of the BX Home screen contains status information for four different values including outside air temperature humidity percentage season and light level Demand Control Section Directly below the OAT section is demand control sta tus information which shows the number of applications and number of loads being shed Operator s Guide to Using the E2 11 1 Power Monitoring Section In the lowest left hand corner of the BX Home screen is the power monitoring section containing active KW and average power information Light Schedules Section In the center of the BX Home screen is ON and OFF status information for light schedules Air Handling Units Section Located at the top right hand comer of the BX Home screen the AHU section shows the number of AHUs tem perature state and ASP information for e
294. ltiFlex combination input output boards are equipped with 8 relay outputs rated for line voltage up to 240V with Form C contacts All combination boards also have either 8 or 16 inputs depending upon the model MultiFlex combination input output boards also may be equipped with four 0 10VDC analog outputs for use in driving variable speed devices All boards feature both 5 VDC and 12VDC output voltage points for use in powering transducers or other input devices that require power On the RS 485 Network the MultiFlex combination input output boards present themselves to the E2 or REFLECS site controller as 16AI Analog Input Boards 8RO Relay Output Boards and a 4AO Analog Output Boards depending on what type of inputs or outputs are equipped Dip switches are used to assign network ID numbers to each board type The MultiFlex combination input output boards also support a hand held terminal interface which allows tech nicians to view input values check relay and analog out put states and override output points with fixed digital or analog values Table 2 7 shows the available models of MultiFlex combination input output boards 810 3063 MultiFlex 88AO 8 analog digital in puts 8 relay outputs 4 analog outputs 810 3064 MultiFlex 88 8 analog digital in puts 8 relay outputs 810 3065 MultiFlex 168AO 16 analog digital in puts 8 relay outputs 4 analog outputs 16 analog digital in puts 8 relay outputs 4
295. lume of space The primary function of an HVAC Zone is to manage the operation of each individual HVAC unit by providing the temperature setpoints that will be used in Temperature Control Zones are also responsible for ordering HVAC units to dehumidify and determining when outside air conditions are favorable to economize 10 6 2 How Zones Work A Zone is built by first creating a Zone application in the E2 BX Then all HVAC unit applications that will be a part of the Zone must be connected with the Zone applica tion This connection process is known as association Overview When a rooftop unit or AHU is associated with a Zone the E2 automatically makes a series of I O connections between the Zone application and the individual MultiFlex RTU or AHU application From that point on the Zone is responsible for passing along the following information to the individual unit The heating and cooling setpoints it will use during occupied and unoccupied building times A command to operate in either occupied or unoccupied mode based on the Zone appli cation s own time schedule input Outdoor air and outdoor relative humidity values A signal to enable or disable economization based on the Zone application s own econo mization checking method A signal to begin or end dehumidification based on the Zone application s own humid ity reading and dehumidification setpoint A signal indicating the current season i
296. m to begin dehumidification It is up to the individual MultiFlex RTU RCB or AHU to per form the dehumidification 10 6 11 1 MultiFlex RTUs and RCBs Once the MultiFlex RTU and RCB applications acknowledge the signal to begin dehumidification it will search its outputs for a dehumidification device If one is configured this device will be turned ON Afterwards cool stages will be cycled ON up to a user defined maxi mum number of stages until all stages are ON or until the Zone application signals dehumidification is complete When dehumidification is complete the stages will cycle OFF followed by the dehumidification device 10 6 11 2 AHUs AHUs use a special dehumidification algorithm based on the Proportional loop in PID control When dehumidifi cation is enabled by the Zone application the AHU appli cation will activate a percentage of its total cool stage capacity the amount of which depends on how close the current relative humidity is to the setpoint See Section 10 5 Air Handling Units AHU for more information 10 6 12 Optimum Start Stop OSS ereccion NOTE OSS applies only to Zone applications 4 that use a time schedule to change occupancy states Overrides initiated by the digital BY PASS TO OCC or BYPASS TO UNOCC inputs will not initiate pre starts or pre stops 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 ee Optimum Start Stop OSS is a feature that works alongside the Zone application s occupied and unoccupied t
297. mensions 3 4 Modem Communica tion Expansion Card Mount ing New Processor Board The E2 s modem communication expansion card mounts above the PIB in the back of the enclosure box as shown in Figure 3 17 The standoffs and mounting holes are located above the PIB in the back of the enclosure box Use the mounting screws and standoffs to secure the card in place For more information on the modem communica tion expansion card see Section 4 3 2 Modem Communi cation Expansion Card New Processor Board Mounting 3 5 Modem Communication Expansion Card Mounts 4 Standoffs Figure 3 17 Modem Comm Card Mounting in E2 3 4 Mounting PC 104 Cards in E2 Previous Generation Processor Board 3 4 1 1 The Internal Modem ging the modem into the PC 104 slot Failure to do so can damage the modem and void the CAUTION Power down the E2 before plug warranty The E2 s internal modem mounts in the PC 104 slot located at the top left of the E2 main board See Figure 3 18 Disconnect power to the unit and carefully plug the male pins on the back of the modem card into the E2 s PC 104 slot Use the standoffs and screws supplied with the modem card to secure the card to the main board as shown in Figure 3 18 When finished restore power to the E2 3 6 E2 RX BX CX ISO Manual 2 MODEM 14 4k or 33 6k E2 PROCESSOR BOARD Figure 3 18 Mounting the Internal Modem Board 3 4 Two Channel and F
298. mine when conditions are favorable for economiza tion 1 Enthalpy Switch An enthalpy switch is a digital device that is pre set to detect when the tempera ture and humidity levels are favorable for econo mization When the conditions are favorable this switch sends an OK ON signal to the Zone application Otherwise the switch sends a NOT OK OFF signal 2 Dewpoint Setpoint A dewpoint probe measur ing the dewpoint of the outside air is compared to a setpoint If the outside air dewpoint is less than the setpoint economization is enabled If it is higher than the setpoint economization is dis abled 3 Calculated Enthalpy The Zone application cal culates the outside air enthalpy by reading the value of a relative humidity sensor and an out door air temperature sensor This calculated enthalpy is compared to a setpoint If the enthalpy is less than the setpoint economization is enabled If greater economization is disabled 4 Dewpoint Fail Safe This is similar to method 2 except an outdoor temperature sensor value is compared to the setpoint instead of a dewpoint probe s value This comparison is a poor substi tute for actual dewpoint readings and is recom mended for use as a fail safe only When possible use humidity or dewpoint sensors 5 Temperature Comparison The AHU Control application simply compares the temperature of the inside air with the temperature of the outside air If the outside air is
299. mplate File Bad CS100 Ckt IS A template file in E2 for a CS 100 is bad Test Dial Successful 50 E2 performed a test dial out with 1ts modem and the dial out was successful Time Updated By A User 99_ A user changed the time in the current E2 Time Updated Over Network The time in the current E2 was updated by another De emoteraracron te nero o Timed Out Waiting For FW Updt 50 The E2 waited for a firmware update to begin and 1t ia 0 Too Many Reboots Flash erased 5 A number of successive reboots has erased the Flash RAM Too Many Reboots SRAM erased 50 A number of successive reboots has erased the SRAM Total On Time Exceeded Limit User A digital value s total ON time has exceeded its defined Time ON Total setpoint Trip Alarm Generic pulse trip alarm Tripped 20 WPK condenser fan or compressor trip 20 50 50 Unit Ctlr Cell Create Failed WE E2 unsuccessfully tried to create a unit controller cell An error has occurred during a firmware update of E2 Call CPC service for assistance Unknown FW Update Attempted Unknown Heap Operation Error There is an internal error in the E2 software Notify uM C NNNM Unoccupied Hi Limit Exceeded User An analog value has risen above its defined high limit ee pi drine UNOCCUPIED mode gt S Unoccupied Low Limit Exceeded User An analog value has fallen below its defined low po limit setpoint during UNOCCUPIED mode this E2 User Appl Forced Reset SO A user or
300. n stein E2 810 3711 Woodley Case Controller ateway 810 3712 Woodley Pack Controller ateway 810 3720 Cutler Hammer Breaker ateway 810 3721 Square D Breaker Gateway Table 2 5 Gateway Board Models 2 2 2 The SmartESR Board The SmartESR Valve Regulator board P N 810 3198 shown in Figure 2 1 is an RS 485 I O Network electronic stepper valve regulator capable of driving up to eight step per motor valves which are typically used to control tem perature 2 4 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual E2 CD N LB TET L9 3 da e 3m a t a LEGEND Valve Connectors 8 6 Termination Jumpers 24VAC CT 75 VAC Power Input HHT Jack General Status LED 8 Network Address Switches Open LED 8 Close LED 8 1 O Network Input TX and RX LEDs Figure 2 1 SmartESR Board Layout The SmartESR uses suction side variable position evapo rator regulators ESRs to vary evaporator pressure for an entire circuit and is an alternative to mechanical EPR con trol The SmartESR receives input data from a CPC E2 control ler via the I O Network and then regulates the stepper valves according to the data from the E2 Each SmartESR board requires a Class 2 80VA 24VAC center tapped transformer for power CPC transformer P N 640 0080 is a multi tapped primary transformer that may be used with the SmartESR board 2 2 3 MultiFlex Boards The MultiFlex line of control system boards provide a wi
301. n 9 7 9 7 6 The System Information Menu ish id so aet et lee eye E He ao egt de ee shee 9 7 II A eie p D e SR PIER ER rt te EI Tong be ERE DER et rend 9 9 9 8 1 Setting the Time and Date seed HERE E rd EIE eee Yee 9 9 9 9 SET UP MODEM sous t EROR e TRO RERO PEDE ORDRE ERROR 9 10 9 10 SETUP TEO Pi ee gre US PS ee te ed tate dde bei ctae be euge 9 11 9 1 SETUP NETWORK BAUD RAT S aiea antapara searen aa o E t t REG ER HERE ERR PERRO rS UPS 9 12 viii Table of Contents 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 9 ILI RS 232 Baud R tes etti ii ie it ni n ui b ee RO Tur e EU utes ERE ERE eles 9 12 911 2 VO Network Baud Rate ue ERE D ERE REREU e REED GI EE USE ah onsen edet nS PRICE 9 12 0 12 SBT UP SER ACGESS ied nitri net ER ira e e TA e e eA e edet PE ERE DNE 9 13 9 12 1 Changing Required User Access Levels esses ener eere enne eteee trennen trennen ene 9 13 9 12 2 Creating a New User Account ii ee e butte tanda ERE RR RES CHE tue EESE couse EE qu De cer SERV seven PER 9 12 3 Deleting a User ue EORR ete OR OR e ehe e ere er Dh adi epar e eat e er eee 9 13 SET UPIJ O NETWORK 5e iare tette RU rad qai wert EO TRO e cei tor de eet mode e 9 13 1 Specify Number of Boatds ii eis treat east eter e ies 9 13 2 Checking Online Status i eere table eae aaa 0 14 SET UP ECHELON NETWORK cetera nte PO RE rire E ERE RED EAE votes 9 14 1 Specifying Number of Devices consinti esto 9 14 2 Commissioning Device eet geb
302. n the 8RO relay is OPEN New 8ROs and 8RO FCs All other E2 compatible output boards including the new design of 8RO P N 810 3005 the 8RO FC and have Form C contacts Figure 8 8 shows how to wire the three terminal Form C contact One wire of the two wire 8RO FC connection should always be connected to the middle terminal The second wire must either be connected to the N C terminal if you want the path to be closed when the relay is de energized or the N O terminal if you want the path to be open dur ing power failure 8 2 5 The Output LED Each output point on an output board has an indicator LED that shows the status of the output This LED is lit to show the output is ON and unlit to show the output is OFF The definition of ON and OFF in this case is deter mined by the position of the fail safe dip switch see Table 8 3 Therefore if the output s switch is UP an illuminated LED means the path is CLOSED but if the switch is DOWN an illuminated LED means the path is OPEN 8 2 6 Output Setup in E2 In order for the E2 to properly control devices that are hooked to an I O board you must first tell the E2 what type of output the devices require This is achieved from the Output Definitions Status screen 8 2 6 1 Configuring a Point from the Output Definitions Status Screen To configure a point go to the Output Definitions Sta tus screen 1 Press UD to open the Main Menu amp 2 Press System Configurati
303. nal Input and Output Setup 8 5 Input Type Dip Switch 550 2500 KW Transducer Down for 4 4 20 mA output to input board 550 2550 20mA Up for Wire positive transducer terminal Pulse to positive 24VDC supply T sd E DC VOLTAGE SUPPLY Wire negative transducer termi TAGE C E 250 ohm nal to odd numbered input termi KW resistor nal OUTPUT Wire negative 24VDC supply to even numbered input terminal Place 250Q resistor across odd and even numbered input termi EVEN ODD nals TERMINAL TERMINAL Pulse Accumulator output to input board If the input board is an 8IO or a 16AI version E 02 or greater connect the two KWh terminals to the input point polarity insensitive If the input board is a 16AI version less than E 02 connect the KWh terminals to board point 1 Set input switch 1 DOWN and set input TO INPUT switch 8 UP If the input board is a 16Ale connect the two LOW VOLTS KWh terminals to input 1 2 3 or 4 ONLY gt pa PHASE Loss 26613086 Table 8 1 Sensor Wiring 8 1 3 Input Setup in E2 At this point in the setup process you should have all y 01 01 02 RX 300 Unit 1 EA 18 12 22 sensors transducers and other input devices wired to ARUTA STATUS Top O points on MultiFlexes 16AIs and all output devices con Board type ra pe Type Application Association Value nected to SROs 8DOs or 4AOs outputs Once the physi LE A Rol
304. nal labeled S1 To communicate at 9600 baud set switch 6 to the UP position and switch 7 to DOWN For 19200 baud set switch 6 to the DOWN position and switch 7 to UP Currently 9600 baud is recommended Recommended Baud Rate The baud rate should be set to 9600 baud in all cases 5 7 Setting the Terminat The I O Network and Hardware Setup 5 3 ing Resistance Jumpers The I O Network connector for all I O boards and the E2 has a set of three terminating jumpers They are the jumpers positioned closest to the I O Network connector The E2 unlike standard boards has multiple I O Network connectors The purpose of the jumpers is to indicate the two ends or termination points of the segment On a daisy chain one device at the beginning and one device on the end must be terminated by placing all three terminating jump ers in the UP position All other devices on the daisy chain must have all three termination jumpers set to the DOWN position Figure 5 2 shows the proper terminating jumper settings for the E2 and for all I O boards VO BOARD AND E2 TERMINATING JUMPERS THE TERMINATING JUMPERS MUST BE IN THE UP POSITION IF AT THE BEGINNING OR END OF THE NETWORK THE TERMINATING JUMPERS MUST BE IN THE DOWN POSITION IF NOT AT THE BEGINNING OR END OF THE NETWORK Figure 5 2 1 0 Network Termination Jumper Settings E2 5 8 Powering the I O Boards All models of E2 compatible 1 O boards
305. nalog Sensor Control module performs three functions COMBINER Up to four analog inputs are com bined into a single analog value CUT IN CUT OUT CONTROL The combined input value is compared to a Cut In Cut Out set point Based on this comparison a digital output will be turned ON or OFF ALARMING Alarms and notices can be generated based on the combined value of the inputs and its relation to a set of high and low alarm and notice setpoints 10 11 3 Cut In Cut Out Setpoint Control Cut In Cut Out setpoints work differently depending upon whether the Cut In Cut Out setpoint is higher Cut In Higher Than Cut Out Cutln 7 Setpoint Cut Out Setpoint Figure 10 15 Cut In Setpoint Higher than Cut Out When the Cut In setpoint is higher than the Cut Out setpoint the Sensor Control output turns ON when the 10 32 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual E2 sensor input goes higher than the Cut In setpoint The Sen sor Control output remains ON until the input falls below the Cut Out setpoint at which time the output turns OFF See Figure 10 15 for an illustration Cut In Lower Than Cut Out Cut Out Setpoint Cut In Setpoint Figure 10 16 Cut In Setpoint Lower Than Cut Out When the Cut In setpoint is lower than the Cut Out set point the Sensor Control output turns ON when the sensor input goes lower than the Cut In setpoint The Sensor Con trol output remains ON until the input rises
306. nation of compressors should be switched ON or OFF to best fulfill the require ment For example if the application says that 60 of the total compressor rack s power should be active and the rack has compressors totaling 50 HP then E2 will try to switch on compressors totaling 30 HP For more information on PID see Appendix D PID Control 10 1 3 Variable Speed Compres sors Suction Group applications are compatible with vari able speed compressors VS compressors allow Suction Group applications to fine tune the amount of total active rack horsepower to react to small changes in suction pressures or temperatures As a result the rack does a bet ter job of controlling suction requiring less compressor switches When a variable speed compressor is present it will generally be treated as the primary pressure controlling device and any other standard compressors in the rack are secondary devices used only if the VS compressor is unable to fully handle the required horsepower The vari able speed compressor will be the first compressor on and the last compressor off 10 1 4 Floating Setpoint Control Suction Groups The Floating Setpoint strategy within the E2 RX pro vides a method for varying the suction setpoint of the group based on the temperature within a circuit When Floating Setpoint Control is enabled the E2 RX monitors either a circuit temperature or a case temperature from a CC 100 and adjusts the suc
307. nd the fans if active and turn the lights ON While the door is open normal refrigeration control will continue to be suspended However if the freezer s temperature rises above its high temperature alarm set point an alarm will still be generated and refrigeration will resume 10 3 4 Fan Control A circuit s circulation fan is always ON when the cir cuit is in refrigeration mode Its state during defrost is determined entirely by how the application is programmed by the user You may choose to set the fan either ON or OFF for each phase of a defrost cycle Pump Down Defrost and Run Off If you choose to keep fans off for 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 E2 the entire defrost cycle you may also choose to program a delay that will keep the fan from activating for a fixed amount of time after the cycle ends Fans are locked OFF during clean mode 10 3 5 The TD3 Temperature Dis play The TD3 is a case display that is designed to monitor three types of temperature sensors The compact unit is mounted on the face of a refrigeration case and displays by default the discharge air temperature Pressing the function button repeatedly allows you to view the temper ature of CPC s product probe the defrost termination value and then back to the discharge air temperature The TD3 has a status light that is controlled by the E2 controller A green status light means that the status is okay while a red status light indi
308. ne 9 22 The Echelon Network 9 22 forced to normal See Alarms reset to nor mal resetting 71 13 reset to normal 71 12 return to normal 71 12 state in advisory log 11 11 the Alarm Annunciator 9 22 Analog Sensor Control 0 32 Anti Sweat case controlled 0 12 dewpoint input 70 12 how setpoints work 70 12 how anti sweat works 10 38 setup 10 38 zones definition of 0 38 Application Setup 9 25 B Battery 4 4 enable switch 4 5 low 4 5 11 16 replacement 4 5 test 4 5 Baud Rates 9 2 E2 RS 232 port 9 12 E2 setting for I O Network 9 2 I O Network 5 3 8DO 5 3 SIO 5 3 ARTC 5 3 E2 5 3 IRLDS 5 3 Blue R See Cold Reset Boards on the I O Network 9 2 9 15 Box to Box Communications 6 Building Controller Buttons cold reset 9 reset 9 1 2 E2 RX BX CX 150 Manual 2 BX Capabilities BX Home Screen 71 1 C Case Circuits Standard See Standard Circuits Case Control Circuits associating CC 100s with 70 14 defrost in 70 10 overview 70 8 Case Controllers anti sweat control 70 12 associating with Case Control Circuits 0 15 CC 100H defined 2 11 10 9 CC 100LS defined 2 11 10 9 CC 100P defined 2 11 10 9 clean mode 70 13 CS 100 defined 2 11 10 9 defrost 10 10 pump down delay 0 11 defrost types 70 11 digital sensors installing 8 4 dual temp control 0 12 EEPRs recovery mode 70 10 fail safe mode 70 13 fan control 70 13 humidity sensor installation 8 15 inputs 8 14 installation guide 7 6 l
309. ne of these terminals labeled SIG reads the sig nal from the sensor while the other labeled Ov is where sensor s ground and or cable shield wire is connected MULTIFLEX INPUT POINTS Ov SIG INPUT 1 Figure 8 1 Input Board Points 16AI Boards On a 16AI terminals are numbered 1 32 starting with the first terminal of point 1 and ending with the last termi nal of point 16 The even numbered terminals of a 16AI are always where the signal voltages are connected The sensor grounds and cable shields are connected to the odd numbered terminals 810 and ARTC Boards On an 8IO board the two terminals of every point are labeled or The ground wire is always connected to the terminal and the signal wire is connected to the The 164AI 810 and MultiFlex Inputs terminal On the ARTC board the input and output points are predefined and are labeled accordingly 8 1 1 2 Specific wiring types are required for each type of sen sor used with E2 All Analog Temperature Sensors and Air Flow Sen sors Sensor Wiring Types Temperature and air flow sensors are to be wired with shielded 2 conductor at least 22 GA wire Belden 8761 or equivalent All Pressure Transducers Humidity Sensors and Refrigeration Transducers Pressure and refrigeration transducers and humidity sensors are to be wired with shielded 3 conductor at least 22 GA wire Belden 8771 or equivalent
310. ned 2 8 features 2 8 mounting in enclosure 3 3 mounting without enclosure 3 4 specifying the number of 9 2 9 15 8RO 8ROSMT Board 2 8 8ROe Relay Output Board defined 2 0 description 3 detail 2 10 mounting 3 4 A Access Levels 9 13 guidelines 9 73 Accessing the Alarm Advisory Log 11 11 Accounts creating a new user 9 14 deleting a user 9 174 Acknowledged State 77 12 advisory message 1 12 property or board point 1 12 Acknowledging 11 12 Acknowledging Resetting amp Clearing Log En tries 11 12 Actions Menu 9 6 11 4 Advanced Rooftop Controller input labeling Advisory Log acknowledging alarms 1 12 clearing alarms 71 13 expanded advisory information 3 resetting alarms 3 Advisory Message 11 12 AHU Zone Control 10 18 AHUs 10 15 curtailment 70 17 dehumidification 70 17 fan control during 0 16 economizers 10 16 analog 10 17 digital 10 17 enabling 10 16 lockout features 10 17 fan control 10 16 during dehumidification 10 16 single speed fans 70 16 two speed fans 10 16 variable speed fans 10 16 optimum start stop OSS 10 18 overview 70 15 temperature control 70 15 alternate set points 10 15 Alarm Advisory Log accessing 11 11 viewing 11 11 Alarm Advisory Messages C Alarm Annunciator Setup 9 22 Alarm Reporting 9 23 Alarms 11 11 acknowledging 1 12 advisory log 1 1 accessing 11 11 viewing 11 11 date and time stamp 11 11 dial out 9 22 The Alarm Output 9 22 The Display Li
311. nique No two E2s on the network may have the same unit number Enter this number in the Unit Number field It is rec ommended you number the first E2 1 and number the other E2s on the network sequentially 2 3 4 etc Unit Name Type a name for the E2 in the Unit Name field Unit Controllers Echelon Liquid Ctrls CC100P CC100LS Enter the com bined number of pulse valve case controllers CC100Ps and liquid side stepper valve case con trollers CC100LSs in this field Suction Controllers CC100H Enter the num ber of suction stepper case controllers CC100Hs in this field Circuit Suction CS100 Enter the number of suc 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 2 tion lineup circuit controllers CS100s in this field ESR8 Line Up Boards Enter the number of ESR suction lineup circuit boards SR100s in this field TD3 Temperature Displays Enter the number of TD3 temperature display units in this field EC2 29x Case Controllers Enter the number of EC2 29x refrigerated case controllers in this field EC2 39x Case Controllers Enter the number of EC2 39x refrigerated case controllers in this field Echelon 16Al Enter the number of 16Ale analog input boards in this field Echelon 8RO Enter the number of 8ROe analog input boards in this field 9 14 2 Commissioning a Device Once all records have been created and defined for all devices on the Echelon Network they must be commis sioned Commissioning is
312. nnel Internal Repeater card con nects above the power interface board on the case mounts using standoffs and screws See Section 3 4 2 3 Mounting the Four Channel Repeater for more information 4 4 Battery Testing and Replacement The 12V battery located on the E2 processor board protects log and alarm data during power loss It is very important that each active E2 unit have a battery and therefore the E2 has several features that warn you of low battery conditions and allow you to test and replace the battery 4 4 1 Low Battery Notification 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 E2 The E2 keeps track of how long the E2 battery has been active and will display a battery icon at the top of the E2 screen whenever the battery is reaching the end of its recommended battery life If a battery has less than 30 of its battery life left a yellow battery icon will appear at the top of the screen If the battery has less than 10 life left or if the battery switch is currently disabled a red battery icon will appear 4 4 2 The Battery Enable Switch The battery enable switch is located near the battery clip on the processor board This switch should be set to OFF whenever the E2 unit is not being used to preserve battery life If the E2 unit is powered up with this switch set to OFF a red battery icon will appear at the top of the screen Check the position of this switch and set it to the ON position You will have to perform a battery tes
313. nsing 1 8 Flexible Combiner Introduction 1 5 ee Application The Flexible Combiner application is an advanced I O control program used to combine multiple analog and dig ital input values using programmed equations similar to those used in spreadsheets and is a new feature of E2 ver sions 2 20 and above For more information on the Flexi ble Combiner application refer to the E2 User s Manual Supplement for Flexible Combiner Programming P N 026 1620 1 6 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 E2 2 Hardware Overview This section gives an overview of the E2 the hard ware and how it communicates across the I O and Eche lon Networks to control an entire system 2 1 E2 Hardware The E2 controller is programmed to monitor and com mand all aspects of a refrigeration or building environ DISPLAY mental control system The E2 uses both an RS 485 I O Network and a LonWorks Network to gather data from d a input devices communicate with other E2s and activate KEYS ROW or deactivate loads ak FUNCTION In general an E2 control network will consist of the KEYPAD following components 1 E2 The brain of the control network which performs all necessary computations and sends Figure 2 1 E2 Front Panel commands to the output devices that control the system 2 Input Boards Transfer readings to the E2 Standard Mount 3 Output Boards Banks of relays digital pulse 9 06 W
314. nsult the Infrared Leak Detector Installa tion and Operation Manual P N 026 1304 for mounting and installation instructions 3 12 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 eO 4 E2 Hardware Setup 4 1 Setting up the E2 4 1 2 Main Processor Board 4 1 1 Enclosure Main Processor Board Power Interface Board LCD Connector Reset and Clean Out Buttons Echelon Plug In Test Button Power Interface Board Connector General Status LED TCP IP Ethernet Connector Backlight Inverter External Keyboard Connector Contrast Adjust E2 100 Ver Only A Lithium Battery Backlight Dim Adjust E2 100 Ver Only Figure 4 1 E2 Inside Enclosure Battery Enable Switch Boot Status LED Open the door and expose the main processor board The main processor board and power interface board PIB are mounted side by side one on each side of the box enclosure Figure 4 2 E2 Main Board RX 100 Board Shown The main processor board is mounted on the hinged door part of the enclosure directly behind the keyboard Setting up the E2 E2 Hardware Setup 4 1 4 1 3 Main Processor Board Pre vious Version LCD Connector Echelon Plug In Power Interface Board Connector Test Button TCP IP Ethernet Connector Backlight Connector External Keyboard Connector 11 PC 104 Slot Lithium Battery Figure 4 3 E2 Main Board Previous Version P N 237 4800 4 1 4 Power Interface Board Battery Enable Sw
315. nt probe s value This comparison is a poor substi tute for actual dewpoint readings and is recom mended for use as a fail safe only When possible use humidity or dewpoint sensors 5 Temperature Comparison The AHU Control application simply compares the temperature of the inside air with the temperature of the outside air If the outside air is cooler than the inside air economization is enabled 6 In vs Out Enthalpy This strategy requires indoor and outdoor humidity sensors and also indoor and outdoor temperature sensors The enthalpy of the outdoor air is calculated and com pared to the enthalpy of the indoor air If the out door air enthalpy is less than the indoor air enthalpy economization is enabled Otherwise economization is disabled You may choose a different economization checking method for use in summer and winter months 10 5 5 2 Economization Lockout Fea tures In addition to the methods listed above there are two economization lockout features that apply to all AHUs using economization Max Outside Air Humidity The Max Outside Air Humidity is the highest allow able humidity level for the outside air If the outside rela tive humidity is higher than this setpoint economization Air Handling Units AHU will not be allowed to occur Minimum Supply Temp The Minimum Supply Temp is a user defined setpoint that locks out economization if the supply air temperature falls below a minimum supply
316. nt s board number will appear in its point record under the Brd column All input boards on a con troller will be displayed 3 Pt read only The point number of each point appears in its record under the Pt column 4 Type read only The Type field shows the output s data type Possible Types are A Analog or D Digital If the point has not The 164AI 810 and MultiFlex Inputs been identified a will appear in the field instead 5 Application Select which application you wish to set up inputs to Pressing LOOK UP when on a defined point will open the Application Selection menu a list of application types currently existing in the box CANCEL will cancel this menu 6 Association If a point has already been defined and is currently being used by an application the name of the input to which the point is connected will be displayed in the Asso ciation field Association is the application s user defined property that is associated with the point Multiple applications attached to single input will all be displayed in the Associ ation field Pressing LOOK UP on a set applica tion will bring up a list of property selections CANCEL will cancel this menu 7 Value read only Value shows the sensor value in the units you select for the input type msc NOTE When changes are made to the Appli cation or Association fields data will not be saved until attempting to arrow off of that pa
317. nted Einstein to be converted to a low profile mount The plate slides over the back of the E2 and is attached using the four holes pictured closest to the cut out four screws and four nuts are included but the plate is equipped with a total of 14 holes for the best possible fit 219 DIA 14 HOLES CUT OUT TOP i 17 A H 9 97 J 219 DIA 1 0 i 4 HOLES o 5 SIDE 5 281 DIA 4 HOLES Figure 3 6 Conversion Bracket for REFLECS Side Mount Figure 3 6 shows the conversion bracket that allows a side mounted REFLECS to be converted to a side mounted E2 The conversion bracket is attached to the back of the E2 using the two holes at the top and bottom of the bracket and aligning the oval openings with the oval cut outs in the back of the E2 case Once the E2 is attached to the conversion bracket use the two holes in either side of the conversion bracket depending on which side is needed to mount the E2 to the wall and replace the REFLECS controller 3 2 E2 RX BX CX ISO Manual 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 2 3 1 4 Blank Face for the MultiFlex 16AI 8RO and the 8DO Blank face control is designed to be used in a system with more than one E2 It has no screen or keyboard and is logged into remotely from another E2 on the Echelon net 0 25 work The green General Status LED transmits status TYP2PL information to the user See Table 2
318. nto hot gas or cool gas defrost Check Group LLSV in Suction Group setup 1 Go to the Outputs tab C5 on the Suction Groups Setup screen and check GROUP LLSV 2 Verify that the case s is assigned to the correct group Case will not terminate out of defrost mode 1 Verify the termination type Term Type in the Defrost tab C4 in the Standard Circuits Setup screen 2 Check the defrost termination input location on circuit input 3 Go to the Inputs tab C6 and check DEFROST AV TERM Problems with Global Actions E 6 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual Information cannot be read from another E2 controller Verify that the controller with the sensor is set up as the Pri mary and the controller receiv ing the information is set up as the User both controllers default as local 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 SYMPTOM POSSIBLE PROBLEM SOLUTION Problems with Temp Sensor or Pressure Transducer Displaying Proper Value 16AI input dip switches are set improperly The 16 dip switches on the 16AI board correspond to each of the inputs Dip Switches Up Temperature Sensor Dip Switches Down Pressure Transducer Incorrect board and point address Set proper board and point set tings for both input and output Go to the Inputs tab in the appli cation s Setup screen and check Board and Point Incorrect sensor type 1 Verify that the sensor type in E2 is the same as
319. ntrol o e e e e ERR RR FER VEU REIN ias E ER INFERRE rr ES 10 21 106 7 Economiz tion Endble esti e e aa odas 10 21 10 6 8 The Effect of Enabling Economiczation eese e esses eeeeeee eene eene ner entente eene nnne 10 22 10 6 9 Dehumidification Control uec a ate peter t Ped dto eee idee een ed 10 22 10 6 10 The Zone Humidity Input eite pte tese eae PE Gr ED eerie perte 10 22 10 6 11 The Effect of Enabling Dehumidification eese eese enne ener hene rennen 10 22 10 6 11 1 MultiFlex RTUs and RCBs 10 6 11 2 ATFIUS c 15e e AERE ee caida ata oh IERI a n BE ROTE HERO PR RAE e 10 6 12 Optimum Start Stop OSS sse tette ie ee HE te FH RE re esta Pe e ape ete 10 6 13 Losing Contact With Zone Applications eese eese eere eterne entre meenene treten trennen trees 10 23 10 6 14 Stand Alone MultiFlex RTUS ccccesccsescessscesseceseeesseesecensecessecscecsaeeeseceeecsueceaceceeeecseceeaeeeeeesaeceeaeceeeeaeesaes 10 23 10 6 15 MultiFlex RTU ARTC and AHU Zone Association eese eese enne ennt ethernet nenne 10 23 10 7 MULTIFLEX CUB BOARD een crei pid dea ISS ID DI eere eS 10 24 10 8 MULTIPLEX PAK BOARD eben e UD RP dra RE RR ERU UU RR 10 24 10 9 LIGHTING SCHEDULES 2 tre e E ER ERE ee dedo 10 24 LOLOL OVeEVIOW e S ree e ERU ert ris EE see se ERR UNE e ERR E VERO e Ite eet pe ree CNS 10 24 10 9 2 Functions of the Lighting Schedule Application
320. ntroller 71 11 RX controller 77 10 Function Keys 9 4 9 28 G Gateway Board 2 4 models 2 4 Global Data priority settings 9 24 setup 9 24 Graph View 71 16 zooming 11 16 H Hand Held Terminal connection to case controller 8 15 Hardware Overview 2 Header Icons 9 4 1 1 6 Help Line 9 28 Holiday Schedules 10 37 Home Screens RX and BX 1 1 Hot Gas Defrost See Defrost hot gas Hot Keys 11 8 Humidistats See Sensors humidity Humidity Sensors See Sensors humidity I I O Boards snap track installation 3 4 I O Network baud rate 9 2 Baud Rate Dip Switches 5 3 Baud Rate Settings ARTC 5 3 baud rate settings 5 3 8DO 5 3 8IO 5 3 E2 5 3 IRLDS 5 3 boards on the 9 2 9 15 checking boards online 9 16 11 10 daisy chains 5 2 E2 dip switches and rotary dials 5 2 E2 RX 1 2 max number of RS 485 Boards 5 7 peripherals for the 7 3 problems with E terminating resistance jumpers 5 3 wiring types 5 2 I O Network Setting Up 9 15 Icons 9 4 Index Tabs 9 27 1 1 6 Inputs analog default values on sensor failure 8 9 selecting units 6 8 setup screen 8 7 digital push button mode 8 10 selecting units 6 9 pulse type setting units per pulse 8 9 Insertion Temperature Probe See Sensors Inser tion Probe Inside Temperature Sensor See Sensors Inside Temperature Installation Guide 4AO 5 9 81O 5 10 5 11 5 12 8RO 5 8 CC 100 CS 100 7 6 E2 4 6 ESR8 7 7 MultiFlex 16 5 6 MultiFlex Combo 5 7 TD3 7 8 Interal Modem Previ
321. ntroller applica tions such as Remote Login and Remote File Services 6 2 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 e 6 4 Open Network Layout 05 09 05 BX 300 Unit 1 16 53 51 Use Ctrl X to Select CX Tabs SETUP si General ca Eng Units 2 Modem TCP IP er Netwrk C9 System General Setup GENERAL SERV e Echelon daisy chain TCP IP Value DHCP Enabled IP Address 10 10 64 17 Subnet Mask 255 255 248 0 DHS Server 1 DHS Server 2 DHS Server 3 i Default Gateway 10 10 64 1 Domain Name MAC Address 00 0a f6 00 04 0a Analog Modem E2 gateway Ez Unit 1 Unit UltraSite Le TCP IP Setup Screen 3 Tab over to the Peer Netwrk tab VPN Connection VPN Firewal Figure 6 2 Open Network Layout CN Tare TR Use Ctrl X to Select CX Tabs C1 General C2 Eng Units TCP IP C8 Peer Netvrk ES EET AT General Setup GENERAL SERV Peer Netwrk Value PO Ethernet ETH oftware Setup kai mam i AutoDscTimeout 300 ReconectTimeout 120 Group Name NAME OF SITE 1 Log on to the E2 controller 2 Navigate to the TCP IP setup screen a tT www NOTE DHCP does not have to be enabled if 4 you have the IP Address Subnet Mask and Primary Gateway settings Contact your IT Network Administrator for all IP configuration infor mation If you do not have the IP configuration set F1 PREV TAB F HEXT TAB Peer Network Tab Set Network Type tings and there is a DHCP serv
322. number of samples When set to on FULL will appear at the top right of the screen and gives user full access to options and applications 8 Toggle Full Options Choose the default values most appropriate to the refrigeration control components in the sys tem 9 Application Default Value Setup Table 11 3 System Information Menu Options Actions Menu Functions such as graphing point logging overriding expanded information setup detailed status and manual defrosting can be initiated from the Actions Menu box by pressing the key from the Home screen or any sta tus screen When you press the Enter key only the options that are appropriate to the current field and application will be displayed all others will be hidden For example if Enter is pressed when a circuit is high lighted the Actions Menu would display all available options for that circuit such as Manual Defrost meaning 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 EZ that by selecting Manual Defrost the Manual Defrost screen would come up for that particular circuit 66 Uni 42 ALARM Name State Setpt Alarm Refr Defr Refrigeration NONE wie OFF STANDARD CKTG2 Refrigeration NONE DFF STANDARD CKT83 Refrigeration NONE OFF STANDARD CKT8 Refrigeration NONE OFF STANDARD CKT85 Refrigeration NONE OFF STANDARD CKT86 Refrigeration NONE OFF STANDARD CKT87 Refrigeration NONE OFF STANDARD CKTG68 Refrigeration NONE OFF STANDARD CKT69 Refrigeration NONE OFF STANDAR
323. o High otherwise the fan speed should be set to Low If for any reason the algorithm thinks that the high speed and the low speed should both be ON the high speed fan should be turned ON only Proper fan speed should be set when there are no heat ing or cooling stages ON and the Fan Always On Setpoint is enabled 10 21 5 Configuration Set the Strategy type under application Setup under the General tab to Separate Setpoints Enter the desired val ues for heating and cooling stages Cooling heating alarm and miscellaneous setpoints can be edited under additional tabs Press Control zero 0 while the More tab is highlighted to bring up the list of additional tabs Separate Setpoints Software Overview 10 47 ee 11 Operator s Guide to Using the E2 11 1 The E2 Home Screen The Main Status or Home screen Figure 11 1 and Figure 11 2 is divided into sections that display the cur rent status in areas of importance in the system i e for RX suction groups compressor stages active circuits condensers sensor control and for BX OAT demand control power monitoring light schedules zones AHUs and sensor control Time date and alarm status are dis played along the top of the screen The display is backlit but turns off to save energy after a determined amount of time Press any key to bring the display back up The Home screen acts as a master and default screen for all the functions of E2 and can be c
324. o on FULL will appear at the top right of the screen and gives user full access to options and applications 9 Application Default Choose the default values most Value Setup appropriate to the refrigeration control components in the sys tem Table 9 5 System Information Menu Options 9 8 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 EZ 9 8 Time Date Setup RX 466 Unit 3 16 11 47 RX DEU SUMMARY ALARH Temp SYSTEM INFORMATION NONE B NONE General Controller Info y NONE NONE A Time and Date J NONE X NONE Passwords User Access y NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE Firmware Revision Service Actions Maintenance Logs Display Users Toggle Full Options Value A NONE Application Default Value Setup NONE NOTAC F1 SENS62 NOTAC ON Controlled By Dis Figure 9 14 System Information Menu The Time Date Setup screen is where users may change the time date date format Daylight Savings Dates and special time synchronization features To get to the Time Date Setup screen from the Main Menu 1 Select H S y stem Configuration 2 Select H System Information 3 Select Time Date The Time Date Setup screen Figure 9 15 is where all time and date changes occur RX 466 Unit 3 16 33 46 TIME DATE SETUP FULL ALARM Time Format 24 Active Time Date Format Date MM DD YY Active Date 88 23 85 Time 2one 66 Eastern Line Sync Yes DEIDERDISEEIDUDEMPEIC
325. o the sunrise time and a negative value entered if offsetting the sunrise to an earlier time For example if the user wanted to turn the lights OFF one hour before sunrise Sunrise Offset would be set to 60 and if the user wanted to turn the lights ON 45 minutes after sunset Sunset Offset would be set to 45 10 9 6 The Basic Schedule Cell The Basic Schedule cell has two main functions e f a Time Schedule application is set up in E2 to provide ON OFF times for the lights the Basic Schedule cell passes the occupied unoccupied state from this time schedule to the Schedule Interface or Multi Logic Com biner cell If no Time Schedule application is set up in E2 for light scheduling the Basic Schedule allows you to configure a schedule for the Lighting Schedule application This custom schedule will pass along a digital occupied unoccupied state to the Schedule Interface or Multi Logic Combiner cell If an external Time Schedule will be used you will only need to configure the Basic Schedule by linking the schedule output to the input of the Basic Schedule cell and setting the Use External Schedule parameter to Yes If no external Time Schedule is being used you may configure a set of schedule events and date ranges to be used by the Lighting Schedule application Up to 15 ON OFF schedule events can be programmed as well as up to 12 date ranges Schedule events and date ranges programmed into the Basic Schedule cell
326. oard RCB BX and CX Only 2 2 3 6 MultiBlex PAK Bo ld 5 aee enden eel 2 2 4 The SRO and SROSMT Relay Boards esee eene non none on entente nennen terne enne EE cn nennen nen 2 8 2 2 95 4A 0 Anglos Output Boards eee Rite e b etti e eT 2 9 2 2 6 SDO Digital Output Board and PMAC II Anti Sweat Controller esee 2 9 2 3 ECHELON NETWORK BOARDS AND PERIPHERALS scccessesssceesecsteessecencecseeesncesceesseceaceceueeesaeeeeeesseeseneceseecseeeaeees 2 10 2 3 1 The I6AIe Discontinued snieni eriari esseer nente enne entere ener ennt sente ne tenter rire s iNe Ee nnns enne 2 10 2 3 2 The 8ROe Discontinued e ti 2 10 DEED EEE EE Meveeed 2 10 2 3 4 CC 100 Case Controllers and CS 100 Case Circuit Controllers eese eene 2 11 2 3 5 The ESRS Discontinued ees ana are ya see e Ra dre ence eee nena canes ded 2 11 23 0 EDS Temperature DI RR EE eerie en edepol pee tie Meee 2 12 IB CO BIS M b Leser NA 3 1 3 1 MOUNTING THE B2 UHR nando Aoi ee eee EAR ede eee ER 3 1 STA Standard Mounts eed ect te ee cde EN AIEEE ORR cie E eMe ees 3 1 3 1 2 Recessed Mount de diia coire iodo idiota A d Des eo det 3 1 3 03 Retrofit Mountihig s dr A e e ede eei 3 2 SANI AMI Edd aiii 3 3 3 2 MOUNTING I O BOARDS a A ee e eie ute a tei re TIR HE EX UHR Ibex iie eds devi odes 3 3 BDZ SSingle Do ble Enclosures iate te edere e ee gd e e AAA ee dee eee 3 3 E2 RX BX CX I amp O M
327. ode No Physical Active State E CLOSED Physical State Active translated to 1 on Inactive translated to OFF OUTPUT MED TEMP COMP OIL FAIL LOGIC IN1 Fi SET ALARMS F2 SET LOGGING F5 CANCEL Figure 8 7 Digital Input Screen Point Name The Point Name is simply a name for the point that may be used as a reference Assigning a descriptive name to a point makes set ting up inputs for applications much easier For example if you are setting up a push button switch to reset compressor 1 after an oil failure shut down you may choose to name it OIL RESET 1 Then when programming your Pressure Control applica tion you may easily define compressor 1 s reset input by tying it to OIL RESET 1 This keeps you from having to keep track of which contacts are tied to which point numbers You are required to enter a point name in the Point Name field The default name is BOARD NAMEJ BOARD NUMBER POINT NUM BER Board Point Number The Board Point Number will automatically be defined if you are configuring the point from the Input Summary Screen Select Eng Units The Select Eng Units field is where you may select how the ON and OFF states of this point are displayed and represented in E2 s setup fields and status screens By default digital inputs have ON OFF engineering units meaning when the input is ON or OFF the input will be represented as ON or OFF in the system software S
328. of Echelon controllers E2s that are online or offline and the number of I O boards online or offline After determining which board is offline turn to Appendix E Troubleshooting To access the Online Status screen 1 From the Main Menu screen press Status for the Status menu 2 Press Network Status for the Network Setup menu 3 Select Online Status and the Online Status screen opens The Online Status screen can also be accessed by amp 1 From the Main Menu screen press System Configuration amp 2 Press Network Setup for the Network Setup menu 3 Select Online Status and the Online Status 11 10 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual E2 screen Opens www NOTE Jump directly to the Online Status j screen by pressing the Wil and keys together For a complete list of Hot Keys press Alt the W and the ED keys together 11 9 Checking Status Screens F1 SUCTION F2 CONDENSER F3 CIRCUITS F4 SENSORS F5 SETUP Figure 11 18 RX Function Button Menu The E2 RX controller has four status screens that are each accessible from the Home screen by pressing the corresponding function key see Figure 11 18 The Suc tion Group status screen the Condenser status screen the Circuits status screen and the Sensors status screen can all be accessed by pressing one of the function keys MAN BZW if the application has been added to the E2 Suction Group Status Screen Press Ball T
329. of all output boards as well as set up individ ual points on the I O boards 2 Output Definitions Menu that gives access to more E2 setup options and informa tion 3 System Information Table 11 2 System Configuration Menu Options Operator s Guide to Using the E2 11 3 Menu Option Description 4 Remote Communica Gives access to modem informa tions tion dial out setup and TCP IP 5 Alarm Setup Set up dial outs and alarm reporting for the current E2 6 Logging Setup Enter information about Logging Group applications such as the sampling frequency and total number of samples 7 Network Setup View and or change the configu ration of the Echelon and RS 485 I O Networks 8 Global Data Configure one or more analog or digital sensors to be used as global values by all E2s Table 11 2 System Configuration Menu Options The System Information Menu RX 466 Unit 3 RX DEU SUMMARY 16 08 56 ALAR SUCTION GR State SYSTEM INFORMATION CKT81 Refr CKT82 Refr f KTS Refr CKTO4 Refr CKT85 Refr CKT86 Refr Passwords User Access CKTO7 Refr e s M CKT68 Refr Firmware Revision CKT69 Refr CKT18 Refr Refr Time and Date Service Actions Maintenance Logs Display Users Toggle Full Options Value NONE NONE NOTAC F1 SENS82 NOTAC ON Controlled By Dis Application Default Value Setup Figure 11 6 System Information Menu The Sy
330. of dewpoints across which the heaters will be pulsed When the measured dewpoint is 45 F directly in between both setpoints the percentage will be 50 and the heaters will be pulsed ON for five seconds of the defined 10 second interval If the dewpoint drops to 30 F the percentage will lower to 20 and the heaters will be on only two seconds out of every 10 10 16 Heat Cool Control Heat Cool Control is a special kind of sensor control that applies to heating and cooling devices Heat Cool Control applications use PID control to vary the amount of heating and cooling based on the current temperature and its relation to the heating or cooling setpoint Both staged and modulated 0 100 heating and cooling outputs are supported by Heat Cool Control Heat Cool controls are available in RX units allowing small installations with simple HVAC systems to use one controller for all refrigeration and HVAC systems 10 16 1 Temperature Control Heat Cool applications use PID control to vary the out put of heating and cooling devices As is the case with all applications that use PID control Heat Cool control makes use of a PID setpoint and a throttling range Refer to Appendix D PID Control for more information Unlike normal PID loops that assume a 50 output is required to keep the temperature stabilized on the setpoint Heat Cools strive to stabilize the temperature on the set point with the output at 0 Thus when the temperature
331. oid energized during network power loss noid LLS Electric Defrost N O down Keeps contacts de energized during network power loss Table 10 2 Suction Group Outputs fan s necessary to bring the input value down below the setpoint Control inputs for air cooled strategies most commonly come from a pressure transducer mounted on either the discharge line the condenser inlet or the condenser outlet However temperature sensor values will also be accepted 10 2 1 2 Temperature Differential Strat esy The temperature differential strategy attempts to keep a minimum amount of difference between the temperature of the refrigerant and the ambient outside temperature This strategy begins by determining the temperature of the refrigerant coming into the condenser This can be sup plied by either a temperature sensor or pressure transducer located near the condenser inlet if it s a pressure trans ducer its value will automatically be converted to a tem perature value based upon the type of refrigerant The refrigerant temperature is subtracted from the value of an ambient air temperature sensor The result is the temperature differential It is this differential value that is compared to the PID setpoint for the purposes of 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 2 determining the amount of total fan capacity to activate 10 2 2 Evaporative Condensers In an evaporative condenser water is sprayed across a condenser coil whi
332. oint settings Go to the Inputs tab C3 in the Condenser Setup screen to check PRES CRTL IN and DISCH TRIP IN Fail Safe wiring on 8RO is incorrect Verify proper fail safe switch positions on the 8RO board The fail safe dip switches are labeled S2 on the 8RO and S3 on the 8ROe and 810 Set the rocker UP ON to close the relay and turn the output ON during net work failure Set the switch DOWN OFF to open the relay and turn the output OFF during network failure Condenser will not split Enable the condenser to split Go to the General tab C1 in the Condensers Setup screen and set the Split Enable field to Yes Unsplit setpoint is set too low Unsplit setpoint value is com pared with discharge pressure value instead of temperature Enter the value in terms of dis charge pressure Go to the Setpoints tab C2 in the Condensers Setup screen and check that the UNSPLIT STPT field value has been entered as a pressure value Half of the fans are not running Check the split fan relay output 1 Go to the Other Outs tab C7 in the Condensers Setup screen and check that SPLIT FAN has a board and point assignment 2 Verify Split is enabled Go to General tab C1 in the Condens ers Setup screen and set the Split Enable field to Yes 3 Verify output is ON Appendix E Troubleshooting E 5 SYMPTOM POSSIBLE PROBLEM SOLUTION Problems with Cases Case will not go i
333. ol outputs are staged or modulating Variable Speed Fan Operation For staged AHU outputs each stage must be pro grammed with its own speed percentage setpoint The AHU Control application looks at all of the active stages takes the highest speed percentage setpoint and operates the fan at this speed For example if cool stage is active with a 30 speed percentage setpoint the fan will likewise operate at 30 speed If a second stage with a setpoint of 50 were to become active the fan speed would increase to 50 For each heating and cooling stage you may specify both occupied and unoccupied speed percentage setpoints Dehumidification with VS Fans When in dehumidification mode a user defined slow down percentage is subtracted from the variable speed fan percentage This percentage will continue to be subtracted until the AHU exits dehumidification mode 10 5 5 Economizer Control Economizer dampers on AHUs are used to bring out side air into the building for use in cooling When temper ature and humidity conditions are favorable the economization dampers are opened and outside air is allowed to flow into the AHU Economization is generally used by the AHU just as a cool stage would be in Temper ature Control if cooling is needed and conditions are favorable for economization the dampers will open and economization will begin If more cooling is needed the cooling stages would then cycle on as normal The E2 su
334. olving refrigeration applica tions specific to RX controllers Suction Groups Condensers Circuits CC 100s etc Building Control This category includes changes or actions involving building control applications specific to BX controllers AHUs Zones Lighting Control Time Schedule Demand Control etc Common Control This category includes control applications common to both RX and BX control lers Sensor Control Time Schedules Conversion Cells Analog or Digital Combiners Global Data etc Advanced Control This category includes applica tions common to both boxes that are only used by advanced users such as Loop Sequence Control lers Refrigeration or HVAC Simulations etc Each row has five columns each of which corresponds to a different category of user actions Setpoint This includes all actions that change application setpoints Also clearing one or more alarms out of the Alarm Advisory Log is considered a setpoint action refer to Section 11 10 8 3 Clearing for the definition of clearing alarms Bypass This includes all actions that bypass a device to a certain state such as initiating a manual defrost or configuring an application input desig nated as a bypass Also resetting one or more alarms in the Alarm Advisory Log is considered a bypass operation refer to Section 11 10 8 2 Resetting for the definition of resetting alarms Override This includes any
335. on 3 Press BW Output Definitions The 8RO 810 and MultiFlex Outputs The Output Status screen opens 01 01 02 RX 300 Unit 1 uy OUTPUT STATUS 18 17 14 Top D Association Value coi oN Application SUCTION GRPO1 SUCTION GRPO1 SUCTION GRPO1 COMP2 SUCTION GRPO1 CO0MP3 SUCTION GRPO1 compa SUCTION GRPO2 SUCTION GRPO2 SUCTION GRPO2 SUCTION GRPO2 SUCTION GRPO2 cOMP3 SUCTION GRPO2 compa VS INV RST OUT OFF VS ALARM OUT OFF VS INV RST OUT VS ALARM OUT COMP2 CONDENSERO1 FAN OUT NOTACT SPR OUTPUT OFF 01 BAKERY CLR REFRIG SOLENOID on 02 ISLAND PROD REFRIG SOLENOID on 03 PROD DISP 1 REFRIG SOLENOID on 04 PROD DISP 2 REFRIG SOLENOID 05 FOOD SRV CL REFRIG SOLENOID 06 MEAT PREP REFRIG SOLENOID t 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 peroo ve rosso F1 SETUP F2 DEL MOD F4 LOOK UP F5 CANCEL Figure 8 9 Output Status Screen To configure a point use the up and down arrow keys to move the cursor to the point you wish to set up and press SETUP If you press to set up a 4AO output point the E2 will automatically transfer you to the Analog Output screen Figure 8 6 For all other output board types press ing will bring up a pop up menu such as the one shown in Figure 8 10 This menu will prompt you to spec a output as either Digital Pulse or One Shot Press if the output is Digital press if the output is Pulse press if the output is One Shot or pr
336. on is used to determine the average rate of temperature change called the K factor The K factor is stored in the memory along with the average value of the outdoor air temperature during the pre start or pre stop Over time collected K factor data will be sorted and combined into a table As a result by constantly observing and recording the results of previous pre starts and pre stops OSS will be able to intelligently guess how much time a pre start or pre stop mode should last based on the outside temperature AHU Control keeps track of three different kinds of K factors Heat K factor used to guess pre start dura tions for AHUs operating in heating mode Cool K factor used to guess pre start dura Zone Control tions for AHUs operating in cooling mode Coast K factor a measurement of the change in temperature when no heating or cooling is active This is used to determine pre stop durations for both heating and cool ing AHUs 10 6 13 Losing Contact With Zone Applications When a MultiFlex RTU or AHU loses contact with the Zone application to which it was assigned it is forced to operate in Stand Alone Mode Each of the different appli cations have different stand alone capabilities 10 6 14 Stand Alone MultiFlex RTUs The MultiFlex RTU uses its own occupied and unoccu pied heating and cooling setpoints when it operates in Stand Alone Mode These values are programmed through the MultiFlex RTU a
337. on systems including two condensers and up to four suction groups The E2 RX is primarily designed to control tempera ture and defrost in refrigerated cases using either direct control connected to the E2 via I O boards or ESR8 lineup control boards or by using CC 100 case control boards connected via the LonWorks Network Table 1 1 shows the differences between capabilities for the RX 300 and RX 400 ere RX RX RX Analog Sen sor Control ECO NC Circuits Table 1 1 RX 100 RX 300 and RX 400 Comparison The E2 Refrigeration Controller Capabilities Digital Sen sor Control Holiday Schedule Power Moni toring Standard Cir cuits Suction Pulse Accu mulator TD Control Time Sched ules Table 1 1 RX 100 RX 300 and RX 400 Comparison 1 2 troller The counterpart to the E2 RX is the E2 BX which con trols HVAC systems for low rise retail industrial and commercial buildings The BX s primary function is to provide energy efficient control of air handling units AHUs rooftop units RTUs and other systems related to environment control In addition the BX provides extensive sensor control logging and graphing features that allow the user to view accurate real time information about system conditions The BX is equipped with many power monitoring and demand control features that give you the information you need to keep your site s energy consumption low The E2 BX is
338. on the Echelon network is of a different type than the user has specified In other words a user might have wired a device such as a CC 100P to the network but set it up in the E2 software as a CC 100LS Check your network setup and if necessary reconfigure the device with the correct type Controller Was Warm booted A user has reset the E2 using the reset button on the main board Couldn t Get File Handle E2 tried to get a file from its memory and failed to do so This alarm likely indicates one or more templates in the E2 software have been corrupted Contact CPC service for further assistance Curtail On User A Curtailment device set up in Global Data has acti a a E DFMC Standby Mode 20 A DFMC 1s put into standby by a service technician oe de it indicates the unit is not actually controlling DFMC Check Clock Settings Sent by the DFMC when it has lost its internal time of day E2 will resend the time upon receipt and this alarm should return to normal without user interac tion DFMC Over Max Defrost A defrost duration was in excess of the maximum limit defined For example the case is not defrosting within spec DEMC Over Max Fan Delay 90 Maximo Fan delay te has been o DFMC Inject Alarm Related to the case s ability to get an into the coil For example this alarm may occur if the case is not being supplied with the proper temperature refrigerant DEMO Door Alam 9 Doorto a case has been eft open too Tong Dest
339. onal two I O Network connectors which allows the E2 to communicate with up to 62 more controllers 31 on each leg on the network for a total of 124 The plug in RS 485 Network card connects to the power interface board between the two fixed RS 485 I O Network connectors and the battery RS 485 Port Card P N 537 4 4 E2 RX BX CX ISO Manual 2 4 3 5 1 LEDs The plug in RS 485 Network card LEDs can be used to determine the status of normal operating parameters for the card RS 485 Plug In Card LEDs Yellow D5 RX1 ON Communication is being received on RS 485 Port 2A Yellow D2 RX2 ON Communication is being received on RS 485 Port 2B Red D1 TX ON Communication is being sent on RS 485 Port 2A and 2B Table 4 3 LED Status for RS 485 Plug In Card 4 3 6 Plug In Four Channel Inter nal Repeater The four channel repeater P N 832 4830 boosts sig nal strength on Echelon Networks However the four channel repeater is also useful as a means of connecting the E2 to its associated devices using more than one daisy chain With a four channel repeater mounted in the E2 you can run as many as three daisy chain segments out into the field each of which can be as long as the prescribed Eche lon maximum wire length The fourth channel of the repeater can be used to connect other E2s in a separate daisy chain eliminating the need to run cable from the field back to the next E2 The plug in Four Cha
340. onnector port The RS 485 termination jumpers JP1 JP2 JP3 JP4 JP5 and JP6 are used to ter minate the devices at the beginning and end of an RS 485 Network Normally the E2 is the beginning of all RS 485 I O Networks so all three of these jumpers should be set to the DOWN position 4 2 3 Echelon Network Connect The next connector is the Echelon Network plug The one connector handles both input and output connections The input and output cables are connected directly to the Echelon plug This plug is the connection to the Case Con troller CC 100 the Evaporator Stepper Regulator board ESR8 TD3s and other E2s 4 2 4 Echelon Jumpers The two Echelon jumpers JP7 and JP8 are located next to the Echelon Network port Additional information about Echelon Networking and terminating the network can be found in Section 7 3 Ech elon Network Structuring Daisy Chains 4 3 als Add On E2 Peripher The E2 has many plug in card options to choose from Plug in Echelon card with mounting screw 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 2 Modem communication expansion card Plug in digital I O Network card RS 485 port card Plug in Four Channel Internal Repeater Plug in modem with mounting screws and stand offs previous generation processor board only 4 3 1 Plug In Echelon Card P N 537 4860 with mounting screw P N 101 4201 Echelon is a two conductor network that interconnects E2s and other associated d
341. ons E2 Hardware Setup 4 3 4 3 3 Plug In Modem Card P N 537 4870 with mounting screws P N 101 4038 and standoffs P N 107 9440 Previous Generation Processor Board The E2 s internal modem mounts in the PC 104 slot located at the top left edge of the E2 main processor board See Figure 3 18 on page 3 6 Disconnect power to the unit and carefully plug the male pins on the back of the modem card into the E2 s PC 104 slot Use the standoffs and screws supplied with the modem card to secure the card to the main processor board as shown in Figure 3 18 on page 3 6 When finished restore power to the E2 4 3 4 Plug In Digital I O Network Card P N 537 4880 This card adds two user programmable digital outputs and two digital inputs to enable connection of switches and relays The plug in Digital I O Network card connects to the power interface board to the right of the two fixed RS 485 I O Network connectors 4 3 4 1 LEDs The plug in Digital I O Network card LEDs can be used to determine the status of normal operating parame ters for the card Plug In Digital I O Card LEDs Red D1 Out 1 ON Relay Output 1 is On Red D4 Out 2 ON Relay Output 2 is On Table 4 2 LED Status for Plug In Digital I O Card 4 3 5 4890 The E2 main board has two RS 485 Network channels allowing you to connect with up to 62 input and or output boards via the RS 485 Network This optional plug in card gives you an additi
342. ons in the E2 are only available when activated with a license key that is obtained through CPC Licensing allows the user to activate certain features in the E2 To obtain a license for a feature go to the TCP IP setup screen and obtain your E2 controller s MAC Address Press T or from the Main Menu 1 Press WWA System Configuration 2 Press KM Remote Communications 3 Press TCP IP Setup to open the TCP IP Setup screen and locate your E2 s MAC address circled in Figure 9 33 Quick Start 9 19 C3 Modem C6 System TCP IP DHCP Enabled IP Address Subnet Mask DNS Server 1 DNS Server 2 DNS Server 3 Default Gatewa Domain Name HAC Address F1 PREU TAB F2 NEXT TAB F3 EDIT F4 STATUS F5 CANCEL Figure 9 33 TCP IP Screen Locating the Mac Address 4 Call CPC Customer Service at 71 800 829 2724 and have your MAC Address ready in order to obtain your unique license key Once you have received your unique license key from Customer Service you can now activate the licensed fea ture s from the License Report screen The License Report screen displays that E2 controller s unit type and firmware version the list of all licensed features on that E2 the current number and maximum number of each of those applications allowed and which additional features that require a license key have been enabled From the Main Menu 1 Press WA System Configuration 2 Press Licensing 3 P
343. ons of the 4 EC 2 Contact CPC at 1 800 829 2724 for more information 2 3 4 CC 100 Case Controllers and CS 100 Case Circuit Controllers A CC 100 case control board is a smart board capa ble of controlling all functions for a single case including lights fans defrost anti sweat and suction side or liquid side valve control CC 100s perform these functions inde pendently from the E2 RX controllers but it does rely on a parent E2 for logging alarming providing supplemental I O values and coordinating defrost times among circuits There are four different models of the CC 100 each of which controls a different type of valve 1 CC 100P P N 810 3160 Case controller for liquid side pulse valves also called electronic expansion valves or EEVs This model is capa ble of controlling up to two pulse valves simulta neously for use in dual evaporator applications such as walk in boxes 2 CC 100LS P N 810 3170 Case controller for liquid side stepper valves EEVs 3 CS 100 P N 810 3177 Case circuit controller for suction side stepper valves also called elec tronic evaporator pressure regulators or EEPRs 4 CC 100H P N 810 3171 A special version of the CC 100 that is used by a particular manufac turer This board controls temperature in a case using suction side stepper valves that regulate pressure in the evaporator The CC 100 CS 100 board is shown in Figure 2 18 Echelon Network Board
344. ord or higher amp 2 Press D followed by BHBHH to navigate to the System Tests screen 3 Move the cursor to the Replace Battery field Enter Y Press ul for Yes then press 4 Make sure the new battery is in place and press If successful the battery icon should disappear from the top of the screen If it is still there check for proper battery placement verify the battery enable switch posi tion and repeat this procedure Battery Testing and Replacement E2 Hardware Setup 4 5 2 E2 INSTALLATION GUIDE Y a a Power Interface Board 000 808 VV W sp XY 1 Connect the I O Network to one or both of the E2 RS 485 1 O Network ports A maximum of 31 devices can be wired to each 1 0 Network port 2 For each I O Network port set RS 485 termination jumpers UP if at either end of a daisy chain Otherwise set jumpers DOWN 3 Connect the E2 to the Echelon Network 4 Set the Echelon Network jumper UP Termination if the E2 is at either end of an Echelon daisy chain Otherwise set the jumper DOWN No Termination 5 Connect earth ground to one of the two ground terminals provided Use 12 AWG preferred or 14 AWG wire and keep as short as possible less than 12 inches preferred 6 Connect 24VAC to the power terminals 7 Flip the power switch to the ON position When 24VAC has been applied to the board the green LED will illuminate D
345. ormation E Advisory 11 of 200 l 7 Parent Controller THIS 63 1 Property or Board Pt 80 83 82 X388 System Advisory Message FAIL Device absent from network Acknowledge Status UNK Report Priority 26 Date 69 69 65 Time 11 18 Press the ENTER key to close this dialog Figure 11 21 Expanded Info Screen 11 10 8 Acknowledging Resetting and Clearing Log Entries 11 10 8 1 Acknowledging When an alarm notice or failure is acknowledged the alarm stays in the Alarm Log but all annunciation of the alarm is suspended until the alarm is reset or cleared As stated in Section 11 10 5 the state of the alarm or notice will also change to a dash indicating acknowl edgement When you acknowledge an alarm you prevent it from ever annunciating again in any way until you manually reset or clear the alarm A condition that causes an alarm will never automatically return to normal when it is 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 2 acknowledged on ACKNOWLEDGEMENT VS RESETTING Reset an alarm if you believe the condition that caused it is fixed but you wish for a new alarm to occur if the problem happens again You MUST reset an alarm that has been previ ously acknowledged to re enable alarming for the alarm Failure to do so will cause the alarm to remain in ACK and the alarm will not be gen erated again AN ACKNOWLEDGED ALARM WILL NOT AUTOMATICALLY RESET e Acknowledge an alarm to silence alarm pane
346. ormer w Three conductor non shielded cabl are the recommended wire for connecting between the AC1 24VAC Center Tapped OV AC2 center tapped transformer and I O boards o EH i d 240 208 120 PRIMARY SIDE Power Wiring Types 14 AWG Belden 9495 18 AWG Belden 9493 Earth ground the OV center tapped terminal of each board im AC1 o m ov me AC2 N Y lt N iH lt SECONDARY SIDE 5 8 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 E2 4AO INSTALLATION GUIDE Y OO AB o gt ii Nt YYYY Y Y Y 4AO BOARD SSNS 5 1 Connect the 4AO board to the RS485 I O Network 2 Set the network address on the first five rockers of dip switch S1 3 Set the network baud rate using rockers 6 and 7 of dip switch S1 4 Set RS485 termination jumpers UP terminated if at either end of a daisy chain Otherwise set jumpers DOWN not terminated 5 Connect board to the 24VAC center tapped secondary of the power transformer Note If you change any dip switch settings while the board is powered disconnect the power and re power the board to reset SHIELDED TWISTED PAIR BELDEN 8761 FOR PLENUM amp USE BELDEN 82761 OR 88761 OR EQUIV ADDRESS BAUD RATE D BOARD 1 9600 baud B FT P
347. ount The standard mount is meant for the controller to be mounted against a wall using the four mounting holes at the rear of the enclosure shown in Figure 3 3 These holes are accessible without any removal of boards inside the enclosure 3 1 2 Recessed Mount The recessed mount is meant for the controller to be bolted against a surface using the eight mounting holes The unit may be mounted with the recessed back portion of the unit inside the wall and the front portion of the unit visible through the hole in the wall Figure 3 1 and Fig ure 3 4 For a recessed mount you will need to cut a rectangu lar hole into the mounting surface 9 0 wide by 10 5 high 22 86 cm wide by 26 67 cm high Once this hole is cut mount the unit as desired using the eight outer mounting holes shown in Figure 3 1 and Figure 3 4 Mounting the E2 Figure 3 2 E2 Side Dimensions Mounting 3 1 2 219 DIA 1 4 HOLES 219 DIA 8 HOLES CUT OUT FOR RECESS MOUNT Figure 3 4 E2 Recess Mount Hole Locations 3 1 3 Retrofit Mounting The retrofit mounting plate and bracket allow the E2 to be mounted where previous generation controllers Ein stein or REFLECS were These two options allow con version of the flush mounted Einstein and the side mounted REFLECS Figure 3 5 shows the low profile conversion mount plate that allows a flush mou
348. our Channel Repeaters 3 4 2 1 Repeaters are used to extend the maximum length of a segment of Echelon cable or to act as a bridge between two devices that are farther apart than the cable s maxi mum node to node distance CPC offers two versions of repeaters for the E2 controller an external two way repeater that comes in an enclosure P N 832 1010 Mounting Repeaters Overview For more information about installing repeaters and routers please refer to the Repeater and Router Installa tion and Networking Guide P N 026 1606 3 4 2 2 Mounting the Two Channel Repeater The external repeater P N 832 1010 is externally mounted within its own enclosure 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 2 4 170 1 75 R0 156 TYP 2 PLACES EXTERNAL REPEATER TOP OF ENCLOSURE 0 50 26501084 Figure 3 19 External Repeater Mounting For external repeaters the mounting bracket at the bot tom of the enclosure has two 0 156 bolt holes on either side Use the bolt holes to mount these repeaters in the field as necessary see Figure 3 19 When mounting external repeaters keep in mind that they require a 24VAC Class 2 power source in order to operate This will likely require a transformer such as P N 640 0041 110V or P N 640 0042 220V to be mounted near the external repeater enclosure Make sure there will be enough space next to the repeater to mount the trans former
349. ous Generation Board 3 6 Internal Modems New Processor Board 3 5 4 3 IRLDS specifying the number of 9 2 9 15 Irrigation 10 44 cycle control types 10 44 timed 10 45 volume 10 45 cycle scheduling 10 45 flow sensor related tests 10 46 leak 10 46 e 1 5 obstructed zone 10 46 number of zones 10 44 override failsafe 10 45 service modes 10 46 zone inhibit 10 45 alarm 10 45 freeze lockout 10 45 rain delay 10 45 timed 10 45 volume 70 45 zone override 10 45 zones and cycles 0 44 J Jumpers Echelon termination E2 4 2 RS 485 termination E2 4 2 termination settings on I O boards 5 4 K Keyboard 2 2 Keypad 71 6 KW Transducer 8 6 KW Transducer See also Sensors KW Trans ducer EP LED Status Keyboard 2 3 Main Board CPU 2 5 PIB 2 2 LEDs Plug In I O Card 4 4 LEDs Plug In RS 485 4 4 License Management 9 19 Licensing 1 5 Light Level Sensor 3 11 Lighting alternate control 0 26 multi logic combiner 70 26 offset solar 10 27 control method select 70 25 functions 10 25 overview 10 24 separate control min ON OFF cell 70 27 proof cell 70 27 1 6 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 2 slave scheduling 10 27 standard control 0 25 light level interface 10 25 schedule interface cell 70 26 unoccupied mode 10 26 Liquid Level Sensors 3 2 Log View 11 15 Logged Inputs and Outputs 4 Logging power monitoring 10 37 Logging On 9 Logs and Graphs 11 14 LonMark Device 7 5 LonWorks Network See Echelon Net
350. ovide temperature setpoints dehumidification and economization enabling and other information The MultiFlex RTU board also has the ability to act in stand alone mode without help from the Zone application The MultiFlex RTU has its own fallback temperature con trol strategy and even has a seven day fallback occupancy schedule that may be substituted when communications with the Zone is lost 10 6 3 2 MultiFlex RCB Board The MultiFlex Rooftop Control Board RCB P N 810 3062 is a rooftop HVAC control board for use either as a stand alone controller or in zone control applications using a CPC E2 BX building control system The Multi Flex RCB is capable of controlling heat and cool stages fans humidification and dehumidification devices econo mizers using on board I O and control algorithms as well as monitor and interact with other building control systems and peripherals such as smoke alarms and CO2 sensors Differences Between the MultiFlex RCB and the Mul tiflex RTU The RCB is an improved version of the MultiFlex RTU The RCB has sixteen fully configurable analog and digital input points whereas the RTU has only eight inputs two of which are configurable The RCB has four analog outputs for use in controlling variable speed fans economizers or modulating heating and or cooling valves whereas the RTU has only two analog outputs for use only 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 ee with VS fans and economizers The RCB
351. own in the display When a user is logged into the controller the Home screen is displayed when the user is not performing any actions such as appli cation setup viewing other status screens etc The Home screen will vary depending on the configu ration of the controller In most cases the Home screen will show the real time status of the most fundamental sys tems being controlled by the E2 The Home screen is a good place to point out three important common elements of all E2 screens the screen header the function key descriptions and the help line Options will vary depending on the type of controller used For more information on the E2 Home screen including options for both RX and BX versions see Sec tion 11 1 The E2 Home Screen 9 5 1 Customizing the Home Screen The Home screen can be customized to show different information depending on the user s needs There are eight different screen options available The Device Summary screen is the Default screen See Section 11 5 Customiz ing the Home Screen for the steps to customize the Home screen Quick Start 9 3 9 6 Common Screen Ele ments RX 400 Unit 3 17 10 38 RX DEV SUMMARY FULL ALARMA SUCTION GRPO1 Ku 22 0 Circuits A CAP 1008 iepen croz s s3 54 STANDARD CKTOS ON ON ON 0M STANDARD CKT06 STANDARD CKTO7 STANDARD CKTOR STANDARD CKTO9 STANDARD CKT10 Refr STANDARD CKT11 Re CONDENSER01 NONE 200 0 HELP LINE Controlled Ry D
352. p O Manual 2 the case temperature equal to the temperature setpoint Condenser Control and HVAC Control seek only to keep pressure or temperature values below or above their setpoints Thus the system is only concerned when the input value is on the wrong side of the setpoint e g above the setpoint in Condenser Control and Cooling Control or below the setpoint in Heating Control Any value on the other side of the setpoint is considered an acceptable value for the purposes of controlling and therefore the output will be at or near 0 Condenser PID and HVAC Cooling Control only react to pressure or temperature levels that climb above the set point Likewise in HVAC Heating Control the tempera ture level must be below the heating setpoint in order to begin heating The 0 100 output percentage is then determined based on the distance between the input and setpoint and the rate of change Output at Setpoint Mathematically the only difference between PID for Condenser and HVAC Control and PID for other systems is the Output at Setpoint value The Output at Setpoint value is simply the percentage the output will be when the input value is stabilized at the setpoint In other words when the PID input equals the PID setpoint the PID output percentage will be fixed at the Output at Setpoint value Output at Setpoint is the value that determines where the throttling range is placed As mentioned in Throttling Range
353. p O Manual E2 attached to single input will all be displayed in the Associ ation field Pressing LOOK UP when on a set application will bring up a list of property selections CANCEL will cancel this menu 7 Value read only Value shows the sensor value in the units you select for the output type 8 2 6 3 Setting Up Digital Outputs Open the Digital Output screen by selecting a Digital D input from the Output Status screen Figure 8 9 and pressing SETUP Digital Outputs are ON when the E2 calls for them to be ON and OFF whenever the E2 calls for them to be OFF Most outputs that directly activate and deactivate output devices will need to be set up as the Digital output type 01 01 02 RX 300 Unit 1 Uy 18 17 40 DIGITAL OUTPUT Point Wane Board Point q PEE Select Eng Units ON OFF Default Value OFF Physical On Energ Off De Energ Hull De Energ Minimum Physical On Time 0 00 00 Off Time 0 00 00 PRIORITY OVR H f Priority Override Timeout 1 0 30 INPUT MED TEMP SUCTION GRPO1 COMP1 F5 CANCEL Figure 8 11 Digital Output Screen Point Name The Point Name is simply a name for the output point that may be used as a reference Assigning a descriptive name to a point makes set ting up outputs for applications much easier For example if you are setting up condenser fan 3 for condenser 2 you may choose to name it CND 2 FAN 3 Then when programming your Condenser
354. pens asking if you are sure you want to delete the application you have selected Press Y Yes or N No 9 18 2 Using and Configuring a Setup Screen The Setup screen is application specific depending on where you place the cursor on the Home screen Press to open the Actions Menu and select Setup or press SETUP on the Home screen The Setup screen for your selected application will open 9 26 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 2 9 18 2 1 The Edit Menu 68 26 05 RX 4668 Unit 3 16 36 05 Use Ctrl X to Select CX Tabs SETUP ALARM C1 General S ED B p C Comp Setup C7 Como Outs LCR c9 alarms Press desired selection Alternate 1 0 Formats 2 Set Multiple Outputs Output Change Delta Generic Alarm Setup Logging Setup Bypass Setup 1 SETUP I 0 Comp On Defrost m Comp On Reclaim Min to Lu On Run Time EQ E Minimize Switch Two Stage SP Float No Associated COND Figure 9 46 Edit Menu The Edit menu becomes available when you are on a Setup screen and can be opened by pressing EDIT Depending on which Setup option index tabs is high lighted the Edit menu allows you to change field format ting using these options Alternate I O Formats setting up pointers can change a field to expect a Board Point Fixed Value or Controller Application Property Set Multiple Outputs allows you to connect an output pointer to multiple input pointers Output Change D
355. permission to access a fea ture during startup Either the license for that feature is invalid or it does not exist or the number of licenses for that feature is less than the number needed for the configuration Further information may be found in the service log Firmware File Bad RO200 C 6 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 Alarm Name Default Definition Priority Firmware Is Not Compatible 20 The firmware in a unit controller is not compatible with the current version of E2 Firmware Update Failed 10 The firmware on a unit controller was not success fully updated Flash File Has A Bad CRC Error 50 An internal error has occurred in the E2 Flow obstructed 30 Irrigation pipe obstruction detected 50 1 1 a 0 i l Fuse Is Blown ESR8 20 A fuse has blown on an ESR8 board and will require replacement Global Spare Dig On User The Spare Dig 1 input in Global Data has switched ON 0 50 Gradual Change Limit Exceeded E analog value has undergone a gradual change greater than its programmed Minimum Change set point Heap Memory Corrupted Reboot High Discharge Limit Exceeded p high discharge pressure detected by a Suction A problem with memory has resulted in a reset of the Group application is causing the suction group to operate at a reduced capacity High Limit Alarm User An HVAC application AHU Zone RI 100 or ARTC MultiFlex RTU has a temperature above one of its cooling setpoin
356. plication still requires demand reduction Like the First Shed priority levels level 1 is always the first Last Shed level to be activated followed by 2 3 4 and so on up to 20 Applications that are assigned to this priority should be the most vital applications to system performance These applications will be shed only as a last resort and there fore will spend the least amount of time in shed A diagram of how Demand Control cycles through all of the three different types of priority levels are shown in the diagram in Figure 10 14 Ww J no BR ROTATIONAL SHED o j 4 O O1 Wo Woo Wa em Me Woo ro Hs DUE pra ME ME ME SS Se o o rH LEVELS ROTATE IN THIS DIRECTION FOR NEXT DEMAND CONDITION LAST SHED 26512042 Figure 10 14 Shedding Priority Levels Other Notes About Priority Levels 10 30 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 2 All priority levels whether they be First Rotational or Last should be shedding relatively the same number of kilowatts When the Demand Control application is shed ding in a non emergency situation it usually sheds one or two levels at a time Therefore Demand Control would do a much better job of reducing demand quickly if each acti vated level were reducing the KW by an equivalent amount Also each priority level has three important user definable parameters
357. pplication and stored in the memory on the MultiFlex RTU board itself During Stand Alone Mode the MultiFlex RTU uses its space temperature sen sor value as the control input The MultiFlex RTU also has a seven day fallback occupancy schedule that it may use to determine occupied or unoccupied building status Different times may be pro grammed in the MultiFlex RTU application for Sunday through Saturday Holiday scheduling is not supported Economization control is available if the sensor pro viding the economization checking is connected to an input on the MultiFlex RTU Otherwise economization is disabled As it does in Temperature Control the MultiFlex RTU stores its own occupied and unoccupied dehumidification setpoints If the MultiFlex RTU has its own humidity sen sor it will continue dehumidification using the stored fall back setpoints 10 6 15 MultiFlex RTU ARTC and AHU Zone Association MultiFlex RTUs and AHUs are assigned to Zone appli cations using the Zone Association screen To access this screen 1 Press UM for the Main Menu 2 Press M for System Configuration 3 Press Wl the Network Setup menu 4 Press for Associations Software Overview 10 23 BX 400 Unit 1 ZONE ASSOCIATION 16 45 26 ALARM AHU ARTC lt gt Zone Association l HUAC Zone l Controller Node Application AR 61 61 1 RRTC RTU861 RC 61 61 1 RCB001 THIS 01 1 1 AHUOA F1 SETUP AHU F2 SETUP ZONE F4 LOOK U
358. pports control of both two position digital and variable position analog economizer dampers 10 5 5 1 Before the AHU Control application may open econo mization dampers it must first determine if the outdoor air conditions are favorable for economization There are six possible ways the AHU Control may do this Economization Enable 1 Enthalpy Switch An enthalpy switch is a digital device that is pre set to detect when the tempera 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 E2 ture and humidity levels are favorable for econo mization When the conditions are favorable this switch sends an OK ON signal to the AHU Control application Otherwise the switch sends a NOT OK OFF signal and economization is disabled 2 Dewpoint Setpoint A dewpoint probe measur ing the dewpoint of the outside air is compared to a setpoint If the outside air dewpoint is less than the setpoint economization is enabled If it is higher than the setpoint economization is dis abled 3 Calculated Enthalpy The AHU Control appli cation calculates the outside air enthalpy by read ing the value of a relative humidity sensor and an outdoor air temperature sensor If the enthalpy is lower than the setpoint economization is enabled If the enthalpy is greater than the set point economization is disabled 4 Dewpoint Fail Safe This is similar to method 2 except an outdoor temperature sensor value is compared to the setpoint instead of a dewpoi
359. pressure transducer is supplied with 20 feet of cable for connection to a 16AI input board 3 5 1 1 The pressure transducers should be mounted in a verti cal position pressure port down above crank case oil level to prevent drainage of oil into transducer port 3 5 2 Inside Temperature Sensor 3 5 2 1 Inside temperature sensors are supplied within a wall mounted enclosure for attachment to a standard switch plate Pressure Transducers Mounting Location The temperature sensor should be located in a central location within the zone to be measured away from doors windows vents heaters and outside walls that could affect temperature readings In addition the sensor should not be mounted above other sensors that generate heat during operation such as relative humidity sensors The indoor temperature sensor should be between four and six feet from the floor 3 5 2 2 Mount the sensor using the screws provided as shown in Figure 3 21 Mounting Mounting 3 7 26509013 Figure 3 21 Inside Temperature Sensor Mounting 3 5 3 Outside Temperature Sen sor 3 5 3 1 Location The outside or ambient temperature sensor should be located on the north side of the building preferably under an eave to prevent sun heated air from affecting the tem perature of the sensor 3 5 3 2 The temperature sensor may be mounted using any standard tubing clamp CPC also offers an aluminum cover and clamp P N 303 11
360. put volt age and engineering unit values for each input point with out need of a voltmeter or front panel controller display Table 2 6 shows the part number of the MultiFlex 16 P N Model Name Description 810 3013 MultiFlex 16 16 analog digital in puts no outputs Table 2 6 MultiFlex 16 Input Board Model VO Network Boards and Peripherals The MultiFlex 16 is designed with several features that make it easy to install wire and configure These main user interface features are shown in Figure 2 7 2 2 3 2 MultiFlex Combination Input Output Board Figure 2 8 MultiFlex Combination Input Output Board Side View ULLELOT TON ETT e e n o e s AS 0 S Transducer Power Out General Status LED Analog Outputs 4 Form C Relay Outputs 8 Network Failsafe Relay Output Fuses 8 The IEA Lacie and network baud rate dip Output LEDs OUT1 OUT8 Input Dip Switches S1 and S2 Input Connections 16 1 O Network Connection I O Net Tx and Rx LEDs Hand Held Terminal Port cej o oj o o v Figure 2 9 MultiFlex Combination Input Output Board Top View There are several models of the MultiFlex board that combine the functionalities of input boards relay output boards and analog output boards The MultiFlex combina tion input output boards provide several new additional hardware and software features Hardware Overview 2 5 All Mu
361. quantity represented by pulses Average output shows the average rate value accumulated over the period set in the Average Window parameter The High Limit Trip out put will turn on if the total accumulation exceeds a user specified high limit Total accumulation shows the total accumulated value since the last reset Last Total output Software Overview 10 43 shows the total accumulated value when the last reset occurred 10 19 4 Accumulator Reset Types The Pulse Accumulator is a register that is increased by the value of each update of the Quantity Accumulation input Each time the Accumulator is reset before clearing its value is saved to a Last Total output The type of reset the Accumulator uses can be user specified with the Accu mulator Reset Type parameter The Accumulator can be set to reset at a certain time of day day of the month when a high limit trip occurs or not to reset at all 10 19 5 Logging Rate and usage data is logged and stored using applica tion logging Data is stored in hourly daily and monthly formats All logged data can be erased from memory by using the Applications Command menu In addition appli cation logs show the total and peak rates of consumption for the last day hour and month The Hourly log will be updated every hour at the top of the hour and contain data for the last 48 hours Time date total accumulation for that hour maximum average for that hour maximum peak value an
362. r VA VAC Center A S npea Ex re o 2 No Ems 24 75 a No CC 100 Power supplied by Power Module CS 100 Table 7 4 Device Power Requirements Echelon Network and Hardware Setup 7 3 Refer to the installation guides on the next few pages for instructions on how to install these boards on the Eche lon Network 1 7 LEDs The Echelon Board LEDs can be used to determine the status of normal operating parameters for the board Echelon Board Status Red D1 Reset ON The Echelon port is being held in reset or if momentary it means the board has gone through reset Red Service During normal operation this LED should be off If the Ser vice Pin is pressed this LED will come on If the LED is blinking the node does not have its Subnet Node address set E2 should set this during the first power up sequence where the user will be asked in which Subnet to put the controller E2 will al ways be Node 1 on the net work If the LED is blinking then try resetting the E2 If this does not correct the problem re place the Echelon board ON no blinking Replace the Echelon board The Neuron processor has lost its applica tion program Table 7 5 Echelon LED Status 7 8 Open Echelon Device Connectivity Open Echelon E2s must be ordered pre configured from CPC Open echelon licenses must be purchased and enabled on units and are not transferrable to other units without as
363. r ticular board and point or attempting to leave the screen If Type has changed data will be saved and then the controller will take you to the Setup In screen 8 1 3 3 Open the Analog Input screen by selecting an Analog A input from the Input Status screen Figure 8 4 and pressing SETUP The Analog Input screen Figure 8 4 is where sensor types units and default values are specified for analog input points Setting Up Analog Inputs Input and Output Setup 8 7 01 01 02 mcam we ER mue 12V 500 LB 12VDC 500 PSI transducer 1 6VDC output Discontin Point Name Board Point 1 1 ued Sensor Type 5v 100PSI a a PE 5V 100 LB 5VDC 100 PSI transducer Default on Short NONE Default Other 0 5 4 5VDC output Change Delta rc eee 2 5V 200 LB 5VDC 200 PSI transducer 0 5 4 5VDC output 5V 500 LB 5VDC 500 PSI transducer 0 5 4 5VDC output OCCUPANCY E OUTPUT MED TEMP SUCTION GRPO1 SUCTION PRESS L Refrig Leak Refrigerant Leak Detector REE SCRE PA TA not IRLDS Fi SET ALARMS F2 SET LOGGING F5 CANCEL Refrig Level Refrigerant Liquid Level Figure 8 6 Analog Input Screen Probe Point Name The Point Name is simply a name for Liquid Level Liquid Level Float Sensor the point that may be used as a reference a A Light Level Light Level Sensor Assigning a descriptive name to a point makes setting up inputs for applications much easier Fo
364. r Input 15 1 Analog 2 Digital Press desired selection DAMPER 1 INFUTI ALARM SILANCE LOGIC IN1 EMERGENCY OVR EMERGENCY OVR EMERGENCY OVR EMERGENCY OVR Figure 8 5 Data Type Pop Up Menu Depending upon what type of input you selected the Analog Input or the Digital Input screen will appear The analog screen is described in Section 8 1 3 3 while the digital screen is described in Section 8 1 3 4 8 1 3 2 Using the Input Definitions Sta tus Screen In order for the E2 to properly read an input value from a sensor or transducer hooked to an I O board you must first tell the E2 what kinds of devices are hooked into each input board point This is achieved by using the Input Def initions Status screen SETUP DEL MOD OFFSET LOOK UP and CAN CEL are the function keys along the bottom of the screen available for the Input Definitions Status screen Each record in this screen contains the following infor mation about a point 1 Board Type read only The Board Type column will read 16AI regardless of whether the input board is a 16AI MultiFlex 16 8IO or MultiFlex Combination I O board eomm NOTE When setting up 88s and 8AOs re 4 member that there are only eight usable input points even though the 16AI that represents the 88s and 8AOs in the summary screen has sixteen points Only inputs one through eight may be defined all other points will be ignored 2 Brd read only The poi
365. r example Linear General purpose linear out if you have an inside temperature sensor located in put sensor Zone 1 of your building you may name it ZONE 1 TEMP Then when programming your HVAC applications you may easily define Zone 1 s temper Pulse Accum Kilowatt value from KW ature sensor input by tying it to ZONE 1 TEMP This transducer pulse accumula keeps you from having to keep track of which sen tion readings see Units Per Humidity Relative Humidity sensor sors are tied to which point numbers Pulse on page 8 9 You are required to enter a point name in the Point KW Transducer Kilowatt transducer using 4 Name field The default name is BOARD 20ma 0 5V signal NAME BOARD NUMBER POINT NUM BER Dewpoint Dewpoint probe Board Point The Board Point number will auto LM235 Temp Linear voltage output tem matically be defined if you are configuring the point from perature sensor the I t Stat reen E inpar Status aproat PT2 Temp Danfoss PT2 temperature Sensor Type The analog input may come from a sensor number of different sensor types CDK Temp CDK 2097MC temperature sensor Sensor Type Description 20K Pot Adjust Standard temperature sensor with offset adjustment Temperature CPC Standard Temp Sensor potentiometer 12V 100 LB 12VDC 100 PSI transducer ATP Hi Temperature CPC s 100K High Tempera 1 6VDC output Discontin ture Sensor Range 0 500 ued DegF 12V 2
366. rds inside the enclosure refer to Figure 3 9 for mounting dimensions 26501033 Figure 3 8 Double Enclosure Mounting Dimensions Mounting I O Boards Mounting 3 3 3 2 2 Boards Without Enclosures Snap Track 16AI 8RO 8DO and Gateway boards not supplied with an enclosure are supplied with a snap track for easy installation The insulation sheet and I O board must be removed from the track before the track is mounted The snap track is mounted using the 0 1875 mounting slots Figure 3 10 shows this installation procedure Figure 3 9 provides mounting dimensions for the Mul tiFlex 16AL 8RO and the 8DO boards Figure 3 11 pro vides mounting dimensions for the 4AO Ie 10 00 4 75 E e2B H 0 218 TYP 6 PL 16AI 8RO 8DO AND MULTIFLEX BOARDS TOP VIEW I 26501055 1 REMOVE THE BOARD AND THE INSULATOR FROM THE SNAP TRACK 2 MOUNT THE SNAP TRACK USING THE 1875 SLOTS PROVIDED OPERATION OF THE BOARD omnes epus MOTA THESUPTRACKAN MOUNTING SNAP TRACK YO WARRANTY AND TERT DWE MAY CAUSE SERIOUS DAMAGE TO THE BOARD 3 REINSTALL THE INSULATOR IN THE SNAP TRACK 4 REINSTALL THE BOARD IN THE SLOTS IN THE SNAP TRACK 26501040 Figure 3 10 440 8RO or MultiFlex Snap Track Installation 3 4 E2 RX BX CX ISO Manual E2 4A0 BOARD WEIGHT 0 50 LB 26501009 Figure 3 11 440 Mounting Dimensions The Gateway is typically mounted in the s
367. re all calls for termination and remain in defrost for the entire programmed defrost time Any Pump Down delays that might be programmed for the circuit are also ignored 10 4 4 6 The WAIT State When a Case Control Circuit application enters defrost mode it sends a message out to all case controllers in the circuit to begin defrost at the same time However since each case in a circuit will have its own termination sen sors it is possible for some cases to terminate defrost while defrosts in other cases continue When a CC 100 or CS 100 terminates defrost it enters a state of operation called the WAIT state While in the WAIT state all refrigeration and defrost heat will remain OFF When the Case Control Circuit application detects that all CC 100s or CS 100s have entered the WAIT state the application will consider the defrost cycle completed and refrigeration will restart 10 4 5 Anti Sweat Control A case controller manages its anti sweat heaters by monitoring the dewpoint in and around the case area The dewpoint input value is compared to the anti sweat appli cation s control setpoints the Full ON setpoint and the Full OFF setpoint Based on this comparison the anti sweat heaters will do one of three things If the input is equal to or above the Full ON set 10 12 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual ee point the heaters remain ON 10046 of the time If the input value is equal to or below the Full OFF se
368. re condensing during network and power failure con denser fans should all be configured normally closed N C Condenser Fan N C N C up Relay Variable Speed N C Condenser Fan Single Speed Dampers Evap E2 Discharge Pressure 500 Ib Eclipse see Table 8 1 on transducer page 8 3 Ambient Temp Temperature see Table 8 1 on page 8 3 Water Sump Temp Temperature see Table 8 1 on Evap only Immersion page 8 3 Override Temp Sen Temperature see Table 8 1 on sors Evap only Pipe Mount page 8 3 Table 10 3 Suction Group Inputs The fan should operate at 100 during loss of communication with E2 me N C up Dampers should be open during communication loss N C only Evaporator Pumps N C see note N C see note Evap only Some condensers have dual pumps that cycle at even intervals One pump should be wired N C and the other N O so that only one pump runs during communication loss Variable Speed Fan None analog point None analog point This 4AO or 8IO analog point sends the 0 100 fan speed sig Output to inverter nal to the inverter Table 10 4 Suction Group Outputs 10 3 Standard Circuits Refrigerated cases that do not use case controllers are controlled by Standard Circuit applications In a Standard Circuit application the E2 is responsible for all case mon itoring and control it uses the RS 485 I O Network to both gather case temperature inputs and activa
369. re you will enter information about the types of devices on the E2 s control system If you know how many applications will be needed this step will save you time and will keep you from having to create new applications during the setup process Options will vary depending on the type of con troller used coseno NOTE You must create at least one applica tion in this screen to continue to the next screen even if you are only using this E2 to control applications not listed on the screen If neces sary you can create one application here and delete it later When finished press NEXT to go straight to the Main Status Home screen Setting Number of Applications 9 5 The Main Status Home Screen RX 466 Unit 3 17 10 38 RX DEU SUMMARY FULL ALARM 22 6 Circuits STANDARD CKTO1 CAP 100 STANDARD CKT82 STANDARD CKTO3 STANDARD CKTO4 STANDARD CKTO5 STANDARD CKT66 STANDARD CKT87 STANDARD CKT68 STANDARD CKT89 STANDARD CKT18 STANDARD CKT11 s1 S2 S3 Sh ON ON ON ON CONDENSERO1 NONE 200 0 Sensor Ctrl Value ANALOG SENS81 NONE ANALOG SENS82 NONE DIGITAL SENSO81 NOTAC F1 DIGITAL SENS82 NOTAC ON Controlled By Discharge Status Fan s On F1 SUCTION F2 CONDENSER F3 CIRCUITS F4 SENSORS FS SETUP Figure 9 4 Home Screen RX version shown The Main Status screen is the home screen for the E2 When no one is logged in to the controller this is the screen that will be sh
370. reaction to a change in the error Proportional Mode simply analyzes the difference between the current error and the previous error Based on the size of this dif ference Proportional Mode will make a change to the out put in an attempt to stabilize the input value and keep it from changing any further Mathematically the following equation determines the P Mode adjustment for a single update P mode adjustment Kp E E 4 TR Kp proportional constant E current error E error during last update TR throttling range Throttling Range In simplest terms the Throttling Range is the number Introduction to PID Control of input value units between a 0 output and a 100 out put For example in a Case Control application the Throt tling Range would be the number of degrees between the input temperature that would result in a 0 output and the temperature that would cause a 100 output Therefore the Throttling Range essentially determines the percentage of the output adjustment that will be added to the previous percentage when a change in input occurs PID Control places this Throttling Range around the setpoint As a result Proportional Mode works to keep the temperature near the setpoint and within the throttling range In most cases the Throttling Range straddles the setpoint evenly on both sides as shown in Figure D 1 However in some applications such as Condenser Con trol the Throttling Range
371. reading from the input sensor or transducer measures the distance between the input and the setpoint also called the error makes a series of calculations and adjusts the out put percentage in such a way as to move the input towards the setpoint in the most efficient manner The calculations that determine the new value of the output after each update are made by three different modes of control Proportional P Mode Integral T Mode and Derivative D Mode Each mode of control makes its own adjustment to the output percentage and the three adjustments are added to the previous output percentage to determine the new output percentage In mathematical terms every update will affect the output percentage as follows NEW OUT OLD OUT P mode adjustment I mode adjustment D mode adjustment Each of the three modes P I and D serves a different and important purpose as described below P Proportional Mode Tries to stop the error from changing Measures difference between current and previous error and adjusts output per centage to prevent any further movement Integral Mode I Tries to bring the error to zero input setpoint D Derivative Mode Tries to slow or stop a rapidly changing error so P and I Modes may effectively work to eliminate it Proportional P Mode The Proportional Mode in PID determines the system s immediate
372. red like an 8RO and the analog outputs are configured like a 4A0 When a MultiFlex combo board is present on the net work it must be addressed like all three board types Therefore when numbering these boards you must set a unique number for both the 16AI 8RO and 4AO compo nents of the board Addressing the MultiFlex Boards For MultiFlex boards set positions 1 to 5 on S3 for the 16AI component and positions to 5 on S4 for the 8RO component Set positions 6 to 8 on S4 for the 4AO or 4DO segment For MultiFlex board controllers use positions 1 to 5 on S3 to set the address Addressing the SmartESR Boards The SmartESR uses standard CPC I O Network addressing Set positions 1 to 5 on S1 to set the network ID address of the SmartESR from 1 to 31 5 6 Setting the Baud Rate All I O boards have dip switches that determine the baud rate at which they communicate Currently the baud rate dip switch in network components may be set at either 4800 9600 19200 and 38400 Setting of the baud rate is accomplished using dip switches refer to the board s installation sheets at the end of this section for specific dip switch settings Setting the Baud Rate Baud Rate for the E2 The baud rate default for E2 1s 9600 Baud Rate for the Gateway The Gateway can be set to either 9600 baud or 19 2K baud by dip switch 6 ON places the rate at 9600 baud while OFF sets it at 19 2K baud Dip switches 6 and 7 control
373. require 24VAC Class 2 input power Some boards such as the 16AI 8RO 4A0 8DO SmartESR and MultiFlex 16 use a center tapped power source All other models such as the 8IO and MultiFlex Combination I O boards may use non center tapped power sources CPC supplies a wide variety of 24VAC transformers with varying sizes and either with or without center taps Table 5 3 shows the transformer sizes and whether they are center tapped or non center tapped Table 5 4 lists each board the board s rating and whether or not the board must use center tapped power Xformer P N VA Rating Input Voltage Center Tap 640 0041 50 VA 110 VAC No 640 0042 50 VA 220 VAC No 640 0056 56 VA Multi tap 120 208 240 VAC Yes 640 0050 75 VA 110 VAC No 640 0045 75 VA 220 VAC No 640 0080 80 VA Multi tap 120 208 240 VAC Yes Table 5 3 Transformers Compatible with I O Network Boards 5 4 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 PA 1 tapped a o os 100 24 Ye Bord 075 18 24 No 75 15 4 EOM IN MER Nal IS Table 5 4 Device Power Requirements To select a power transformer for a board or a series of boards Determine what the total VA is for the boards that will be powered by the transformer see Table 5 4 Example Two MultiFlex 168AOs 15 VA each and one 8DO 18 VA boards are to be powered by one transformer The total VA is 2 x 15VA 1 x 18VA 4
374. ress Add Feature Enter your license key to activate the desired feature 9 20 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual Add License Licensed Features 09 06 2005 13 58 24 Rev 2 20B12 For controller model type BX 400 F GEN LON Demand Limit Cont Flexible Combiner Time Schedule Log Group CarrierOne ARTC RTU Nose5 HUAC Zone Analog Sensor Ctr Loop Sequence Ctr Digital Sensor Ct RCB Lighting Control Trane SCC Air Handling Unit Digital Import Point Analog Import Point F5 CANCEL Figure 9 34 Enter Your Unique License Key fictivate Feature Enter License key to activate a Feature 4 Reboot the controller and open the License Report screen again to see the license key appear next to the activated feature Figure 9 35 BX 466 Unit 1 CENSE REPORT TD Control HUAC Simulation Conversion Cell Holiday Schedule Anti Sweat Control Heat Cool Control 16A1 8R0 8D0 40 Echelon 16RI Echelon 8R0 Digital Combiner Pulse Accumulation LonWorks Network Ethernet Network Color Display Web Services Lennox IMC Power Monitoring IRLDS Analog Combiner 3BBC FE91 E5 04 1623 8B9F 075E 1921 FD7A EOI Figure 9 35 License Report Screen BX 400 version shown 9 15 1 Web Services Web Services is a licensed feature that allows the user once the required license has been obtained and entered to view and adjust certain parameters in the E2 controller through a Web page The E2 Web Services feature ena
375. rol is implemented on an AHU basis not individual cooling or heating stages Because of implementation on an AHU basis dehumidification con trol is woven throughout the cool Cut In Cut Out as well as the heating Cut In Cut Out control algorithms by calling for increases or decreases in heating and cooling capaci ties The dehumidification algorithm does not directly change the states of the heating or cooling instead it influences the staging process by calling for more less or the same amount of cooling and limit the amount of heat used if a call for heating is necessary during dehumid ification If the current space temperature is less than the dehu midification minimum space temperature call for the end of dehumidification If the current control value used for dehumidification is greater than the dehumidification setpoint plus the dead band divided by two 2 call for an increase in dehumidi fication capacity If the current control value used for dehumidification is less than the dehumidification setpoint minus the dehu midification deadband divided by two 2 call for a decrease in dehumidification capacity 10 21 4 Two Speed Fan Control To determine proper fan speed determine which heat ing and cooling stages are ON and if the user has set any of the fan speeds for those stages to High If any of the 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 E2 stages have been set to High then the fan speed should be set t
376. rol temperature in the case circuits instead the CC 100 or CS 100 controls temperature for each individual case based on the setpoint s supplied to them by their associated E2s This section of the manual covers both the program ming of a Case Circuit Control application and the process of associating a CC 100 CS 100 or EC 2 with a Case Circuit Control application Setup of a case controlled refrigerated case system is a two fold process 1 For each case circuit in the refrigeration system a 10 8 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 2 10 4 2 Case Circuit Control Soft ware Overview There are five different versions of case control soft ware in the CPC case control family CC 100P This version controls temperature in a case using a pulse modulated valve which is pulsed ON for a percentage of a fixed amount of time to achieve the necessary refrigerant flow CC 100LS This version controls temperature in a case using a liquid side stepper valve This valve is capable of various positions in between 0 and 100 As a result the CC 100 is capable of supply ing the exact refrigerant flow necessary to achieve the case setpoint CC 100H This version controls temperature in a case using a suction side evaporator pressure regu lator EEPR This valve is capable of various posi tions in between 0 and 100 As a result the CC 100 is capable of providing the exact suction pres sure necessary
377. roper rating HP AMP or BTU Pressure setpoints are set up incorrectly Set proper pressure setpoints If you are controlling the rack using suction pressure enter the pressure setpoint in the SUC PRES SETPT field If you are controlling by temperature enter the temperature setpoint in the CTRL TEMP SETPT field Note Pressure setpoints are located under the Setpoints tab C2 in the Suction Group Setup screen Board and point addresses are incorrect Set proper board and point set tings for input output and com pressor outputs Board and point settings are located under the Inputs tab C4 Outputs tab C5 and Comp Outs tab C7 in the Suction Group Setup screen Appendix E Troubleshooting E 3 SYMPTOM POSSIBLE PROBLEM SOLUTION Compressor will not Operate Cont E 4 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 8RO fail safes are not wired cor rectly Verify fail safe wiring on 8RO board for N O N C positions One wire of the two wire con nection should always be con nected to the middle terminal The second wire must be either connected to the N C terminal if you want the relay to be closed ON during power fail ure or the N O terminal if you want the relay to be open OFF during power failure Compressor in override Highlight compressor stage and cancel the override by pressing Enter to open the Actions Menu Select 3 for Override options or go to the O
378. rs a con sumer s energy consumption for a fixed period of time usually anywhere from 15 to 30 minutes with most power companies although it may be as short as 5 minutes This monitoring period is called the demand window Demand windows are always the same length of time but they may be measured at any time the power company chooses to Since Demand Control applications have no way of determining when the power company will start a demand window they simply assume that the demand window can begin at any time As new values of the KW input are gathered Demand Control applications roll their demand windows forward and recalculate their load shed ding algorithms as if the power company were measuring the average power of the new window For example if the power company s demand window lasts for 15 minutes the Demand Control applications will keep a constant real time average of all recorded KW val ues from the previous 15 minutes If a Demand Control application determines from its calculations that the cur rent KW usage might cause its demand limit to be 10 28 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 2 exceeded for the current or a future demand window it will begin shedding loads to bring the KW usage down A graphic example of the rolling demand window used by the Demand Control application is shown in Figure 10 13 ACTUAL DEMAND WINDOW MEASUREMENT FROM POWER COMPANY m mjm m m m an gt DEMAND CONTR
379. rs when alarm set points are supplied by other applications or inputs and the application or input fails Resize bad Logging Terminated 10 The number of samples was changed in a log group cessful Check memory 20 50 and the resizing of the file storing data was not suc Runtime Log Stuck No Memory 15 A Runtime Log is unable to save new data because AAA Runtime Logs Not Restored 15 The runtime logs stored in memory were not restored AS RX BX Firmware Update Failed 20 The EZ firmware update was not successful IRX BX Firmware Was Updated 50 The EY Firmware was successfully updated Smoke Detected 30 A smoke detector input on an ARTC MultiFlex RTU has detected smoke C 12 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 Priority SRAM Memory Corrupted 30 A problem with memory has resulted in a reset of the Reboot E2 State Switched On User A digital value that has been set up to alarm when ON has switched ON Status Config Loss CRC Error 30 An internal error has occurred in the E2 SmartESR controller has detected a stuck valve System date needs manual reset 20 The date time of the box is not valid User The suction pressure has fallen below the pump down setpoint for a Suction Group causing shutdown of the rack Template File Bad CC100 Liq UE template file in E2 for a CC 100P or CC 100LS 1s bad Template File Bad CC100 Suct 15 JA template file in E2 for a CC 100H is bad Te
380. rview An AHU Control application actually consists of three separate control algorithms The main control algorithm monitors the indoor temperature and activates heating and cooling stages when necessary to maintain the user defined temperature setpoint Another algorithm monitors the indoor humidity and uses a desiccant wheel or addi tional AHU cool stages to reduce the humidity level The third loop controls either a two position digital or vari able position analog economizer damper based on the outside air conditions 10 5 2 Temperature Control In its most basic form Temperature Control simply reads a control input value compares it to the active tem perature setpoint and activates or deactivates heating or cooling stages in an effort to satisfy the setpoint The majority of user setup that must be done in Temperature Control involves specifying which input is to be used as the control source defining different setpoints for use in occupied unoccupied summer and winter modes and setting up the operating characteristics of the heating and cooling stages 10 5 3 Alternate Setpoints For both the heating and cooling setpoints you may choose to use different setpoints during occupied or unoc cupied building times and different setpoints for summer and winter seasons In other words AHU Control may have four different pairs of heating and cooling setpoints as shown in Table 10 8 SUMMER COOL OCC SUMMER HEAT OCC SUMM
381. s 9 18 Set Up Applications From the Main Status Home screen place the cursor on the application you wish to view and press SETUP You can also press and select Setup from the Actions Menu to open the Setup screen for your selected application 9 18 1 Add Delete an Application Add an Application Quick Start 9 25 1 Press the UD key to open the Main Menu screen 2 Select Add Delete Application to open the Add Delete Application menu 3 Select to add an application 4 Choose an application by pressing LOOK UP to open the Option List Selection menu and choose the application you wish to add 5 Press to place the application in the Type field 6 Select the number of applications you wish to add in the How many field 7 Press to add 8 You are then asked if you would like to edit the application now Press Y Yes or N No Delete an Application 1 Press the EP key to open the Main Menu screen 2 Select Add Delete Application to open the Add Delete Application menu 3 Select EM Delete Application 4 Press to delete the application if not dis played by default 5 If not displayed by default choose the applica tion you wish to delete by selecting LOOK UP The Option List Selection menu opens Choose the application you wish to delete from this list 6 Press and the application appears in the Type field 7 Press to delete the application 8 Adialog box o
382. s 16 relay outputs 4 digital outputs 810 3077 MultiFlex 1616DO 16 analog digital in puts 16 relay outputs 4 digital outputs Table 1 4 MultiFlex Products and Descriptions 1 6 On Line Help System Overview The E2 On Line Help is the primary source front panel interface users will have to consult when seeking instruction on properties screens menus and trouble shooting of hardware software problems The on line help topics are designed to minimize the time the user would otherwise have to spend searching through the manual to find information Press gt keys to open the General Help menu To use on line help from any screen in the E2 front panel interface simply press the E2 s permanent Help key This opens a pop up window containing either information about the screen or menu you are currently on or information about the input output or setpoint you have highlighted with the cursor if available After the Help lt p key has been pressed will open the Gen eral Help menu containing Troubleshooting options 1 7 Some applications in the E2 are available only when activated with a unique license key that is obtained through CPC Software licensing see Section 9 15 License Management allows the user to activate certain features in the E2 such as Web Services and third party controllers Call your CPC sales representative at 7 800 829 2724 for more information about software licensing Software Lice
383. s below Actions Taken During Fail Safe Mode When a CC 100 or CS 100 enters Fail Safe Mode each output will be set to the fail safe state described in Table 10 7 Software Overview 10 13 Pulse Valve Stepper Valve Controller will fix the position to the last known good out put percentage CC 100 and CS 100 Alarm Flashes at a rate of 2 LEDs red per second Suction Solenoid Valve Liquid Solenoid Valve Table 10 7 Fail Safe States 10 4 11 1 Recoverable Sensor Failures The CC 100 and CS 100 will be able to cope with some sensor failures without having to enter Fail Safe Mode Coil In or Coil Out Failure A coil inlet temperature or coil outlet temperature sen sor will be considered failed if one of two conditions occur 1 The sensor gives a value outside of its minimum and maximum temperature range that is below 50 F or above 120 F for two consecutive read ings or 2 The sensor value is 20 F above the control set point for longer than ten minutes If the coil inlet or coil outlet temperature sensor has failed the case controller will compensate by guessing the inlet or outlet temperature based on the values of the remaining functional coil sensor and the case temperature sensor s The case controller will continue to guess the value until the coil inlet or outlet sensor can be fixed If both the coil inlet and coil outlet sensors have failed or if one coil sensor and the case temperatur
384. s either SUMMER or WINTER The combined Zone Temperature and Zone humidity based on a combination of each HVAC unit s space temperature and space humidity The fallback temperature and humidity set points to use in case the unit loses contact with its Zone application 10 20 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual E2 10 6 3 Applications That May Be Connected To Zones There are three different HVAC applications that may be associated with a Zone application a MultiFlex RTU application a MultiFlex RCB application and an AHU application The MultiFlex RTU and RCB applications interface with the MultiFlex RTU and RCB I O Network boards that control rooftop units AHU applications use input and output points on the I O Network to control air handling units 10 6 3 1 MultiFlex RTU Board The MultiFlex RTU is a control board on the E2 s I O Network that controls the operation of a single rooftop HVAC unit This board has an on board processor with numerous inputs relay outputs and 0 10VDC analog out puts and is designed for controlling advanced rooftop units with a large number of heat cool stages variable position economizers variable speed fans etc The E2 s MultiFlex RTU applications serve only two purposes to act as an interface between the user and the MultiFlex RTU processor and to allow communications between the MultiFlex RTU board and the Zone applica tion The MultiFlex RTU depends on the Zone application to pr
385. s I O Network 8RO Boards Enter the number of 8RO relay output boards on this E2 s I O Network 8DO Boards Enter the number of 8DO digital out put boards on this E2 s I O Network 4AO Boards Enter the number of 4AO analog out put boards on this E2 s I O Network IRLDS Controllers Enter the number of IRLDS leak detection units on this E2 s I O Network Options will vary depending on the type of controller used Quick Start 9 15 9 13 2 Checking Online Status RX 466 Unit 3 ONLINE STATUS 13 34 63 ALARM Online Status Board Subnet Node THIS 03 19 P TS E E 3 1 AI AI 63 61 16 Name Model Revision Status 2 20812 1 8 806 68 Online 1 8 68 68 Online 1 2 20812 Online This Controller RO 63 61 THIS 61 1 8R0 CX366 C Store 1 F1 CST STATUS i eG SY Figure 9 24 Online Status Screen You can check all boards that are on either the Echelon Network E2 controllers or the I O Network from the Net work Status screen See Figure 9 24 The Connected I O Online Status screen displays information such as the Sub net and Node addresses for each board and the status of Echelon and I O boards To get to the Online Status Screen 1 Press BP to open the Main Menu 2 I ress S stem Confi uration y g 3 I ress H etwork Set N up 4 Press Online Status The Online Status screen will display The names models and subnet and node addresses for each controlling device in
386. s and Peripherals gt Temperature Sensor Inputs 6 Valve Connection Analog Input 2 LonWorks Network Connection Hand Held Terminal HHT Jack 7 LEDs Red Service Green Status Output Cable Connection Network Termination Jumper 26502034 Figure 2 18 Case Controller CC 100P shown 2 3 5 The ESR8 Discontinued The ESRS electronic suction regulator P N 810 3195 is an Echelon Network based control board that controls up to eight separate electronic suction regulator ESR stepper valves The ESR8 uses suction side variable posi tion ESRs to vary evaporator pressure and control temper ature for an entire circuit The ESR8 offers an economical more efficient alternative to TXV control The board can be used with either Emerson Flow Con trols ESR12 or ESR20 valves as well as a number of com mercially available ESR stepper valves Note that Emerson Flow Controls supplies both a 24 Volt and a 12 Volt version of the valve The ESR board is only compati ble with the 12 Volt version of the valve The board features two LEDs for each valve which indicate movement and direction A status LED indicates the general status of the board The ESRS board is shown in Figure 2 19 Hardware Overview 2 11 2 LEGEND 1 Power Input 4 Termination Jumper 2 Valve Inputs 8 5 Status Light 3 Network Inputs 6 DIP Switches Figure 2 19 ESR8 Board Layout
387. s simply a multiplier that can be used to fine tune the size of the Proportional Mode adjustment Raising the value of K results in a greater reaction to input value changes while lowering it results in a smaller reaction Changing K is essentially the same thing as changing the value of the throttling range For example having a TR of 10 and a K of 2 is the same as having a TR of 5 and a K of 1 Mathematically speaking the effective propor tional range is calculated by dividing the Throttling Range by K D 2 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 2 If Proportional Mode is functioning incorrectly in your system it may be more appropriate for you to change the Throttling Range value to a more appropriate value K is designed as a fine tuning constant for example it might be used to speed up reaction slightly by setting it to 1 04 or to slow down reaction by setting it to 0 98 Integral Mode The Integral Mode also called T Mode is the por tion of PID control that seeks to make the input equal to the setpoint When an update occurs the Integral Mode measures the difference between the current input value and the setpoint The size of this difference determines Integral Mode s output percentage adjustment Why I Mode is Necessary Though Proportional Mode handles the majority of the workload during PID control there are two major short comings that make the I Mode necessary Proportional Offset
388. se MultiFlex input adapters P N 335 2301 to plug input connectors from old board into the MultiFlex input sockets One for inputs 1 4 and one for inputs 5 8 Otherwise polarity sensitive inputs will have to be rewired 6 Connect board to the power transformer CT Note If you change any dip switch settings while the board is powered disconnect the power and re power the board to reset ag a lt lt AAAA Ov SIG INPUT 9 Ov SIG INPUT 10 Ov SIG INPUT 11 INPUT 12 INPUT 13 0v SIG INPUT 14 INPUT 15 INPUT 16 WIRE to same color SHIELDED TWISTED PAIR BELDEN 8761 FOR PLENUM h USE BELDEN 82761 OR 88761 OR EQUIV 2 ADDRESS BOARD 1 a 485 i LL NRI AAA ELALI Er BOARD 5 BOARD 6 BOARD 7 BOARD 8 ov li CEPIT AMM nn z uu uu 485 BOARD S BOARD WIRE to same color Sra 5 E EET WIRE OV to 0V ARO Pod 3 S3 9600 baud 19200 baud je Jo IN JPz e Jes e E spa e NO TERMINATION 1 OUT PLUG INPUT di Exe CONNECTOR FROM 16AI ues EN INTO THIS 3 spa EST m TERMINATION PLUG CABLE CONNECTOR INTO
389. sion Shown 2 The Override Update screen appears see Figure 11 16 Press the or to enter Yes to place the stage in override Scroll down one space to enter the Override Time 3 Choose the Override Value of either OFF or ON using or m Operator s Guide to Using the E2 11 9 The compressor stage or condenser fan stage in over ride mode will be marked with a cyan blue background in the Main Status screen indicating that the override is in effect 11 8 Checking Boards Online RX 466 Unit 3 11 16 14 ONLINE STATUS FULL ALARM Online Status BoardH Model Bus Subnet Node Revision Status THIS 63 1 RX466 Refrig ETH CL 03 002 CC166 Liquid LON 20812 This Controller 66 66 Online 66 66 Offline 66 66 Offline 66 66 Offline 66 66 Online 006 60 Unknown CS166 Ckt Suction LON C166 Suction LON EC2 29x Control LON 16A1 1 0 16A1 1 0 16A1 1 0 006 60 Unknown 16A1 1 0 16A1 1 0 8R0 170 8R0 170 8R0 170 06 60 Unknown 66 66 Unknown 66 66 Online 66 66 Unknown 66 66 Unknown 8R0 1 0 8R0 1 0 66 66 Unknown 66 66 Unknown 2 8 8 8 8 8 8 6 16A1 1 0 6 66 66 Unknown 8 8 6 8 6 6 8 F3 NET STATUS Figure 11 17 Online Status Screen You can check all boards that are on either the Echelon Network E2 controllers or the I O Network from the Online Status screen See Figure 11 17 This screen dis plays information such as the Subnet and Node addresses for each board the number
390. sistance from CPC Call 1 800 829 2724 for technical assistance or your sales representative Your sales representative will know which devices your unit will connect to 7 4 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual E2 7 8 1 Devices Configuring Echelon Log in to the controller and enter the desired number of Echelon devices to be added in the Connected I O screen From the Main Menu 1 Select H S ystem Configuration 2 Select H etw ork Setup 3 Select Connected I O Boards and Control lers Enter the number of Echelon devices you wish to add on the Connected I O screen BX 466 Unit 1 18 42 41 CONNECTED 1 0 ALARN 1 Unit Number THIS 01 1 Unit Name Boards Controllers on 1 0 Network lu Ni Type lum Ctrl Type I IRLDS 1 RCB 6 6 6 1 4A0 ARTC RTU Third Party Num Ctrl Type cen Lon Ctrl Type 8 Lennox IMC Controllers on Echelon Network Num Ctrl Type 8 RT188 Roof Top 6 Echelon 16A1 6 Echelon 8R0 Figure 7 5 Connected I O Screen BX 400 Unit Shown Navigate to the Gen Lon field under the Third Party section of the Connected I O screen and enter the number of Echelon devices to be added Next commission the Echelon device Commissioning is done at the Controller Setup screen If still on the Con nected I O screen hit the back button to go back to the Network setup menu and select Controller Setup Or from the Main Menu 1 Select HM System Configuration 2 Select WA Network S
391. some system settings Level 2 Setpoint and bypass access Users may perform all the tasks a level 1 user may and they may also change control setpoints and bypass some devices Level 3 Configuration and override access Users may perform all the tasks a level 2 user may and they may also override system settings create new cells and program new applications System Administrator access All E2 func tions are accessible by a level 4 user Table 11 1 User Access Levels 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 2 11 3 Toggling Full Options Toggling Full Options on allows you to have full access to programming applications To Toggle Full Options on l Press the gt key 2 Select H S ystem Configur ation 3 Select H S ystem Information 4 Select Toggle Full Options FULL will appear in the top right corner of the screen when Full Options is enabled Pressing Kl H toggles Full Options on and off 11 4 Navigation 11 4 1 Main Menu The Main Menu is accessed by pressing the c key This menu gives you direct access to applications such as Suction Groups Condensers Circuits Air Han dling Units Zones Light Schedules and Sensor Controls applications depending on which controller type you are using as well as all configured applications in the control ler The Main Menu also allows you to add and delete applications gives system configuration abilities and shows status information for inputs and outp
392. st heat is deactivated the application waits for the Run Off time to pass before re entering refrigera tion mode This allows melted frost on the evapo rator to drain from the coil so that it will not re freeze when refrigeration begins again After the user specified Run Off time has passed the defrost cycle has ended 10 3 2 2 Defrost Types There are many different ways used to defrost a refrig erated case A Standard Circuit application is capable of employing five different strategies to accommodate five different types of defrost Timed and Reverse Air Timed defrost and Reverse Air defrost are two differ ent defrost strategies but both are alike in the way they are controlled by a Standard Circuit application In both defrost types no heat is applied to the evaporator The application simply turns the refrigeration solenoid OFF for the duration of the defrost cycle When these defrost types are used Pump Down and Run Off times are not necessary therefore they will not be part of the defrost cycle Hot Gas and Reversed Cycle Hot Gas Hot Gas and Reversed Cycle Hot Gas require the use of hot gas from the refrigeration lines During these types of defrost the application will open the circuit s liquid line solenoid AND will send a command to the refrigeration rack to open the Master Liquid Line Solenoid As a result heated refrigerant will be pumped through the evaporator coil Any user defined Pump Down and Run O
393. stance Jumpers I O Network See Jumpers termination Thermostatic Expansion Valves See TXVs Time Date Setup 9 9 Active Date 9 9 Active Time 9 9 Date Format 9 9 I 10 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 2 Daylight Savings Dates 9 9 Daylight Savings Time uses GMT 9 0 Sundown 9 10 Time Zone 9 9 Unit Location From 9 10 Toggle Full Options 3 Transducers Pressure See Sensors pressure transducers Transformers VO board 5 5 selecting the correct VA rating 5 5 7 3 six board 5 5 ten board 5 5 three board 5 5 Troubleshooting E TXVs control using CC 100s 70 10 Ue Unit Controllers Echelon 9 2 9 16 User Access Menu 9 13 Usernames Creating 9 3 V Valves EEPR cables for CC 100 8 5 EEVs cables for CC 100 8 15 Emerson Flow Controls ESR wire colors 8 6 Emerson Flow Controls ESV wire colors 8 6 Sporlan CDS wire colors 8 6 Sporlan SEI wire colors 8 6 W Watt hour Transducer See Sensors KW Trans ducer Web Services 9 20 Wire Types Echelon Network 7 7 E AP Zone Control 10 20 AHUS 10 18 10 21 dehumidification 70 22 dehumidification 0 22 economization 10 21 10 22 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 2 enabling 70 21 MultiFlex RTU 0 20 MultiFlex RTUs dehumidification 0 22 optimum start stop OSS 70 22 stand alone mode 0 23 MultiFlex RTU 70 23 temperature control 70 27 zone humidity 70 22 zone temperature 70 21 I 11
394. stem Information menu is used to set up the E2 The options in this menu allow setting up time and date passwords toggle full options general information about the controller and other important data The System Information Menu is another menu used to set up the E2 The options in this menu allow setting up time and date passwords toggle full options general information about the controller and other important data To open the System Information Menu 1 Press D gt 2 Press WA System Configuration 11 4 E2 RX BX CX 150 Manual 2 3 Press WEB System Information The System Information menu contains nine menu items 1 General Controller Info Edit general information about the E2 such as engineering units and summer winter change over specifications 2 Time and Date Change the current date and time and specify date formats 3 Passwords User Access Set up usernames and pass words and define security level requirements 4 Firmware Revision Read only information screen that contains current system ver sion information 5 Service Actions Set up system diagnostics mem ory and execution info and per form advanced functions system resets and firmware update 6 Note Pad Writable field for technician to make notes about changes made or general information 7 Display Users Enter information about Logging Group applications such as the sampling frequency and total
395. t Control eed pete eei e PE RE e Rr Ho ep retentis 10 5 10 3 2 1 Defrost States sui oontra neon me iti astral retenir ene ie i ete QU PERENNE 10 5 10 3 2 2 DEMOS ET Pest e e Ve D ee CE a B BI Pt 10 5 1032 3DefrostTerti inationv 2 eerte NAO 10 5 10 3 2 4 Emergency Defrost nei rie toe He Ee er ed ug ete o e eee baee ee 10 6 10 3 3 Clean and Door Switches ei RT RU RERO ORE t ds diee itte 10 6 10 3 3 T Clean Switches nete c e e rto eite ten inen ert eb rt e hti eee 10 6 10332 TOOTS WENES asenn RU EIC ERE E RERO IHRER RUNE 10 6 10 3 4 Fan Control ni AA A eddie a eda eiue 10 6 10 3 3 The TDS Temperature Display e SHIRE te secs nett aei did ii 10 7 10 3 6 Witing oeaan oe EE RETE eee REGE ONE des A Aia 10 7 104 CASE CONTROL CIRCUITS vi is 10 8 HIE SEO I A NN 10 8 10 4 2 Case Circuit Control Software Overview eese esee enne tentent treten nete en nente en nennen 10 9 10 24 21 Valve Controls 5o e o ee tee te inde de O cte abst Pe hena RNA 10 9 104 3 Refrigeration Control ita dete tt eere dr e efe t e pte eie 10 10 10 4 3 1 EEVs Liquid Pulse and Liquid Stepper esssseseeeeseeeeeeeene ennemi 10 10 10 4 3 2 BEPRS Suctionm Stepper ott pe i A se oeste 10 10 10 44 Defrost Controla arrinin ea Re eee e ie eo ia ad 10 4 4 1 Defrost States 10 4 4 2 Defrost Types sA AT 10 4 4 3 Defrost Termination eee eren ER ERES SS a EEA EEE EKE 10 11 10 4 4 4 Demand Defr st 5 ero Poem BRI eere Oei
396. t States The defrost cycle for a Case Circuit application con sists of three steps Of these three steps 1 and 3 apply only to cases with heated defrosts 1 Pump Down The defrost cycle begins with this step immediately after the refrigeration solenoid is turned OFF During the Pump Down phase the application waits for a user specific amount of time to elapse before turning on the defrost heat This allows refrigerant in the evaporator to be evacuated before defrost heat is activated The compressor s remain ON during Pump Down Pump Down times may only be used for hot gas and electric type defrosts 2 Defrost During the defrost phase refrigeration is disabled If using electric defrost heaters will be ON If using hot gas heated refrigerant will be pumped through the coil This phase will con tinue until the defrost is terminated see Section 10 3 2 3 for information on how defrost is termi nated 3 Run Off After defrost heat is deactivated the application waits for the Run Off time to pass before re entering refrigeration mode This allows melted frost on the evaporator to drain from the coil so that it will not re freeze when refrigeration begins again After the user speci fied Run Off time has passed the defrost cycle has ended Run Off times may only be programmed for hot gas and electric type defrosts 10 4 4 2 Defrost Types There are many different ways used to defrost a refrig erated case A case
397. t cycle or an amount of time has elapsed equal to the duration parameter This is a feature to prevent water runoff When irrigation is stopped for a zone due to elapsed time control will cycle to the next active zone 10 20 3 Cycle Scheduling Irrigation cycles can only be started during a user defined irrigation season The Season Source parameter allows the user to select how to determine the season by either using the Dates parameters or the Summer Winter input If the user selects Dates start and stop day and month parameters will become visible and are used to specify the season Each zone will have parameters to configure what days of the month it should participate in irrigation cycles If the user selects Summer Winter an input of the same name will become visible under the Inputs tab The sea son will be active when this input indicates Summer The Summer Winter input is automatically connected to the Global Data output of the same name Tf the season is not active the System status will be set to Off Season and no normal or manual cycles will be possible This prevents accidental cycles from occurring after the system has been winterized 10 20 4 Zone Inhibit Inhibiting sensors enable a zone to terminate irrigation early when enough water has been dispensed for the cur rent cycle or completely removes a zone from the cycle Each zone is equipped with a digital inhibit input called Zone Inhibit If th
398. t to clear the battery icon from the screen See Section 4 4 3 Battery Test below 4 4 3 Battery Test E2 s automatic calculation of battery life is based on the number of hours it has been active not its voltage If you wish to know for certain if the battery is good you can perform a battery voltage test from the E2 front panel You will need to perform this test to remove a yellow or red battery icon from the screen If you are replacing the bat tery and wish to remove the battery icon from the screen see the instructions under Section 4 4 4 Battery Replace ment To perform a battery test 1 Log in to the controller level 4 password or higher 2 Press D followed by BHEHH to navigate to the System Tests screen 3 Move the cursor to the Battery Test field Press for Yes and press Ea The dialog box that appears will show the CPU Battery status OK or FAIL and the Battery Switch position ON or OFF If the CPU Battery is OK and the switch position 1s ON the battery icon will disappear Otherwise the bat tery should be replaced or the switch set to ON 4 4 4 Battery Replacement To replace the battery remove it from the battery clip and replace it with an identical 3 6V battery obtained from or approved by CPC DO NOT USE AA BATTERIES IN THIS BATTERY SLOT After replacing the battery you must tell E2 the battery has been replaced so it can reset its battery life counter 1 Log in to E2 level 4 passw
399. t value will also be OFF XOR This combination strategy is exactly the same as OR except when all sensor control inputs are ON the logical input value will be OFF instead of ON VOTE If more than half of the sensor control inputs are ON the logical input value will be ON Otherwise if 50 or less of the sensor control inputs are OFF the logical input value will be OFF 10 12 Loop Sequence Con trol The Loop Sequence Control application s main func tion is to read the value of an analog input compare the value to a setpoint and generate a single analog output value This output value is represented in three different forms a single analog value from 0 to 100 up to eight digital stage outputs and a digital pulse width modulation output The output value s are generated by a PID Control cell which takes into account both the input s instanta neous value and its rate and direction of change The PID Control algorithm is similar to the PID algorithm used by Pressure Control except the Loop Sequence Control application is designed to be used in a wider array of applications 10 12 1 Layout of the Loop Sequence Control Application There are two different types of cells in the Loop Sequence Control Application control cells and output cells The control cells have a part in determining the PID output percentage The output cells convert this PID per centage to staged digital and pulse width modulation acti va
400. ta see Sec tion 9 17 Fan Proof Digital See Table 8 1 on page 8 3 Fan Proof Reset Digital See Table 8 1 on page 8 3 VS Inverter Alarm Digital See Table 8 1 on page 8 3 Enthalpy Switch Digital See Table 8 1 on Indoor and or Out page 8 3 door Dewpoint Probe for Dewpoint See Table 8 1 on Economization page 8 3 Mixed Air Temp ana Temperature See Table 8 1 on log economizers only page 8 3 Table 10 9 Suction Group Inputs Output Device Wire 8RO Set Fail safe Dip P contacts to Switch to Heat Cool Staged see note see note Set up any stages you want ON when the controller is off line as Outputs N C Stages you want OFF should be set as N O T see note see note LOW HIGH and fan contactor Two Speed Fans Table 10 10 Suction Group Outputs Air Handling Units AHU If one or more heat or cool stages will be ON wire fan N C so it will be active during controller off line times Otherwise wire N O If any heat or cool stages are configured to be ON N C set the wiring and the switch to N C and set either the LOW or HIGH stage output to N C whichever speed you want active If no heat or cool will be active set LOW HIGH and the fan contac tor to N O Software Overview 10 19 10 6 Zone Control 10 6 1 An HVAC Zone is a collection of up to sixteen rooftop units or air handling units that work together to maintain the same temperature and humidity throughout a particular vo
401. tal PWM Output 10 12 2 2 The Setpoint Float Cell The Setpoint Float cell provides users to raise and lower the control setpoint based on the value of a sensor called the float sensor The float sensor can be any type of analog sensor but is typically a temperature sen sor since most of the applications for floating setpoints involve HVAC and floating the setpoint based on outdoor air temperature To set up the Setpoint Float cell you must provide three values a High Float Value a Low Float Value and an Output Range The Output Range is the maximum amount that the PID Setpoint may vary An Output Range of 4 for exam ple means that the control setpoint may only be increased by a maximum of 2 and decreased by a maximum of 2 The High Float Value and Low Float Value form a range of values that determine what portion of the Output Range is applied to the final control setpoint For example suppose a Setpoint Float cell is given a High Float Value of 100 a Low Float Value of 0 and an Output Range of 4 When the float sensor value is at the high float value the setpoint will be increased by its maximum amount 2 When the float sensor value is at the low float value the 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 E2 setpoint will be decreased by its minimum amount 2 For all float sensor values in between the High Float and Low Float values the amount added or subtracted to the control setpoint will vary linearly
402. te or deacti vate the liquid line solenoids defrost modes and fans 10 4 E2 RX BX CX 150 Manual crec NOTE Do not set up a Standard Circuit appli cation for a case that uses a CC 100 case con troller These cases must use Case Circuit Control applications see Section Section 8 Input and Output Setup 10 3 1 A Standard Circuit application may apply one of three different control methods to a case circuit the Tempera ture Monitor method the Temperature Control method Refrigeration Control 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 2 and the Line Up Control Method 10 3 1 1 The Temperature Monitor method does not control case temperature The application will read and record case temperature inputs but it will not make any attempt to control temperature The application will still initiate and control defrost cycle fans and perform other neces sary functions Temperature Monitor 10 3 1 2 Temperature Control A Standard Circuit application using the Temperature Control method will pulse the refrigeration liquid line solenoid OPEN and CLOSED so as to control the case temperature to the user defined setpoint The application monitors up to six different temperature sensors in the cir cuit and combines them into a single value that is com pared to the setpoint 10 3 1 3 Line Up Control In Line Up Control circuit temperature is controlled by an electronic evaporator pressure regulator EEPR The EEPR is controll
403. tee tore uite bee coo ete eec eee dese te cese tee ce eei 1 4 1 6 ON LINE HELP SYSTEM OVERVIEW csssssscecessssseseceeesesseececeseusecccecesssaeececessaaesecceensueeecceesessesesceessesecesensaeseseeeneaaees 1 5 1 2 SOFTWARE LICENSING enemies basim 1 5 1 8 FEEXIBEE COMBINER APPLICATION ideada 1 5 2 HARDWARE OVERVIEW csscisesiivaisssacsstacsasiesensoseseesesssnessasssectansasevtcsantaxsinesacesnnecucsvaaseevesenncseasestecseoseeecdautedeseososesnts 2 1 2 1 E2 HARDWARE ds 2 1 21d E2Main Processor Board CRU idas eee ied e ied uice eda d ise dete eut 2 2 2 1 2 E2 Processor Interface Board PIB ausi eene er Ee PU er PR oerte eigene rerit 2 2 2413 ERRE Dd HR TR da ac au ERE IEEE SH RIS EUR ERU Red ue EU id 2 2 DA SIGE DY rte MOREM PE EHE RAN D UR 2 2 2 1 5 PC 104 Peripherals The Internal Modem Previous Generation Processor Board ees 2 3 2 2 I O NETWORK BOARDS AND PERIPHERALS c cccessccessscecesseccsssseecsscceecsseecesececseeceesseecessececsseecesueeesessecentssesesseeensnsees 2 3 22d Th G tewdy Bo rd ao tT RAE E D EUG NR TELA eet to OA ee to PUEDE aA 2 3 2 2 2 TheSmartESR Bo rd scope eue Eel aiibi 2 4 2 23 MultiFlex Boardss i iN At tete dettes tt dive qe iro Ao Pace ret ivi d 2 4 2 2 3 1 MultiFlex 16 Input Board irae ii aia 2 2 3 2 MultiFlex Combination Input Output Board 2 2 3 8 MultiFlex CUB eene 2 2 3 4 MultiFlex RTU BX and CX Only 2 2 3 5 MultiFlex Rooftop Control B
404. that affect the level s time in shed Minimum Shed Duration the minimum amount of time a level must remain in shed Demand Control will not restore the level until this minimum time has passed Maximum Shed Duration the maximum amount of time a level will remain in shed When the level has been shed longer than this duration it will automat ically be restored regardless of the current need for demand shedding Minimum Restore Duration the minimum amount of time a level must be restored from shed before it may be shed again Demand Control will not re shed this level until this minimum time has passed ams NOTE If a level is in RESTORE but its mini mum restore duration has not been met levels of the next highest priority category or catego ries will not be shed until the lower priority lev els are all in shed 10 10 6 How Demand Control Uses Load Shedding Demand Control uses three parameters to perform load shedding the current KW input value the current integral error described in Section 10 10 2 Demand Monitoring and the active KW setpoint The active setpoint is chosen from four different setpoint values depending on the sea son summer or winter and occupancy occupied or unoc cupied The Demand Control application is programmed with three different modes of operation Under normal condi tions Demand Control operates in the first mode then proceeds to the second or third mode if the deman
405. the Echelon Network E2 RX and BX Offline and online status After determining which board is offline turn to Appendix E Troubleshooting 9 14 Set Up Echelon Net work 9 14 1 Devices Specifying Number of To specify the number of devices on the Echelon Net work navigate to the Connected I O screen 9 16 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 2 1 Press BP to open the Main Menu amp 2 Press System Configuration 3 Press WA Network Setup 4 Press Connected I O Boards amp Controllers RX 466 Unit 3 CONNECTED 1 0 ME Unit Number THIS 63 1 Unit Name Boards Controllers on 1 0 Network Num Ctrl Type Nu Ctrl Type 6 16AI WCC 8RO CUB 8D0 IRLDS 4A0 WTPK WPK Num Ctrl Type 6 SmartESR Third Party IO Controllers on Echelon Network Num Ctrl Type 8 CC188 Liquid Ctrl Type Echelon 16A1 Echelon 8R0 EC2 29x Control EC2 39x Control S166 Ckt Suction 8 CC188 Suction 6 ESR8 Line Up 6 DataLink 6 TD3 Case Display FS NEXT Figure 9 25 Connected I O Screen RX 400 version shown After logging in for the first time the Network Setup screen will ask you to specify how many of each type of device will be connected to the E2 you are currently pro gramming Options will vary depending on the type of controller used Unit Number Echelon Subnet Each E2 on the Echelon Network must have a different unit number This can be any number from to 255 but each E2 s number must be u
406. tion 0 5 timed and reverse air 0 5 types 10 5 emergency defrost 0 6 fan control 0 6 inputs wiring 10 8 line up control 70 5 outputs wiring 10 8 problems with E 6 pulsed defrost 70 6 refrigeration control 0 4 temperature control 70 5 temperature monitor 70 5 wiring 10 7 State 11 11 Status Screen 71 5 Status Screen The Main 9 3 Status Screens 9 5 Circuit Status Screens 11 10 Condenser Status Screen 0 Home Screen 1 navigation of cursor 7 Network Status Screen 9 16 11 10 Sensor Control Screen 71 10 Suction Group Status Screen 71 10 Subnet setting the number 9 2 9 16 1 9 Suction Groups bypassing compressor stages 71 9 floating set point control 0 hardware overview 0 1 Introduction 70 1 overriding compressor stages 71 9 PID control strategy overview 10 1 variable speed compressors 70 1 Summary Screen 5 Superheat Control 70 10 Supply And Return Air Sensors 3 8 System Configuration Menu 9 7 System Information Menu 9 8 T Tabs Index 9 27 TCP IP setup 9 1 TD3 Temperature Display defined 2 12 features 2 12 Temperature Control case controllers 70 10 Temperature Differential TD Control 710 42 alarms 10 43 configuration 70 42 inputs 10 43 setpoints 10 42 TD failsafes 10 42 TD strategy 10 42 Temperature Differential Strategy 10 2 Termination 7 2 block 7 2 Echelon jumpers E2 4 2 RS 485 jumpers E2 4 2 Termination Block 7 2 Termination Resistance Jumpers I O Network 5 4 Termination Resi
407. tion setpoint if the temperature is too low or too high The user establishes a range outside of which the E2 RX is instructed to make a one pound adjustment to the suction pressure setpoint to either reduce or increase the case temperature If the temperature continues to remain outside of the range for a user defined period of time the E2 RX continues to make pressure setpoint adjustments until the temperature is within the established range By varying the suction pressure setpoint to match the temperature requirements of the circuit the E2 RX is able to ensure product integrity while achieving maximum rack efficiency 10 1 5 Hardware Overview An overview of the input and output devices that make up a Suction Group is shown in Figure 10 1 These devices should be wired to input and output boards in the manner outlined in Table 10 1 and Table 10 2 CIRCUIT LIQUID RECEIVER CASE TEMP FOR FLOATING u E LIQUID LINE SOLENOID CONDENSER VA DISCHARGE PRESSURE NL OIL RESET SWITCH i pg jp m OIL lt 26507005 PRESSURE i E 2 o ps o LL 7 lt O SUCTION PRESSURE Figure 10 1 Diagram of a Suction Group Software Overview 10 1 Wiring Sensor Type Suction Pressure 100 Ib Eclipse see Table 8 1 on transducer page 8 3 Discharge Pres 500 lb Eclipse see Table 8 1 on sure transducer page 8 3 Oil Pressure 200 Ib Eclipse see
408. tions 10 12 1 1 Control Cells The five control cells in the Loop Sequence Control application act as steps in determining the final PID per centage Step 1 Select The Select cell determines whether the Loop Sequence Control occupied setpoint or the unoccupied setpoint will be used by the PID cell This cell reads in values for both set points chooses the one to use based on the value of an Occupancy input and sends the appropriate setpoint value to the next cell in line the Setpt Float cell Step 2 Setpt Float The Setpt Float cell allows alter ation of the control setpoint provided by the Select cell based on comparison of a float input to a range of val ues The floating setpoint is then sent to the next cell in line the PID Control cell Step 3 PID Control This cell makes the PID percentage calculation based on the value of the setpoint received from the Setpt Float cell compared to the control input which is fed directly into the PID Control cell The resulting percentage is sent to the next cell in line the Filter cell Step 4 Filter The Filter cell limits the rate of change of the PID percentage over time and is typically used to keep the PID cell from over compensating when inputs change drastically The filtered PID percentage is sent to the final control cell the Override cell Step 5 Override Once the PID percentage is figured the Override cell provides for overrides of the P
409. tions of E2 are set up the next step is to set the System Configuration which is basically how the system is used 9 18 3 Using the Help Key to get Property Help Property Help gives an explanation of the parameter input or output the user has selected Pressing the ES key while the cursor is pointing to a parameter input or output opens the Property Help win dow The Property Help window displays documentation specific to the parameter input or output the cursor is cur rently pointing to 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 2 10 Software Overview 10 1 Suction Groups 10 1 1 Introduction Both E2 RX 300 and RX 400 models may control up to four suction groups each of which can control up to 16 compressor stages standard variable speed or unloader A suction group is controlled in the E2 software by a Suc tion Group application This section of the manual outlines how to set up a Suction Group application 10 1 2 Overview of PID Control Strategy A Suction Group application looks at suction pressure or suction temperature to determine how many compressor stages should be ON or OFF The application compares the suction pressure or temperature to its control setpoint using PID control The result of this comparison is a per centage from 0 to 100 that corresponds to the total capacity of the compressor rack that should be active The Suction Group application then takes that percent age and determines what combi
410. to E2 program ming and navigation 9 1 Logging On User Login Password Copyright c 2882 2885 Computer Process Controls Inc All rights reserved This product and system including protocols user interface and algorithms is protected by copyright law intellectual property law and international treaties Figure 9 1 User Login Dialog Box When the E2 is powered up for the first time the first screen displayed after initialization is the User Login screen 1 Enter USER in the Username field 2 Press ES 3 Enter PASS in the Password field 4 Press ES Logging into and out of the E2 controller can be done at any time by pressing the key on the E2 keypad If you are currently logged out pressing will bring up the User Login dialog box If you are already logged in pressing will immediately log you out and return you to the E2 home screen 9 2 troller Cleaning Out the Con Cleaning out the E2 controller needs to be done if If you are programming your E2 controller for the first time If all of the settings need to be cleared If the program settings are unknown Logging On Open the E2 controller panel There are two buttons located midway down on the main board see Figure 2 2 These buttons are used to perform various hardware func tions Reset Button The button e C labeled RESET on the main E board resets the controller LLI T Pressing and ho
411. tpoint the heaters will be ON 0 of the time fully OFF If the input value is between the Full ON and Full OFF setpoint the heaters will be pulsed ON for a percentage of the specified time interval The per centage is determined by proportionately measuring where the dewpoint falls between the range of val ues formed by the two setpoints Figure 10 6 shows an example of how anti sweat con trol works The setpoints Full ON dewpoint 80 F Full OFF dewpoint 20 F form the range of dewpoints across which the heaters will be pulsed When the measured dew point is 45 F directly in between both setpoints the per centage will be 5096 and the heaters will be pulsed ON for 5 seconds of the defined 10 second interval If the dew point drops to 30 F the percentage will lower to 20 and the heaters will be on only 2 seconds out of every 10 TALL ON SETPT 80 DEG F DEWPOINT 45 DEG F E ALL OFF SETPT 20 Osec 10 sec T ALL ON SETPT 80 DEG F DEWPOINT 30 DEG F ON OFF ALL OFF SETPT m EE 20 DEG F Osec 2sec 10 sec 26512014 Figure 10 6 Illustration of Anti Sweat Control 10 4 5 1 Dewpoint control inputs for the case controller s Anti Sweat algorithms must come from a dewpoint probe set up on the E2 I O Network Note that when using a dewpoint probe on the E2 I O Network the case controller will rely on the E2 to provide the anti sweat control value If communications with the E2 are lost the case
412. tpoints SUCT PRES SETPT 22 Ol Suct Pres 6 28 Extrn Pres Shft Comp On Delay 8 Comp Off Delay 8 Unldr On Delay 8 Unldr Off Delay 6 Min ON Time 6 Min OFF Time 8 TR Pressure F1 PREU TAB F2 NEXT TAB F3 EDIT F4 STATUS F5 CANCEL Figure 11 24 Example Setup Screen Setpoints When setting up an application using a Setup screen see Section 9 7 2 Status Screens all inputs and outputs that are set up to be logged will be marked with an L on the right hand side From the Setup screen you may access the logs of these inputs by pressing MEN 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 2 11 11 1 3 Setting Up Input and Output Pointers 69 69 65 Use Ctrl X to Select CX Tabs C1 General C2 Setpoints C Comp Setup C7 Comn Nuts RX 466 Unit 3 ALARM C5 Outputs Outputs GROUP LLSU SWITCH BACK RACK FAIL SUBCOOLER SATUR SUC CUR PRESS PERCENT US CURRENT HP TOTAL STAG STAGES ACT PID OUT ALG STATUS LEAD CIR OUT Select format for the pointer Board Point Controller Application Property Press desired selection Figure 11 25 Pointer Format Box Pointers allow a property to get or send its value to another property and are a way to transfer information or values input and outputs from one application to another within a controller For example if you are setting up a Suction Pressure pointer you are specifying the location of where the Suc tion Pressure is coming from Note that
413. tpoints and dewpoint device s then all the heaters may be set up in a single zone Zones are set up in a single screen called the Anti Sweat Control Setup screen 10 15 1 How Anti Sweat Works Anti sweat applications control anti sweat heaters by monitoring the dewpoint A dewpoint value may come from a dewpoint probe mounted within the Zone or it may be calculated automatically by the E2 using a combination of a relative humidity sensor and a temperature sensor The dewpoint value is used to pulse the heaters ON for a certain percentage of a user defined time interval The dewpoint is compared to the anti sweat application s con trol setpoints the Full ON Dewpoint and the Full OFF Dewpoint Based on this comparison the anti sweat heat ers will do one of three things If the dewpoint is equal to or above the Full ON Dewpoint the heaters remain ON 100 of the time 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 2 If the dewpoint is equal to or below the Full OFF Dewpoint the heaters will be ON 0 of the time fully OFF If the dewpoint is between the Full ON and Full OFF Dewpoint the heaters will be pulsed ON for a percentage of the specified time interval The per centage is determined by proportionately measuring where the dewpoint falls between the range of val ues formed by the two setpoints Figure 10 6 shows an example of an anti sweat appli cation The setpoints Full ON 80 F Full OFF 20 F form the range
414. ts High Limit Notice SO Network variable high limit exceeded High Suction Limit Exceeded User The suction pressure has risen above a Suction A HVAC Phase Loss User A phase loss device connected to Global Data has switched ON to shut down all HVAC systems HVAC Shutdown User A Global Data application s HVAC Shutdown input has turned ON to shut down all HVAC systems Incomplete Advisory Setup 15 99 An important setting used in advisory and or dial out set up were not configured correctly Inhibit Sensor Failed User A Demand Defrost Inhibit sensor on a case circuit is not functioning correctly Input Bypass Failure 15 A command to bypass an input was not successfully carried out Input Sensor Is Open 20 An analog input sensor is OPEN possibly due to a severed connection or sensor failure Input Sensor Is Short 20 An analog input sensor is CLOSED possibly due to a short circuit or sensor failure Instance limit exceeded 20 Maximum number of a particular type of licensed Open Echelon controllers has been reached A new instance cannot be commissioned Invalid Cell ID In Scratch Pad 30 JAn internal error has occurred in the E2 Invalid Nxt Ptr In Scratch Pad 30 An internal error has occurred in the E2 Invalid Scratch Pad Block Size 30 JAn internal error has occurred in the E2 Appendix C Alarm Advisory Messages C 7 a IRLDS Absorption Data Error An internal error has occurred in the IRLDS Check the IRLDS
415. tus Connected I O Boards amp Controllers Controller Setup Router Setup Associations For the total Echelon E2 devices online or offline select Online Status For the number of I O Network devices 16AIs 8ROs etc associated with each controller online and offline select Connected I O Boards amp Controllers For the names models and subnet and node addresses for each controlling device in the Echelon Network E2 RX amp BX select Controller Setup To set up a router select Router Setup For more information on routers and repeaters refer to the Router and Repeater Installation Guide P N 026 1605 For CC 100 circuit associations select Associations 9 13 1 Specify Number of Boards Specify the number of boards from the Associated Controllers screen Set Up I O Network RX 4668 Unit 3 CONNECTED 1 0 unit Number Boards Controllers on 1 0 Network Ctrl Type Nui 16A1 8RO 8D0 4A0 DFHC Third Party THIS 63 1 Unit Name Ctrl Type Num Ctrl Type UHH 6 PAK CUB 8 SnmartESR IRLDS WTPK WPK AAA Controllers on Echelon Network Num Ctrl Type 8 CC188 Liquid CS188 Ckt Suction 6 6 CC188 Suction 8 ESR8 Line Up 6 DataLink 6 TD3 Case Display Ctrl Type Echelon 16A1 Echelon 8R0 EC2 29x Control EC2 39x Control FS NEXT Figure 9 23 Associated Controllers Screen RX version Boards on the I O Network 16Al Boards Enter the number of 16AI analog input boards on this E2
416. ult in the output turning OFF The LOGIC IN input should not be used to compare the light level state to a Time Schedule output or a similar digital state that represents OCCUPIED UNOCCUPIED Schedule comparisons are handled by the Schedule Inter face cell If a schedule input value is the only digital value you will be using to combine with the light level sensor value choose the LLEV ONLY combination for this cell Occupied Unoccupied and Alternate Settings If desired the Light Level Interface cell can be set up with a set of unoccupied Cut In Cut Out setpoints To do this the Light Level Interface cell relies on a separate dig ital input to tell it when to use occupied or unoccupied set points The Light Level Interface cell can also be set up with a set of alternate occupied and unoccupied setpoints used only when the value of the input called USE ALT LLEV COMB is ON 10 9 4 2 The Schedule Interface Cell SCHEDIF The Schedule Interface cell is similar in function to the Light Level Interface cell except it is used to logically combine the output of the Light Level Interface cell with that of the Basic Schedule cell The Schedule Interface cell allows you to choose how the light level sensor and the time schedule work together to control the lights Logical Combinations The output of the Schedule Interface cell represents the final ON OFF state of the lights It determines this state by performing one of the logi
417. ume to represent what is being measured The Pulse Accumulator input can support many types of pulse counting applications such as flow meters for water and gas applications In addition application spe cific logging such as hourly daily and monthly usages are supported for pulse type inputs 10 19 2 Configuration Set the Input Type parameter to the desired measure ment power gas liquid or volume sess NOTE The engineering unit for the Pulse 4 Accumulator Type Input is specified by the active EU parameter This parameter is located in the General Controller Information screen under the Engineering Units tab and determines what unit of measure will be used when the Input Type is set The analog input connected to the board and point number must be configured as a Pulse Accumulator Type input The engineering unit of the analog input must match the engineering unit that is being used in the Pulse Accu mulation application Pulse Accumulation application can be deter mined by viewing the Total Accumulation out put on the application Status screen 10 19 3 Outputs All output information is available from the main Sta tus screen or from under the Outputs tab in application Setup Current output status average output high trip total accumulation and the last accumulated total informa tion can be viewed Q TIP The engineering unit that is active in the The current output shows the rate of consumption of the
418. until the TD rises back above the setpoint 10 18 6 Inputs The Drop Leg Temperature input is the current drop leg temperature used for TD control The Plenum Temperature input provides the current value of the ambient temperature used for TD calculation 10 18 7 Alarms For Drop Leg High alarm the alarm setpoint is the drop leg temperature that if exceeded will cause an alarm to be generated If you wish to generate an alarm for high drop leg temperature enter the desired setpoint Other wise to disable this alarm leave the value set to NONE For Drop Leg Delay if the drop leg alarming feature is used enter the amount of time the drop leg temperature must be higher than the setpoint before an alarm will be generated HHH MM For TD High alarm the TD alarm setpoint is the value of the TD calculation that if exceeded will cause an alarm to be generated If you wish to generate an alarm for high TD enter the desired setpoint Otherwise to disable this alarm leave the value set to NONE For TD Delay if the TD alarming feature is used enter the amount of time the TD must be higher than the setpoint before an alarm will be generated HHH MM Pulse Accumulation 10 19 Pulse Accumulation 10 19 1 Overview The Pulse Accumulation application counts incoming pulses and converts that consumption value into a rate value once per minute Pulses are user specified by the Input Type parameter power gas liquid or vol
419. urpose of Shed Mode is to get the total KW usage below the demand setpoint as soon as possible ast NOTE If you do not wish to use load shedding 4 for your building simply do not connect any thing to the SHED OUT output 10 14 2 Logging Power Monitoring applications are pre programmed with extensive logging capabilities that record the hourly daily and monthly power usage statistics Hourly The hourly log contains a list of power usage summa ries of the previous 48 hours An hourly log entry con tains The time and date of the entry The KWh for that hour The maximum average KW that occurred within any demand window for that hour The highest instantaneous KW reading taken for that hour and the time that reading was taken Daily The daily log contains a list of power usage summaries for the previous 48 days A daily log entry contains Software Overview 10 37 The date of the entry The KWh for that day The maximum average KW within any demand window for that day The highest instantaneous KW reading taken for that day and the time that reading was taken The total number of minutes the Power Monitoring application was in Shed Mode The Heat Degree Days for that day The Cool Degree Days for that day Monthly For monthly logging the day of month can be user specified so the day of the month on which the utility bill ing period starts can be accurately compared to the utility bill The monthly log
420. ustomized accord ing to the user s needs see Section 11 5 Customizing the Home Screen 11 1 1 RX Home Screen NONE IE AJ Controlled By Discharge Statws Fan s ds n on fi SUCTION F2 COMENSER F2 CIRCUITS 5 LEGEND 1 Suction Group One 4 Function Button Index 2 Additional Suction Groups 5 Circuit Status 3 Condenser Status 6 Sensor Control Figure 11 1 RX Home Screen Suction Groups Section The first section of the RX Home screen is the Suction Groups section located in the top left corner The large let ters have the name of Suction Group 1 along with infor mation on compressor stages active and the current pressure setpoint Setpoints status percentages of capaci ties and which stages are active for each suction group are displayed as well The suction group that is displayed in the large block at the top left of the screen is the group that is named alphabetically first of the suction groups The E2 Home Screen Circuit Status Section To the right of the Suction Groups section is the Circuit Status section Both the Standard Circuits and the Case Controllers are listed in this screen The circuit names their current status and temperatures are listed Condenser Section This section is located at the bottom left of the screen and contains information on the status of the condenser such as the discharge setpoint and individual fan states Sensor Control Be
421. ut Setup AW EZ 5 usata A ias 8 1 3 1 Configuring a Point from the Input Definitions Status Screen 8 1 3 2 Using the Input Definitions Status Screen 8 1 3 3 Setting Up Analog Inputs Le ES 8 1 3 4 Setting Up Digital Inputs ss ee eesis aeei eeen eerie a ae aredi na esae aeeai aea R 8 2 THE 8RO 810 AND MULTIPLEX OPO a a a a E A E EEN 8 2 1 Wiring Form C Contacts eie e A eee de Bet E aR 52 2 MultiFlex Relay QUIPuts cov 35 se eA td ente den e Rete deett des 6 10 6 2 3 Setting the Fail Safe Dip Switch eese eene nennen entente trente ten ne ene cn nente en nee eoe ERs 6 10 8 2 4 Wiring Outputs 10 Points cok s eer EH HU E REN e o Ere pre eens eae 6 11 6 2 5 The Output EED pepe de e e tee Ee Pe Bs SG A e EE RELY 6 11 6 2 0 Output Setup Am El cett dose aea Up teet PER 6 11 8 2 6 1 Configuring a Point from the Output Definitions Status Screen e ssssseseessesesessessrrrststststsrsrsrstsrererersesrerererrereet 8 11 8 2 6 2 Using the Output Definitions Status Screen 8 2 6 3 Setting Up Digital Outputs de s 82 6 4 Setting Up Analog Outputs to ERE DCUM E que 8 3 CC 100 CASE CONTROLLERS IR ee dete eee Rer e RR E ee EIE edet Re eee Rr eee SLID MPUS sees ert Re D RR e RR ERR I IM 6 3 2 Power Module Wiring ici ROT a a a ee epi ee e ern e dut 06 3 3 Valve Cable i s aa eoi d es AOE adv Have 8 4 ESR8 AND SMARTESR VALVE OUTPUT WIRING cccoccccccon
422. ut at Setpoint Advanced users may wish to change the Output at Set point in order to change the stabilization characteristics of their system s In most cases the default values of the Output at Setpoint 0 for Condenser Control and HVAC 50 for all others are appropriate and recommended Changing the value of the Output at Setpoint may have some beneficial results but at the same time it may also hamper the system s ability to react to changing condi tions and it may also result in decreased energy efficiency Other PID Features The following section lists other PID related constants or control structures that are a part of some PID control algorithms Many of these features are advanced features that are accessible only by service personnel or advanced users As a general rule it is best to contact CPC before changing any of these values Output at Minimum Output at Max imum The Output at Minimum and Output at Maximum val ues are used to change the range of possible output per centages The default values 0 for minimum 100 for maximum allow the output to vary from fully off to fully on changing these values therefore would only be neces sary 1f you desire a limited output range Two things occur when the Output at Minimum or Output at Maximum values are changed 1 The throttling range is shortened as dictated by the new values For example if you specified a 20 minimum the portion of the throttling ran
423. ut cable P N NETWORK 3 335 3258 If not using a CPC power module clip the connector OUTPUT E from the cable and wire based on the pinout shown below CABLE VALVE HE 2a If using a pulse valve connect to the CC 100 using valve cable P N 335 3263 2b If using a Sporlan SEI or Alco ESR stepper valve with four pin connector connect valve to CC 100 CS 100 using valve MODULE cable P N 335 3261 2c If using a stepper with no four pin connector connect valve to CC 100 CS 100 using valve cable P N 335 3260 A A 3 Wire the CC 100 CS 100 to Echelon network 1 2a CASE t4 GRAY aux i CONTROLLER ER Ground GRAYIBLACK y y a BLACK AUK 2 23 O BLACK RED PULSE VALVE 1 gula BEAGIURED PULSE VALVE 1 Output Cable o gt co F ei 4 5 6 CC 100 POWER MODULE 27 O BLACK GREEN SUSE VALINE DE zZ CASE 20 6 BLACK GREEN PULSE VALVE 2 VALVE RECEPTACLE CONTROLLER z3 a BACK TO 24VAC CLASS 2 50VA SOURCE 2 BLACK GROUND 2b 8 9 101111211314 1 213 4 5 6 7 SPORLAN BLACK PINOUT FOR CC 100 AUX GROUND POWER MODULE RECEPTACLE CC 100 SEI 8 BLACK AUX GROUND CS 100 ALCO ESR BEAGK TO 24VAC CLASS 2 50VA SOURCE BLACK FANS BLACK LIGHTS BLACK ANTI SWEAT 20 Ul case BLACK DEFROST im CONTROLLER GRAY AUXILIARY 1 qa RED STEPPER 1 GRAY BLACK ev LU AUXILIARY 2
424. uts network graphs and logs Menus 10 46 28 ALARM RX 480 Unit 3 RX DEU SUMMARY NONE Circuits Temp r NONE MAIN MENU Refr NONE Refr NONE Refr NONE NONE Condensers E NONE nr r NONE Circuits E NONE 7 r NONE Sensor Controls j NONE A A B r NONE Configured Applications fdd Delete Application System Configuration Value Status NONE Controlled By Dis NONE DIGITAL SENSO1 NOTAC F1 DIGITAL SENS62 NOTAC ON Figure 11 4 Main Menu Toggling Full Options The System Configuration Menu RX 466 Unit 3 15 02 17 RX DEU SUMMARY ALARM 22 6 Circuits SYSTEM CONFIGURATION fee Input Definitions Output Definitions System Information Remote Communications Alarm Setup Logging Setup Network Setup Value Global Data NONE Controlled By Dis E 5 NONE Licensing NOTAC FA NOTAC ON Figure 11 5 System Configuration Menu The System Configuration Menu is one of the menus used to set up the E2 Included options are Input Output Definitions internal system information remote commu nications global data alarm logging and network setup information To open the System Configuration menu 1 Press D gt 2 Press WA System Configuration The System Configuration menu contains eight menu items 1 Input Definitions View the status of all input boards as well as set up individ ual points on the I O boards View the status
425. vary depending on where the cursor is placed in the Main Status Home screen before E 1s pressed This is the easiest way to edit an existing application For more information on usage of the Setup screen and how to implement its functions see Section 11 11 1 2 Setup Screens 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 ee 9 7 4 The Setup Screens Value BisucrioM curat Mormal re No mo Ne Mo ND COMDENSEROT Fi PREV TAS 2 NEXT TAB F3 EDIT 1 FS CANCEL FUNCTION W KEYS Figure 9 11 Typical Setup Screen Setup screens are the interface used to change settings and setpoints and define inputs and outputs in the E2 Figure 9 11 shows a typical Setup screen and its primary elements For more details on Setup screens see Section 9 18 2 3 Navigating the Setup Screen 9 7 5 System Configuration Menu RX 466 Unit 3 15 02 17 RX DEU SUMMARY ALARM 22 6 Circuits SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Output Definitions System Information Remote Communications Alarm Setup Logging Setup Network Setup Value Global Data NONE Controlled By Dis n NONE Licensing NOTAC F1 NOTAC ON Figure 9 12 System Configuration Menu The System Configuration Menu is one of the menus used to set up the E2 Included options are Input Output Definitions internal system information remote commu nications global data alarm logging and network setup information To open the System Configuration menu 1 Pr
426. ve seconds 9 18 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual ee The TD3 s Service Button FUNCTION COMMISSIONING BUTTON BUTTON ECHELON ADDRESS STICKER RUBBER SLEEVE ON BOTTOM Figure 9 29 TD3 Service Button Location The service button on the TD3 is located on the front panel Figure 9 29 Of the two buttons on the face the commissioning button is the one on the right To send the Neuron ID press and hold this button down for five sec onds The ESR8 s Service Button LII LEEIELTI COMMISSIONING BUTTON y gt o ESR8 BOARD DISCONTINUED Figure 9 30 ESR8 Service Button Location The service button on the ESR8 is located on the right hand side of the board directly below the termination jumper Figure 9 30 To send the Neuron ID press and hold this button down for five seconds Commissioning the EC 2 The EC 2 can be commissioned by pressing the UP ARROW key on the EC 2 front panel and holding it for five seconds 9 14 2 2 The Manual ID Entry Method The Manual ID Entry Method involves entering each device s twelve digit ID number by hand When entered the E2 searches the network and tries to match the ID number to the device When the E2 finds this device the commissioning process is completed The easiest way to set up a multiple node store using the Manual ID Entry Method is to arrange all network devices into a list that shows e
427. verride Bypass Log to view and cancel overrides 1 From the Main Menu press 8 to open the Status menu 2 From the Status menu press 4 for the Graphs Logs menu 3 Press 3 for the Override Bypass Log This screen gives you quick access to all overrides bypasses in the system Rack is in Phase Fail Verify correct phase and verify correct input for phase loss If you specified that phase pro tection would be used on this rack the Phase Loss input is dis played The Phase Loss input is automatically configured to use E2 s Global Data phase loss pro tection source If you wish to define a different source re define this input definition To point this input to a board and point address press EDIT and then 1 to change the definition format Oil sensors are set up but are not in use Remove oil sensors from indi vidual compressors 1 Highlight the Comp Setup tab C6 in the Suction Group Setup screen 2 Use the arrow keys to select the OIL SENSOR field 3 Choose None from the LOOK UP menu 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 SYMPTOM POSSIBLE PROBLEM SOLUTION Problems with Condenser Condenser will not operate Verify that E2 is programmed with proper number of fans 1 Highlight the General tab C1 in the Condenser Setup screen 2 Is the correct number of fans in the Number of Fans field Incorrect board and point set tings Confirm proper board and p
428. w This dou bles the number of displayed samples Navigating a Zoomed View While zoomed in on a graph only a subset of the total number of samples are visible To view samples that were recorded earlier or later than those in the current view press the left and right cursor keys The availability of ear lier or later samples is indicated by the presence of arrows at either end of the X time axis 11 12 Low Battery Notifica tion The E2 keeps track of how long the E2 battery has been active and will display a battery icon at the top of the E2 screen whenever the battery is reaching the end of its recommended battery life If a battery has less than 30 of its battery life left a yellow battery icon will appear at the top of the screen If the battery has less than 10 life left or if the battery switch is currently disabled a red battery icon will appear For more information on battery testing and replace ment refer to Section 4 4 Battery Testing and Replace ment 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 2 Appendix A Case Type Defaults The table below lists the sixty four default case types that may be used in Standard Circuit or Case Control Cir cuit applications along with the recommended defaults for each case type When one of these sixty four case types is selected the E2 automatically enters the following information from the table into the Circuit application The setpoint High Alarm Low Alarm and De
429. wer to the unit and carefully plug the male pins on the back of the modem card into the E2 s PC 104 slot Use the standoffs and screws supplied with the Hand Held Terminal Jack Receiver Bus Term Jumper modem card to secure the card to the main board as 1 O Net RS485 Receiver Bus Network shown in Figure 2 5 When finished restore power to the VO Net Status LED Powar Connector 1 0 Net Term Jumpers Dip Switch F2 Receiver Bus Status LED 10 Alarm and Gen Status LEDs Figure 2 6 Gateway Board I O Network Boards and Peripherals Hardware Overview 2 3 The Gateway board is an RS 485 to RS 485 con verter One side of the Gateway is always connected to the CPC I O Network The other side of the Gateway is the receiver bus RS 485 The receiver bus is connected to one or more RS 485 devices depending on which type of Gateway is being used The Gateway interfaces devices to the Einstein E2 and legacy CPC controller REFLECS by simulating 16AI and 8RO boards using CPC standard I O board protocol The Gateway can also convert third party controller protocols to CPC protocol for custom cells cre ated in the Einstein E2 to interface with third party con trollers Danfoss Woodley etc The Gateway performs one of two basic functions 1 It allows control of and or status of a device using I O board simulation 2 Converts a third party protocol to CPC I O Net protocol and interfaces to a custom cell in Ei
430. will be used for the output value instead of the input value but only for the override timeout period Priority Override Timeout When an input goes on it will override to a value for the timeout period INPUT This field links the output to an application You do not need to enter anything in this field You will be able to link applications to this point during the application setup process 8 14 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 2 8 3 CC 100 Case Control lers 8 3 1 The input connections to the CC 100 are made on the left hand side of the controller Figure 8 13 shows the CC 100 input connections Inputs HAND TEMP SENSORS HELD AIN TERMINAL 4 JACK AUXILIARY INPUT DETAIL A A 26502035 Figure 8 13 Temperature Auxiliary and HHT Inputs Temperature and Digital Sensors The six two pin Molex connectors on the left hand side of the unit numbered 1 through 6 are where the case s temperature probes coil inlet coil outlet sensors and other digital switches and contacts are connected CPC temperature sensor leads are equipped with male connectors that plug in to these receptacles For digital switches and sensors such as dual temp and clean switches CPC supplies a digital output harness P N 335 3264 that consists of a connector with a two wire pigtail These wires may be spliced on to the switch or dig ital sensor leads The connector is designed to snap in to one of the six
431. work M Main Board 2 2 Main Processor Board 2 2 Main Status Screen 9 3 Manual Defrost ending 171 9 initiating from Main Status Screen 1 8 Memory clearing all data from 9 7 Menu actions 9 6 User Access 9 15 Menus 3 Messages alarm advisory C Modem setup 9 10 Modem Board 3 5 4 3 Modem Mounting 3 7 Modem Communication Expansion Board 3 5 Mounting bullet and pipe mount sensors 3 9 CC 100 3 5 dewpoint probe 3 11 E2 blank face 3 3 recessed mount 3 retrofit 3 2 standard mount 3 ESR8 3 5 VO Boards And Enclosures single enclosure 3 3 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 E2 light level sensors 3 11 liquid level sensors 3 12 temperature sensors insertion probe 3 8 inside 3 7 outside 3 8 supply and return air sensors 3 8 MultiFlex mounting in enclosure 3 3 plus board 5 2 MultiFlex 16 Board features 2 5 MultiFlex Boards 2 4 16 2 5 combination input output 2 5 CUB 2 6 10 24 PAK 2 7 10 24 RCB 2 6 10 20 RCB RTU compared 0 20 RTU 2 6 MultiFlex Combination Input Output 2 5 MultiFlex CUB 2 6 10 24 MultiFlex PAK 2 7 10 24 MultiFlex Plus Board 5 2 MultiFlex RCB 2 6 10 20 MultiFlex RTU 2 6 10 20 N Navigation 1 3 Network RS485 I O baud rate dip switches 5 3 daisy chain diagram 5 2 dip switches and rotary dials for board numbering 5 2 Neuron ID manual entry of 9 8 No Description File 7 5 O Off Cycle Defrost See Defrost off cycle Offline Boards 9 16 Open Echelon 7 4 Operator s Guide to Using the E2
432. work records them in its own advisory log and applies its own set of alarm filters to determine if the alarms should be dialed out reported to its display or sent to its Advisory Output There are several benefits to having an Alarm Annun ciator An Alarm Annunciator makes it possible to handle all alarm dial outs for all controllers with a single modem or network card 9 22 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 2 Users can view alarm notifications and alarm logs for all controllers from the Alarm Annunciator Only the Alarm Annunciator needs to be pro grammed with alarm filter settings for dial out out put and display All other controllers may be programmed to simply send all alarms to the Alarm Master via the LonWorks Network 9 16 2 Setting up an E2 to be an Alarm Annunciator Any E2 on the network that has a modem or Ethernet connection can be set up as an alarm annunciator but only one alarm annunciator per network is allowed To set up from the Main Menu Press WA System Configuration 1 2 Press Vl System Information 3 Press General Controller Info 4 Set Alarm Annunc field to Yes esas NOTE When the E2 is set up as an Alarm An nunciator the Home screen becomes the Alarm Log 08 26 05 Use Ctrl X to Select CX Tabs Ci General coz RX 466 Unit 3 SETUP C2 Eng Units C3 Modem C4 TCP IP C8 Peer Netwrk C9 Web Server General Setup GENERAL SERU 14 16 58 ALARM CO
433. x 12 06 H x 3 75 D outputs or analog outputs which the E2 may use Recessed Mount to control loads 9 06 W x 10 56 H x 2 0 D 4 Smart Boards Boards such as case controllers Base for refrigeration or rooftop controllers for 10 56 W x 10 56 H x 3 75 D building control that perform control functions Operating 40 F to 149 F 40 C to 65 C Temp for an individual case or rooftop unit and send the data to the E2 for logging and alarm purposes Storage Temp 40 F to 158 F 40 C to 70 C 5 Modem For remote communication via phone e Operating 5 95 RH non condensing at 90 F 1f necessary Sg Humidity 6 Network Wiring Wiring that connects the E2 to other E2s and all the input output and smart Storage 5 100 RH boards Humidity 7 Sensors and Loads The eyes and hands of Power 24 VAC 20 50 60 Hz Class 2 the control network Sensors see what needs to VA Load be controlled on the network and Loads are what can be controlled or more specifically be turned on and off such as compressors condensers lights and fans Table 2 1 E2 Specifications www NOTE Contact CPC Customer Service at 4 1 800 829 2724 for E2 controller part num bers and model descriptions E2 Hardware Hardware Overview 2 1 2 2 1 1 E2 Main Processor Board 2 13 E2 Keypad CPU Figure 2 4 E2 Keyboard The E2 has a QWERTY style keyboard layout with
434. y chain Otherwise set jumpers DOWN not term 5 Connect board to the 24VAC center tapped secondary of the power transformer Note If you change any dip switch settings while the board is powered disconnect the power and re power the board ey Q SHIELDED TWISTED PAIR 1 BELDEN 8761 FOR PLENUM 2 ADDRESS E E 3 h USE BELDEN 82761 OR 88761 ini TO OR EQUIV ll omen RETES BOARD1 BOARD2 BOARD 4 _ ge 485 1 2 03 3 6 AS E 9600 baud HHHH m m x OV z OTC 9 485 BOARD 9 _ z SUL Sk dt pong A NOS 19200 baud U U U o m Ev CEs Pile En Ypf OARD 13 1 WIRE to same color SO L WIRE OV to 0V WIRE to same color 4 DAISY CHAIN CONFIGURATION TERMINATING JUMPERS SET TERMINATING JUMPERS O O O UP DOWN o o o A i Term Term Terminated Not Terminated UP DOWN DOWN UP vL 5 120 208 240 VAC rc N HOT r NEUTRAL WIRING FOR 640 0056 56VA Transformer and 640 0080 80VA Transformer 24VAC Center Tapped Transf
435. y indicator Yellow less than 30 of battery life left Red less than 10 of bat tery life left or battery switch is disabled Le mese Table 11 4 Header Icons and Descriptions RX 466 Unit 3 SETUP H i C3 Ch C6 Comp Setup C7 Comp Outs c8 c9 Alarms Suction Groups SUCTION GRP 01 08 26 05 Use Ctrl X to Select CX Tabs Long Name Strategy Normal Control Type Pressure Num of Stages 4 Refr Type s R22 Phase Protect No Yes No No Run Time EQ No Enable SP Float No Associated COND CONDENSERO1 One Comp On Comp On Defrost Comp On Reclaim F1 PREU TAB NEXT TAB F3 EDIT F4 STATUS FS CANCEL Figure 11 13 Setup Screen RX 400 Version Shown 11 4 3 The E2 Keypad The Cursor The cursor highlights individual fields on the E2 026 1610 Rev 3 10 17 05 2 screen allowing you to change their contents and or select them to perform other functions like viewing logs graphs or setting alarm parameters The E2 includes arrow keys for the user to easily navigate the cursor around each screen Areas can be accessed for detailed information and certain functions by guiding the cursor with the arrow keys The Tab Key When an E2 screen is split into multiple areas like the default Main Status screen the Tab am cursor to each section of the current screen The border around each section is highlighted by the cursor so the user will know which section the cursor is on The Enter

E2 User Manual.book

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents